Home

MCWP 3-16.3 - GlobalSecurity.org

image

Contents

1. 5 130 9 0 142 11 0 189 14 0 334 21 0 325 19 0 223 17 0 22 0 24 0 396 22 0 274 19 0 25 0 409 22 0 282 20 0 26 0 421 23 0 291 20 0 27 0 432 23 0 298 20 0 27 0 24 0 151 100 132 9 0 178 12 0 146 110 186 12 0 155 110 196 13 0 160 120 211 13 0 169 120 220 14 0 281 15 0 229 14 0 293 16 0 240 15 0 308 16 0 424 18 0 338 17 0 443 19 0 355 17 0 251 15 0 199 14 0 270 16 0 211 14 0 283 16 0 371 18 0 294 17 0 CHG 3 EL T 64 80 483 20 0 385 19 0 306 17 0 27 0 770 165 10 0 17 90 203 12 0 171 11 0 403 19 0 318 18 0 457 20 0 346 18 0 662 22 0 474 20 0 360 19 0 493 21 0 372 19 0 512 22 0 387 20 0 533 23 0 400 21 0 710 25 0 476 22 0 26 0 492 23 0 355 ee CHG2 EL TI 66 8 0 173 10 0 662 23 0 446 685 24 0 462 246 13 0 211 12 0 259 14 0 222 13 0 274 14 0 235 13 0 321 15 0 268 14 0 e Y 19 N o d bed e F eo o x o ojojo N 2 e lt 5 8 2 3 lelolelgejelimwo ejej NIN o Pu o ojo olo o o elo e ee e e olo eio e WW Zocalo
2. I o 0 0 5 uo RS 2 2 619 5 empresas 45 3 o os 2 ses o o o dn I o 4 olnfalolala 2 5 8 8 2 8 8 8 2 2 9 8 DS ed Ed S ISIIERSRISISSS oo o 27 2 2 i NIN No o I o eee ololxieleiriei iriejir ixielwleixi ieioi ielo elaslels 4 ulgsssss cE IissessssssseEESSEISSSS lelelelelelele ole ojo o efeleleleleterlelelelere ojejo Flo 5 lo olo 0 gt oloje eje jejejejeje NINJA 9 9
3. 355 amp 5 5 4 Za 266 24600 5 5 5 _ 3 9 r4 o wp ol 4m __ s 11 5 zw TE 9008 E 4 3 99 TER ee K 14 FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 Table K 15 Rapid fire table for M109A2 A6 M198 shell DPICM all propellants SHELL DPICM ALL PROPELLANTS CHG4GB CHG4WB CHG5GB CHG5WB 100 62 61 J 59 58 58 57 se 55 55 20 4 42 4 938 s3 35 J 33 31 3 46 41 39 535 32 30 25 20 722 50 51 45 43 38 34 31 2 19 22 ___600 58 50 47 4 3 2 34 18 322 Pp 700 65 55 51 45 450 31 29 19 23 J 80 I 71 62 56 49 44 39 31 19 24 ___ 900 18 61 54 4 22 32 19 24 190 88 74 67 59 52 46 35 20 2 11000 96 811 72 64 6 491 3s 22 28 1200 14 87 80 6 6 5 4 23 3 1 300
4. 5 2 5 4 POLARIS KOCHAB METHOD 5 3 5 5 POLARIS 2 2 2225525224224 50 4 52 X OY 4 5 10 5 6 DIRECTIONAL 5 5 11 Section 111 LOCATION a ees e IU TES E Ce ET 5 13 5 7 METHODS OF LOCATION 5 13 5 8 GRAPHIC 5 13 5 9 GRAPHIC TRAVERSE ae wo Se 5 14 5 10 DISTANCE MEASURING 5 15 5 11 AUTOMATED COMPUTATIONS 5 23 5 12 AFU INPUT FOR GRAPHIC TRAVERSE USING BUCS REV1 5 23 5 13 ALTITUDE 5 25 FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 CHAPTER 6 MINIMUM QUADRANT ELEVATION 6 1 RESPONSIBILITIES 6 1 6 2 ELEMENTS OF COMPUTATION 6 1 6 3 MEASURING ANGLE SITE TO CREST 6 2 6 4 MEASURING PIECE TO CREST RANGE 6 2 6 5 COMPUTATION FOR FUZES OTHER THAN ARMED VARIABLE TIME 6 2 6 6 COMPUTING FOR ARMED VT FUZES LOW ANGLE FIRE 6 3 CHAPTER 7 FIRE COMMANDS AND FIRING REPORTS 7 1 DEFINITIONS 2505 EROR eA CIRCE Ve 7 1 7 2 SEQUENCE OF
5. 12 13 12 13 12 13 12 13 14 15 14 15 14 15 14 15 B 28 FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 TASK 14 Scoring Initialize the AFCS a Standards of precision B 2 Conditions The soldier is men a howitzer parked within Were met dF applicable 0 1 meter of a survey control point SCP The soldier will b Correct steps were followed to receive data for the SCP and initialization data The soldier complete the task positions himself as chief of section and announce when If st db ready The examiner will state BEGIN P Up auno D Were oL followed soldier recieves a NO GO Time The time starts when the examiner states BEGIN and and 0 points If soldier received a stops when the soldier announces INITIALIZED GO on steps a and b use the chart below to determine score 29 FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 TASK 15 Prepare for firing using the AFCS Conditions The soldier is given a howitzer aligned alon the azimuth of fire and in travel lock The Emplace screen is displayed on the AFCS The soldier positions himself as the chief of section and announces when ready The examiner will state BEGIN Time The time will start when the examiner states BEGIN and will stop when the soldier sends the updated piece status uec eam B 30 Scoring a Standards of precision B 2 were met If applicable b Correct steps were followed to complete the task c If steps
6. m oojoo 11 40 08 129 138 142 148 101 105 110 119 126 131 172 178 j gt 0 A IO Co 103 107 110 5 199 207 213 219 225 163 74 118 178 183 213 128 149 oN 277 392 310 569 e rq oleo pmsl bel pat Dalen on D IN 622 FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 Table K 10 Rapid fire table for M109A2 A6 M198 fuze M514 propellant GB M3A1 RANGE EL EL TI EL TI EL TI o 04 s 62 s a 89 49 25 4 80 _ 30 89 890 29 m9 80 805 80 250 590 23 43 80 35 25 10 10 13 90 15 80 p 100 10 16 100 57 90 99 L 29 t4 100 15 151 110 0 2 50 146 156 132 20 29 50 140 165 137 120 _____2300 97 160 225 150 18 148 130 2 54 90 25 194 150 157 ____2700 36 190 25 199 150 9 38 190 264 170 24 165 L 390 260 _ 20 215 180 7 249 209 800 54 280 369 50 270 315
7. 2 23 2 35 MOVEMENT PROCEDURES 2 23 Section VIII OCCUPYING THE POSITION 2 33 2 36 TYPES OF OCCUPATION 2 33 2 37 DELIBERATE OCCUPATION 2 33 2 38 HASTY OCCUPATION 2 33 2 39 EMERGENCY 2 33 2 40 SUSTAINING 5 2 34 2 41 TRAINING TIPS uum ed at See ee as eet REESE 2 35 iii FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 CHAPTER 3 BATTERY DEFENSE Section INTRODUCTION m vos e re wale Nar std Do de 3 1 CAPABILITIES Section CONSIDERATIONS FOR 3 3 USE OF TERRAIN 3 4 DEFENSE 35 SECURIT Ba e Mere 3 6 DISPERSION PRIORITIES ura ias 4 med 3 8 DEFENSE ALL DIRECTIONS 3 9 MUTUAL 0 3407 CONTROL eos 3 13 eorom eta bee Deo dre oe a Section
8. 2179 290 351 260 Ls 3959 _ 38 ee o ree OO ee ee 5680 10 FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 Table K 11 Rapid fire table for M109A2 A6 M198 fuze M514 propellants 2 Chg 3 7 and M119 Chg 8 FUZE M514 PROPELLANT White Bag M4A2 Chg 3 7 M119 Chg 8 PIECE TO CREST CHG 3 CHG 4 CHG 5 CHG 6 CHG 7 CHG 8 RANGE EL TI EL Ti EL TI EL TI EL TI EL TI _____200 41 80 37 80 35 __ 80 34 80 3 80 31 890 38 80 33 80 29 ___ 80 7 80 24 80 23 890 40 39 33 80 28 801 26 ___ 80 22 80 20 80 500 234 80 36 30 80 2 21 X 80 19 X 80 600 207 80 40 3 80 26 21 80 18 890 180 80 35 80 28 80 22 80 18 ___ 80 8900 19 90 16 80 15 80 29 80 22 80 18 90 17 ___ 90 158 90 147 80 138 80 23 80 18 890 100 166 90 152 90 1399 90 129 _ 80 25 20 80 1 00 165 10 0 163 10 0 1300 165 100 147 ___ 1001 128 90 114 90 104 580 97 80 1400 165 110 146 100 125 1001 10 ___90 10 90 92 80 1500 166 ___ 1101 146 110 124 1001 108 90 97 90 89 80 1600 170 120 148 127 1001107 90 95 390 86 80 1900 181 130 153 __ 1201 130 110 105 100 90
9. a Standards of precision 2 were met If applicable b Correct steps were followed to complete the task c If steps a and b were not followed soldier recieves a NO GO and 0 points If soldier received a GO on steps a and b use the chart below to determine score B 19 FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 TASK 10C Scoring Conditions Continuation from 10B Soldier announces a Standards of precision B 2 when ready The examiner cancels special corrections says were met If applicable that the co limator has fallen and directs the gunner b followed to use the amine n The examiner commands m Pu ere 10 0wed to DEFLECTION 3180 M101A1 USE DEFLECTION comp ete the task 2780 QUADRANT 315 c If steps a and b were not followed soldier recieves a NO GO and 0 points If soldier received a GO on steps a and b use the chart below to determine score TIME IN SECONDS POINTS Time The time will start on the last ns of deflection and will stop when the gunner states READY B 20 FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 TASK 10 D Scoring Continuation from 10C Soldier announces a Standards of precision 2 When rea d e examiner commands DEFLECTION 3230 were met If applicable M101A1 USE DEFLECTION 2830 QUADRANT 315 b Correct steps were followed to Time The time will start on the last digit of deflection and complete the task will stop when the gunner states READY If steps and b we
10. ee INGENIUM ee 35 0 8 500 654 38 0 gt 5 z o 8 o p K 12 FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 Table K 13 Rapid fire table for M109A2 A6 M198 M728 and M732 fuzes propellants WB 4 2 Chg 3 7 and M119 Chg 8 FUZE M728 M732 PROPELLANT WB 4 2 Chg 3 7 M119 Chg 8 PIECE TO CREST CHG 3 CHG 4 CHG 5 CHG 6 CHG7 CHG 8 RANGE Ti EL T EL EL 1 EL EL EL TI 100 61 80 59 80 58 80 57 ___ 80 56 80 5 CBO 20 241 80 3 80 35 80 33 __ 80 32 80 31 890 300 33 80 29 8 0 400 39 80 33 ___ 80 28 ___ 80 25 80 22 80 20 80 50 ___ 43 80 36 80 3 ___ 8017 2 80 21 ___80 19 ___80 _____600 181 80 40 _ 801 32 80 25 80 21 ___ 80 18 ___80 148 8 0 132 90 130 80 120 __ 80 28 ___ 80 2 80 18 80 900 138 90 11100 127 1060 121 590 __ 90 95 80 8 ___ 80 21 80 140 143 110 124 ___ 100 103 10 0 104 10 0 1170 155 120 131 110 109 110 88 100 74 90 65 ___ 90 __ 1900 165 130 137 120 14 1101 89 100 74 100 64 20 __ 2 200 184 140 149 ___ 1301 122 120 9 10175 100 63 ___ 90 126 130 97 24 110 76 100 63 100 157 140 128 130 62 10 0 2500 200 150 164 ____ 140 131 130 100 120 77 110 63 100 _____2 600 211 150 170 140 136 130 102 120 78 110 63 10 0 104 120 80 110 2 80
11. Communications Wire Battery fy Operations Center Verification Circle Tactical Operations Center TOC Tactical Command Post TAC Other Vehicles if Collocated S3 e Cy es e c 5 t C Sy e C gt Sy C C C 2 reo 5 5 2 Xe D Lily 0009 lt 7 Figure F 1 1 Killer Junior is a procedure that uses HE projectiles with mechanical time fuzes set to burst about 10 meters above the ground at ranges of 200 to 1 000 meters Killer Junior techniques can be used with an of the current cannon systems Specific techniques are described in detail in endix I of this manual Battery personnel should note that when Killer Junior is used over friendly troops soldiers 109 40004 0009 0000 wi Communications C ERARE SS RE 49 Rep b Inner Berm or Wire Other Battery Vehicles or Radar if Collocated 79 Fire Direction Center FDC Battery Commander s J BC Vehicle COTO TOON Oy gt Meters from Outermost 0 gt Position cy 150550 Hardened battery position in star formation and equipment must be below ground with substantial overhead cover Fighting positions over which Killer Junior is likely to be tired must be specially reinforced on the back side to protect the soldiers and to prevent collap
12. EXTRACT FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 the movement order A warning order alerts the battery and p enough information of the impending movement for the battery to make plans and to take the necessary preliminary action The references listed below provide adequate information for the following types of movement e Movement by rail FM 55 15 TM 55 601 e Movement by 55 9 55 12 FM 90 4 and FM 101 10 1 e Movement by water FM 55 15 and FM 101 10 1 2 35 MOVEMENT PROCEDURES The BC ensures that movement procedures are included in the unit SOPs He should consider the following items before establishing a movement SOP e Tips on establishing a realistic movement SOP paragraph 2 41 e References identified in this chapter e 2041 and QSTAG 520 Operation Orders Tables and Graphs for Road Movement see 55 30 for applicable details STANAG 2154 and QSTAG 539 Regulations for Military Motor Vehicle Movement by Road The applicable details of this agreement to be included in unit SOPs are extracted from STANAG 2154 and are shown below STANAG 2154 Edition 6 REGULATIONS FOR AD OR VEHICLE MOVEMENT 5 Composition of Columns a column may be composed of a number of organized elements b Each organized element includes 1 commander whose location may vary 2 In the first vehicle a subordinate commander known as the pace setter 3 At the en
13. 5 8 818 818 8 8 5 9 N N NIN co e a N e z PIECE TO a m o 4 RANGE 100 300 1 400 10 200 _____300 40 50 60 80 90 1000 ____1 100 1200 1300 150 160 700 1800 1900 2000 210 220 2300 2400 250 260 2700 2800 1 290 ____3 100 320 320 3400 350 360 370 380 390 4000 4500 5000 5500 1 600 6 500 7000 750 800 850 900 950 10000 Table K 5 Rapid fire table for M102 M119A1 M557 and M564 fuzes FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 PROPELLANT M6 CHG7 e N NIN ara Ajo OIN Y N as FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 Table K 6 Rapid fire table for M102 M119A1 M513 fuze 5 n RANGE FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 Table K 7 Rapid fire table for M102 M119A1 M728 and M732 fuzes FUZE M728 M732 PROPELLANT M6 PIECE TO CREST CHG 1 CHG 2 CHG 3 CHG 4 CHG 5 CHG6 CHG7 RANGE EL T EL TI EL EL Tl EL TI EL TI EL 5 20 54 8 0 _____300 58 Bolsi 8014 40 __ 80135 80 30 80 27 80 40
14. I 2498 Aro 148001 5317 500 152041 1 520 15500 __ ___ __ _____ ___ __ ___ O 1 041 55 0 Note No restrictions K 13 FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 Table K 14 Rapid fire table for M109A2 A6 M198 M557 and M564 fuzes all authorized propellants SHELL RAP ALL AUTHORIZED PROPELLANTS PCR cHGswB 20 cHG7RB en s ee x 1 34 s z gt 5 1 14 1 25 184 2 _ ___ 6 vs ncs oec i ume 208 138 ft 99 1 3 _ x 175 187 206 10 __ 2 29 5 3 2 m 29 5 9 0 220 1 2 ard ___ __ 5 3124 se BRETT ESD NTC __ 389 s
15. BODY p J 1 CERTAIN BASE COVER PROJECTILES Figure 10 1 Exterior components FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 f Obturating Band On some projectiles there is a nylon obturating band below the rotating band to help in forward obturation Two examples of 155 mm projectiles with this e of a band are the illuminating round and the high explosive rocket assisted round Base The base is that portion of the projectile below the rotating band or obturating band The most common type is known as the boattail base This type of base streamlines the base of the projectile gives added stability in flight and minimizes deceleration by reducing the vacuum forming ei currents in the wake of the projectile as it passes through the atmosphere h Base Cover The base cover is a metal cover that is crimped caulked or welded to the base of the projectile It prevents hot gases of the propelling charge from coming in contact with the explosive filler of the projectile through possible flaws in the metal of the base 10 3 PROJECTILE PAINTING AND MARKING The main reason for painting a projectile is to prevent rust However painting is also used to identify the various types of ammunition a Identification The basic colors used for many years were olive drab OD for high explosive rounds ga for chemical rounds blue for practice rounds and black for drill rounds A system of c
16. M VA EI IF icis ABOVE POLARIS 41 USE GRAP o True Azimuth to Polaris 5 6 2 5 E o o x E 9 2 gt 2 9 3 ere N i 6 50 3 1 6 23 Table 5 3 Polaris Kochab determining true azimuth 35 north latitude ENTER TABLE ON LEFT WITH MEASURED ANGLE FROM KOCHAB TO POLARIS READ RIGHT TO GRAPH 1 OR GRAPH 2 THEN READ DOWN TO DETERMINE TRUE AZIMUTH TO POLARIS IF KOCHAB IS ABOVE POLARIS USE GRAPH 2 True Azimuth to Polaris 5 7 FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 Table 5 4 Polaris Kochab determining true azimuth 42 north latitude E READ RIGHT TO GRAPH 1 OR GRAPH 2 THEN READ DOWN TO DETERMINE TRUE AZIMUTH TO POLARIS eame LLL LLL LLL _ iF KOCHAB IS ABOVE POLARIS 1 11 LLL LIA 1 4 USE GRAPH 2 JI ly v 5 o a x E e 2 2 2 x o 2 N i o r True Azimuth to Polaris 5 8 FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 Table 5 5 Polaris Kochab determining true azimuth 50 north latitude READ RIGHT GRAPH 1 OR GRAPH 2 THEN READ DOWN DETERMINE TRUE AZIMUTH TO POLARIS Po
17. FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 Internal Battery Power BA 5590 Install the battery in the case assembly as follows Figure L 10 CAUTION When putting the new battery in the case assembly handle it very carefully It is easily damaged by rough handling e Loosen the cover fasteners and remove the cover e Put the new battery in the compartment and ush the battery in to seat the battery connector with he case assembly connector CONTROL CASE CAPTIVE SCREWS Figure L 10 Battery installation in the case assembly L 9 FM 6 50 MCVVP 3 1 6 23 e Install the spare battery in the battery compartment Put the cover in place and lock the fasteners Lithium organic batteries or cells are used in this equipment They are potentially hazardous if misused or tampered with before during or after discharge The following precautions must be strictly observed to prevent possible injury to personnel or damage to equipment e Do not heat incinerate crush puncture disassemble or otherwise mutilate the batteries e Do not short circuit recharge or bypass Internal fuse e Do not store batteries in equipment long periods of nonuse excess of 3 days e Turn off the equipment immediately if you detect that the battery compartment is too hot hear battery cells venting hissing sound or smell irritating sulfur dioxide gas Remove and dispose of the battery only after it is cool 30 to 60 minutes
18. If displacement is not corrected the weapon will not be oriented in the direction of the target o The aiming posts are emplaced 100 meters far post and 50 meters near post from the pantel If the far aiming post cannot be placed at 100 meters the near aiming post should be placed half the distance to the far post ffor example far post 90 meters near post 45 meters This is very important for the following reasons a The distance to the aiming pot is in direct relationship to the angular measurement taken when the displacement occurs The farther the aiming post is from the sight the smaller the angular measurement The near post because it is closer to the pantel has the QURE angular measurement This is the reason for the use of the near far line rule when correcting for displacement to the aiming posts To correct for displacement to the aiming posts the number of mils between the near post and the far post must equal the number of mils between the far post and the line vertical line of the pantel D 1 FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 b The rules of geometry and trigonometry tell us that if two points are on a line and the near point is half the distance of the far point from the origin then the angle measured to the far point from a point that 1s not on the line is half the angle measured to the near point That is to say the angle measured to the near post will be twice that of the far post uj if the near post is hal
19. If unsafe because QE is off of the safety T say CORRECTION QUADRANT 1080 Fire Mission 5 Errors 1 A3 T6 Shell Smoke Charge 3 charge 4 is cut Fuze TIME MTSQ used M564 or M582 Time 14 1 time setting is off safety T DF AP 3026 QE 360 If unsafe because the time is off of the safety T say CORRECTION TIME 15 9 Fire Mission 6 Errors A4 W4b Shell HE Charge 3 Fuze Time Time 14 9 time 13 9 set on 564 149 0 set on 582 DF C 3307 incorrect sight picture on collimator QE 360 Pick up displacement on wrong side of zero Fire Mission 7 Errors W7 Shell WP Charge 3 Fuze Time Time 212 DF AP 3395 QE 317 QE 371 set off O 16 Fire Mission 8 SAFE Shell WP Charge 3 Fuze PD DF C 3033 QE 224 Fire Mission 9 errors A1 T3 W1 W2 Shell HE Charge 3 Fuze TIME M728 VT FUZE USED Time 19 0 DF C 2963 deflection off of safety T gunner s cross level bubble off individual piece correction L10 QE 360 If called unsafe because deflection is off the safety T CORRECTION 2973 QUADRANT 360 DEFLECTION Fire Mission 10 errors T5 W3b WS Shell HE Charge 5 Fuze VT fuze VT not authorized on chg 5 safety T Time 25 0 DF C 3051 reset az counters out of sync 30 or more ANNEX 3 CUE CARDS MISSION AIMING DF TO SET OFF NUMBER POINT C 1 3403 transposed numbers 3043 AP 3441 pick up displacement using line far near
20. b External Power W34 or W34A Power Cable 1 Use the W34 cable with the M109 series of Pd howitzers and all towed howitzers Use the cable only on the MI10 series self propelled howitzers 2 Install the BA 5590 battery in the case assembly Note Use internal battery power when the W34 M a pov cable is connected to the OG 174 N VRC The purpose of the internal battery is to provide backup power whenever external power drops below 12 volts direct current DC Power will not be drawn from the internal battery as long as the rime power source voltage is greater than the internal battery voltage 3 Remove the dust cap from the power connector of the case assembly 0 Join power cable W34 7025 01 122 2984 or W34A 7025 01 122 2985 connector P2 to the power connector on the case assembly 9 Connect power cable W34 or W34A connector P1 to the Bendix connector on a 24 volt vehicle power cable L 10 If you have the AN PRC 68 or AN PRC 126 SUT connect the W34 W34A power cable to the OG 174 AN VRC amplifier power supply group instead of directly to the vehicle power L 10 TOWED HOWITZERS a The following is a safe accepted and proven method of remoting power from various vehicles to the GDU when it is used with a towed howitzer The Communications Electronics Command CECOM cee ed Safety Office agrees that it is a practical solution for the towed howitzer power problem The required ca
21. Figure 4 1 Polaris 2 reticle pattern b Reflector The reflector Figure 4 2 page 4 2 is a plastic signal post mounted on top of the telescope It is used as an aiming point for other instruments sighting on the aiming circle c Elevation Knob The elevation knob Figure 4 3 page 4 2 is used to raise and lower the telescope line of sight used to measure vertical angles See paragraph 1 Elevation scale Each graduation on the elevation scale Figure 4 3 represents 100 mils The scale is numbered at 100 mul intervals The black numbers 0 to 1100 indicate elevation The red numbers 0 to 400 indicate depression 2 Elevation micrometer scale Each graduation on the elevation micrometer scale Figure represents 1 mil The scale is numbered at 10 mil intervals The black numbers 0 to 100 indicate elevation The red numbers 0 to 100 indicate depression d Magnetic Compass The magnetic compass is located in the main housing Figure 13 For rough centering the magnetic needle m y be seen through the windows on to of the body assembly A small glass magnifier Figure 4 5 and reticle with three vertical lines are at one end of the recess These aid in aligning the end of the magnetic needle e Leveling Vials There are two tubular leveling vials and one circular leveling vial Figure 4 2 on the aiming circle One tubular leveling vial on the left side of the elbow telescope is used in leveling the
22. G 3 CONDUCT OF THE EVALUATION This evaluation evaluates the ability of the section chief to e and train his pn into a cohesive effective fighting unit It consists of five phases a Phase I is an orientation and organization period beginning with a statement of the purpose scope and description of the evaluation During Phase I a written test will be administered This phase should be conducted in a classroom on a day before the test b Phase II involves preparation in an assembly area for movement to a location for a deliberate occupation of a prepared position c Phase III covers the deliberate occupation of a prepared position d Phase IV evaluates the conduct of various types of fire missions e Phase V is a critique of the performance of individual sections Note Phases II through IV of the evaluation are constructed around a tactical scenario that can be altered to fit the training resources and the time available G 4 EVALUATION FORMAT task is a general statement of the requirement for the particular evaluation b The conditions outline the specific environment or situation in which the evaluation will be administered They state what assistance or reference materials if any are authorized and what equipment or personnel are required for proper evaluation c Evaluation checklists present the requirements for successful completion of that particular task Specific technical proc
23. Tasks Purpose 1 2 3 4 5 Battery Mission A The battery critical tasks TASK PURPOSE REMARKS FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 Table C 15 Sample battery fill in the blank order continued 3 Execution 4 Service Support A Location of decon site B Location of BAS POSITION RESUPPLY SCH MAINT PRIORITY CL IV REQ Ammo distribution plan Class V endstate for battery platoons Maintenance priorities Recovery priorities Priority of CSS assets Priority of Class IV Priority of Class 111 5 Command and Signal A Signal Frequency change over time Battery frequency platoon voice frequency platoon digital frequencies Battalion command frequency Battalion fire support frequency Battalion logistics frequency Challenge and password Recognition signals Retrans frequency B Succession of command C Risk assessment 1 Identified risk 2 Actions to minimize risk C 9 FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 APPENDIX D COMMON MISTAKES AND MALPRACTICE D 1 PROBLEM AREAS Inaccuracies in cannon artillery fires cause wasted rounds and a decrease in the effectiveness of fire support Many of these inaccuracies can be attributed to careless and or improper procedures at the howitzer or aiming circle The key to minimizing human error and careless gunnery rocedures is proper training The problem areas discussed elow give the commander a starting point for evaluating the t
24. h Supervise assumption of control of the fires of other units when necessary i Perform independent safety computations and verify the data with the executive officer j Maintain muzzle velocity information for all howitzers 1 20 CHIEF OF FIRING BATTERY The chief of firing battery is the primary enlisted advisor to the XO and must be prepared to assume all of the XO s duties The equivalent USMC billet description is the battery gunnery sergeant Btry GySgt responsibilities may include the following Supervise and maintain the firing capability of the battery b Supervise the occupation of the position c Supervise the overall maintenance of the firing battery d Continue to develop and implement the battery defense plan e Give the 156 information on the defense plan f Ensure that each chief of section knows the route to both alternate and supplementary positions g Verify the completion of the DA Form 2408 4 h Ensure ammunition is properly handled and protected i Ensure safety aids and procedures are maintained In a USMC battery the battery gunnery sergeant will complete the NAVMC 10558A gun book and compute and record EFC data 1 21 GUNNERY SERGEANT The gunnery sergeant supervises and executes the batter advance party operations ter 2 The equivalent U5M billet description is the local security chief He must be prepared to assume the duties of the chief of firin
25. 100 80 90 2000 185 130 156 __ 1201 131 120 105 110 89 10 0 _____2 100 ___ 190 130 159 130 133 A 120 107 110 8 100 7 90 220 198 1401 163 1301 136 amp 120 109 110 89 100 77 90 89 10 0 170 140 141 13 0 _____2 500 212 150 176 140 143 130 112 120 8 100 12800 234 1601 190 150 154 1401 18 X 130 92 120 75 110 2900 239 160 194 150 159 140 121 13 0 279 18 0 179 16 0 7135 150 99 130 77 12 0 300 19 0 370 308 20 242 180 194 1701 i44 150 15 140 80 120 322 210 252 190 202 18 0 257 19 0 4500 383 230 293 210 234 2001 176 180 123 160 88 140 5000 44 760 331 23 0 ___5 500 __ 517 280 374 260 295 240 220 X 210 153 ___ 190 106 166 328 25 0 650 556 330 367 270 273 250 190 2201 126 190 700 1655 36 0 2712 2 11 455 320 337 X 290 231 3 2501 151 210 9 000 151 340 36 310 254 270 164 230 8500 1 150 370 41 2330 281 290 182 250 ____ 9000 __ _________ _________ 671 4 8901 446 350 307 3101 19 20 ____99 500 __ ___________ ___________________ 623 400 368 350 237 30 0 19000 S 1 1 67 420 408 370 258 310 1050 120 Lzi8 _____ 450 439 281 336 Pp 1100 1 1 493 410 305 X 356 1150 ___________ __________ _ ________ 529 430 330 37
26. 4 While measuring the subtense used to determine distance elevate or depress the telescope to place the horizontal cross hair of the aiming circle on the chest of a m guide The subtense method 15 described in paragraph 10a 4 21 FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 Note If there was not enough time to measure VAs during advance party operations the instrument operator can align the horizontal cross hair at chest level of a cannoneer during The key is to measure the VA at a height that approximates instrument height 5 Read and record the value on the elevation and elevation micrometer scales to the nearest 1 mil 6 Subtract the correction corr factor from the readin obtained in the step The result is the vertica angle for that howitzer EXAMPLE Correction Factor ELO Rer Reading step 5 5 5 6 1 Correction factor 2 2 2 2 Vertical angle 7 3 8 1 CORRECTION FACTOR CORRECTION FACTOR OF 2 CORRECTION READING FACTOR VA 7 2 READING 1 CORRECTION 8 VA R FACTO READING 5 46 READING 4 27 MEMORY AIDS Tables 4 2 through 4 5 page 4 24 show memory aids for use in training personnel to lay the battery and or platoon 4 22 Table 4 2 Laying with the M2A2 aiming circle SEQUENCE MEMORY AID STEPS Survey is Available Do this first TFOOL Take Math step the azimuth of Subtract the Fire Out of the azimuth of fire Orienting
27. FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 TASK 10 Scoring Fire missions the missions in task 10 are one continuous a Standards of precision B 2 mission were met If applicable TASK 10A b Correct steps were followed to Conditions The soldier is Hen a howitzer in the firin position The howitzer is laid and both the collimator an c If steps a and b were not aiming posts are emplaced The pantel is aligned on the followed soldier recieves a NO GO collimator bubbles are level and special corrections are at and 0 points If soldier received a 0 The cannon tube is oriented on the primary direction of GO on steps a and b use the chart fire and elevated to 315 mils The soldier positions himself below to determine score as gunner and announces when m The examiner commands FIRE MISSION PLATOON ADJUST NUMBER 1 1 ROUND SHELL HE CHARGE XX FUZE QUICK DEFLECTION 3225 M101A1 USE DEFLECTION 2825 QUADRANT 315 Time The time will start on the last dieit of the deflection and will stop when the gunner says READY wis TIME IN SECONDS POINTS B 18 TASK 10B Conditions Continuation from 10 Soldier announces when ready e examiner commands SPECIAL CORRECTIONS RIGHT 4 DEFLECTION 3194 M101A1 USE DEFLECTION 2794 QUADRANT 315 Time The time will start on the last n of deflection and will stop when the gunner states READY TIME IN SECONDS FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 Scoring
28. IMS Machine Gun 7 62 mm M60 29 February 24 1 Signal Support in the AirLand Battle 15 October 1990 S FM 34 40 Electronic Warfare operations U 9 October 1987 44 1 US Army air Defense Artillery Employment 9 May 1983 d 6 50 3 1 6 23 S FM Air defense Operational Planning Data U 9 May 1983 FM 44 3 Air defense Artillery Employment Chaparral Vitlcan Stinger 15 1984 FM 44 18 Air Defense Artillery Employment Stinger 30 September 1981 55 Series Transportation 55 9 Unit Air Movement Plan 5 April 1993 FM 55 12 Movement of Units in Air force Aircraft AFM 76 6 FMEM 4 6 OPNA VINST 4630 27 10 November 1989 IMS I Transportation Reference Data 9 June FM 55 30 Army Motor Transport Units and Operations 14 March 1980 FM 55 450 2 Army Helicopter Internal Load Operations 5 June 1992 FM 55 450 3 Multiservice Helicopter External Air Transport Basic Operations and Equipment 11 February 1991 Desert Operations 7 27 24 August FM 90 4 Air Assault Operations 16 March 1987 FM 90 10 HTE Military Operations on Urbanized Terrain MOUT 15 August 1979 FM 90 13 River Crossing Operations 7 26 30 September 1992 FM 100 2 1 Soviet Army Operations and Tactics 16 July 1984 FM 100 5 Operations 14 June 1993 FM 100 27 US Army US Air Force Doctrine p Joint Airborne and Tactical Airl
29. 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000 1100 1200 1300 1600 1700 2500 2600 5000 5100 Note Angle2 95meteris PIECE TO CREST RANGE in thousands Five meters is the appropriate vertical clearance for firing fuzes other than armed VT b The time listed in the armed VT fuze tables M513 M514 M728 M732 includes the TFT time of flight plus 5 5 seconds expressed to the next higher whole second minimum safe time for each listed range When the time set on the VT fuze is equal to or greater than the time listed in the table the platoon leader s 00 minimum quadrant elevation for fuzes other than VT is used unarmed VT Note All M557 M564 tables are used for unarmed VT fuzes Use information in the EL column of the VT K 2 USE OF THE RAPID FIRE TABLES a Add Angle 1 and Angle 2 Sum must be 300 mils or less to use rapid firing tables Tables K 2 through K 16 b Enter the table at the piece to crest range and determine the elevation for the appropriate charge c Add Angle 1 and elevation obtained from appropriate table The sum is the minimum quadrant elevation d There are restrictions on the use of the VT fuze when firing certain charges on some weapon systems These areas are boxed on the tables by shading For the specific restrictions refer to the weapon operator s manual and or TM 43 0001 28 e The TI column in the rapid fire tables is the same as minimum safe time MST f Fuze M732
30. 2 The first vehicle of each element must display a blue flag mounted on the front left hand side of the vehicle 3 The last vehicle of each element must display a green flag mounted on the front left hand side of the vehicle 4 The column commander should display a white and black flag at the front left hand side as indicated below 5 The driver of a broken down vehicle must remove the flag s and filter light and if technical assistance is required a yellow flag is to be attached to the vehicle so that it is visible to approaching traffic 6 Flags must be approximately 30 cm 12 in x 45 cm 18 in in size 7 To obtain legal rights for column movements for different countries see Annex D 7 Movement Credit A movement credit is issued by the National Movement Staff or the appropriate dun on whose territory the movement starts The credit is coordinated by that staff or authority with the movement staff or authority of another nation where the crossing of international boundaries is concerned It is required for Columns of vehicles in accordance with national regulations see Annex C b Outsize or heavy vehicles in accordance with national regulations see Annex Inthe case of border crossing movement see STANAG 2176 d Hazardous cargo in accordance with national military regulations 8 Special Regulations for the Execution of Movement a Halts 1 Short halts made by columns normally are to last 10 minutes and
31. DEFENSE DIAGRAM at 4 3 So or ee Boe PSS ee le A ENSE EN OE 9126 PURPOSE 5 44 tus Ere des oce wur e arb tei 3 13 CONSTRUCTION OF THE DIAGRAM 3 14 DISPOSITION OF THE 3 15 PREPARING RANGE CARDS Section IV CONDUCT OF THE DEFENSE 3 16 DEFENSE AGAINST ENEMY ARMOR MECHANIZED 3 17 DEFENSE AGAINST AIR ATTACK 3 18 DEFENSE AGAINST DISMOUNTED ATTACK 3 19 DEFENSE IN OPERATIONS OTHER THAN WAR OOTW 3 20 DEFENSE AGAINST INDIRECT 3 21 DEFENSE AGAINST NBC ATTACK 3 22 EQUIPMENT AND MATERIEL DESTRUCTION PROCEDURES 3 23 EMERGENCY ALARMS OF HAZARD OR ATTACK 3 24 BOMBING SHELLING ROCKETING MORTARING AND LOCATION REPORTS iv 3 2 BATTERY RESPONSIBILITIES FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 CHAPTER 4 LAYING THE BATTERY MEASURING AND REPORTING Section THE AIMING CIRCLE EM GR UR S E RELY Ud 4 1 4 1 DESCRIPTION OF THE AIMING CIRCLE 4 1 4 2 SETTING UP THE AIMING CIRCLE 4 3 4 3 LEVELING THE AIMING CIRCLE 4 3 4 4 TAKING DOWN THE AI
32. Enemy Situation Examples 1 If the most likely enemy action during the battery s movement is from air attack then e The BC a change to the given route to support a terrain march for certain segments of th planned route where there is not adequate concealment for the battery e The route must allow the march units to conduct their immediate action drills for air attack e A route reconnaissance must be performed to determine easily identifiable features to serve as air target reference points TRPs FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 e f a terrain march is too slow move in an open column 2 If the most dangerous enemy action during the battery s movement is ambush then e Each march element to include the reconnaissance and advance parties must lead with an armored vehicle and or crew served weapon e Coordinate with higher headquarters to determine possible ambush sites and clear those areas so hat advance parties or main bodies can conduct reconnaissance by fire Positioning Criteria Examples 1 If the most likely threat in the subsequent position is enemy counter batt ry fire then the battery commander must ensure position areas support maximum dispersion and hardening 2 If the most dangerous threat to the battery in the subsequent position is from mechanized forces then e The battery commander must ensure the position is not located on platoon sized or larger avenues of approach e He must perform
33. IE NER so s 11 Lees ees oen s ________ me sme ems ees GE FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 Maximum cut for entire problem 25 26 Weight 25 od Deflection and azimuth 2 each Maximum cut 6 Failure to use GFT setting 15 FS M514 did not apply 5 5 2 Expression 1 Math error 1 Deflection other than 3200 3 RG 7100 AZ 2535 DF 2804 AZ 1925 DF 5412 AOF 2150 DF 3200 Maximum cut for entire problem 25 O 11 FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 27 Weight 20 Diagram Deflection and azimuth 2 each maximum cut 4 rift 2 each maximum cut 4 Math errors 1 Expression errors 1 Deflection other than 3200 3 RG 6900 MIN ALT 389 AZ 5580 DF 3565 AOF 5900 DF 3200 Maximum cut for entire problem 20 28 Weight 10 Diagram Deflection and azimuth 1 each cut 2 xpression errors 1 Math errors 1 RG 7000 368 AOF 2050 DF 3200 az 1678 gus DF 3581 MAX ALT 524 O 12 29 Weight 10 Diagram Deflection and azimuth 1 each cut 2 xpression errors 1 Math errors 1 RG 7000 MIN ALT 368 AZ 1675 AZ 2456 DF 3575 DF 2814 MAX ALT 585 MAXIMUM CHG ALT _ ee x ox _ Maximum cut for entire problem 10 O 2 HANDS ON SAFETY CERTIFICATION a Description 1 The hands on safety certification test presente
34. TO BATTERY HQ SB 22 VOICE TO BATTERY HQ SB 22 VOICE TO PLATOON FDC IFSAS DIGITAL Ane BCS DIGITAL oice wire line igital wire line TERMINAL STRIP TM 184 BATTERY WIREHEAD Figure 9 6 Battery based battery wire system FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 PLT FDC 1 PLT FDC 2 FM VOICE DS BN F1 F2 OR F3 NET FM DIGITAL VOICE MVR FS NET DS BN F1 F2 OR F3 NET MvR FS NET 1 FM VOICE Note The maneuver mvr fire support FS net is monitored to allow the battery or platoon FDO anticipate missions and follow the manueuver battle Emergency SECTIONS missions may also be conducted on this net Figure 9 7 Battery radio nets c Battery Command Fire CF Net FM Voice and or Digital With the fielding of the small unit transceiver SUT AN PRC 68 or AN PRC 126 and the radio set single channel ground and airborne radio system SINCGARS each FA firing battery will have its own internal radio net 1 The L edition TOE authorizes two AN PRC 68s or AN PRC 126s per howitzer section one in the howitzer and one in the ammunition resu p one per FDC one per platoon leader and one for the battery commander 2 The AN PRC 68 or AN PRC 126 can receive operating power from either the battery source or from a vehicular power system In the hand held mode the AN PRC 68 or AN PRC 126 is powered by a 154 volt dry battery BA 1588 that provides 24 hours of continuous operation To operate the AN P
35. To maximize the tactical benefit the reconnaissance must be planned As pu of the planning phase for any operation order or RSOP the factors of METT T must be considered before any action is taken Mission The mission is the governing factor in planning the RSOP The unit must remain able to perform its mission with minimal degradation as a result of tactical or survivability moves The battery commander must perform or have previously done his mission analysis with respect to his current and subsequent positions Then he can identify the battery s critical tasks in each of these positions and determine a list of movement and positioning criteria Movement Criteria Examples e The battery cannot lose firing capability Therefore the battery must move by platoon e Battery is out of range to execute their portion of the tire support plan Therefore move by battery using fastest movement technique e Battalion has two batteries moving at the same time The battery could receive an emergency mission Therefore the battery must consider internal platoon order of march and perform a reconnaissance of areas along the planned route to assist the battery on meeting this contingency b Enemy Situation The current enemy situation must be thoroughly understood The disposition intentions and penne of erbe must be analyzed before the OP particularly their local capabilities as revealed in current combat information
36. c Section chiefs should ensure that a good lithium battery if available is in every GDU during operations Batteries must be changed every 5 to 7 days depending on the intensity of firing T If firing data are lost the howitzer section must ensure that e Power is recycled on the gun display unit e The gun number is reestablished on the section chief s assembly e The firing data are retransmitted from the BCS TO C 2298 VRC CREW J507 J50 AM 1780 6 J505 E 3501 4 TO C 2298 CDR ANTENNA ANTENNA ABLE 467655 801 CABLE AT 892 PRC 25 INTERFACE FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 L 12 INOPERATIVE GUN DISPLAY UNIT If the GDU becomes inoperative it should be turned in for repair If communications cannot be established with the GDU NORMAL BITE switch in the NORMAL position try placing the switch in the BITE position If this is operation can continue until the GDU can be repaired L 13 SMALL UNIT TRANSCEIVERS The AN PRC 68 or AN PRC 126 provide an internal FM voice net This net will be used for convoy movement hasty displacements emergency occupations and during the initial occupation of a prepared position Once wire communications are established radio will no longer be used except for end notification of an enemy attack Despite these radios short planning range their signal can still be detected by ground and airborne RDF and or intercept stations This is another reason wire must be
37. determine the mean record it on the notation pad If the values do not agree within 10 mils repeat the entire procedure Note A declination constant determined by simultaneous observation or from a map should be verified as soon as possible 4 6 CARE AND HANDLING OF THE AIMING CIRCLE Protect the aiming circle from shock b Keep the instrument clean and dry c Clean the lens with an optical lens cleaning brush and lens tissue only d Keep the magnetic needle locked anytime it is not in use the aiming circle head cover over the aiming circle ead f Cover all tubular leveling vials g Rotate the azimuth knob until it is over the notation pad before trying to replace the head cover Section II PRECISION LIGHTWEIGHT GPS RECEIVER PLGR 4 7 GLOBAL POSITIONING SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Global positioning system GPS is a space based navigation m Which provides worldwide continuous all weather three dimensional position information The GPS system consists of the following three primary components e The satellite constellation Ensures worldwide coverage with a minimum of four satellites within electronic line of sight to any point on the earth e A master control station and five monitoring stations These provide ground based support for the satellites e The GPS receivers These receivers provide the operator with navigational and location data Currently the oun receiver being issued
38. e Checks the level of the bubbles centers if necessary Checks for the correct sight picture corrects if necessary Reads the deflection from pantel CAUTION When making corrections to the A picture or leveling the bubbles the tube must not be moved e Reports the deflection read from the pantel to the FDC as CORRECT DEFLECTION so much EXAMPLE Your platoon M109A3 155 mm SP is laid on azimuth 5000 orienting angle 0600 with a common deflection of 3200 fter firing a registration FDC requests that the platoon leader report the azimuth or orienting angle n leader completes the check sand CORRECT DEFLECTION 3250 He then does the following Determines the change between the common deflection and the correct deflection Common deflection 3200 correct deflection 3250 increase 50 mils Applies the difference according to the backwards azimuth rule to determine the azimuth tired ction 250 mils azimuth 30 mils 5000 50 4950 Reports CORRECT AZIMUTH 4950 4 31 MEASURING THE AZIMUTH OF THE LINE OF FIRE a If a gun fires out of safe the platoon leader or XO ma wish to determine the azimuth at which the round was fired This is the most common reason for measuring the azimuth of the line of fire Another reason is that a unit may use a less desirable method of lay and then improve this method example would be a unit that lays by the grid azimuth method because there is n
39. tt 15 ______ 700 2 404 171 120 139 14 no 8 __ 25 140 18 130 200 25 50 188 140 150 130 122 120 _____ 2000 27 150 19 140 157 no 15 120 2200 28 160 26 1402 130 131 120 280 29 160 22 150 167 15 130 240 35 i170 at 138 so 6 no 28 16 340 tat 2 600 80 29 160 183 150 146 140 2790 354 19 0 246 16 0 188 150 f 40 140 _____2800 190 15 349 290 378 200 260 __ 170 200 160 18 150 392 20 0 269 180 25 7160 162 150 3100 430 286 180 215 169 LLL 309 2010 190 369 457 220 31 590 220 170 17 160 340 472 220 3131 190 23 180 182 16 0 93500 488 20 39 _ 200 238 180 17 10 8605 549 24 0 338 20 0 248 80 14 _ 170 _____5700 240 39 210 255 199 1989 380 584 250 38 20 263 190 204 18 0 3900 60 26 0 269 20 0 208 18 0 624 260 8 20 25 213 190 5 Me 220 242 20 0 _____5000 275 220 890 45 __270 30 240 rr 2 96 26 0 189 E 28 0 3 _______ _ 35 0 437 30 0 TENEO MAH
40. FD nets that are ean one to each firing battery The Bn FDC is the NCS for these nets The net FD1 202 or FD3 is used to pass digital traffic It may be converted to voice net to fit operational needs Each platoon FDC operates in this net and communicates digitally with the battalion FDC by using the BCS The pl toon FDC can also use this net as directed to communicate with the company fire support headquarters forward observers battalion fire support section combat observation lasing teams aerial observers and Firefinder radar sections FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 Note 1 TA 312s can be substituted for SB 22s if no other administrative lines are installed in the battery or platoon area 2 The digital line can be routed directly between the two FDCs if the battery wirehead is not installed 3 A 6 platoon based organization would have one less howitzer than the figure depicts 6 58727 SEE 1 SS 4 PLT FDC TML e 2 pe I kemman BTRY HQ 2 Pd TM 184 TM 184 SEE NOTE 1 7 5822 2 2PLTFDC TM 184 bus mL PM oe Ses TO BATTERY HQ SB 22 VOICE TO BATTERY HQ SB 22 VOICE LEGEND voice wire line TERMINAL STRIP TM 184 digital wire line BATTERY WIREHEAD Figure 9 5 Platoon based battery wire system FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 9 6 BTRY FDC BTRY HQ
41. FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 NUMBER 2 CANNONEER mounts fuze on projectile Continued MISSION ANNOUNCED FUZE TO MOUNT NUMBER Note Incorrect fuze FUZE TIME announced VT setup set up M564 M582 if error is found 10 VT M728 514 732 25 0 Note Safety T does not allow VT if CORRECTION FUZE TIME TIME 25 0 is announced then set up fuze time M564 M582 25 0 induced error NUMBER 3 CANNONEER cuts powder MISSION CHARGE TO PREPARE FINAL NUMBER INITIALLY CHARGE IF ERRORS ARE FOUND 1 4 CORRECTION CHARGE 3 3 Number 2 bag left out 5 CORRECTION CHARGE 3 3 3 4 CHARGE 3 is announced induced error O 18 NUMBER 4 CANNONEER prepares projectile MISSION PROJECTILE TO FINAL NUMBER PREPARE PROJECTILE if INITIALLY errors are found WP SMOKE is SMK announced x sme plo 8 ee DT we ee 4 SAFETY Ts Firing Point SAFETY Azimuth of Fire 2600 Low Angle Charge 5 DF 3446 3306 3015 MIN QE HE HC SMK wo TI VT Firing Point SAFETY Azimuth of Fire 2600 Low Angle Charge 3 MAX QE DF TI VT Firing Point SAFETY Azimuth of Fire 2600 High Angle Charge 5 Shell HE es 1082 1168 or MIN QE 892 ANNEX 5 IN BRIEFING TO TEST SITE 1 Here are your auth
42. GPS Accuracy Positioning accuracy 10 meters CEP horiz 10 meters PE alt LASER RANGE FINDER OPTICAL INSTRUMENT AZIMUTH GYROSCOPE Figure 4 9 Components of the GLPS FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 4 9 FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 Section IV THE M2 COMPASS 4 11 DESCRIPTION OF THE M2 COMPASS The M2 compass Figure 4 10 is the alternate instrument for orienting or laying cannons The unmounted magnetic compass is a multipurpose instrument used to obtain angle of site and azimuth readings The components of the M2 compass are discussed below a Azimuth Scale The azimuth scale is numbered as 200 mils from 0 to 6400 The scale is graduated every 2 mils and can be read to an accuracy ot 10 mils b Sights The compass has front and rear leaf splits and a mirror in the cover for sighting and reading angles c Levels The compass is equipped with a circular level for leveling the instrument before the azimuth values are read A tubular level is used with the elevation scale to measure angles of site d Angle of Site Mechanism Rotation of the level lever causes the elevation level and the elevation scale index to rotate as a unit The index clamps against the bottom piece to keep the mechanism from moving unless it is actuated by the level lever e Magnetic Needle and Lifting Mechanism magnetic needle the white end of the needle shows a magnetic north direction for orienting purposes The needle is delic
43. MCWP 3 1 6 23 C4 C 5 C 6 D 2 D 3 D 4 D 5 D 6 D 7 D 8 D 9 D 10 F 1 F 2 F 3 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 F 11 CRITICAL EVENTS TIME LINE C 5 BATTERY WARNING ORDER C 5 BATTERY ORDER dod Gash D doute Bo debido His ad C 8 APPENDIX D COMMON MISTAKES AND MALPRACTICES PROBEEM AREAS 33194 8 ou e DU ette Ce gig D 1 PRECUTTING D 1 LAYING ON THE WRONG 5 5 D 1 IMPROPER EMPLACEMENT AIMING POINTS D 1 FAILURE TO COMPUTE TERRAIN GUN POSITION CORRECTIONS D 3 USING THE M139 OR M140 ALIGNMENT DEVICE TO VERIFY D 4 OTHER MISTAKES e eder Su sot ns CS D 4 MAEPRAGTIGES eii odore x eR p RAMS ate WORT D 4 ERRORS IN SETTING UP AND ORIENTING THE AIMING CIRCLE D 5 INCIDENTS oh demi bdo due que Set tto gratis iod D 6 APPENDIX E LOAD PLANS FOR HOWITZER AMMUNITION VEHICLES AND CAMOUFLAGE CONFIGURATION APPENDIX F SPECIAL OPERATIONS OPERATIONS MOUNTAINOUS TERRAIN F 1 OPERATIONS IN JUNGLE TERRAIN F 1 NORTHERN 5 1 MILITARY
44. Malfunctions Involving Ammunition and Explosives 1 March 1989 AR 310 25 Dictionary of United States Army Terms 15 October 1983 AR 310 50 Authorized Abbreviations and Brevity Codes 15 November 1985 AR 380 5 Department of the Army Information Security Program 25 February 1988 AR 380 19 Department of the Army Information System Security Program 1 August 1990 AR 672 5 1 Military Awards 12 April 1984 AR 750 1 Army Material Maintenance Policy and Retail Maintenance Operations 11 March 1988 DST 1160G 029 85 Projectile Fragment Identification Guide 27 January 1989 Note DST 1160G 029 85 can be obtained from e Science and Technology Center ATTN AIA IPD US Army Intelligence Agency Washington DC 20310 1015 FM 3 4 NBC Protection 29 May 1992 FM 3 5 NBC Decontamination 23 July 1992 C FM 3 10B Employment of Chemical Agents 0 30 November 1966 FM 3 100 NBC Operations 23 May 1991 FM 5 25 Explosives and Demolitions 15 June 1992 FM 5 103 Survivability 10 June 1985 FM 6 2 Tactics Techniques and Procedures for Field Artillery Survey 23 September 1993 FM 6 15 Tactics Techniques and Procedures for Field Artillery Meteorology 18 June 1992 Dot Fire Support in the AirLand Battle 17 May FM 6 20 1 Tactics Techniques and Procedures for Field Artillery Cannon Battalion 29 November 1990 FM 6 20 2 Tactics Techniques and Procedures for Corps Artillery Division Ar
45. VT M762 M692 ADAM L 1320 D501 Yes butnot Y Yes 17 740 ET MTSQ M577 zone 1 or 2 M731 ADAM S 1320 D502 Yes butnot Y Yes 17 740 ET MTSQ M577 zone 1 or 2 M116A1 HC 1320 D506 Yes butnot Yes 18 100 ET MTSQ M577 zone 1 M110A1 WP 1320 0550 Yes Yes Yes 18 100 PD MTSQ ET zone 1 M110 H HD 1320 D543 Yes butnot Yes Yes 18 100 PD MTSQ ET zone 1 M687 binary 1320 D594 Yes butnot Yes TBD zone 1 or2 M121 chemical 1320 D568 Yes butnot Yes Yes 18 100 PD VT zone 1 M795 HE 1320 D529 Yes butnot Yes Ye TBD CP PD ET MTSQ VT zone 10r2 M732 only M825 smoke 1320 D528 Yes butnot Yes Ye 17 500 ET MTSQ M577 zone 1 2 M718 RAAMS L 1320 0503 Yes butnot Yes Ye 17 740 ET MTSQ M577 zone 1 2 M741 RAAMS S 1320 0509 Yes Yes Ye 17 740 ET MTSQ M577 zone 1 or2 es Ye Y lt o a M712 1320 0510 Yes but no Copperhead 16 400 BD comes already installed 18 100 PD MTSQ ET VT M572 only requirement for zones 1 through 3 M804 practice 1320 D513 Yes butnot Yes Y zone 1 Type classified but not in production 5 5 5 5 5 5 10 11 FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 CHAPTER 11 SAFETY PROCEDURES 11 1 RESPONSIBILITIES AR 385 63 Chapter 11 implements the chain of command safety concept Under this a battery chain of command is responsible for safety during firing training and combat This c
46. a Set up and level the aiming circle over the selected point b Using the upper motion set 0 0 mils on the azimuth scale c Place the vertical cross hair of the instrument on using the lower motion and the elevation micrometer ob d Turn the azimuth micrometer knob upper motion clockwise until the vertical cross hair is centered on Polaris The telescope may have to be elevated or depressed e Read the value on the azimuth scale to the nearest mil This is the entry value used to enter Tables 52 through 55 pages 5 5 through 5 8 5 4 FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 f Depress the telescope to ground level an ium post at least 30 meters along the line of sight of the vertical cross hair line This will serve as the EOL and the aiming circle becomes the OS 2 Extract the true azimuth to Polaris a Select Table 5 2 5 3 5 4 or 5 5 whichever pertains to the latitude closest to that of the instrument operator If the instrument operator s location is exactly half way between the latitudes listed on any two tables either table may be used b Enter the appropriate table on the left side with the value from the upper motion of the aiming circle Visually interpolate if necessary by using the value from 1 e above c Determine whether to intersect with an 1 is below Polaris or Graph 2 Kochab is above Polaris f in doubt compare the vertical angle of the two stars 4 From th
47. align the vertical hairline on the center of the cannon bore FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 f With the upper motion of the aiming circle align the vertical hairline on the pantel of the weapon Read the instrument reading angle from center bore to pantel to the Weapon ANGLE READ ON SIGHT 4 30 TO 50 METERS 8 4 E The gunner sets the announced reading on the pantel e then adjusts the pue by using the tangent screws or the boresight adjustment shaft until his sight picture is centered on the lens of the aiming circle AIMING CIRCLE ON LINE WITH AXIS OF THE BORE ANGLE READ ON AIMING CIRCLE Figure 8 3 Aligning the sight parallel to the axis of the bore by use of an aiming circle FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 CHAPTER 9 COMMUNICATIONS 9 1 COMMUNICATIONS EQUIPMENT The cannon battery or platoon uses both radio and wire equipment Either system will become primary or secondary depending on the tactical situation and the availability of equipment There are advantages and disadvantages associated with each For example radio permits mobility and speed but is susceptible to enemy electronic warfare EW Wire lines are more immune to enemy EW but the inhibit rapid movement and speedy installation Hence the strength of one becomes the weakness of the other Therefore it is reasonable to view the battery or platoon communications comm system as that which makes th
48. box grider percussion hammer CP continuous pull a pneumatic HP hydropneumatic SIP spring actuated inertia percussion HPC hydropneumatic constant TIS thread interrupted screw HPV hydropneumatic variable VSW vertical sliding wedge M2 FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 APPENDIX N INTERCHANGEABILITY OF AMMUNITION N 1 GENERAL Ammunition interoperability between the US Army and its allies is important The purpose of this appendix is to show the field artillery ammunition components that are authorized and or acceptable for exchange between the US and various allies during training and combat conditions This has been done through the use of tables Countries for which data are currently available are Belgium Canada Denmark France Germany Italy Netherlands Norway Turkey United Kingdom Greece Portugal Spain and United States N 2 TRAINING Tables N 1 and 2 reflect the cartridge propellant charge combinations that are authorized for firing troops in cane Tables N 1 N 2 and N 3 page N 2 describe complete round combinations authorized tor exchange by a memorandum of agreement signed by each nation A mix of components of other nations is not authorized for use by the US For example a German projectile cannot be used with a Canadian propellant charge for training Note The following charts cover only authorized items for NATO countries and US use if a munitions item has not been autho
49. commander can coordinate for additional assets or augment the advance party with internal assets to provide the additional ability to clear areas of small enemy forces obstacles and minefield c The following are some tactics techniques procedures and considerations units should incorporate when performing advance party security sweeps 1 Maximum use of the senses Sight Advance party members look for e Enemy personnel vehicles and aircraft e Sudden or unusual movement e Smoke or dust e Engine exhaust fumes e Unusual movement of farm or wild animals e Vehicle tracks e Signs or evidence of enemy occupation e Recently cut foliage or vegetation e Lights fires or reflections e Muzzle flashes b Hearing Advance party members listen for e Running engines e Track sounds e Voices e Metallic sounds e Gunfire e Dismounted movement through brush or woods c Smell Advance party members smell for e Cooking food e Vehicle exhaust e Burning petroleum products e Burning tobacco products d Advance parties use reconnaissance methods that they have trained and rehearsed in detail The correct reconnaissance technique will maximize security and mission accomplishment FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 1 Mounted reconnaissance of a position area should be used when e Terrain is open and provides maximum visibility e ime is limited e Very detailed reconnaissance is not required e Minefield and obs
50. light and noise discipline helps the battery avoid detection 1 Use artificial camouflage Two artificial camouflage measures that reduce the chance of recognition are pattern painting of equipment with the NATO three color patterns and proper use of the lightweight screening system 2 Properly site electronic equipment to reduce signatures and position all battery equipment to eliminate exposure and detection 3 Make use of all camouflage Trees and shrubs can hide a battery or platoon Built up areas are great for hiding equipment because man made items look like other man made items and do not contrast with natural surroundings 4 Use whatever terrain and natural concealment are available to blend into the surroundings 5 Maintain light and noise discipline 6 Use the track plan The most common signs of military activity in an otherwise well camouflaged area are tracks spoil debris and movement The BC must enforce his track plan Existing roads and trails must be used If none are available some should be created with i vehicles to give the appearance that a unit has moved throug the area The roads and trails must have logical starting and ending points b Fortification 1 Occupy positions that have natural advantages for defense such as interior tree lines and ravines e Harden battery positions and dig in whenever possible FM 5 103 shows good examples of hardened positions 3 Whenever pos
51. of platoon position areas c Assist the commander in the development and execution of the overall battery defense plan Chapter 3 d Coordinate administrative and logistical en less ammunition to include water and food service mail laundry showers maintenance and evacuation of personnel and equipment Chapter 12 e Monitor the health care welfare and sanitation of battery personnel f Plan coordinate and execute the evacuation of casualties to the battalion aid station 1 8 PLATOON LEADER The platoon leader PL is responsible for everything his platoon does or fails to do He positions himself where he can best lead the platoon considering the factors of METT T He relies heavily on the platoon sergeant to supervise the firing element and on the gunnery to supervise the detailed platoon RSOP His responsibilities may include the following a Establish and maintain the firing capability of the platoon b Supervise the displacement movement and occupation of the platoon Supervise the POC and be prepared to perform the duties of the FDO to facilitate 24 hour operations d Supervise the use of the M90 radar chronograph e Supervise the overall maintenance of platoon equipment f Ensure continuous security of the platoon with emphasis during displacement and occupation of position Verify minimum rein quadrant elevation QE for each owitzer h Ensure the weapon location data are
52. select D to delete the location of that howitzer because the first forward station will be entered as gun 1 1 BUMP Select I endline 16 BUMPER P Enter bumper endline any bumper can be used with first character A to Z second and third 0 to 9 FROM GUN x Enter A endline e Theorienting station A ORSTA is the starting point for the traverse 18 DIR P Enter azimuth known azimuth plus the station angle endline 19 DIST P Enter distance determined from fieldwork endline Note Touse subtense distance press endline at step 19 and SUBTENDED PX is displayed Enter the angle measured between the left and right ends of the subtense bar in mils Press endline and BASE LENGTH P x is displayed Enter the length of the subtense bar in meters and press The entries M16 M16A1 or M16A2 are not options VERT ANG P Enter vertical angle endline f All data needed to compute the coordinates and height of the first traverse station forward station are entered upon completion of step 20 This is the end of the first leg g 2 BUMP IDGP X is displayed when endline is pressed in step 20 h one leg is entered select endline UPDATE FU OPM x will appear Go to step 27 i To enter fieldwork for an additional forward station perform steps 21 to 26 2 BUMP x Select endline 2
53. the assistant gunner and the BCS Apply GDU power by one of the methods described in paragraph 1 9 Notes 1 Because of the unique characteristics of a digital wire circuit its hiny is seriously impaired by an electrical leakage through the wire insulation or a bad TUE Therefore great care must be taken in laying the firing battery wire circuits to avoid damage to the insulation Wire lines must not be laid in water Splices must be carefully made and well insulated to avoid excessive leakage or possible shorts Splices on wire lines must be kept to a minimum to reduce line resistance 2 The use of terminal strip TM 184 instead of jack panel 58 16 is highly recommended This will reduce circuit resistance due to the internal circuit design of the SB 16 AUTION Ground the GDU to earth ground before starting cabling operations a Operation With Terminal Strip TM 184 Terminal strip TM 184 n ure L 6 is an expendable Class IX item NSN 5940 00 238 8493 reference TC 24 20 It is the poe device to use in connecting wire lines from the DU to the BCS If no TM 184 is available in the unit recommend that the SB 16 be used The digital wire system connecting the BCS through the TM 184 terminal strip to GDU 5 shown in Figures L 6 and 1 7 TO GUNS Figure L 6 M 184 terminal strip L 6 FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 b Wire Construction The wire system is constructed by laying a wire line of WD l TT field wir
54. to the line of sight of a designated aimin pu with the vertex of the angle at t he sight In addition to deflection as a fire command the firing battery is concerned with both common and referred deflection deliberate occupation the occupation of a position by a unit that has been fully prepared for occupa tion by the advance party for example howit zer positions have been selected and initial de flections provided to the gun guides destruction fire indirect fire delivered with the sole urpose of destroying material targets by mas Sing fires Each firing element may expend large quantities of ammunition to destroy the target df deflection diam diameter digital message device a small portable two way communications terminal used by field artillery Glossary 4 observers to transmit and receive high speed digital messages May communicate with IFSAS TACFIRE BCS VFMEDs FEDs DCTs or oer DMDs through wire or standard army radios direct fire fire brought on a target utilizing direct laying techniques direct laying the of a piece by sighting directly on the target dis distance displacement 1 The act of leaving a position prior to occupying another 2 The undesired move ment of a sight caused by traversing the tube or by the shock of firing distant aiming point an aiming point at least 1 500 meters from the pieces distribution of fire the pattern of bursts in the target area the sheaf div
55. 1 6 23 7 Antitank weapons are very effective against low flying rotary winged aircraft at short ranges b Defense of convoys against air attack is as follows 1 Move the battery at night on concealed routes or during periods of reduced visibility 2 Consider infiltration if there is a significant air threat 3 Post air guards for each vehicle and assign sectors of responsibility that permit massing small arms tires Immediate action against air attack is to disperse vehicles Everyone must return fire 5 Designated drivers must have strip maps to the battalion station and alternate medical facilities in the area rehearse the plan For the employment of the Stinger and or Avenger teams see FM 44 18 and FM 4423 1 3 18 DEFENSE AGAINST DISMOUNTED ATTACK a Dismounted enemy elements will attack by use of the ollowing e Ambushes e Guerrilla type attacks normally not exceeding platoon size and often conducted at night or in adverse weather e A diversionary attack and then a main attack e Dismounted infantry b A properly equipped 10 man enemy combat patrol can effectively neutralize a cannon battery that is weak in its defense planning or execution To keep this from happening the battery must do the following e Fight the enemy outside the position e Insure fighting provide interlocking sectors of fire around the position e Use an overwatch technique One element will cov
56. 1341 9 85 73 64 55 22 23 73 1 3140 119 9 j 9 9 18 69 6 1 44 25 33 __1 500 127 48 97 86 7 6 47 26 35 L 1700 149 _ 123 14 96 85 J 073 521 28 38 1800 157 130 17 12 8 7 55 29 40 1900 165 137 12 107 9 f 82 58 30 42 __ 200 1 74 145 10 713 J oz ase ec2 32 44 2100 18 45 148 10 43 92 66 33 J 4 J 2200 19 121 17 126 j 8 56 6 34 50 2300 27 19 153 132 113 13 72 36 52 240 216 17 137 8 171 76 37 __ 54 2500 224 186 17 143 13 12 79 56 260 24 16 172 150 1 9 7 8 39 5 270 250 203 183 156 14 171 s 60 280 22 21 10 14 19 16 488 42 62 2900 21 28 19 10 14 134 44 65 SS 55 5 3100 303 243 21 185 157 143 47 70 3400 35 268 241 20 13 18 12 52 78 3 500 36 277 248 29 18 1 16 5 80 3 600 36 24 26 221 190 170 121 _ 55 83 15 15 17 57 8 236 420 18 11 58 98 22 27 16 135 60 91 24 22 194 139 62 94 __289 26 24 46 172 9 5 000 _ 671 335 292 256 186 81 125 1 5500 1 68 ___386 323 29 211 9 14
57. 2 337 4e Wos 35 ___ 18 2 36 2 e 1o 3 wos 35 1815 336 45 002 set Wi 35 18 8 55 oe o 36 18 335 xr tens E 395 1 x9 178 1505 45 tera 3s 17 45 tors xe mal 3 39 _ 40a wwe xr wzs 358 ss wze 35 135 32 1515 s 1022 3e 52 3 4 1es ss gt 39 2 41 f es 175 142 1822 ws8 1845 5 e tea E 1848 390 ws xe teas Wwa2 39 5 xe es 32 ves ss2 waz t 5 3r 3m ws 3e teas sn wsz 3 we 5 xe wss 3 ___ 37 waz 3e wse 15 327 545 x5 tes 39 we o wes xs 304 665 3 wez 3 1 197 15 394 f sa _ wes 1l 1972 35 1e 3 wes 3 1895 3 555 3e 3 w __ 8 35 3 1es 3e w2 3 _ ___ me 3 156 5 390 5 21 FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 Table 5 8 Sub
58. 2 5 RSOP OPERATIONS The BC is responsible for the overall RSOP He or his representative performs general reconnaissance and leads the advance party He selects a atter or two firin peoo positions and a battery trains position if apia e The Pamer sergeants will then conduct the detailed RSOPs or their locations 2 2 2 6 METHODS OF RECONNAISSANCE The three methods by which the battery commander and platoon leaders may conduct a reconnaissance are map air and ground The best reconnaissance is one which uses a combination of all three Normally the commander is able only to make a map inspection followed by a ground reconnaissance a Map Reconnaissance 1 Any reconnaissance begins with a map inspection Potential positions and routes to the new position can be chosen This method is very fast and allows unsuitable routes to be eliminated In addition likely ambush sites can be identified on the BC or platoon leader can also determine an initial order of march for the howitzers The rule he applies here is that the howitzer which will travel the farthest into the new position will be the first vehicle in the column There are also two major disadvantages to conducting only a map inspection a Terrain and other features may have been altered For example a pate shown on the map may no longer exist Military load classifications of bridges are not listed on maps Bridges must be physically inspected b
59. 23 STANDARDIZING ELEMENTS OF THE FIRE COMMAND 7 7 7 24 EXAMPLE OF FIRE COMMANDS 7 8 7 25 RECORD OF MISSIONS FIRED 7 10 vii FM 6 60 MCWP 3 1 6 23 viii 8 2 8 3 8 4 8 5 8 6 8 7 8 8 9 1 9 2 9 3 9 4 9 5 9 6 10 1 10 2 10 3 10 4 10 5 10 6 10 7 10 8 10 9 10 10 10 11 10 12 10 13 10 14 10 15 CHAPTER 8 SPECIAL SITUATIONS DIREGTEIRE 2 aos Suh mde UK SE due o Ses Ono ISI Ob Sow oak 8 1 DIRECT FIRE SIGHTING METHODS 8 1 DIRECT FIRE LAYING 5 8 2 COMMANDS FOR DIRECT FIRE 82 EMERGENCY BORESIGHTING 8 3 COLLIMATOR METHOD BORESIGHTING 8 3 STANDARD ANGLE METHOD OF BORESIGHTING 8 3 AIMING CIRCLE METHOD OF BORESIGHTING 8 3 CHAPTER 9 COMMUNICATIONS COMMUNICATIONS EQUIPMENT 9 1 BATTERY COMMUNICATIONS 9 1 BATTERY WIRE SYSTEM y det Ree aee de Rabe RU 9 1 BATTERY RADIO NET STRUCTURE 9 4 AN PRC 68 AND AN PRC 126 PLANNING CONSIDERATIONS 9 7 BCS TO GDU COMMUNICATIONS 9 8 CHAPTER 10 AMMUNITION REFERENCES Susa ent A
60. 3 1 6 23 J M SHELLING REPORTS The division artillery div a responsible for counterfire Therefore bombing reports BOMBREPs heling reports and mortar reports MORTREPs should be orwarded as quickly as possible to the div arty tactical operations center TOC through either fire direction or fire support channels If a report 15 received by D5 battalion and that battalion decides to attack the report of action taken and a damage assessment if available should be forwarded to the div arty TOC when the action is completed a Contents To provide a standard method of rendering reports on enemy bombing shelling and mortaring within the NATO forces operating on land and the United States armed forces and certain other NATO armed forces have concurred in the provisions of STANAG 2008 Refer to STANAG 2103 as implemented in FM 3 100 in conjunction mh ANAG 2008 for guidance in reporting the type of attack b Artillery Counterfire Information Form The information obtained from a crater should be forwarded by the most rapid means available the ATI SHR followed up with DA Form 2185 R Artillery Counterfire Information ACIF Figure J 11 Regardless of how little information has been obtained do not hesitate to forward it Fragmentary or incomplete information a radio or telephone report is often valuable in supplementing or confirming existin information This radio or telephone may be followe by a written rep
61. 3311 Conditions After evaluating task 5 the evaluator reads the following to the section chief NOW THAT THE MICROMETER TEST HAS BEEN DONE YOU OR ANY MEMBER OF YOUR SECTION ARE TO PERFORM THE END FOR END TEST O G 8 YOUR GUNNER S QUADRANT AT THE CONCLUSION OF THE TEST e LEAVE THE GUNNER S QUADRANT ON THE BREECH e THE ERROR To THE EVALUATOR ND e ANNOUNCE To THE EVALUATOR IF THE UADRANT IS SERVICEABLE OR SERVICEABLE ARE YOU READY GO Evaluation Checklist Did the soldier follow the correct procedures in performing end for end test Was the correct quadrant error announced Was the quadrant d clared unserviceable if the error exceeded 0 4 mil or declared serviceable if the error was 40 4 mil or less Scoring If all GO ratings are awarded the score for the task will be determined by the speed of execution Table 7 If any NO GO ratings are awarded 0 points will be awarded Table G 7 Scoring end for end test TIME minutes and seconds ewm 1 41 1 50 1 51 2 00 Longer than 2 00 G 11 PHASE III DELIBERATE OCCUPATION During this phase the gun guide will prepare a designated location for occupation by the section The section will move to this location make a deliberate occupation and prepare for firing TASK 7 Preparation of position by the gun guide 061 266 1101 p bu 1 31 1 40 Conditions The gun guide will be required
62. 3966 0 2d reading 1533 5 1533 5 6400 7933 5 7933 5 12 3966 8 The mean angle is not valid because it does not agree with the first reading within 0 5 mil The angle must be remeasured d A directional traverse is shown in Figure 5 7 page 5 12 and the following example EXAMPLE The known data are as follows Azimuth from A to the azimuth mark 0805 0 The mean station angles measured were as follows Station A 4997 5 15 1 2248 2 5 2 5168 8 The method of determining the azimuth from to TS 2 is as follows Known azimuth A to azimuth mark is 0805 0 Plus station angle at A 4997 5 AZ station A to TS 1 5802 5 To determine back azimuth the next step is always required 3 200 mils AZ TS 1 to station A 2602 5 3200 0 Plus station angle at TS AZ 5 1 to TS 2 4850 7 3 200 mils 3200 0 AZ TS 2 to TS 1 1650 7 Plus station angle at TS 2 5168 8 If the sum of an azimuth 6819 5 and a station angle exceeds 6 400 mils then 6 400 mils must be subtracted 6400 0 AZ TS 2 to station B 0419 5 3 200 mils 3200 0 AZ B to TS 2 3619 5 AZ from OS A to EOL 3619 5 2248 2 5168 8 MILS FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 0805 0 MILS 4997 5 MILS Figure 5 7 Example of a directional traverse Section III LOCATION 5 7 METHODS OF LOCATION Whenever the tactical situation permits the firing units osition should be surveyed before the unit arrives formation provided by the survey
63. 4 and is depicted by a defense diagram bee Section The defense diagram is based on the data tor each howitzer and each machine gun range card It includes the fields of fire for grenade launchers antitank weapons and individual weapons The diagram is prepared the platoon sergeant and approved by the platoon leader If howitzer sections are dispersed over great distances the section becomes responsible for its defense It must be able to defend itself until help arrives 3 3 6 50 MCWP3 1 6 23 o Table 3 1 Battery defensive resources e Note Source is 101 10 2 WEAPONS THAT MAY BE AVAILABLE FOR MUTUAL SUPPORT Weapons Cannons indirect fire DPICM HET smoke illuminating and FASCAM TOW 2 75 inch rockets MG and 40 mm and 20 mm cannons Guns bombs rockets napalm missiles Mavericks guided bombs and cluster bombs all varieties HE WP and illuminating Armor piercing HE VT Q CP and illuminating NUMBER OF NIGHT OBSERVATION DEVICES IN FIRING BATTERIES 155 mm Towed 105 mm Battery Battery 155 mm SP Battery AN PVS 7B night vission goggles AN PVS 5 night vission goggles Bo _ __ Attack helicopters USAF tactical air Mortars Naval gunfire AN PVS 4 night vision sight tripod mounted WEAPONS ASSIGNED TO A CANNON BATTERY Weapon Issue or Caliber Max Effective Range M16A2 One per individual 800 meters FM 23 9 May select fully automatic
64. 5151 2900 MIN SAFE FS M564 State whether the following data are safe or unsafe to fire if unsafe state why 31 Lot XY chg 4 fz quick df 3695 QE 347 6 MIN SAFE FS M732 32 Lot XY chg 4 fz ti ti 122 df 3472 QE 253 33 Lot XY chg 4 fz vt ti 17 0 df 3515 QE 315 34 List the action taken in the event of a misfire on an M109A2 A4 howitzer hot tube charge 3 35 Describe the method for measuring the peak angle of site to a crest in front of the howitzer and list the four methods of determining piece to crest range 4 SOLUTION TO QUALIFICATION TESTI Part 1 True and False 1 True 6 False 11 True 2 False 7 False 12 True 3 True 8 True 13 True 4 True 9 False 14 True 5 True 10 False 15 True Part 2 Multiple Choice 16 d 18 a 20 a 22 b 24 d 17 c 19 c 21 c 23 a 25 c Part 3 Completion 26 How are white phosphorus projectiles stored Explain why They are stored on their bases to improper settling of the projectile filler and away from other ammunition 27 If a VT fuze does not seat properly in the fuze well what actions should be taken The fuze should be removed Check the round to see if the supplementary charge is still in the fuze well M500 series and M728 only If it is remove it and install the fuze If it still does not seat properly remove it and turn it in to the ammunition section 28 Describe
65. 7 OTHER MISTAKES Other mistakes are as follows e Failure to correct the gunner s aid when the corrections were not needed e Transposition of numbers e Failure to center pitch and cross level bubbles e Failure to compensate for backlash in the traversing handwheel by ensuring that the last movement of the handwheel is in the direction of the greatest resistance D 4 D 8 MALPRACTICE Malpractice include blatant violations of standard procedures set forth in field manuals technical manuals and other publications Some of these are as follows Failure to have a second safety qualified person orient the verification circle and verify the lay of the howitzers e Having no system of double checks or leader checks on the actions taken e Exceeding the maximum and or sustained rates of fire e mproper ramming which may result in the projectile falling back on the propellent when the tube is elevated rue nadi ammunition If the projectile falls back on the propellant gases pass around the projectile blow by This m y decrease muzzle velocity The projectile may be pushed forward towards the forcing cone If so the projectile will flutter and cause additional and unnecessary wear on the lands at the forcing cone Improper testing of the gunner s quadrant Improper or inconsistent placement of the propellant in the chamber These tests must be conducted in accordance with the technical manual to ensure
66. A 1 FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 APPENDIX B SAMPLE GUNNER S QUALIFICATION TEST B 1 USE OF TEST a This Seen presents the test that evaluates the 138 0811 soldier Mane the performance of the principal duties of the gunner This test applies to all weapon systems and has the following purposes 1 The tasks in this test should be used as a training tool The soldier should practice each task under close supervision to acquire the degree of proficiency required by the standards stated in this test 2 This test can bolster the esprit and motivation of the soldier through recognition of individual proficiency The Artillery clasp for the marksmanship badge will be awarded upon completion of this test see AR 672 5 1 b This test will be given at least semiannually B 2 STANDARDS OF PRECISION The soldier will be required to perform the tasks in accordance with the following standards a Settings must be exact b Bubbles in leveling vials must be centered exactly c The cross hair of the reticle pattern on the panoramic telescope must be aligned exactly on the left edge of the aiming post on the 0 line of the collimator or offset correctly to counter the effects of displacement center mass of the compass or reflector of the aiming circle or on the top left edge of the distant aiming point d The final motion of the elevating handwheel must always be in the direction that raises the cannon tube e Azimuth kn
67. AP C P 3307 pick up sight picture on wrong side of zero 2963 CORRECTION DEFLECTION 2973 cross level bubble off individual piece correction 110 reset and or azimuth counter out 30 mils B induced error ASSISTANT GUNNER 1 2 1107 CORRECTION DEFLECTION 2973 cross level bubble off individual piece correction L10 5 induced error FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 NUMBER 1 CANNONEER sets time on time fuzes MISSION FUZE TO SET TIME TO SET DATA ON NUMBER FUZE FOR M565 M577 M564 M582 M564 M582 98 0 M564 M582 98 0 M564 M582 14 1 Note 14 1 is below minimum safe time on the safety T if CORRECTION TIME 15 9 set time on 15 9 M564 M582 13 9 A 149 0 Note Announced time is 14 9 set it off if error above is found 7 M564 M582 212 564 1970 582 5 98 0 M728 514 732 190 Note Incorrect fuze FUZE TIME announced VT setup Set up proper fuze if error found 10 M728 514 732 25 0 Note If CORRECTION FUZE TIME TIME 25 0 set up M564 M582 25 0 induced error mounts fuze on projectile MISSION FUZE TO MOUNT NUMBER 2 4 PD 564 582 Note Fuze should be base ejecting M565 M577 Set up proper fuze if error is found 2 1 13 9 3 M565 M577 M564 M582 M564 M582 M564 M582 M564 M582 O 17
68. Civilian drivers are not to disturb or obstruct a column Country SP Flagging See 6 b Minimum lighting and flagging EE red flag must be displayed on vehicles carrying explosives or ammunition dimensions are not required Lighting See 6 b Minimum lighting and flagging In order to warn the following rapid traffic on highways and freeways the last vehicle may display an omnidirectional amber light Other provisions hazard triangle must be displayed at the front of the first vehicle and at the rear of the last vehicle Legal rights None MILITARY UNIT Country UK Flagging In the UK the national regulations do not recognize column flagging of any sort Lighting See 6 b Minimum lighting and flagging Legal rights None FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 Section VIII OCCUPYING THE POSITION 2 36 TYPES OF OCCUPATION This section describes three types of occupation deliberate hasty and emergency Also the key functions performed in laying and readying the battery or platoon for firing and for sustaining operations are addressed Regardless of the type of occupation local security must be established and maintained a A deliberate occupation is one that has been planned The advance party precedes the unit and prepares the position The occupation may be during daylight hours following a daylight preparation at night after a daylight preparation or at night following a nighttime preparation A common error
69. DF Mim pantel panoramic telescope PCC precombat check PCI precombat inspection PCR piece to crest range PD point detonating fuze PDF primary direction of fire PDU power distribution unit PH percussion hammer platoon leader is the tactical commander of the firing platoon platoon sergeant the primary enlisted assistant to the platoon leader He must be prepared to assume all of the platoon leaders duties PLAY PLGR memory aid pantel lays you precise lightweight global positioning system receiver Glossary 9 FM 6 60 MCWP 3 1 6 23 PL platoon leader PLL prescribed load list PLS palletized load system PSG platoon sergeant PMCS preventive maintenance checks and services pneu pneumatic PO Portugal POC platoon operations center POL petroleum oils and lubricants PPS precise positioning system primary position the position from which a battery intends to perform its assigned mission priority target a target that firing units gi on while not engaged in a fire mission It is designated as critical by a maneuver commander on the basis of type location or time sensitivity one battery will be laid on each priority target as with an FPF prox proximity fuze PSG platoon sergeant PSYOPS PTF pieces to fire PTO power takeoff pub publication psychological operations PZ pickup zone Q quick fuze QE quadrant elevation QSTAG quadripartite standardization agreement R right R
70. FIRE COMMANDS 7 1 7 3 TYPES OF FIRE COMMANDS 7 2 7 4 ELEMENTS OF THE FIRE COMMAND 7 2 7 5 WARNING ORDER 7 2 7 6 PIECES TO FOLLOW PIECES TO FIRE AND METHOD OF 7 2 7 7 SPECIAL INSTRUCTIONS RES 7 3 7 8 PROJECTILE voeem dv de AA deus 7 5 7 9 AMMUNITION LOT 7 5 7 10 CHARGE bao 5 Bowls ote a Ru nr ri a I due feq 7 5 7 14 FUZE ue xe eo Qt sole d sto ef os ohare 7 5 7 12 EUZE SETTING e eed de bis n p uo 7 5 7 13 DEFLECTION 22 5 a glk are d GU ED Gr s 7 5 7 14 QUADRANT ELEVATION 7 5 7 15 METHOD OF FIRE FOR EFFECT 7 6 7 16 SPECIAL METHODS OF FIRE 7 6 7 47 CHECK FIRING 22522555556 xem Ron ac RR UN e Ede RN 7 6 7 18 CEASE LOADING oe erp ed Ee ROAD EO Wen 7 6 7 19 END OF 5 7 7 7 20 PLANNED TARGETS 7 7 7 21 REPETITION AND CORRECTION OF FIRE COMMANDS 7 7 7 22 FIRING REPORTS ERE EATER RA Y und 7 7 7
71. Firing Battery 105mm Towed 24 January 1990 6 167 30 MTP Mission Training Plan for the Cannon Firing Battery 3x6 155mm Towed M198 13 November 1991 6 367 20 MTP Mission Training Plan for the Cannon Firing Battery Firing platoon 155mm Self Propelled and Towed 20 December 1990 DA Form 581 Request for Issue and Turn In of Ammunition August 1989 DA Form 2028 Recommended Changes to Publications and Blank Forms February 1974 DA Form 2185 R Artillery Counterfire Information April 1990 DA Form 2404 Equipment Inspection and Maintenance Worksheet April 1979 DA Form 2406 Material Condition Status Report April 1993 DA Form 2407 Maintenance Request August 1988 DA Form 2408 Equipment Log Assembly Records November 1991 DA Form 2408 4 Weapon Record Data January 1979 DA Forin 2408 14 Uncorrected Fault Record October DA Form 4504 Record of Fire October 1978 DA Form 4513 Record of Missions Fired May 1976 DA Form 5212 R Gunner s Reference Card May 1983 atom 5517 R Standard Range Card February 5698 R Weapons Location Data August 5699 R Howitzer Range Card August References 1 FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 DA rom 5969 R Section Chiefs Report October DA Pam 25 30 Consolidated Index of Army Publications and Blank Forms 1 October 1993 DA Pam 710 2 1 Using Unit Supply System Manual Procedures 1 January 1982 DA Pam 738 750 The Army Main
72. Form 4513 with standard data 7 9 FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 7 25 RECORD OF MISSIONS FIRED a The DA Form 4513 or 4513 R is used by each section to record fire commands voice ammunition stoc on hand fired transferred or reup pued and any standardized data After this form has been completed it is used primarily for computing remaining tube life on the DA Form 2408 4 All elements of this form must be recorded neatly and accurately Note A reproducible copy of DA form 4513 R is located at the back of this manual b The form consists of four basic parts They are the administrative data to include standard data AMMUNITION FUZES ON HAND the fire mission data fto include transfer and and AMMUNITION XPENDED Each of these parts should have the following information recorded see Figures 7 4 and 7 5 1 Administrative data n SECTION howitzer bumper number position number in formation b DATE date of firing c PAGE OF each side of the form represents one page of the total pages for that days firing d STND DATA elements of a fire command standardized in order to expedite the delivery of fires ADJ PIECE howitzer designated as adjusting piece voice commands only and number of rounds to be fired e SH type of shell used in adjustment LOT designated lot of and p Lot designators are usually established by the platoon leader or fire direction officer FZ type of fuze used i
73. In some units ammunition assets may be consolidated at battalion 1 14 TACTICAL DUTIES OF KEY PERSONNEL Paragraphs 1 15 through 1 22 present recommended duties of key personnel in a cannon battery of a battery based 1 6 battalion The unit MTOE personnel fills and individual capabilities may require the commander to modify or reassign duties to fit his circumstances and SOPs Note Key personnel in a US Marine Corps 05 battery have the same duties and responsibilities except where noted 1 15 BATTERY COMMANDER The battery commander is responsible for all aspects of the operations of his battery He must plan and train for continuous operations in an intense combat environment He locates where he can best command the battery ones the factors of METT T and the level of unit training His responsibilities may include the following Supervise and standardize the operations of the battery b Reconnoiter and select battery positions Chapter 2 Supervise the FDC when necessary d Plan specific actions to enhance the survivability of the battery Chapter 3 e Plan for survey control and when necessary perform hasty survey Chapter 5 f Plan unit marches and movements Chapter 2 M lan the basic load mix and the resupply actions for the attery h Plan logistics for the battery supply mess and maintenance Chapter 12 i Establish and maintain communications and electronics security
74. Line from the azimuth ofthe OL Set the remainder OA on the upper motion With the lower motion sight on the EOL With the upper motion sight on Note You must use the azimuth of the OL and the azimuth of fire Do this second Do this third Do this last No Survey is Available SAD Subtract the Math step Azimuth of fire Subtract the Do this first from the azimuth of fire Declination from the constant declination constant DC Set the remainder instrument reading on the upper motion With the lower motion center the magnetic needle Do this second Note You must use the declination constant and the azimuth of fire Do this third With the upper motion sight on the pantel of the weapon Table 4 3 Laying with the M2 compass SEQUENCE MEMORY AID STEPS Do this first SAM Subtract the Math step Azimuth of fire Subtract the from the azimuth of fire Measured from the azimuth azimuth measured to the deflection to the weapon pantel Do this second weapon The weapon that was laid by the M2 compass will lay the rest of the unit reciprocally Note You must use the azimuth to the weapon measured with the compass and the azimuth of fire Table 4 4 Laying by the aiming point deflection method Do this first AP BAF azimuth Subtract the back to the Aiming azimuth of fire Point minus the from the
75. MAXIMUM POSSIBLE STANDARDS PENALTY POINTS CUT The announced lead and range or elevation are set 6 for any incorrect lead or range or elevation off All bubbles are centered when the howitzer is fired 2 for each bubble not level 4 The time from the last digit of range or elevation until 1 for each second over 10 the howitzer is fired is 20 seconds or less The section chief issues correct and complete fire 1 for each incorrect or omitted fire command or for commands within 20 seconds of the receipt of each each command that takes over 20 seconds to issue card and section members announce correct commands G 12 FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 APPENDIX H UNIT DEFENSE CHECKLIST Note This sample checklist will help the leaders go through a mental review of existing battery or platoon defensive preparations H 1 ENTRANCE POINT The entrance point serves as a means to control traffic flow into and out of the firing position It does not necessarily serve the same fiction as an LP and or OP a Is the sentry properly posted and given guard orders and special instructions b Does the sentry know the current challenge and password c Does the entrance point have communications with the BOC or POC d Does the entrance point restrict movement into and out of the battery area e Who will pick up the sentry in an emergency displacement H 2 PASSIVE DEFENSIVE TECHNIQUES Are passive measures
76. Nonadjustin on prepare two rounds of HE and follow commands Adjustment continues as in the first example STND DATA ADJ PIECE PIECES FOLLOW PIECES FIRE PLT ADJ mE _ _ 6 50 3 1 6 23 2 When fire for effect is entered the commands are PLATOON 2 ROUNDS DEFLECTION 2950 QUADRANT 210 3 The entire platoon fires two rounds of shell HE at the announced deflection and quadrant END OF MISSION is commanded as appropriate d Standard FFE mission Elements designated as standard in this example are Number 3 one round shell HE lot XY and fuze quick FIRE MISSION PLATOON 3 ROUNDS CHARGE 4 DEFLECTION 3111 QUADRANT 400 Each weapon in the platoon fires three rounds shell HE lot XY fuze quick with the announced charge and at the announced deflection and quadrant END OF MISSION is commanded as appropriate and ammunition is updated see Figure 7 5 Lr ne agency is US Amy training and Doctrine C mmand Today ci agii UEM uc redis SP INSTR METHOD MOF FFE emm I He lze 21 25 AMMUNITION EXPENDED tr ofe e ofestzsjto 4 ls Le Libera bes Lp EP op pe ols e n so asfro 14 a 5 Rozuppiioa Secon grenier lelei lal lel lel LL 444 pe FEE eee Figure 7 5 Use of DA
77. OPERATIONS ON URBANIZED TERRAIN F 2 DESERT F 2 AMPHIBIOUS ASSAULT F 3 AIR ASSAULT OPERATIONS F 3 AISTIELER YSROAIDS d RS Eee RR Oe go de ae dora F 5 OPERATIONS OTHER THAN WAR OOTW F 6 FIRE BASE HARDENED ARTILLERY POSITION 5 F 7 EMERGENCY OCCUPATION PROCEDURES WITH BCS F 11 FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 APPENDIX G CANNON SECTION EVALUATION AND TRAINING Gale SCORE Lr DP G 1 Gu PURPOSE Oo Roe M ation isa ub geo deed d end G 1 G 3 CONDUCT OF THE EVALUATION G 1 G 4 EVALUATION G 1 9 9 SCORING und lode So nai o t OP otio dI e ROTE EUER ett G 1 G6 PREPARATION euo P S PR Fed Re LE Oe er DO den G 1 G 7 G 2 G 8 ORGANIZATION AND 5 6 2 G 9 PHASE ORIENTATION AND ORGANIZATION G 4 G 10 PHASE PREPARATION FOR FIRING OPERATIONS G 6 G 11 PHASE Ill DELIBERATE G 8 G 12 PHASE IV FIRE MISSIONS G 10 G 13 PHASE V CRITIQUE 6
78. S should precede any special corrections that apply in the fire command This command prevents misunderstanding and unnecessary repetition of missed special corrections If SPECIAL CORRECTIONS is announced alone it alerts the sections that separate data will be sent to one or more sections Unit SOP and degree or training dictate how this should be implemented 2 SPECIAL CORRECTION NUMBER so and so LEFT or RIGHT so many mils may be announced These corrections are appia by the specified piece to the announced deflection and remain in effect until changed within a fire mission or until the command END OF MISSION is given This command may be given administratively apart from fire commands or it may be announced in fhe special instructions element of a fire command These corrections are in addition to any corrections currently on the gunner s aid 3 SPECIAL CORRECTION ON NUMBER so and so OPEN or CLOSE so many mils may be announced Each piece other than the piece specified applies correction to the announced deflection on the gunner s aid Each section chief determines his correction by multiplying the number of mils announced by the number of pieces his piece is removed from the piece announced For example the command ON NUMBER 3 CLOSE 4 is given Number 3 applies no correction Number 1 applies left 8 Number 2 applies left 4 Number 4 applies right 4 All guns fire the announced deflection after applying their c
79. See Appendix D for further discussion of aiming points 4 17 FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 EXAMPLE Laying by Aiming Point Deflection Method The XO receives an emergency fire mission while en route to a new position and signals the convoy The emergency data base is input into a BUCS and the initial firing data are determined As the firing element the Prud the XO notices that there is a water tower located about 4 km to the left flank of the position Using his map he scales an azimuth to the water tower The XO pulls into position and aligns his vehicle in the general direction of the azimuth of fire While the howitzers are moving int position the XO determines the deflection to e uses the memory aid AP BAF 0 announce Azimuth of Fire 3200 Back azimuth of fire Azimuth to the aiming point Minus back azimuth of fire Deflection to DAP After all howitzers are in position and the deflection has been determined the XO moves to the front of the and announces BATTERY ATMING POINT WATER TOWER LEFT FLANK DEFLECTION 1575 Each gunner performs the two step deflection method is up a line of VN to the DAP and announces NUMBER so and so AIMING POINT IDENTIFIED DEFLECTION 1575 When all sections have reported the XO commands THE BATTERY IS LAID The XO announces fire commands to the adjusting piece to fire the initial round in the mission The FDC announces the remaining commands by voice 4 23
80. TRPs been established and marked Day and night 9 Have avenues of approach been identified 10 Have Killer Junior targets been identified data computed and disseminated d Has the battery commander or platoon leader planned indirect fires in support of his defensive plan e Has the challenge and password been issued to all personnel f Have friendly unit locations been identified and disseminated to avoid fratricide g Does everyone know the threat H 8 NUCLEAR BIOLOGICAL AND CHEMICAL a Are chemical agent detectors situated upwind of the battery position FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 b Are detectors placed far enough from the unit to provide adequate warning c Have detectors been relocated as wind direction changed d Have detector alarms been tested e Have detector alarms been located to afford security and control f Has a level been established g Do sections have complete chemical protective overgarments on hand Filter replacements M258A1 kits M256 kits Chemical agent monitor CAM h Does the battery have survey and monitoring teams Have the teams been rehearsed i Are the M256 detection kits being used by trained teams Is M8 or M9 paper being used by individual soldiers j Are the AN PDR 27 IM 174 and IM 93 radiac meters on hand Do they work k Is the unit pepe to conduct personal decontamination Have personnel been designated and trained 1 Is the
81. The surface conditions of the route and position cannot be determined For example the pou may not support an MI09A3 A6 howitzer or an M198 howitzer and its prime mover 2 If available aerial photographs should be used to supplement maps They are usually more recent show more detail and present a clear picture of the current condition of the terrain to be crossed 3 In addition to aerial photographs the battery commander can ask his battalion S2 or higher headquarters intelligence section for products from the terra base computer program concerning his subsequent position areas and routes b Air Reconnaissance If time and resources are available information gained from an air reconnaissance may be very beneficial in the selection of routes to be used and areas fo be occupied Although a fast method true surface conditions may not be distinguishable or may appear distorted The battery commander must be careful that his flight plan does not compromise the route or the new position area Normally this method will not be available to the battery commander c Ground Reconnaissance best method of reconnaissance is the ground reconnaissance The suitability of routes can be physically examined The true condition of the terrain is especially critical if the surface has been affected by enemy action NBC attack and or weather conditions The ground reconnaissance is the slowest method 2 7 PLANNING THE RECONNAISSANCE
82. XY CH3 FZ QUICK 1 0 DF3211 QE 531 SUBSEQUENT COMMANDS Use a different charge and fuze delay Evaluation Checklist Cards 1 and 2 Was ammunition sufficiently protected as dictated by the tactical situation Was ammunition prepared in accordance with fire commands Were PD fuzed projectile propellant prepared as announced NO G Were delay fuzed projectile and propellant prepared as announced Was propellant cut to announced charge SUBSEQUENT COMMANDS Use different charge fuze VT and fuze time with appropriate settings Evaluation Checklist Cards 3 an Was ammunition sufficiently protected as dictated by the tactical situation Was ammunition repared in accordance with fire comands Were VT fuzed projectile and prepared and was time set to an accuracy of 0 seconds Were MTSQ fuzed projectile and Pro prepared and was time set an accuracy of 0 1 Was propellant cut to announced charge Scoring For each GO rating 10 points will be awarded for a maximum of 100 points For each NO GO rating 0 points will awarded TASK 11 Planned priority targets third fire mission Conditions FDC has announced the firing data for planned targets FDC has designated a priority target from the planned target list FDC announces the section and target number to be fired Evaluation Checklist noso Has the section prepared a section data card for planned targets to in
83. a Locate the stars 1 Locate Polaris by using the procedures in paragraphs or 5 4b paragrap 2 To locate Delta Ursa Minoris and 43H Cephei the instrument operator may have to reduce the light intensity in the telescope The three T stars appearing in his field of view will be Polaris 43H Cephei and Delta Ursa Minoris When Polaris is used as the vertex the angle formed by Delta Ursa Minoris and 43H Cephei is about 1 800 mils Figure 5 4 This relationship remains the same and rotates counterclockwise at about 150 each hour LIMIT FIELD DELTA URSAE MINORIS 43H CEPHEI Figure 5 4 Polaris 2 with stars in tangent 5 10 b Establish direction 1 Determine the grid convergence the angle between true north and grid north in mils from the map sheet for the area of operation or from a survey section esie 55 page 5 10 Record this information 2 Set up and level the aiming circle over the selected point 3 Using the azimuth micrometer knob upper motion set the grid convergence on the azimuth scale Figure 5 5 4 Using the elevation micrometer knob set the predetermined elevation to Polaris paragraph 5 4b on the elevation scale 5 Using the orienting knob lower motion sight on Polaris Ensure that the grid convergence remains correctly set on the azimuth scales 6 When Polaris is in the field of view use the elevation knob and lower motion to place the stars on their respe
84. and inspection of range cards h Coordinate with adjacent units for areas of responsibility mutual support communications patrol schedules defensive targets sectors of fire call signs and requencies and any other matters required to integrate the two units defensive plans This will reduce fratricide i Rehearse battle drills for enemy inside the perimeter snipers air attack mounted mechanized attack and so on j Maximize the use of night vision equipment Leaders must ensure everyone understands the priorities of work and that resources are allocated to complete high priority tasks first F 11 EMERGENCY OCCUPATION PROCEDURES WITH BCS a The BC reconnoiters the route to the new position selects emergency occupation positions determines map spot locations and transmits these locations to the platoon leaders b The BCS operator enters these locations in BCS PIECES format in order of 06 occupation when platoon displaces As the platoon passes a predetermined position that position can be deleted c When the platoon march orders the BCS operator erases the X in READY and places an entry in the OUTTIL field He then transmits the AFU UPDATE format to battalion tactical fire direction computer IFSAS This should allow the battery to complete its displacement without receiving a call for fire Regardless the BCS operator should be to receive a fire mission He does this by enterin 200 in t
85. and Organization TASK 1 Written test 1 Section member scores Section Chief 25 correct Gunner 25 correct Ammo Team Chief 25 correct Assistant Gunner correct No 1 85 correct No 2 5 correct No 3 4 25 correct 5 correct Add other personnel as required Driver Howitzer 25 correct Driver Ammo Carrier 25 correct Section points 25 correct 3 Section 50 average x 2 _ points maximum Total Phase I points maximum 50 Phase II Preparation for Firing Operations TASK 2 Preparation for deliberate occupation of a prepared position 9 minus NO GOs x 8 points __ points maximum 72 TASK 3 Disassembly of breech mechanism 1 NO GO awarded Yes 0 points 2 If all GOs awarded Time __ points maximum TASK 4 Assembly of breech mechanism 1 NO GO awarded Yes 0 points 2 If all GOs awarded Time __ points maximum 49 TASK 5 Performance of micrometer test on the gunners quadrant 1 NO GO awarded Yes 0 points No 2 Cannoneer No 3 Cannoneer No 4 Cannoneer Driver Howitzer Driver Ammo Carrier 2 If all GOs awarded Time points maximum 40 TASK 6 Performance of the end for end test 1 NO GOs awarded Yes 0 points 2 If all GOs awarded Time points maximum 40 TotalPhasell points maximum 250 Phase III Deliberate Occupation Preparation of positi
86. and QSTAG 520 Edition 1 Operation Orders Tables and Graphs for Road Movement STANAG 2047 Edition 6 and QSTAG 183 Edition 3 Emergency Alarms of Hazard or Attack NBC and Air Attack Only STANAG 2113 Edition 5 Denial of A Unit s Military Equipment and Supplies to an Enemy STANAG 2154 Edition 5 and QSTAG 539 Edition 1 Regulations for Military Motor Vehicle Movement by Road As used throughout this publication the words howitzer gun cannon weapon and piece are synonymous The proponent of this publication is HQ TRADOC Send comments and recommendations on DA Form 2028 Recommended Changes to Publications and Blank Forms directly to Commandant US Army Field Artillery School ATTN ATSF DD Fort Sill Oklahoma 73503 5600 Unless this publication states otherwise masculine nouns and pronouns do not refer exclusively to men xiv FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 FIELD MANUAL HEADQUARTERS No 6 50 DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY MARINE CORPS WARFIGHTING PUBLICATION UNITED STATES MARINE CORPS No 3 1 6 23 Washington DC 23 December 1996 Tactics Techniques and Procedures for THE FIELD ARTILLERY CANNON BATTERY Table of Contents HE Y M PAGE No erac ede prctio et det ee Rabani ie oe oR xiv CHAPTER 1 MISSION ORGANIZATION AND KEY PERSONNEL Section MISSI
87. and other key leaders collocated with a platoon Conduct ground Reconnoiter alternate and or supple reconnaissance mentary positions First Sergeant Assist BC on reconnaissance Plan battery defense Coordinate defense efforts of all battery elements Organize trains position and select support vehicle positions Direct security and defense of battery Brief platoon sergeants on defense plan and platoon respon sibilities in the lan Supervise the security sweep Lay the Make plan for occupation howitzers Designate howitzer FDC aiming circle Begin to prepare and TM 184 locations the platoon Set up and orient the aiming circle leader s report Determine initial deflection distance and vertical angle to guns Develop track plan Brief guides on occupation plan Supervise preparation of position Help in security sweep Lay wire from aiming circle to TM 184 Gunnery Sergeant Assemble the platoon advance party Brief the advance party Supervise security Gunnery Sergeant s Driver Help in radio communications during security sweep Guide platoon from release and help set up OE 254 point RP if Monitor NBC detection equipment necessary Position M8A1 chemical agent detector Guide vehicles upwind of selected position if advance into service area party brings M8A1 forward Mo
88. as personnel become available e Other considerations for night occupations areas follow 1 Light discipline must be Proper pon for a night occupation will minimize the need or lights Vehicle blackout drive and blackout marker lights should be turned off as soon as the ground guide has begun to lead the vehicle into During the laying process only the an circle AC and the weapon being laid should have any night lights on 2 Noise discipline is most important since noise can be heard at much greater distances at night 3 The time for occupation is increased 4 Each vehicle guide should know where his vehicle is in the order of march so the platoon can move smoothly into position without halting the column 5 Filtered flashlights are used to lead the vehicles CAUTION Each driver must stop his vehicle whenever he cannot see the light from the guide s flashlight 6 Vehicles will not move within the position without a guide 2 38 HASTY OCCUPATION In a hasty occupation day or night the platoon requires more time to occupy This is because some tasks were not accomplished due to the limited time available This may result in the following e Delay in getting the vehicles off the route of march e Laying by voice e Increased ae time since pun guides might not have aligned the stakes on the azimuth of fire or obtained initial deflections e Increased FDC pen time because not all
89. azimuth Back Azimuth of to the aiming point Fire Using the proper commands announce the resulting Do this second Using the proper commands announce the resulting deflection to the unit Note You must use the azimuth to the DAP and the azimuth of fire FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 Table 4 5 Laying by the howitzer back lay method SEQUENCE MEMORY AID STEPS N Do this second a U Men Note Using the M2 compass align engineer tape with a wooden stake at one end and a nose plug at the other on the azimuth of fire and position the adjusting piece parallel to the tape Set up the aiming circle where it can be seen by all howitzers and level it After the adjusting piece fires the first round command the gunner to refer to the aiming circle With the upper motion place the referred deflection on the aiming circle With the lower motion sight on the pantel of the adjusting piece With the upper motion lay the rest of the unit 4 23 FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 Section VI MEASURING AND REPORTING DATA 4 28 ACCURACY a The accuracy of lay is directly related to the method used to orient the howitzers on the azimuth of fire and the alignment of the fire control equipment b Measuring and reporting data provides us with a method of correction for errors in the lay The FDC
90. azimuth of fire before he uses the above d The platoon leader should walk the gun line and visually check the tubes to ensure they are parallel An M2 compass tod also be used to ensure the tubes are on the azimuth of fire 4 26 MEASURING VERTICAL ANGLES a Normally vertical angles VAs from the M2A2 aiming circle to the howitzers are measured during advance party operations The VA and distance from the orienting station to each howitzer are required by FDC to determine piece locations in BCS or LCU The aiming circle can also be used to determine sight to crest at each howitzer during advance party operations b The VA to a point is measured from the horizontal plane passing through the horizontal axis of the instrument M2A2 aiming circle It is expressed as plus or minus depending on whether the point is above plus or below minus the horizontal plane It is measured to the height of instrument which is about chest high on the average individual at the gun position The steps for measuring a VA are as follows Using the circular en vial ensure the aiming circle is properly set up and leveled 2 Using the elevation knob center the upper tubular leveling vial This yields a correction factor to be applied to all measured vertical angles 3 Read and record the corrections from the elevation scale If black numbers are used the correction factor is plus if red numbers are used the correction factor is minus
91. b The battery displaces from the position and occupies the PZ The minimum time necessary is allowed to rig equipment before the aircraft arrive 4 Pickup zone organization a ud should be placed so that after the first loads are lifted following loads are lifted sequentially either left to right or front to rear along the line of flight b Sections must provide security of the PZ while their equipment is being ed The PZ security must be coordinated and areas of responsibility designated 5 Personnel responsibilities in the pickup zone a The battery XO or platoon leader is the officer in charge of the pickup zone b Normally the advance party for the LZ is the same party that sets up the PZ c The PZ party consists of the hookup team The composition of the party depends on the number of aircraft available for the lift To more easily move the party to the LZ the last lift should bean internal load d All remaining section members makeup the rigging party and main element They rig their equipment and provide security as required 6 Landing zone organization The LZ must be secured upon arrival of the advance party The battery commander selects landing positions on the basis of his reconnaissance and lift sequence If simultaneous loads are to be delivered to the LZ the LZ is to be occupied as a tiring position and the LZ size will not accommodate all aircraft the commander may have to stagger th
92. below a Reticle Laying The gunner maintains lead by placin the vertical hairline the proper number of mils ahead of the point of aim on the target Figure 8 1 b Central Laying The gunner sets the lead in mils on the azimuth micrometer scale of the pantel and maintains the vertical hairline of the reticle on the center of the target irure 8 2 There is a modification on the knob of the M100 series pantel called a click It permits the gunner to set off lead in 5 mil increments by sound or feel without removing his eye from the sight 80 70 60 50 40 30 20 10 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 Figure 8 1 Gunner s sight picture reticle laying lead R20 8 4 COMMANDS FOR DIRECT FIRE The platoon leader XO or BC will direct the engagement of targets by certain sections using verbal commands Normally individual section commands for direct fire are iven by the howitzer section chief The commands include e following e A waming order TARGET so and so e General direction to the target LEFT FRONT 8 2 e Lead in mils how to determine lead is explained in the weapon manual LEAD RIGHT 5 e Range to target RANGE 800 e Method of fire FIRE AT WILL b The shell fuze and charge to be fired should be standardized to save time If a shell fuze combination other than the standard is desired the command SHELL so and so with time if applicable is given after the direction to target c The howitzer sec
93. by using BUCS or BCS Establish direction by using Polaris Kochab or Polaris methods Verify safety and position data Place howitzer in order using TLABSPAP Conduct hot and cold tube misfire procedures Compute platoon leader XO s minimum QE 13 Identify proper shell fuze combinations and set time with proper fuze setter Reciprocally lay another howitzer O 13 FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 Table O 3 Platoon leaders and fire direction officers tasks 1 Complete all tasks listed in Table O 2 Place safety limits on the howitzer 3 Transmit voice fire commands to the howitzer section Construct a safety box on the firing chart or map Table O 4 Platoon sergeant and gunnery sergeant tasks 1 Complete all tasks listed in Table O 2 except for tasks 6 9 and 12 2 Lay the platoon using the howitzer backlay method Place safety limits on the howitzer 4 Conduct the end for end test and the micrometer test Table O 5 Howitzer section chief tasks TASK Place the howitzer in order by using the memory aid TLABSPAP 2 Conduct hot and cold misfire procedures Place safety limits on the howitzer Reciprocally lay another howitzer Identify proper shell fuze combinations and set times with the proper fuze setters 6 Conduct end for end test and micrometer test T Conduct dry fire missions with the entire section paragraph c below Table O 6 Chief computer and or fire dir
94. c Communications Data must be passed quickly and efficiently The small unit transceiver if effective tool Wire can be used if the battery internal wire aim is designed for very rapid emplacement In the absence of these systems or it some elements are not operational all key personnel must have relays and or runners in position to data as they become available For example as each nonadjusting howitzer is emplaced a relay should move immediately to the aiming circle to get his deflection Another runner should get firing data from the FDC d Aiming Points Aiming points will be established in the following priorities Distant aiming point DAP Collimator 2 34 e Aiming posts e Security In M109A3 5 units for security the M992 should automatically disperse in a semicircle from the right front around the rear of the position to the left front They should be well outside the gun line and not be a factor in line of sight between the aiming circle and the howitzer In towed weapon units where ammunition is carried separately the prime mover should move to the rear as soon as possible to reduce line of sight problems and congestion Administrative vehicles and their occupants should move into security positions f Position Improvement Upon completion of the mission the tactical situation dictates whether the unit moves on or continues position improvement The unit should make the five requirements for
95. close hazard to the crew Also the fuzes except for the M577 and the M582 require about 400 meters to arm 2 0 seconds The M577 and M582 fuzes when set for a time of less than 4 seconds will allow the fuze rotor to release almost This fully arms the fuze which enables the fuze to explode at the set time Any time setting of less than 2 seconds is a danger to the crew and should not be fired unless firing Killer Junior 2 155 mm Direct fire tables are not available in current firing tables therefore battery personnel must compute the data The data are produced for quadrant elevation fuze setting and 10 R factor 10 divided by rane in thousands for the minimum authorized charges The quadrant elevation when used with the listed fuze setting will produce an airburst of 10 meters above and before the listed range Compute data as discussed below EY WARNING Firing a fuze setting less than what corresponds to a range of 750 meters for 155 mm is restricted to combat emergency conditione only Firing a fuze setting less than this value results in a danger close hazard to the crew Refer to AR 385 63 Chapter 11 Table 11 1 Also the fuzes require about 400 meters to arm 2 0 seconds The M577 and M582 fuzes when set for a time of less than 4 seconds will allow the fuze rotor to release almost immediately This fully arms the fuze which enables the fuze to e at the set time setting of less than 2
96. condition When breakdowns do occur equipment must be repaired as far forward as possible and by the lowest echelon possible Battle damage assessment and repair BDAR 15 an expeditious method of getting battle damaged equipment major end items operationally capable It may involve bypassing standard repair procedures cannibalizing or repairing components using field expedient methods to get the equipment up as quickly as possible BDAR rocedures shall be used only in combat at the direction of he commander Equipment repaired by BDAR means shall be repaired by standard maintenance procedures as soon as ractical after the mission is completed Operators should e familiar with BDAR technical manuals for their specific equipment They provide repair procedures and guidelines for battlefield repairs When equipment must be moved it is moved only as far as necessary for repair The battery must recover extensively damaged equipment to the nearest maintenance collection point or request assistance from battalion Further evacuation beyond the maintenance collection point is the responsibility of the DS maintenance unit operating the point b Each FA cannon battalion is authorized an FA maintenance support team from the nondivisional intermediate DS maintenance company Equipment with faults not authorized for unit repair is repaired or replaced by the FA maintenance support team This team is organized with limited capability but it can hel
97. containers must be filled d Class V Ammunition Normally ammunition is constantly pushed to the battery by the consolidated assets of the battalion ammunition section and the organic ammunition resupply vehicles in each battery A LOGPAC could occur simultaneously with a normal Class V push to the tiring batteries and they could use them to resupply cross level small arms The three methods of Class V resupply are discussed below 1 Push to a flat rack transfer point FRTP double loop method The battalion ammunition section vehicles ick up the ammunition from the ammunition transfer point in the BSA They take it to a battalion level flat rack transfer point The ALOC combat trains is a good initial choice for the location of the FRTP At the FRTP the ammunition section chiefs with guidance from the BAO and the battalion ammo sergeant configure flat racks as outlined by the 53 They then drop the flat racks and wait for the empty flat racks from the battery it is habitually associated with The firing uu an empty fl t rack or a flat rack with residue He drops the flat rack and picks up his designated flat rack in a combat configured load CCL configuration This one for one exchange of flat racks must occur to maintain the flow of ammunition resupply In addition this helps the ammunition section chiefs maintain control of their assets and this assists the BAO and battalion ammo sergeant with operations The firi
98. data with the platoon leader j Maintain muzzle velocity MV information for all owitzers 1 10 PLATOON SERGEANT The platoon sergeant PSG is the primary enlisted assistant to the platoon leader and must be prepared to assume all of the platoon leader s duties His responsibilities may include the following a Supervise the firing platoon and maintain firing capability b Supervise occupation of the position c Supervise the overall maintenance of the firing platoon d Develop and execute the platoon defense plan Chapter 3 e Provide the 15 with the platoon defense plan for integration into the overall battery defense scheme f Ensure that each chief of section knows the route to both alternate and supplementary positions f Verify the completion of DA Form 2408 4 Weapon ecord Data h Ensure ammunition is properly handled and protected Ensure safety aids are used and safety procedures are ollowed 1 11 GUNNERY SERGEANT The gunnery sergeant GSG supervises and executes platoon advance party operations Chapter 2 He must be prepared to assume the duties of the platoon sergeant His responsibilities may include the following a Lay the platoon b Perform hasty survey as required Initiate the development of the platoon defense plan d Assist in the sustainment of 24 hour operations e Ensure there is an initial fire direction capability with the advance party f Compute executive
99. directional antennas will improve survivability b Other targeting means are radars sound and visual target detection teams Radars can detect firing weapons within 100 meters or less Higher trajectories produce more accurate results Seismic and sound ranging can produce targets with a um location accuracy of 1 percent of range up to 10 km error of 100 meters However their accuracy is diminished by other battle noise and they are affected by weather and the soil Unaided visual observations depend on line of sight and their accuracy varies Visual sound and radar collectors are commonly organic to the front line units and immediate targeting can be expected About 10 percent of enemy detection of friendly artillery is by RDF sound and flash provide about 20 percent and radar and or visual assets provide the remaining 70 percent 2 maen Intelligence This effort is normally coordinated cued by other sensors It consists of photographic electro optical agay thermal detection radar location and laser imagery The product from these sensors may require laboratory processing Data may have to be transcribed to a map sheet during the analysis The of IMINT requires more than 2 hours Target ocation errors from IMINT will be no more than 100 meters 3 Human Intelligence Long range patrols spies parans and enemy pon of war EPWs are the UMINT collectors Although HUMINT relies primaril on visual observation the pec
100. display window The FFE LOT 0 key is pressed to show the FFE lot data or to enter the section number in the display window D The FFE RDS key is pressed to show the number of FFE rounds in the display window 16 The FFE FZ key is pressed to show the FFE fuze data in the display window 17 The READY key is pressed to lock in the section number and is pese When the piece is ready The ready message is sent to the BCS 18 The SHOT RC key is pressed once after the first round is fired It causes SHOT to show in the display window and sends the SHOT message to the BCS It i pressed again when the last round is fired This causes RC rounds com d to show in the display window and sends the ROUNDS COMPLETE message to the BCS Note In one round FFE missions and during the adjustment pae the section chief must ensure that he presses the SHOT RC key twice after firing or he may not receive data for the next adjustment mission 19 The SELF TEST key is pressed to start the GDU self diagnostic test CYCLE key is pressed to acknowledge to the FDC the receipt of a message It silences the alarm and causes the gun number and mission number or updated firing data to show in the display window The SCA window oes blank 15 seconds after the last key is pressed Pressing e CYCLE key causes the display to reappear L 3 CASE ASSEMBLY a The case assembly Figure L 3 provides circuits for data reception and tran
101. fire bases should be collocated F 7 FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 with maneuver elements and their defenses should be integrated into the overall maneuver defense plan e Gun positions the POC and or FDC and the batter CP must be hardened as much as possible Gun pits an fighting positions are prepared and constantly improved All personnel and ammunition are provided with at least 18 inches of overhead cover to protect them from incomin indirect fire Preparing pits clearing fields of tire an establishing wire and other obstacles may well be beyond the capabilities of the battery If so engineer must be requested and the FSCOORD must coordinate with the maneuver brigade commander for priority of engineer support A priority of work must be established for the engineer assets For example first dig in FDC then howitzers then fighting positions then field expedient devices to assist in filling sandbags Field Artillery units will in any case begin hardening the position with whatever means available immediately after establishing firing capability and continue until ordered to move Asa minimum the battery must carry basic Class IV materials sandbags concertina pickets 4 x 4s plywood and use these and other readily available materials powder canisters ammunition boxes and so forth to secure and harden itself Internal wire lines should be buried to a depth of at least 12 inches and redundant lines should be lay
102. for each section 2 20 e Carrying non TOE property in the section responsible for using it e Listing the personnel and equipment to be carried in each vehicle Equipment should be located to facilitate identification under blackout conditions e Practice loadings to test the validity of the load plan e Establishing a list of items that must be removed from the vehicle and carried forward if the vehicle becomes disabled e Using load plans Operator manuals and Appendix E of this publication present examples e Indicating that howitzers and ammunition vehicles use separate camouflage nets 2 28 MOVEMENT PREPARATIONS When the command PREPARE TO MARCH ORDER 5 piven everything possible will be done to quickly displace e unit However these actions must not hamper the ability to continue to deliver tire Actions may include but are not limited to the following a Stow section equipment Note The collimator and any item forward of the howitzers remains in ce until receipt of the final command MARCH ORDER b Upload all ammunition Transload ammunition from the ammunition vehicle to the howitzer to allow maximum ammunition availability at the next position c Stow camouflage nets us all service elements mess maintenance and so orth e Ensure that security is continuous 2 29 ORGANIZATION OF THE COLUMN The organization of the battery or platoon column varies according to t
103. from AM 2 TFTs na firing tables GFTs and graphical site tables e Angle 1 Records the angle of site reported by the chief of section H6 mils e Angle 2 Determines the vertical clearance in mils He uses the GST to divide the vertical clearance in meters 5 meters by the PCR in thousands 1 1 This value read under the M gage point 15 4 6 and is expressed to the next higher whole mil 5 mils Note The value for angle 2 can also be extracted from the rapid fire tables Appendix K e Angle 3 Determines comp site multiplying the comp site factor corresponding the piece to crest range or the next higher listed range in the TFT Table G if that range is not listed the sum of angles 1 and 2 Angle 1 Angle 2 21 The comp site factor corresponding to 1 500 meters range 1100 is not listed in Table G is 0 010 erefore 21 x 0 010 0 210 Once a value for comp site has been determined it must be expressed to the next higher whole mul m Angle 4 Determines elevation for the PCR TFT Table column 2 If this value is nota whole number it is expressed to the next higher whole mil 74 1 expressed to 75 75 mils Angle 5 Determines the value of 2 forks TFT F column 6 at PCR 2 x 2 mils Total Add angles 1 5 to determine the platoon leader s minimum quadrant elevation 16 5 1 75 4 101 mils QE charge 3 GB Therefore the min QE for Gun 1 Chg 3GB is 101 mils The platoon lea
104. fuze Note When used against personnel shell HE with impact fuze delay action is fired at a point 10 to 30 meters in front of the target to achieve the best effects 8 2 DIRECT FIRE SIGHTING METHODS The three primary methods of sighting used in direct fire are as follows a Two Man Two Sight This method is best for all weapons except the 105 mm howitzer M119 The gunner establishes lead with the pantel and the AG establishes elevation with the direct fire telescope This is the fastest and most accurate method of Sprin It permits the AG to check the direction of lead The reticle in the direct fire telescope must be level A canted reticle in the direct fire telescope will prevent satisfactory direct fire on movin targets because an unacceptable range error is introduce when lead is changed b Two Man One Sight The gunner establishes lead with the pantel and the assistant gunner sets elevation on the elevation quadrant at the command of the chief of section is method is not effective when the target is moving on other than flat terrain 8 1 FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 c One Man One Sight This method is least desirable and should not be used unless absolutely necessary The gunner lays for lead and elevation with the reticle of the pantel This method should not be used if the target is moving or on a steep slope 8 3 DIRECT FIRE LAYING METHODS The two methods laying for direct fire are discussed
105. local commander 3 24 BOMBING SHELLING ROCKETING MORTARING AND LOCATION REPORTS The BC must ensure that his unit SOPs provide guidance concerning bombing shelling o kine mortaring and location reports including the format to be used when these reports must also be included Guidance or the commander is provided in FM 6 121 in Speo J of this manual and in STANAG 2934 Chapter 13 3 23 FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 EXTRACT FROM STANAG 2934 Edition 1 Chapter 13 Annex A FORMAT FOR BOMBING SHELLING ROCKETING MORTARING AND LOCATION REPORTS SECTION I SHELREP indicate which A UNIT OF ORIGIN Use current call sign address group or code name B POSITION OF OBSERVER Grid reference preferred encoded if this discloses the location of a headquarters or important observation post C DIRECTION FLASH SOUND OR GROOVB AND ANGLE OF FALL DESCENT omit for aircraft Grid bearing of flash sound or groove of shell state which in mils unless otherwise specified The angle of fall or descent may be determined by placing a stickhod in the fuze tunnel and measuring in mils unless otherwise specified the angle formed by the stick rod in relation to the horizontal plane D TIME FROM E TIME TO F AREA BOMBED SHELLED ROCKETED OR MORTARED 1 Location to be sent as a Grid reference clear reference is to be used OR b Grid bearing to impa
106. meters from the sight of the weapon When the collimator is emplaced 3 numbers 5 0 5 and 11 graduations will be visible in the reticle If possible place the collimator under cover to the left front or left rear of the weapon See Figure 4 17 for the proper sight picture c When aiming posts are used the far aiming post should be placed 100 meters from the howitzer and the near aiming post should be placed 50 meters from the howitzer If the Situation or terrain limits placing the far aiming post 100 meters from the howitzer place it out as far as possible and place the near aiming ps halfway between the howitzer and the far aiming post d As soon as the platoon is laid and the aiming point s is are emplaced the platoon leader should have the gunners of all pieces refer to a distant aiming point if one is available A DAP must be at least 1 500 meters away This DAP can be used as the primary aiming point if something happens to the collimator or aiming posts e Close in aiming points are moveable established by battery personnel and can be seen at night The DAP has the advantage of being readily available upon occupation of a firing position f During an emergency occupation it is recommended that a distant aiming point be selected If a DAP is not available then several other options can be used Two examples are as follows e Set up the collimator e Set up an aiming post at a point halfway between the aiming ci
107. of or presence of chemical or biological agents or VISUAL WARNING SIGN 2b 1 Black Preferably triangular in shape AUDIBLE ALARM SIGNAL 2c 1 Interrupted warbling sound on a siren radiological hazards 2 Donning respirators and taking protective action followed by such hand Signals as may be prescribed in local instructions See Notes 1 2 and 3 2 Succession of short signals on vehicle or other horns by beating metal or other objects in a ratio of 1 1 approximately 1 second off 3 Vocal Gas gas gas or corresponding national term where only one nation is involved 3a Clear 3b Removal of appropriate warning oA Vocal all dear s type of signal attack or corresponding national term when only one nation is involved 2 If used a steady siren note for one minute or a sustained blast on a vehicle horn whistle bugle or other wind instrument to indicate absence of all NBC and air attack hazards NOTES 1 Automatic alarms for the early and rapid detection of biological and chemical agents and radiological hazards may complement the devices referred to previously 2 A special audio visual pyrotechnic signal producing a whistle sound and a yellow red yellow display of lights may be used The combination of colors should be produced as near simultaneously as possible 3 Wearing respiratory protection in the presence of radiological hazards is not mandatory but will be decided by the
108. of 5750 The aiming circle has a declination constant of 0300 Your final step 15 to solve for the azimuth of the line of fire DC 6400 if needed IR az of the LOF 0300 6400 5750 0950 Your platoon howitzers were initially laid on 0950 but your BCS or LCU currently has an azimuth of fire entry of 0900 You have two options at this point e Leave the platoon laid on 0950 and have the FDC correct the computer entries for azimuth of fire and piece locations the platoon on the originally intended azimuth of 0900 Note The first option requires less time and effort and is thus normall pe if the tubes were laid parallel However if the unit was laid by an alternate method of lay where the tubes are not truly parallel then re laying would be preferred e If survey control is available the following is the final step 1 The platoon leader with the upper recording motion sights in on the end of the orienting line B The value now on the upper motion is the orienting angle Subtract the orienting angle from the azimuth of the orienting line The difference is the azimuth of the line of fire For a memory aid see Table 4 7 page 4 28 4 25 FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 EXAMPLE Your battalion FDC has instructed you to continue fring from your present position survey team is on its way to put you on common survey In pr paration you place an OS marker directly below the aiming circle plumb bob You also establi
109. of critical events Time now Rehearsal and location FA rehearsal and location Issue battery order time location Technical rehearsal time frequency PCC completed NLT Fire support rehearsal time frequency Advanced party ready to move BC s reconnaissance Main body moves NET R3P IPRTF FIRECAP PCI completed NLT move NLT Service Support Time critical resupply ops Classes of supply Class I Class Ill Class IV Class V Class IX R3P Ammunition required Coordinate for external support attachments detachments of CSS assets Command and Signal C 7 FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 1 2 C 8 C 6 BATTERY ORDER Table C 15 is a sample battery order Once the commander has completed his plan he must ensure the sections retain the minimum essential information successful technique is the section fill in the blank order Section chiefs and other key leaders can use a laminated format to fill in during the commander s orders brief It also helps the section chief brief his subordinates More importantly it forces the commander to focus on battery level information only Table C 15 Sample battery fill in the blank order Situation Enemy A The enemy forces the reg bde is now fighting B The primary threat to the battery now C The threat will be NET NLT Friendly A Thereg bde mission attacking defending B TheFA bn mission C TheFA bn critical fire support tasks CFST
110. of platoon leader and platoon sergeant in the platoon based unit also pertains to executive officer and chief of firing battery USMC battery gunnery sergeant in the battery based unit c Officer in Charge The officer in charge OIC is the battery commander or his command safety certified direct representative The OIC is responsible for all aspects of safety in the firing unit and on the assigned firing range Before the firing exercise the range control officer provides the OIC the required safety data and any firing limitations The OIC verifies that the unit is in the proper firing position He supervises the conversion of the safety data into a safety diagram and ensures that this diagram is verified by another command safety certified person safety diagram provides right and left direction limits minimum and maximum quadrant elevations for authorized charges and minimum safe fuze times The safety diagram modified as necessary by minimum QE is given to the appropriate members of the firing battery The OIC is responsible for ascertaining locations of friendly personnel who may inadvertently be exposed to artillery fires ensures dissemination of this information to subordinate XOs platoon leaders FDOs chiefs of firing battery platoon sergeants unnery sergeants and chiefs of section as appropriate so ey aware of potential situations which might result in ratricide d Firing Platoon Leader The firin
111. of the march might 2 21 FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 make a wrong turn Details concerning traffic control and route marking are presented in FM 55 30 and FM 1925 g Predetermined signals should be established to aid in convoy control Colored flags in daylight and flashlights at night can aid in simple but important communications within the column See FM 21 60 2 32 HALTS During administrative marches halts are made at regular intervals or at selected sites They allow to rest to service the vehicles and to check the loads Normally halts are not scheduled for tactical marches b During extended vehicle marches wooded areas built up areas and appropriate terrain should be selected as halting places They m concealment and do not present straight line of vehicles for attack by enemy aircraft Avoid stopping near crossroads railroads and other easily identifiable reference points 2 33 MARCH COLUMN CONTINGENCIES a Immediate Action Procedures A unit must always assume that it is a high priority target and vulnerable to all kinds of attack while moving Preplanned immediate actions can decrease vulnerability In establishing immediate action rocedures the BC or platoon leader should consider the ollowing e The enemy situation with what he expects to be attacked e The organic resources for countering the different types of attack e The nonorganic support available for countering attacks e T
112. of the small size of the beachhead positioning coordination with the supported maneuver forces is of extreme importance Units must remain flexible to change the predetermined positions on the basis of events within the beachhead Get off the beach as soon as possible FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 d Other Considerations Units must plan to embark and debark with all available MTOE equipment Vehicles must be forfording Vehicle tires may be partially deflated for improved performance on beach sand Survey enerally is not present during the first stages of the landing urvey must be established forward as early as possible Salt water and sand increase the need for preventive and corrective maintenance Unit basic loads must be transported forward with the unit An adequate ship to shore resupply ammunition must be coordinated by the maneuver unit F 7 AIR ASSAULT OPERATIONS a Movement Entire firing batteries are moved to quickly poe FA fire support into a battle area to attack special argets to bypass enemy concentrations or untrafficable terrain and to facilitate future operations Sustained operations may be conducted from the new battery position etailed planning and coordination a dE execution and speed of emplacement are essential to mission success b Capability Because of the diversity of the aviation mission and demand for aviation assets in a tactical environment it is imperative that proper aircraft be used t
113. points 2 Verify sight to crest 3 Verify boresight 4 Verify that prefire checks have been performed 5 Post safety limits when a safety T is received 6 Before firing verify the following a Shell fuze combination and fuze setting b Charge c Deflection and quadrant settings bubbles level and that the gunner has the correct sight picture d Fire commands are safe to fire using the safety T e The number of cut charges remaining O 21 FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 GLOSSARY A allied administrative publication abatis obstacle created by felling trees so that the trunks lie across road or trail and impede movement AC aiming circle ACIF artillery counterfire information ADAM area denial artillery munitions ADFT artillery direct fire trainer adjusting piece the howitzer that is designated by FDC to conduct the adjust fire portion of a fire mission advance party a group of unit representatives ispatched to a planned new position in advance of the main body to prepare the position for the arrival of the unit and its equipment AFATDS advanced field artillery tactical data system AFCS automatic fire control system AG assistant gunner AIC ammunition identification code aiming circle an optical instrument used to orient the tube of an indirect fire weapon in a desired direction This instrument can measure both the horizontal and vertical angles aiming point a sharply defined point or d o
114. position as low as 10 above the level horizon Each receiver has a function which displays the direction and vertical angle to each of the satellites being tracked Use this display to determine if signal masking is what is causing the system to fail When a satellite signal is masked the operator can either reorient the PLGR antenna or move to another location to improve signal reception b Multipath distortion reflected signals may occur if the receivers antenna is tilted away from a satellite This causes a reflected signal to be received which has more power than the direct signal Coordinates determined under these conditions can be off by as much as several hundred meters To correct this problem reorient the receiver antenna to a position that eliminates the distortion As with all aspects of artillery operations personnel must be properly trained in the safe operation of equipment The PLGR will provide accurate location data only if it is operated in strict accordance with the procedures outlined in the technical manual Battalions and batteries must ensure that training and testing on GPS operations are part of their safety certification program Specifically all battery level leadership must be able to identify and proper correct when needed the setup functions of the PLGR These personnel must also be proficient in map reading and hasty survey techniques needed to conduct an independent verification check of the PLGR
115. projectile and the radius of which is generally 6 to 11 calibers c Bourrelet The bourrelet is an accurately machined surface that is slightly larger than the body and located immediately to the rear of the ogive It centers the forward art of the pope in the tube and bears on the lands of he tube When the projectile travels through the bore only the bourrelet and the rotating band of the projectile bear on the lands of the tube d Body The body is the cylindrical portion of the projectile between the bourrelet and the rotating band It Is machined to a smaller diameter than the bourrelet to reduce the projectile surface in contact with the lands of the bore The body contains most of the projectile filler e Rotating Band The rotating band is a cylindrical rin of comparatively soft metal that is pressed into a knurled or roughened groove near the base of the projectile It mates with the forcing cone of the tube to eliminate gas wash blow by and to provide forward obturation The rotating band in conjunction with the rifling of the tube imparts n to the moving projectile A properly rammed separate loading projectile 15 held in the tube at all angles of elevation by the wedging action of the rotating band against the forcing cone EYEBOLT LIFTING i PLUG aS o lt m BOURRELET GROMMET PROTECTS ROTATING BAND DURING SHIPMENT e ROTATING BAND lt 1 OBTURATING BAND USED ON
116. ratiy evaluate the terrain in light of the cross country mobility of their vehicles Even in a well developed area with a good road net a driver ma be required to make an off road detour to bypass a roadbloc or a Section of damaged highway The habit of constant terrain evaluation enables him to make a quick decision and select the most practical route promptly d Practice terrain movement in small elements e Practice immediate action Include vehicle breakdowns equipment transfer and vehicle repair or recovery Many such items can be in the SOPs f Practice blackout movements to accustom the drivers to using the blackout lights As they become proficient restrict them to cat s eyes only g Consider the following tips for increasing the ae ey for rapid and secure tactical vehicle marches _ 1 Do not limit training to those times when the entire unit is available Whenever two or more vehicles are going to the same place conduct the movement as a tactical march 2 Find out how fast the unit can travel both on and off the road without losing the slowest vehicles Putting B a vehicles up front will automatically pace the column 9 As planning guide on roads and trails the battery or platoon will average 25 kilometers km per hour in an column and 10 km per hour in a close column at night 2 35 FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 CHAPTER 3 BATTERY DEFENSE This Chapter implements STANAG 2113 STANAG 2
117. reading would you place on the scales by use of the upper motion when you are preparing to orient your aiming circle on the azimuth of fire 6 100 mils 19 If a VT fuze does not seat properly in the fuze well what actions should be taken Remove the fuze and check to see if the charge is still in the fuze well ren series and M728 only If it 1s remove it and install the fuze Then if the fuze does not seat properly remove it and turn it in to the ammunition section 20 Describe the procedures for burning unused powder increments The burning site will be at least 200 feet from debris and grass personnel and equipment All powder charge increments to be destroyed should be placed in a single layer row not more than 12 inches wide The row of increments should be placed so that burning will progress into the direction of the wind A train of combustible material about 15 feet long should be placed perpendicular to and at the downwind end of the row of increments The combustible materials should be lit at the end farthest from the row of O 10 increments Igniter pads and flash reducers will be pari at the upwind end of the row of increments to be destroyed 21 At a firing point how do you verify the declination constant of the aiming circle Set up the aiming circle over any point from which the azimuth to another visible point is known Using the upper motion set the known azimuth on the scales Using the lower m
118. reconnaissance selection and occupation of position FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 5 series or short duration suffix with ADAM and RAAMS SAD memory aid subtract the azimuth of fire from the declination constant SAM aid subtract the azimuth of fire from the measured azimuth SCA section chiefs assembly GDU SCP survey control point SEAD suppression of enemy air defense sec second sheaf the lateral distribution of the bursts of two or more pieces fired together The width of the sheaf 15 the lateral distance perpendicular to the direction of fire between the centers of flank bursts A sheaf may be formed in any of the following patterns converged open parallel or special SHELREP shelling report SHORAD short range air defense si site SID the instrument reading rom th declination constant SIGINT signals intelligence SIGSEC signals security SIMO simultaneous observation SINCGARS single channel ground and airborne radio system SIP spring actuated inertia percussion SITREP situation report SM soldier s manual small unit transceiver a short range FM radio esigned to supplement the intrabattery wire system and to enhance command and control of marches and movements smk smoke SOI signal operation instructions SOL maniy aid subtract the orienting angle rom th orienting line SOP standing operating procedures SP start point or self propelled spoil refuse removed in the p
119. riot until the tube is at the Emplace the left limit safety stake as shown in B Figure c Determine the right limit and traverse the tube to the maximum Traverse the carriage left until the tube is at the right limit Emplace the right limit safety stake as shown in C Figure 11 1 11 3 FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 LEFT LIMIT SAFETY STAKE RIGHT LIMIT SAFETY STAKE Figure 11 1 Establishment of 119 1 safety limits 3 Quadrant elevation safety aids n Use the cam follower as an index mark b Set off the maximum QE on the fire control uadrant Elevate the tube until the bubbles center in the elevation level vials c Mark the cam with apiece of tape in line with the cam follower d Mark the minimum QE in the same manner d Emplace safety tape on the M198 howitzer as follows 1 Deflection safety aids n With the tube parallel to the azimuth of lay deflection 3200 place apiece of tape over the azimuth counter ottom carriage b Set off the left deflection limit on the pantel b using the deflection counter Traverse the tube to establish the proper sight picture on the aiming point c Using a T draw a line on the tape placed on the bottom carriage directly below the azimuth counter index mark found on the upper carriage Record the left deflection limit next to that line d Mark the right deflection limit in the same manner 2 Quadrant elevation safety aids a With the tube el
120. road users 2 30 FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 The priority rights of closed formations must not be called upon if e the traffic is regulated in another way by police forces other road users call upon priority by displaying a blue flashing light together with a signal horn Such vehicles must always be given free way e threat to other road users cannot ey be E by traffic regulation by police forces warning by military police forces of other mu personnel detailed for that tasks That applies especially if the traffic is regulated hy alternating lights permanent lights traffic signals or by the traffic signs Stop Give way or Give way Country GR 1 Flagging a See 6 b Minimum lighting and flagging b The driver of a broken down vehicle must remove the flag and filter light and if technical assistance is required a yellow flag is to be attached to the vehicle so that it is visible to approaching traffic 2 Lighting The first vehicle of each element must display a blue filter on the front left hand side headlight or a blue light b D vehide of each element must display a green filter on the front left hand side headlight or a green ight 3 Legal rights If part of the column element complying to the above stated national requirements has already moved into a crossing the next vehicles have right of way This right should be excercised with necesssary caution Civilian drivers are not to disturb or obstru
121. should be taken where possible after every 2 hours of operation Long halts made by columns for at least 30 minutes must always be specifically plotted on road movement graphs 3 The movement control staff can give additional instructions concerning time duration and or place of halts Particular attention is to be paid to the following aspects of traffic discipline during halts When making a halt single vehicles or vehicles forming part of a column should move off the roads as much as possible A b If this practice cannot be observed the commander of a column which is halted must take all necessary measures to facilitate movement of other road users and to avoid accidents or traffic jams The measures to be taken will vary according to conditions and the width of the road and should include 2 24 FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 i Warning at sufficient distance from the front and rear of the column guards warning flags lights or flares 1 Organizing and directing a system of one way traffic along the column b Overtaking of Columns 1 Single vehicles are authorized to overtake columns during their halts or if there is a large speed differential Vehicles may only overtake if it is safe to do so 2 Columns may only be authorized to overtake other columns by the movements control authorities and if so the overtaking maneuver has to be supported by traffic regulation personnel 3 A column with
122. situation Changes in tactical missions and CAPABILITY FORWARD of friendly maneuver units and supporting artillery Depending upon the mission and tactical situation the may direct that a howitzer section go forward with the advance party Reasons for taking howitzers forward may be e Mission Changes in the mission of the supported maneuver unit and supporting artillery e Execution e To confuse enemy moving target locating radars as part of the infiltration plan Concept of the operation General location of the battery and or platoon positions azimuth of tire e To determine the suitability of the route and firing routes order of march location of start point SP position when conditions are doubtful and RP and times e conduct a registration or an offset registration Mission oriented protective posture MOPP status Areas of known chemical and or nuclear 2 11 MOVEMENT BRIEFING contamos a Before departing to reconnoiter the new position the e Administration and logistics When and whereto feed BC briefs th platoon leaders and other key personnel on unit personnel priority for maintenance recovery the movement information ammunition resupply and refuel location e Situation e Command and signal Enemy situation Rear area activity Major avenues Command Changes in location of the battalion of approach Air activity Potential ambush sites command post CP and battalion support operations
123. stopping in position did the gun guide report the azimuth of fire and the initial d flection to the chief of section Was the weapon emplaced by following the standards in the appropriate technical manual Did the use the initial deflection reported by the gun guide Were proper commands used during laying according to Chapter 4 Were the bubbles centered and correct settings made during laying Did the section chief verify the sight picture laid deflection arid bubbles When the howitzer was laid Was the howitzer laid to an accuracy of 0 mils within the time prescribed by the appropriate evaluation standards Were the collimator and aiming posts for use while the howitzer was eing laid Was the collimator emplaced and ready for use as the primaty aiming poirit within 2 minutes after the howitzer was laid for deflection Were the aiming posts proper emplaced within minutes dd Was a DAP selected if applicable Was the howitzer boresighted by Dar or test target according the TM or verified by the use of the appropriate alignment device Was the lay of the howitzer verified by a second aiming circle Were prefire checks properly performed in accordance with the appropriate TM Was ammunition handled and prepared according to the TM Were angle of site and piece to crest range verified by the section chief Did the section chief report when his section was in order We
124. submitted and updated on DA Form 5698 R Weapon Location Data ca 5969 R Section Chief s Report is submitted to the Note Reproducible copies of DA Forms 5698 R and 5969 R are at the back of this manual FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 i Supervise and conduct hasty survey operations for the platoon Supervise ammunition management within the platoon k Supervise safety during platoon operations 1 Ensure all reports personnel supply maintenance are submitted to the battery commander and battalion 1 9 FIRE DIRECTION OFFICER The FDO is responsible for the training and supervision of POC personnel He also must be familiar with the duties of the platoon leader as he will at times perform his duties also His responsibilities may include the following a Decide to attack a target and issue a fire order b Ensure accurate and timely determination of firing data c Ensure that maintenance checks are performed on the section vehicle radios computer and generators in strict compliance with technical manuals d Ensure that the tactical situation map is current e Ensure accurate FDC records of missions fired are maintained f Ensure that data for prearranged fires are disseminated and understood g Ensure data from the other platoon is recorded and available h Supervise assumption of control of the fires of the other platoon when necessary i Perform independent safety computations and verify the
125. telescope so that the operator can measure vertical angles The other tubular leveling vial located on the left side of the main housing or the circular leveling vial fisheye bubble is used in leveling the aiming circle for measuring horizontal angles When the tubular leveling vials are not in use the protective covers should be closed to prevent damage f Azimuth and Azimuth Micrometer Scales 1 The azimuth scale Figure 4 3 is located below the magnetic compass housing It is graduated in 100 mil increments from 0 to 6 400 mils and is numbered every 200 mils The portion of the azimuth scale from 3 200 mils through 6 400 mils has a second 0 3200 scale numbered in red from the black 32 through the large black 0 on the azimuth scale 4 1 FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 Note Also located on the azimuth scale is an imaginary line called the 0 3200 line This line starts at the black O and goes through the black 32 on this scale This is the line we orient on the azimuth of fire during the laying process 2 On the azimuth scale the red numbers 0 to 3200 indicate azimuth The lower row of graduations parallels the 3 200 to 6 400 mil row of graduations This the aiming circle to be used with other instruments hat have scales labeled from 0 to 3 200 mils The red numbers are used only in the following instances You are reading red numbers to an M12 series sight and you are measuring a deflection b You
126. than minimum time 33 Unsafe time is 2 0 seconds less than minimum time 34 List the action taken in the event of misfire on an M109A2 A4 hot tube charge 3 After a failure to fire try to fire two additional times If the weapon still fails to fire wait 2 minutes from the last attempt to fire and then remove and inspect the primer a If the primer is not dented the fault is in the firing mechanism Repair the firing mechanism prime the weapon and then fire it within 5 minutes from the time the round was chambered b If the primer is dented the primer is at fault Replace the primer with another primer and then fire the weapon within 5 minutes from the time the round is chambered c If the primer fired the fault is with the propelling Ses If it is a combat emergency insert another primer and then try to fire the weapon within 5 minutes from the time the round was chambered d If for any reason the project is not removed from the tube within 5 minutes of cambering evacuate all personnel from the weapon and notify explosive ordnance disposal for removal of the projectile 35 Describe the method for measuring the M eed angle of site to a crest in front of the howitzer and list the four methods of determining piece to crest range Looking through the tube sight along the lowest element of the bore and direct the movement of the tube until the ine of site just clears the highest point on the crest in front of the how
127. that the fire control equipment is synchronized with the cannon tube Cannon tubes impio erly secured in travel lock This causes damage to the traverse and elevation mechanisms Leaving poe and or propellants exposed to direct sunlight for extended periods The result is erratic tiring Droppie projectiles or pallets of projectiles from the backs of ammunition trucks or carriers Damage to the fuze well or rotating band may result Failure to clean dirty poene before loading The result is increased resistance in the bore and a dragging effect on the projectile during flight Lifting a round with a hand around the fuze Failure to use a fuze wrench when tightening fuzes This increases the chance of an in bore explosion if gases escape around the projectile or it may bring about low order burst upon reaching the target area Removing the grommet poe the rotating band before the round is placed in the bustle rack or on the loading tray Incomplete and or improper fire control alignment tests e Improper procedures when transferring from primary to alternate aiming points during a tire mission e Attaching and or picking up the lanyard before the proper command 15 given e Standing in the path of recoil when priming or performing misfire procedures e Failure to segregate propellent by lot e Failure to perform prefire checks in each position e Failure to cycle through the GDU on each command verifying the number
128. the BOC and assists the battery commander during displacement His responsibilities include the following a Lay the battery b Perform hasty survey as required c Assume the duties of XO or FDO when required d Assist in the establishment and maintenance of battery firing capability during advance party operations Coordinate resupply and distribution of ammunition with the FDO f Perform liaison with battalion and other outside agencies as required g Ensure there is initial fire direction capability with the advance party h E DUE the XO s min QE for the lowest preferred charge the unit expects to fire 1 19 FIRE DIRECTION OFFICER The fire direction officer is responsible for the training and supervision of the FDC personnel He also must be familiar with the duties of the XO since he will at times perform all those duties responsibilities may include the following a Decide to attack a target and issue a fire order b Ensure accurate and timely determination of firing data c Ensure that maintenance checks are performed on the section vehicle radios computer and generators in strict compliance with the technical manuals d Ensure that the tactical situation map is current e Ensure accurate FDC records of missions fired are maintained f Ensure that data for prearranged fires is disseminated and understood g Ensure data from the other batteries are recorded and available
129. the US Belgium and Canada have the M119A2 charge and fire it with the M110A1 M107 M116 and the M485A2 projectiles The Dutch NL have NR13 which is similar to the M119A2 2 Germany has the M549A1 HE RAP and is using both the M4A2 and the M119A1 charges see Table N 5 3 DM45 smoke and 62 illum can be fired with mixed DM52 charge 78 4 M485 illum is restricted to firing Zones 1 through 6 M110 110 110 110 110 M3 M3 M3A1 M3 M3A1 M110 gt M110 110 M4A1 z 8 N 3 FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 Table N 5 New projectile propellant charges permitted by the US for firing in combat 155 mm M549A1 M4A2 M119A2 1 Fired rocket on Zone 7 only i in M199 and M284 cannon tubes only in FH70 only IK M557 M557 M577 DM241 577 557 M739 M739 739 51 5 DM211 M535 DM211 51 5 572 M572C2 M78 M78 DM71 78 78 572 M78A1 M78A1 DM71B1 M76A1 M572C1 Mod 1 M572C2 M514A1 M514A1 M514A1 NUT42 732 514 12 M72B M732 M732 M72B 732 503 501 M501A1 501 1 501 DM53 501 M561 L81A2 M501A1 M501A1 M501A1 M501A1 MTSQ 520 1 52041 520 1 520 1 520 1 DM113 M565 NRISO RR sd usi ucl E D M582 M582 577 usz7 msz 2 1 M78 and 78 1 are not safet
130. the maintenance representative stops to If the disabled vehicle cannot be repaired in a reasonable time or recovered by the platoon the position and condition of the vehicle are reported to the BC for recovery The maintenance representative must proceed ud e route of march as soon as possible to be available to the rest of the platoon d Each vehicle commander is responsible to watch for signs markers signals and other traffic e The specific objective of march discipline is to ensure intelligent cooperation and effective teamwork by march personnel Teamwork includes the following e Immediate and effective response to all signals e Prompt relaying of all signals e Obedience to traffic regulations and control personnel e Use of cover concealment camouflage dispersion blackout precautions smoke and other protective measures against air ground armor and NBC attack e Maintaining correct speeds positioning and intervals between vehicles within the column e Ability to recognize route marking signals and signs 2 31 CONVOY CONTROL MEASURES The control measures discussed below help in convoy movement a The start point is normally a geogr ptica feature identifiable on the ground and on a map The first vehicle of the convoy must cross the start point at the specified start time The BC is responsible for determining the route to the start point and the time it will take to get there If the unit is spaa
131. the sight picture is correct and the azimuth reading is the same as the surveyed data the M is declinated MAGNETIC REAR SIGHT HOLDER REAR SIGHT AZIMUTH SCALE INDEX AZIMUTH SCALE ELEVATION SCALE INDEX Figure 4 10 M2 compass top view 4 10 FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 b The procedure for field expedient declination of the M2 compass is as follows D Using the azimuth adjuster scale set off the grid magnetic G M angle shown on the bottom of all military maps 2 Once the G M angle has been set off on the azimuth scale the M2 compass is declinated 4 13 MEASURING AN AZIMUTH AND SITE TO CREST WITH THE M2 COMPASS a The procedure to measure an azimuth follows To read the azimuth scale by reflection hold the compass in both hands at eye level with arms braced against body and with the rear sight nearest your eyes Place the cover at an angle of approximately 45 to the face of the compass Figure 4 11 so that the scale reflection can be viewed in the mirror Level the instrument by viewing the circular level in the mirror Sight on the desired object and read the azimuth indicated on the reflected azimuth scale by the south seeking black end of the compass needle CENTER OF OBJECT Figure 4 11 b The procedure to measure site to crest follows Hold the compass on edge with both hands at eye level with arms braced against the body and with the rear sight nearest your eyes Place the cover at app
132. to his sections The level of detail is METT T dependent but as a minimum must convey the essential information to accomplish the critical fire Support tasks Prepare a terrain sketch or map board to use to issue the order Rehearse to ensure a focused and dear delivery ief Headquarters an ersonnel should attend so they understand their role Be concise but specific in the subunit missions to each section Once complete use backbrief techniques to make sure your orders and priorities are understood Have the XO and other key leaders back brief you after they have had time to analyze and implement their part of the plan State the specific items you will check or have another leader check Update your time line and rehearsal schedule p eue the Order eae must be present for the h Supervise This is the most important step Leaders must conduct precombat inspections PCIs and spot check the plan to ensure standards are met the defense especially leaders must ensure weapons range cards fightin observation posts and knowledge are to standard se subordinate leaders to assist but the commander must conduct the prioni PCIs The requirements for effective PCIs are outlined in FM 7 123 pages 2 33 to 2 35 Note C of this manual provides a sample battery field artilley support plan checklist sample precombat checklists a sample warning order a mission analysis work sheet and a sample battery operations order
133. total width must not exceed the following values Single axle load 1 single axles 10 0 t 2 single axles live except for two axle busses 10 0 t b Double axle load taking into consideration the regulations for the single axle load 1 axle distance less than 1 00 m 11 0 t 2 axle distance 1 00 m to less than 1 30 m 11 0 t 3 axle distance 1 30 m to less than 1 30 m 16 0 t 4 axle distance more than 1 90 m 20 0 t c Triple axle load taking into consideration the regulation for the single axle load and the double axle load 1 axle distance 1 30 m or less 21 0 t 2 axle distance more than 1 30 m to 1 40 m 24 0 t d Total weight of individual vehicles except for semi trailers taking into consideration the regulation for axle oads 1 vehicles with not more than 2 axles a vehicles 16 t b vehicles with live axle according to point a 2 17 0 t c trailers 18 0 t 2 vehicles with more than 2 axles a vehicles and trailers 24 0 t b busses which are constructed as articulated vehicles 28 0 t c vehicles with 2 double axles the centers of which are at least 4 00 m apart 32 0 t 2 27 FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 e Total weight of vehicle combinations towing vehicles and semi trailers taking into consideration the regulations for axle loads and individual vehicles 1 vehicle combinations with less than 4 axles 27 0 t 2 two axle vehicle with two axle trailer or semi trailer 35 0 t 3 other veh
134. unit area by all who hear or see the original alarm signal since most available alarm signals are generally limited in range Additionally audible and visual alarm signals should normally be supplemented by simultaneous use of radio telephone and public address systems DETAILS OF THE AGREEMENT 3 It is unlikely that personnel can understand and react quickly and correctly to more than two alarm signals The following hazards require fast and correct reaction use or presence of chemical or biological agents and an imminent air attack or nuclear operation Therefore alarm signals for these two hazards are mandatory see Note 1 In the case of radiological contamination a delay in personnel taking cover may be acceptable Note 1 No reference is made to ground attack in order to reduce to a minimum the number of signals Signals for ground attack if deemed necessary remain the prerogative of field commands 4 The spoken word vocal alarm signals remains the most effective means of informing troops an emergency 5 Visual alarm signals are included to supplement the audible alarm signals under conditions when audible signals may be lost due to other noises or to replace audible signals when the tactical situation does not permit the use of sound a Reliance should not be placed on visual alarm signals during the hours of darkness or in conditions of poor light b Visual alarm signals should be used when purely audible sign
135. unit keeps proficient in those skills that are used day to day If not used or practiced skills that may be required later can be lost Consideration should be given to conducting training during combat lulls Such training will ensure that a platoon stays able to perform all skills required b Training in convoy operations and immediate action should conform to the unit SOP This will ensure hat personnel are adequately trained to cope with situations that may confront them Some considerations for establishing a training program are discussed below 1 Establish a realistic movement SOP It should conform to battalion SOPs and should cover as a minimum the following e Approval authority for displacing the battery or platoon e Duties of convoy commanders e Convoy organization e Weapons and ammunition to be carried e Hardening of vehicles e Protective equipment to be worn by personnel e Preparation of vehicles detailed instructions regarding tarpaulins windshields and tailgates e Counterambush action e Drills in reaction to air or artillery attack e Security measures e Maintenance and recovery of disabled vehicles e Any scheduled refueling and or rest halts e Establishment of rally points 2 Stress estimating and maintaining the specified interval between vehicles especially if the column halts Put interval marking signs on your motor pool exit to help train drivers c Teach the drivers to
136. use mutual support Within the platoon one section must be ready to support another section Apply the same concept to the individual soldier and you can build a formidable defense Range cards for crew served Weapons are essential to a good defense The BC or platoon leader should plan indirect fire targets for the defense of his position These might include illumination targets if self illumination is not possible 3 10 CONTROL All leaders must control their personnel and firepower before during and after an attack so the correct actions can be taken at the right time Battery leadership should review FM 71 1 for techniques of focusing and controlling fires Something as simple as what sections will suppress with heavy machine guns as others direct fire their howitzers will be difficult to control without rehearsing The use of range markers out to 1 500 meters or TRPs greatly enhances the effectiveness of massing the fire power in a platoon or battery Battery and platoon SOPs must be developed and followed to maintain control FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 400 METERS 200 METERS Figure 3 1 Platoon position elements not dispersed 200 METERS REMOTE FDC Note A3x6 platoon based organization would have one less howitzer than the figure depicts Figure 3 2 Platoon position elements dispersed 3 11 FLEXIBILITY No tight will ever go exactly as planned so the BC and platoon leaders must respond quickly to the unex
137. weapon should be recorded by the instrument operator for use by the FDC Note The chief of section supervises the laying rocess and verifies all data after the gunner lays the OWIZer RIGHT SUBTRACT Figure 4 13 Reciprocal laying from another howitzer M100 series sight 4 17 LAYING BY ORIENTING ANGLE a When occupying a position it is preferable that all fire support assets have survey data available to them Common survey enables units to mass fires more accurately Surve data will not always be available therefore all efforts should be made to establish directional control as early as possible b If survey is available the following as a minimum will be provided Figure 4 14 e The orienting station OS with grid and altitude to the station e The azimuth of the orienting line OL e The description of the end of the orienting line EOL UNIT DATE g OS GRID ALT DISTANCE TO EOL DESCRIPTION OF EOL Figure 4 14 Orienting station 4 13 FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 c Steps in orienting angle OA method are as follows 1 Using the plumb bob position the aiming circle over the orienting station 2 Compute the orienting angle Figure ip by subtracting the azimuth of fire from the azimuth of the orienting line add 6 400 mils if necessary 3 With the upper motion set the orienting angle 4 Using the lower motion sight on the EOL The 0 3200 line 1s now parallel to the
138. 0 12000 LL L 8614 460 363 39 0 12500 22 lol 1857 490 387 410 13000 __ __________ __________ ____________________________________425 ____430 ___13500 __ ___________ ______________________________________________________455___45 0 ___14000 __ ___________ _________ 47 0 14500 __ Oe OT 533 ____500 1500 TT 05 520 150011 2 2 2222 1 63 550 K 11 FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 Table K 12 Rapid fire table for M109A2 A6 M198 M728 and M732 fuzes propellant GB M3A1 FUZE M728 M732 I o N T o w 2 2 o D m 2 4 3 m w z gt PIECE TO CREST CHG 4 CHG 5 RANGE EL TI EL EL EL TI 10 64 62 8 0 61 8 0 58 8 0 20 47 8 0 43 8 0 40 8 0 36 8 0 30 48 80 40 80 30 8 0 40 53 80 43 80 37 80 30 8 0 ______500 48 8 0 40 80 32 80 80 489 4 80 3 o ao Mi 148 90 135 90 123 LI m wo 497 99 ns gt 199 p __ 779 2 100 39 1 49 gt gt gt ____140 197 120 _____154 0 129 10 100 150 i30 160 120 131 1600 28 __
139. 0 20 1 22 0 3 23 1 30 0 32 Scoring Standards of precision 2 were met If applicable b Correct steps were followed to complete the task c If steps a and b were not followed soldier recieves a NO GO and 0 points If soldier received a GO on steps a and b use the chart below to determine score FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 APPENDIX C SAMPLE OPERATIONS CHECKLISTS C 1 DESCRIPTION To make a tentative plan the commander must gather information by focusing on the battery level METT T Table C 1 will assist the commander in this effort Table C 1 Battery FA support plan checklist From the S2 1 Position Area Terrain and Weather What is the slope soil conditions trafficability Where can best position observation posts Site to crest or intervening crest problems Percent illumination moonrise moonset night vision device window Precipitation wind temperature Enemy What is the primary enemy threat to the battery What kind of forces Number and type of weapons Avenues of approach how will they locate me direction finding radar observation What is their mission how will they react When and where will they be a threat When will be his priority target When and where will he use chemical weapons type effects best defense From the S3 What battalion critical fire support tasks are my responsibility in priority Who am reinforcing wh
140. 0 01 067 0687 15 April 1981 TM 9 1300 200 Ammunition General 3 October 1969 TM 9 6920 361 13 amp P Operator Organizational and Direct r Maintenance Manual Including Repair Parts and Special Tools List Field Artillery Trainer n with Field Artillery Trainer M31 22 September TM 43 0001 28 3 Data Sheets for Guns Howitzers Mortars Interoperable Ammunition 29 September 43 0001 28 4 Artillery Ammunition Authorized Projectile Fuze and Propelling Charge Combinations for Howitzer Heavy Prap led 8 inch M110A2 with Cannon 2 August 1988 TM 43 0001 28 6 Artillery Ammunition Authorized Projectile Fuze and Propels Charge Combinations for Howitzer Medium Self Propelled 155mm M109A3 A4 with Cannon M183 30 June 1993 43 0001 28 7 Artillery Ammunition Authorized Projectile Fuze and Propelling Charge Combinations for Howitzer Medium Towed 155mm M198 with Cannon M199 30 June 1993 TM 43 0001 28 10 Artillery Ammunition Authorized Projectile Fuze and Propelling Charge Combinations for Howitzer Light Towed 105mm M101A1 and M102 31 August 1988 43 0001 28 13 Artillery Ammunition Authorized Projectile Fuze and Propelling Charge Combinations for Howitzer Medium Self Propelled 155mm M10945 A6 with Cannon M284 15 September 1994 FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 advance party 2 4 through 2 6 2 7 assembly 2 4 major tasks 2 5 2 6 organization 2 4 ai
141. 0 223 160 179 1507 143 140 107 130 81 120 64 C 2900 229 160 184 150 149 140 111 4130 82 120 64 110 8000 237 170 188 160 153 150 113 130 83 120 65 110 86 120 66 110 3 200 255 18 0 162 150 88 12 0 262 18 0 89 13 0 277 19 0 218 180 175 16 0 130 15 0 _____3600 ___ 291 190 228 180 181 170 132 150 94 130 70 120 3 900 315 210 245 _ 190 19 180 143 160 101 74 130 5000 1436 60 32 230 25 220 189 200 131 170 91 150 323 26 0 _ 650 4 9 300 362 280 268 250 185 220 11 190 ________ 552 330 402 300 297 270 204 240 7500 161 360 41 3 320 33 _ 2901 227 250 147 2190 ____ 8000 __ 1 1507 340 361 __ 310 250 270 160 3 230 821157 370 408 X 330 278 290 19 250 900 167 4001 42 ___ 350 303 310 194 260 ____ 9500 _ L T5546 ___ 4001 365 350 234 300 10000 664 420 405 370 255 ___310 1050 A d 436 _____ 390 278 330 11000 410 303 350 1150 J 1 56 430 327 379 1200 _________ ________ 60 46 0 1250 4 4 65 2490 385 4190 413001 _________ ________ __________ 423 230 1350 ST _____________________453 450 14000
142. 0 nay not proceed with the laying of the other pieces When the gunner of any piece announces a difference of 10 mils or less the instrument operator normally continues to lay that particular piece until it is laid to zero mils The gunner then announces NUMBER 3 READY FOR RECHECK Instrument operator NUMBER 3 DEFLECTION 3093 Gunner of number 3 NUMBER 3 DEFLECTION 3093 0 MILS When the deflection announced by the instrument operator Td deflection on the pantel are identical the howitzer is laid Instrument operator NUMBER 3 IS LAID e aiming circle 4 15 FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 DECLINATION CONSTANT 0400 gt 3900 AZIMUTH FIRE 6400 6800 3900 2900 IR 2900 AZIMUTH OF FIRE Figure 4 16 Computation of instrument reading 4 20 LAYING BY ALTERNATE METHODS Based on an ever changing tactical environment situations could arise that would make it impractical or impossible to use the primary methods of lay orienting angle and grid azimuth In such cases the firing element must be able to keep su pii the maneuver forces Alternate methods of lay that give the unit this capability are discussed in paragraphs 4 21 4 22 and 4 23 4 21 M2 COMPASS METHOD a Normally this method of lay is used during a deliberate occupation when an aiming circle is not available The M2 compass is used to lay one howitzer Once laid for direction mat howitzer is used to recipro
143. 047 QSTAG 183 and STANAG 2934 Chapter 13 QSTAG 503 Section I INTRODUCTION 3 1 THREAT CAPABILITIES The enemy will direct actions against the field artillery to i ress neutralize and or destroy our capability to fight All field artillerymen must know and apply passive and active defense measures against artillery air and ground attacks if they are to survive and provide continuous and responsive fire support a Detection The enemy will try to detect FA elements Detection is done through the study of our doctrine and the processing of signals intelligence E SM intelligence IMINT and human intelligence HUMINT 1 Signals Intelligence Using signal intercept and radio direction finding Sd equipment the enemy collects various tlequency modulate EV and amplitude modulated AM transmissions Through triangulation the enemy frees the signal FM monitors are closer to the forward line of own troops FLOT because of the limited range of FM radios AM radio direction finding monitors follow the fmt echelon About 25 seconds after communications begin the enemy targeting sequence can continue even if our communications stop Within 2 to 3 minutes the information can pou a jamming mission fwe mission or a combat mission Tactical FM radios operating on low power can be picked up by enemy RDF units at distances in excess of 10 kilometers High power signals can be detected at distances up to 40 kilometers However
144. 1 3 11 4 SAFETY COMPUTATIONS 625 94 CAE NS MERE 11 4 CHAPTER 12 COMBAT SERVICE SUPPORT 12 1 RESPONSIBILITIES cc soe eo Er uum ATA Soo he RS RE See 12 1 12 2 BATTALION TRAIN a dub cu deste ee 12 1 12 3 LOGISTICS PACKAGES ge hu DE eo RR ERE 12 1 12 4 BATTERY INTERFACE WITH THE 0 1241 12 5 CLASSES OF SUPPLY or soo Rn Rx I esa 12 2 12 6 MAINTENANCE RECOVERY AND REPAIR 12 3 12 7 REFUEL REARM AND RESUPPLY 12 4 APPENDIX STANDARDIZED PROCEDURES APPENDIX B SAMPLE GUNNER S QUALIFICATION TEST Bd USE OF tok Pecan eo ad pde B 1 B 2 STANDARDS OF PRECISION B 1 5 ASSISTANCE co ic cope ha ote rns b iat ees eet t e a B 1 BA TASK SCORING os ipea Oops B 1 B 5 QUALIFICATION SCORES B 1 B 6 EQUIPMENT PERSONNEL AND SITE REQUIREMENTS B 2 TASKS ty Ses ities aya e s ae awe eh Ga B 5 APPENDIX C SAMPLE OPERATIONS CHECKLISTS Gly DESCRIPTION Sioa aloes o Bede vetat d s C 1 C 2 PRECOMBAT CHECKLISTS 1 C 3 BATTERY STATUS C4 FM 6 60
145. 1 M728 M732 N463 N464 1 M548 MTSQ fuze is being issued and used instead of M565 until stocks are exhausted See TM 43 0001 28 for additional details M577 and M582 can be set for either MT or SQ If the fuze is set for MT SQ action may occur 10 9 FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 Table 10 3 Field artillery ammunition planning guide M198 M109A5 A6 PROPELLING CHARGES MAXIMUM FUZE PROJECTILES DODAC M3SERIES M4 SERIES RANGE ACTION M107 HE 1320 0544 Yes butnot Yes Yes 18 100 CP PD ET zone 1 or2 MTSQ VT M549A1 RAP 1320 D579 Yes but zone Yes but not Yes 30 000 PD ET VT 7 only M119 732 only M449A1 ICM 1320 D562 Yes butnot Yes Yes 18 100 MT ET MTSQ zone 1 2 1320 D505 Yes butnot Yes Yes but 17 500 MT ET MTSQ zone 1 or2 M577 17 500 ET MTSQ M577 degraded reliability M483A1 DPICM 1320 0563 Yes butnot Yes Yes zone 1 or2 M864 BB DPICM 1320 D864 Yes zone7 Yes Yes 28 200 MTSQ M577 only VT M762 ET M692 ADAM L 1320 0501 Yes butnot Yes Yes zone 1 2 M731 ADAM S 1320 D502 Yes butnot Yes zone 1 or2 M116A1 HC 1320 D506 Yes but not Yes zone 1 or2 M110A1 WP 1320 D550 Yes but not zone 1 or2 M110 H HD 1320 D543 Yes but not zone 1 or2 M687 binary 1320 D594 Yes but not zone 1072 17 740 ET MTSQ M577 17 740 ET MTSQ M577 18 100 ET MTSQ M577 18 100 PD MTSQ ET 18 100 PD MTSQ ET 18 100 PD VT
146. 12 APPENDIX UNIT DEFENSE CHECKLIST Het ENTRANGE POINT x suem EU osse oec H 1 H 2 PASSIVE DEFENSIVE TECHNIQUES H 1 H 3 ACTIVE DEFENSIVE TECHNIQUES H 1 H 4 PERIMETER COMMUNICATIONS H 2 5 ANTIARMOR ASSETS H 2 MOVEMENT eee BAG Ga Celis eee a H 2 EOOALSEGURLIDY thet were de ee euer dea idee H 3 H 8 NUCLEAR BIOLOGICAL AND CHEMICAL H 3 9 AIR DEFENSE COVERAGE H 3 MEDICAL o Vet e rel eio e dab te H4 H 11 ENEMY PRISONERS OF WAR EPWs H 4 APPENDIX I KILLER JUNIOR Eb DESGRIPTION tm ebd p SED ur S etre pad 1 1 k2 TYPES OPS TARGET n 1 1 27 AMMUNITION 355 555 oe og Es 2A 1 1 1 4 PROCEDURES dc reta ie iet oa X wey GU ae do age Gee ADAE I 1 xi FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 xii J 1 J 2 J 3 J 4 J 5 J 6 J 7 J 8 J 9 J 10 J 11 J 12 J 13 J 14 K 1 K 2 L 1 L 2 L 3 L 4 L 6 L 7 L 8 L 9 L 10 L 11 L 12 APPENDIX J CRATER ANALYSIS AND REPORTING CRATER ANALYSIS TEAM EQUIPMENT DETERMI
147. 143 801 57 Ot 5 80 43 801 80 30 80 25 80 50 149 159 _ 801 147 8 0 147 ___ 901 155 _ 90 143 129 580 42 80 33 80 25 89 ___700 1170 90 14 901149 124 90 11 80 36 80 27 80 800 173 100118 100 139 121 107 80 9 80 28 _____900 ___ 180 100 162 004 700172 90 16 90 9 29 80 1000 189 1 0417 110 144 100 123 100115 90 9 _ 90 78 8 0 ____1 100 __ 204 70178 11015 11058 100 16 90 91 90 75 120 25 120145 120146 110 131 1007 100 91 oof 74 90 1400 28 13023 120170 120139 1009 100 74 90 L 1 500 250 140 213 13017 12144 120115 110 95 10 0 74 9 0 76 10 0 31900 97 16024 15043 130 130 120114 110 77 100 200 335 16075 16 0 222 150 177 140 1 8 120 108 120 79 110 339 18 0 267 160 207 150114 140223 130747 120 250 42 200135 18029 17027 160 162 140 128 1309 90 120 2600 51 20030 19030 17020 160 170 ____150 132 140 93 120 532 21 0 2800 53 22040 200 322 180 170114 150 141 140 98 130 574 2047 220 332 190422 1701168 ____16 0 145 150 10 130 00 60 23044 210 344 190 30 1 59 20 35 20 29 18021 160 158 150117 140 3200 537 2301368 200297 190 205 170 162 160113 140 55 230 99 21025 190 12 170 168 160116 140 340 575 24 0 3500 _ 595 25 0 426 201
148. 17 EXECUTIVE OFFICER 1 18 ASSISTANT EXECUTIVE OFFICER USMC only 1 19 FIRE DIRECTION OFFICER 1 20 CHIEF OF FIRING BATTERY 1 21 GUNNERY 1 22 HOWITZER SECTION CHIEF CHAPTER 2 RECONNAISSANCE SELECTION AND OCCUPATION OF A POSITION Section RECONNAISSANCE AND THE ADVANCE PARTY 2 1 DEFINITION AND REQUIREMENTS 2 2 CONSIDERATIONS 7 o S S EUR eC o CES 2 3 RECEIPT OF THE ORDER os acce 2 4 ARTILLERY TROOP LEADING PROCEDURES 2 5 RSOP OPERATIONS 2 6 METHODS OF RECONNAISSANCE 2 7 PLANNING THE RECONNAISSANCE 2 8 THE RECONNAISSANCE PARTY 2 9 ASSEMBLING THE ADVANCE PARTY 2 10 TAKING A FIRING CAPABILITY FORWARD 2 11 MOVEMENT 2 12 ROUTE RECONNAISSANCE Section 1 2 14 TYPES OF 5 Section ORGANIZING THE NEW POSITION FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 2 15 ADVANCE PARTY 2 8 2 16 FORMATIONS 09 soe eoe ee a URN TER E 2 10 Section IV PREPARATION FOR OCCUPATION 2 12 2 17 DAYTIME O
149. 2 BUMPER P x Enter bumper 23 FROM GUN AB P Enter 1 endline 5 24 DISPLAY ACTION TAKEN Note TS 1 is now the occupied station therefore a 1 is entered to indicate the start point of the second leg This process is the same for all subsequent legs 24 DIR P x Enter azimuth forward azimuth from TS 1 to TS 2 endline 25 DIST P x Enter distance TS 1 to TS 2 endline 26 VERT ANG P Enter vertical angle endline j Ail data needed to compute the coordinates and height of the second forward position are entered This is the end of the second leg k To enter the fieldwork for additional forward stations perform steps 21 to 26 again Each time an additional leg is entered into the program the number in step 21 is incremented by 1 and the number in step 23 is the last traverse station The number of traverse stations forward station is not to exceed eight m Todetermine grid coordinates of each traverse station 2 methods are available 1 Method 1 Method 1 is a review of the data that was entered into the computer in the order thatit ws entered The grid coordinates for each traverse station are reviewed and recorded in the order that the fieldwork was entered in the BUCS that is the first station the second and so forth 27 IDGP Select endline BUCS will jump to UPDATE FU index a Review and extract the grid coordinates of each traverse stat
150. 2 Aiming circle is set up 3 Cannon positions are prepared to include placin and pantel marking stakes and recording of initia etlections 4 Minimum essential internal wire communications are established 9 Attempt is made to pass survey and lay data to the main body b Duties are decentralized As soon as the BC or GSG selects the position the gun guides select positions for their howitzers c The battery commander s or GSG s driver is left at the release point to guide the entire platoon into position Gun guides meet their vehicles as they approach their positions d The FDC or POC representative and the GSG conduct their normal duties as much as time permits 2 19 NIGHT OCCUPATION Night occupation priorities are similar to daylight occupations However they require more planning more time and additional techniques to ensure a smooth and orderly occupation a Gunnery Sergeant The GSG is especially concerned with noise and light discipline security and communications between advance party members b Gun Guides Guides must be thoroughly briefed and should pace their routes before and after darkness The should be equipped with filtered flashlights to guide the vehicles Color coding of individual howitzer sections will facilitate section identification during night operations example first or fifth section blue second or sixth section red third or seventh section yellow and forth or eighth
151. 2 6 center and the location of battery commander It also includes a contingency plan if the BC does not return or report back by a predetermined time or event Signal Movement radio frequencies and net control restrictions Signals for immediate actions at the halt and during movement b After being briefed by the BC the platoon leader or XO briefs the remaining key personnel by using the movement order format in Figure 2 1 2 0 ROUTE RECONNAISSANCE a After making a map inspection planning the reconnaissance and briefing the necessary personnel Situation Mission Execution General Organization Composition of column Instructions 1 Air observers 2 Reconnaissance element 3 Route markers 4 Start point 5 Checkpoints 6 Rally points 7 Release points 8 Route of march 9 Alternate routes 10 Lights Unblocked ambush Blocked ambush Air attack Artillery attack FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 the BC is now ready to make a ground reconnaissance Accompanied by the advance party the BC or his representative departs on the route reconnaissance The p purpose of this reconnaissance is to determine the suitability of the route of the units movement Items to be analyzed include possible alternate routes cover concealment location of obstacles likely ambush sites contaminated areas route marking requirements and the time and distance required to traverse the route b
152. 22 400 PD MTSQ VT M732 only ET 22 600 ET MTSQ M577 17 740 ET MTSQ M577 17 740 ET MT 16 400 BD comes already installed 18 100 PD MTSQ ET VT M572 only Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes M121 chemical 1320 D568 Yes but not Yes Yes zone 1 or2 M795 HE 1320 D529 Yes but not Yes Yes zone 1 or2 M825 smoke 1320 D528 Yes but not Yes Yes zone 1 or 2 M718 RAAMS L 1320 D503 Yes but not Yes zone 1 or2 M741 RAAMS S 1320 D509 Yes but not Yes zone 1 or2 Yes Yes M712 1320 D510 Yes but no Yes Copperhead requirement for zones 1 through 3 LINE SN 804 practice 1320 D513 Yes but not es M804A1 zone 1 2 1 Type classified but not in production 10 10 FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 Table 10 4 Field artillery ammunition planning guide M109A2 A3 A4 PROPELLING CHARGES MAXIMUM PROJECTILES DODAC waSERIES _ FUZEACTION M107 HE 1320 D544 Yes butnot Yes Yes 18 100 CP PD ET MTSQ VT zone 1 2 M549A1 RAP 1320 D579 Yes but zone Yes but not M119 23 500 PD ET VT MTSQ 7 only M449A1 ICM 1320 D562 Yes but not es Yes 18 100 MT ET MTSQ 577 zone 1 1320 D505 Yes but not es Yes but degraded 17 500 MT ET MTSQ M577 zone 1 reliability M483A1 DPICM 1320 D563 Yes butnot Yes Yes 17 500 ET MTSQ M577 zone 1 2 es es es m Y Y M864 BB DPICM 1320 D864 LE Y Yes 22 000 MTSQ M577
153. 2525 740 310 641 23045 21034 190 242 17 0 182 601132 7140 320 64 2041 22033 20 0 248 180 168 16 0 136 150 330 19 250 485 22032 20026 18014 ___ 160 139 150 340 47 260 501 23034 210 12 180115 170 42 150 350 179 059 24434 210 269 19 0 360 65 240445 20293 190208 180 151 160 370 64 2047 25020 20024 1801155 160 380 66 26 0 429 23 0 299 20 0 390 6 270440 23 0 306 20 0 400 1 7 60 22 44 24034 21027 190 487 170 450 0 1 E 27 0 _ o d o 30 0 428 26 0 550 504 28138 250 243 22 0 6 66 310 383 2701272 240 650 J o eet cce 89 35 0 11 1 149 2030 280 ___ _____ d 50378 _ 300 __9000 1 044 320 _ ve e 55 538 5 __ 9500 ____ pn 7 617 ool 11111 11 ____________ ____ 722 43 FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 Table K 4 Rapid fire table for M101A1 M728 and M732 fuzes PROPELLANT M6 CHG4 zi B EL olojolele e olojo P 06 eo o e e e e 2 S
154. 3 Compute deflection a subtracting the back azimuth of fire from the azimuth to the aiming point memory aid AP BAF 4 To ral the platoon command PLATOON ADJUST AIMING POINT description location DEFLECTION so much Each gunner Em the two step deflection method picks up a line of sight to the DAP and announces NU so and so AIMING POINT IDENTIFED DEFLECTION so much 5 When all sections have reported command THE PLATOON IS LAID Note During an emergency mission the X0 or FDO will normally announce the initial fire commands charge and quadrant to the adjusting piece The remaining fire commands will be determined and issued by the FDC c This method has advantages and disadvantages which must be considered before its use 1 Advantages a It is a very rapid method of lay It may be used immediately upon occupation and only one command 15 required to lay the entire firing element b Minimal preparation of the position is required c The DAP can be used as an aiming point 2 Disadvantages a A DAP must be available b Line of sight to the DAP may be obscured by smoke fog darkness and so forth c Howitzers will not be laid parallel when oriented with a common deflection to an a pon except when that aiming point is on the left or right flank If the DAP is to the tint of the position the sheaf will converge If the DAP is to the rear of the position the sheaf will diverge
155. 3 1 6 23 APPENDIX G CANNON SECTION EVALUATION AND TRAINING G 1 SCOPE This appendix is an evaluation and training guide for the howitzer sections of a cannon firing battery It is universal in scope and can be adapted readily to all cannon weapon systems currently in the Marine Corps and Army inventory It may be modified by the commander to meet local requirements It may administered as follows Formally or informally With minimal administrative support e Inthe local training area e Ina nonfiring but tactical environment G 2 PURPOSE a The evaluation is a performance test of the skills that are essential to the successful accomplishment of the mission of the cannon section Although many of the tasks are evaluated on the basis of individual performance the evaluation actually measures the ability of the section to function as a team The evaluation can be used as follows e To evaluate the current state of proficiency of the section e As a competitive evaluation to determine the best section in a unit e Asa basis for a howitzer gun crew training program in preparation for a formal battery or battalion training evaluation b The tasks laid out in this appendix should be used as training vehicles with as much time as possible devoted to controlled practice of a task The sections should practice each task to acquire the degree of proficiency required by the standards set forth in the evaluation
156. 33 20 22 180 178 1701122 150 3600 74 25049 23034 200 233 180 182 170 125 150 370 45 2034 21 070 190119 170 130 160 50 24032 21076 190113 180115 160 _ 1 53 250 22021 20076 180114 160 400 150 25033 20 28 20 0F 203 19013 170 170 29046 250130 22 0 500 1 28036 240 265 220 189 200 550 1 es sto 39 260136 240 216 220 600 _ 26022 240 650 121 994 31036 28027 250 700 1 2 3046 310136 270 750 o S 33036 20 800 0 320 850 22171 77 34 0 9000 LLL 36 0 980 111 38 0 430006 L ene 42 0 FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 Table K 8 Rapid fire table for M109A2 A6 M198 FUZE 557 564 PROPELLANT Green Bag M3A1 RANGE CHG 5 IM ee ee ee o o e dcc ass p ww 5 c rael 7 62 2 ee _ Oe a c WB c dL a _ gt _ __ 1 8 __ et __ 45 _ 1489 2 86 5e ______ 200____ 175 9 5 10 17 19 5 de creo Mer c pr 3 ee RENDERE 90 uam 7 4 7 EE 0 _ _ euo d oio n
157. 399 2409 419 Figure 7 2 Computations for zone fire h SWEEP so many MILS so many DEFLECTIONS ZONE 50 many MILS so maniy UADRANTS commands a method 01 fire combining sweep Ire and zone fire Sweep and zone fire for firin several deflections and quadrants On the SCA the comman is displayed in the order listed above as the chief of section 7 4 presses the cycle key ihat is m DF ZmQE The chief of section fires the displayed commands for deflection and uadrant first and then fires all combinations of computed and quadrants in any order or as directed by unit SOP EXAMPLE The SCA displays FFE S 10m3DF Z 4j h3QE DF 3200 and QE 310 The chief of section computes deflections 3190 and 3210 and quadrants 306 and 314 Figure 7 3 After the displayed commands for deflection and quadrant DF 3200 QE 310 are fired each ofthe remaining quadrants is fired with each deflection for a total of 27 rounds nine deflections and quadrants multiplied by three rounds per deflection and quadrant DISPLAYED DF AND QE DF 3210 DF 3200 QE 314 QE 314 DF 3210 DF 3200 QE 310 DF 3210 QE 306 DF 3190 QE 310 DF 3190 QE 310 DF 3190 QE 306 Figure 7 3 Computations for sweep and zone fire i SPECIAL CORRECTIONS is announced or displayed on the SCA to alert the crew when a separate time deflection and or quadrant will be sent to or fired by one or more gun sections 1 The words SPECIAL CORRECTION
158. 3P rearm refuel resupply point RAAMS remote antiarmor mine system RALS right add left subtract Glossary 10 RAP rocket assisted projectile RC rounds complete BCS RDF radio direction finding rd min rounds per minute RDP range deflection protractor rearward extension of the line of fire an imaginary line extending through the center axis of the tube when looking down through the muzzle to the breech of the weapon The rearward extension of the line of fire is a line in the exact opposite direction of the line of fire REC radio electronic combat recoil rearward motion of a weapon caused by firing refer to measure using the panoramic telescope the deflection to a given aiming point without moving the tube In some instances this referred deflection will be reported If it is desired that it be recorded the command RECORD REFERRED DEFLECTION is announced referred deflection the deflection measured to an aiming point without moving the tube of the Weapon registering pes the howitzer that is designated by DC to conduct a registration fire mission remote antiarmor mine system M718 M741 projectile containing nine antitank mines The M718 and 741 perc are epe with a long and a short self destruct capability respectively rg range RJ road junction ROCKREP rocketing report ROE rules of engagement read only memory RP release point RPG rocket propelled grenade rpm revolutions per minute RSOP
159. 46 2 00 3 31 4 00 4 16 4 35 88 4 31 4 50 2 01 2 10 4 01 4 20 4 36 4 50 4 51 14 00 2 11 4 00 4 21 12 00 4 51 12 00 Longer than 14 00 Longer than 4 00 Longer than 12 00 Longer than 12 00 Note Times are minutes and seconds FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 TASK 5 Performance of the micrometer test on the gunner s quadrant 061 266 3310 Conditions After evaluating task 4 the evaluator reads the following to the howitzer chief of section BECAUSE OF RECENT FIRING INACCURACIES THE PLATOON LEADER HAS TOLD EACH HOWITZER SECTION TO PERFORM THE MICROMETER AND END FOR END TESTS ON THEIR GUNNER S QUADRANTS YOU OR ANY OF YOUR SECTION MEMBERS ARE TO PERFORM THE MICROMETER TEST AND ANNOUNCE ANY ERROR AND CORRECTIVE ACTION AFTER THE MICROMETER TEST DO NOT REMOVE THE GUNNER S QUADRANT FROM THE BREECH UNTIL TOLD TO DO SO BY THE EVALUATOR ARE YOU READY Evaluation Checklist Did the soldiers follow the correct rocedures ip performing crometer test Was the soldier able to determine if the micrometer knob was or was not in error and the action to be taken if it was 1n error Scoring If all GO ratings are awarded the score will be determined by the speed of execution Table G 6 If any NO GO ratings are awarded 0 points will be awarded Table G 6 Scoring micrometer test TIME POINTS minutes and seconds of the end for end test TASK 6 Performance 061 266
160. 5 6000 447 967 329 _ 241 1 16 6500 7000 7500 783 _ 55 48 36 145 232 800 1661 548 32 4160 25 8500 1 85 642 43 tz 284 9000 J po 461 15 309 9500 56 24 36 10000 _ 85 22 24 19500 58 420 1100 2582 212522 1 89 28 451 __ 11500 po 1371 54 _ 12000 j ee 1 329 550 12500 1 363 661 43000 pU c dj o poco a 388 Dp 709 7 5 13500 2 pou tps cp ang __ 1400 eg x45 14500 po rj 0 qe c me __ 4 15000 l iE 542 15 500 16000 660 16500 n jl X4 78459 17000 D pu oe rp a K 15 FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 Table K 16 Rapid fire table for M109A2 A6 M198 shell Copperhead all authorized propellant K 16 FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 APPENDIX L GUN DISPLAY UNIT L 1 DESCRIPTION b The following data can be displayed on the SCA The gun aspin unit links the howitzer into the BCS At e Mission each gun the GDU displays firing data and fire commands from the BCS and transmits the status of the gun to the e Special instructions BCS throughout the fire mission The GDU consists of a e Shell section chief s ass
161. 5 mm M116 HC smoke only 5155 mm M449 HE ICM M485 illum and M116A1 HC smoke only 8155 mm M1 HE M107 HE M110 WP and M110 HD gas only 203 mm M106 HE only 7155 mm M449 HE ICM M483 HE DPICM M692 M731 ADAM M718 M741 RAAMS M485 illum and M116A1 smoke only 203 mm M404 HE ICM and M509 HE DPICM only FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 APPENDIX O SAMPLE TESTS AND REPORTS O 1 SAMPLE TESTS FOR THE QUALIFICATION OF SAFETY PERSONNEL Description The qualification tests presented here are designed to be used by the commander as a guide in developing a program that fully qualifies all pne involved in firing commander may use these tests modified as required to meet local requirements to determine the level and knowledge of selected personnel concerning safety regulations and procedures Also he may use them to determine specific areas that require refresher or remedial training b Format Qualification Test I is designed for those personnel not ordinarily tasked to compute safety data for example the howitzer section chief platoon sergeant and gunnery sergeant Test II is designed for all officers and any other personnel who may be responsible for the computation of safety data At the discretion of the examiner Test I may also be given with Test II c Test Administration 1 Examinees should be allowed about 1 week to PUN for the examination During thi
162. 72 557 557 739 557 564 520 1 NL m N 1 FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 MOFA S Notes Table N 3 Cartridges fuzes permitted by the US for firing in combat 105 mm multiple option fuze artillery series Weapons are M101 M101A1 M102 and M119A1 All listed cartridges are issued fuzed Rounds should be fired with the issued fuze The XM773 fuze is projected to replace the following current fuzes beginning in 94 M564 M582 M557 M739 M739A1 M513 M514 M728 M732 M587 The M762 and M767 fuzes are projected to replace the M577 The M78 and M78A1 CP are not safety certified for peacetime use The MK 399MOD1 will replace the M78A1 series fuzes FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 Table N 4 Projectiles propellant charges permitted by the US for firing in combat 155 mm us ca oa rn ce eon m no ro se w M107 3A M107 107 M107 107 DM21 107 NM28 107 M107 M107 M3 M3 M3 M3A1 M3 M3 M3 M3A1 M3A1 DM62 M3A M3A1 M3A1 M3 M3A1 M107 107 JM107 107 DM21 M107 107 M107 1 107 M107 M4A1 M4A1 M4 4 2 4 1 4 2 M4A2 DM42B11M4A1 M4A2 4 2 M4A2 M4A1 M4A2 M110 110 M110 M3A1 M3 M3A1 M110 110 M110 M4A2 M4A1 M4A2 M116 M116 M3 M116 M116 M4A1 M485A24M485A2 1M485A2 485 2 M3A1 M3A1 M3A1 1 45 2 485 2 118 485 2 M4A2 1 M4A2 M4A2 1 Currently
163. AFCS Perform Direct Fire Using AFCS Total Points Possible 112 6 2 FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 Table B 3 Recommended grading sheet SECTION UNIT SECTION CHIEF DATE WEAPON SYSTEM POINTS TASK ACHIEVED TASK 1 Laying Using Aiming Circle NO GO 0 POINTS TIME POINTS TASK 2 Laying Using M2 Compass NO GO 0 POINTS TIME POINTS TASK 3 Laying Using DAP NO GO 0 POINTS TIME POINTS TASK 4 Laying Reciprocally NO GO 0 POINTS TIME POINTS TASK 5 Refer the Piece NO GO 0 POINTS TIME POINTS TASK 6 Aligning the Collimator NO GO 0 POINTS TIME POINTS TASK 7 Aligning the Aiming Post NO GO 0 POINTS TIME POINTS TASK 8A Boresight Pantel with Testing Target NO GO 0 POINTS TIME POINTS TASK 8B Boresight Elbow Telescope With Testing Target NO GO 0 POINTS TIME POINTS TASK 8C Boresight Pantel Using a DAP NO GO 0 POINTS TIME POINTS TASK 8D Boresight Elbow Telescope Using a DAP NO GO 0 POINTS TIME POINTS TASK 8E Boresight Pantel using Standard Angle NO GO 0 POINTS TIME POINTS TASK 9 Verifying Boresight with the M140 M 139 Alignment Device NO GO 0 POINTS TIME z POINTS TASK 10A Fire Mission NO GO 0 POINTS TIME POINTS TASK 108 Fire Mission NO GO 0 POINTS TIME 5 TASK10C Fire Mission NO GO 0 POINTS TIME POINTS B 3 FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 Table B 3 Recommended grading sheet continued SECTION UNIT SECTION CHIEF DATE WEA
164. AL MIGAS BAY Ls e om ss m is 3 9 Dis pna p 8 26 L8 ps s 28 39 39 Fs pus ce par qu 122 288 35 36 Le m pw x erm o 292 a 35 Ls m m re s mew x Ls pe cm 298 34 202 so 9 102 s 1 25 so _ Le ane p c os oe 5 4 4 _ s s 9 _ 4 ze a e _ 2 w rete o fa p a M e s e a ez S p e por p e 2 e 2516 5 28 m o o m mele 4 ss o a L2 m a u _ eepe E 3m 1 a n aues ws s Ln m 25 4 4s 59 n o a _ a saja S e 252 _ e e 255 s 4 _ se 155 es s o v 158 es 6 so e 2 s Note Measure M16 rifles from the top of the butt to the en
165. AMC on the SCA Other special instructions such as high angle use gunner s quadrant azimuth or zone and or ve fire will be displayed as digital readout in the window of the SCA when the special instruction ke of the SCA is depressed When voice commands are used the FDC must announce the special instruction s to be followed The FDC will precede a special instruction with the words SPECIAL INSTRUCTIONS When more than one special instruction applies restrictive commands should be announced first a DO NOT LOAD is a restrictive fire command that prohibits loading and mng The section may charge and fuze 1 apical and lay the howitzer or deflection and set the quadrant elevation or loading elevation 1 Digital Double bars are lit under DNL on the SCA When the round is to be fired the double bars under FIRE on the SCA are lit and the audible alarm sounds The section chief announces CANCEL DO NOT LOAD QUADRANT so much The howitzer is fired at the section chief s command unless otherwise restricted 2 Voice The command from the FDC would be so many ROUNDS special instruction DO NOT LOAD To fire the rounds the FDC commands CANCEL DO NOT LOAD QUADRANT so much This command allows the guns to load if not otherwise restricted by special instructions The target number may be used in place of the command QUADRANT to allow loading and firing of preplanned targets and scheduled fires D NOT LOAD
166. ATA GUAMOTRF x Select U endline UPDATE FU OPM x Select endline Weapon System Displays weapon REV1 Ix system module identification Any weapon may be used endline a Forsteps 5 8 default values are displayed If data are correct pressendlineandproceedtothenextstep Otherwise enter new data as required Azimuth of lay deflection and propellant temperature are not used in the computation of a graphic traverse Note Universal transverse mercator UTM coordinates long coordinates are preferred however short coordinates may be entered if within the MAPMOD For this procedure orienting station ORSTA is considered the start point for the traverse Toinput selectl endline Enter OS start point easting endline Enter OS start point northing endline Enter OS start point altitude endline b Note that the ORSTA starting point data have been Select endline 5 23 FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 DISPLAY ACTION TAKEN c OrientingstationB ORSTB isnotusedforthisprocedure If ORSTB has been previously entered in the BUCS select and endline to return to the UPDATE FU index IfORSTB hasnotpreviouslybeenstoredintheBUCS NOORSTB IP will appear Press endline and go to step 14 The following Steps are used to compute the traverse fieldwork _ UPDATE FU OPM Select P endline d computer already contains grid coordinates for a howitzer number used in the graphic traverse
167. AX QE LEFT LIMITS MIN QE STAND ARDS ADJ PIECE SHELL 2 PRIORITY TARGETS PRIORITY DESIG SPINSTR Ros sH Lor rz m DF i EXE POSITION CORRECTIONS SECTOR DFCORR QE CORR PRIMARY _ a MH as LEFT _ DA FORM 5212 R May 83 5 ONIHLYON 15 NOLLV LS SNILN3IHO 88 1 869S WHOS 00 9 WNS 4 0079 12 1815 TNO ZIN CASN SI H38IAN 41 0026 Gav OLZV dG dOV U3ZLIMOH NOIL23133d 30 OL HLNWIZV auld 2 500VvL s jueuodoud 991 05 9 995 SIU jo esn 104 NOILVO2OT1 NOdV3M LH9IN 30 945 QOGVUL s zuauodosd y 05 9 WJ ees 5 esn 10 4 AONVY H3ZLIMOH 88 6695 WHOJ VG FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 REFERENCES SOURCES USED These are the sources quoted or paraphrased in this publication AR 385 63 Policies and Procedures for Firing Ammunition for Training Target Practice and Combat 15 October 1983 FM 101 5 1 Operational Terms and Symbols 21 October 1985 Ott General David E Vietnam Studies Field Artillery 1954 1973 Was
168. Acquire copper wire WF 16U NSN 6145 00 910 8847 for use with the GDUs b Gun Assemblies for Deflection and Quadrant There must be enough slack in wire lines for shifting trails Otherwise wires or assemblies may be damaged c Grounding 1 The case assembly on a howitzer must be properly grounded according to TM specifications Otherwise the 9 8 system will malfunction especially in wet weather or in early morning dew 2 All wires and cables must be installed according to exact TM specifications d Switchboard Use Do not use an SB 22 or a similar device that a male end metal connector Use a TM 184 or TM 125 type of terminal device e GDU Power for Towed Unit For GDU power use a plug in device to connect with the prime mover Do not use a clamp connector to the vehicle dor since this will damage or destroy batteries and or the GDU f Mounts All locally fabricated mounts should be inspected by comm technicians for proper power hookup and grounding g Wire Setup Within the Position 1 A loop wire system from BCS to GDUs does not work The vast and continuous amount of traffic in the system causes a loop to overload and malfunction or the guns will receive improper data FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 2 Failure to waterproof lines at the point of connection may cause loss of digital communications in wet weather The plug in terminal strip for GDU lines can be permanently mounted in a waterproof amm
169. BER OF VECHICLES FOR WHICH A MOVEMENT CREDIT IS REQUIRED NATION __ FR GE GR IT LU NL TU UK US Number of Peacetime 20 31 20 20 31 1 10 22 10 Jio t 5 vehicles Wartime 20 31 20 20 31 1 10 20 10 10 1 5 6 LEGEND BE Belgium Luxembourg CA Canada Netherlands DA Denmark Norway FR France Portugal GE Germany Turkey GR Greece United Kingdom IT Italy United States 2 29 FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 ANNEX D TO STANAG 2154 Edition 6 NATIONAL MARKING OF COLUMNS AND LEGAL RIGHTS Country BE and DA 1 Hagging See 6 b Minimum lighting and flagging 2 Lighting See 6 b Minimum lighting and flagging 3 Legal rights None Country GE 1 Flagging a Columns of three or more vehicles are to be marked by flags vehicles except for the last vehicle display a blue flag The last vehicle displays a green flag b If a column is separated in several independent elements and if the distance between the last vehicle of the following element exceeds the distance ordered between the individual vehicles each element of the column is to be marked by flags according to the provisions for a column 2 Lighting Also during the day the headlights of all vehicles moving in column must be on 3 Other provisions In order to warn the following rapid traffic on highways and freeways the last vehicle ma
170. BY ALTERNATE METHODS 4 16 4 21 M2 COMPASS METHOD 4 16 4 22 AIMING POINT DEFLECTION 4 17 4 23 HOWITZER BACK LAY METHOD 4 18 4 24 ESTABLISHING AIMING POINTS 4 19 FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 4 25 SAFETY AND VERIFYING THE LAY OF THE PLATOON 4 20 4 26 MEASURING VERTICAL ANGLES 4 21 4227 MEMORY AIDSia cei X ehe S ec eI 4 22 Section VI MEASURING AND REPORTING 4 24 4 28 2 84 doe eat Re beue de ep eta 4 24 4 29 BACKWARD AZIMUTH RULE 4 24 4 30 REPORTING THE CORRECT DEFLECTION 4 24 4 31 MEASURING THE AZIMUTH OF THE LINE OF FIRE 4 24 4 32 CORRECTING BORESIGHT ERROR 4 26 4 33 TRAINING xu dx oe ae oS Dues e ae ale 4 27 CHAPTER 5 HASTY SURVEY TECHNIQUES Section SURVEY CONTROL gt we Re Seldom eeu Em RON Er 5 1 ST REQUIREMENTS ese eee ie ae ae d e re e EN 5 1 5 2 ELEMENTS OF SURVEY CONTROL 5 1 Section 11 DIRECTION pop E UE am ele OE TERR asa UK ice boe 5 2 5 3 SIMULTANEOUS OBSERVATION
171. Bury the wire collimator and improve with vegetation Become familiar with displacement route s Selected members continue camouflage and prepare alternate position Supervise preparation of alternate position Continue to improve camouflage Brief personnel on displacement route s alternate position and signals to be used Help at individual and defensive positions Help at supplementary position Supervise improvement of equipment protection Supervise preparation of individual and defensive position Take cover mask and or vest as necessary Continue the mission while awaiting signal to displace Displace as per prior instructions 3 8 FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 Section III DEFENSE DIAGRAM 3 12 PURPOSE The defense diagram portrays the position area with respect to the azimuth of fire The diagram shows the osition area all section positions all defensive positions findi din sectors of fire TRPs and adjacent units and key terrain It is a key tool to ensure there is a defense l n which can provide 6 400 mil coverage necessary or the battery Also this diagram is sent to battalion and is used to develop a battalion defensive fire support plan 3 13 CONSTRUCTION OF THE DIAGRAM There are different methods for determining the location of different points for the defensive and construc
172. CCUPATION 2 12 2 18 LIMITED TIME PREPARATIONS 2 15 2 19 NIGHT 2 15 2 20 SECTION CHIEFS 2 16 Section V TACTICAL MARCHES es 2 18 2 21 METHODS OF MOVEMENT 2 18 2 22 OPEN 2 18 2 23 GEOSE COEUMN ixi Urb ew a 2 18 2 24 2 19 2 25 TERRAIN 2 19 Section VI PREPARING FOR MOVEMENT 2 20 2 20 ORDERS a og Rusia ndash TEN Sen xe RUE e EP Se 2 20 2 27 LOAD PLANS eto ae a d Ue Sp meh EP Pots 2 20 2 28 MOVEMENT PREPARATIONS 2 20 2 29 ORGANIZATION OF THE COLUMN 2 20 Section VII CONDUCTING THE 2 21 2 30 MARCH DISCIPLINE 2 21 2 31 CONVOY CONTROL MEASURES 2 21 2532 HALTS stu RR S WS RO qus bbs dedos 2 22 2 33 MARCH COLUMN CONTINGENCIES 2 22 2 34 OTHER MOVEMENTS
173. Chapter 9 Keep the battalion TOC and battery personnel informed k pees and execute the overall battery defense plan Chapter 3 1 Supervise safety during battery operations and conduct risk assessment m Develop the battery standing operating procedure FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 CANNON BATTERY BATTERY HEADQUARTERS SUPPLY FOOD SERVICE MAINTENANCE SECTION SECTION SECTION FIRING BATTERY COMMUNICATIONS NBC SECTION SECTION FIRING BATTERY HEADQUARTERS HOWITZER SECTION FIRE DIRECTION AMMUNITION CENTER SECTION Figure 1 2 Battery based cannon battery FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 1 16 FIRST SERGEANT The 156 is the principal enlisted advisor to the battery commander His responsibilities may include the following Supervise the chief of firing battery and gunnery sergeant and whenever possible maintain a presence on the gun line b Assist and advise the BC during reconnaissance and selection of the battery position c Assist the battery commander in the development and execution of the overall battery defense Plan Chapter 3 Note In a USMC Ra the local security chief plans and executes overall battery defense d Coordinate administrative and logistical support less ammunition to include water and food service mail laundry showers maintenance and evacuation of personnel and equipment Chapter 12 e Supervise the health care welfare and sanitation of battery personnel
174. E ADVANCE PARTY 2 1 DEFINITION AND REQUIREMENTS Reconnaissance selection and occupation of position ensures the rapid and orderly movement to and occupation of a firing position On the battlefield a sophisticated enemy can locate and engage a p in various ways To survive we may have to move often Frequent movement however reduces responsiveness it necessitates greater reliance on other batteries to assume the mission during displacement To minimize movement time all key personnel must be able to do the reconnaissance selection organization occupation and movement tasks quickly and efticiently The key to a successful RSOP is discipline and team effort Reconnaissance is the examination of the terrain to determine its suitability for use in accomplishing the mission 2 2 CONSIDERATIONS A continuous and e reconnaissance is essential to timely and accurate fire support The BC or his representative must continually perform this reconnaissance and plan ahead to meet any contingency The BC must have a clear understanding of the tactical situation of both friendly and enemy forces while planning and executing any movement The headquarters controlling the movement of the battery directs the essential elements of the movement when where and how The BC will advise the controlling headquarters of any factors to be considered in determining the essential elements of the move 2 3 RECEIPT OF THE ORDER The battery commande
175. EN 529 eso o o T eee 20 65 p FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 Table K 3 Rapid fire table for M101A1 M513 fuze PROPELLANT M6 PIECE TO CREST CHG 1 CHG 2 CHG 3 CHG 4 CHG 5 CHG 6 CHG7 RANGE EL Tl EL T EL TI EL Ti EL L EL TIE 10 6 66 580 62 80460 80 15 55 80 _ 2 5 80152 amp 80 48 4 804 8018 3 50 26 90125 23 80151 22 8013 2 60 27 _ 901 214 9 0 46 8 0 ___700 ___ 224 __100 206 9 0 203 100 185 90 168 150 138 amp o 30 900 26 110126 10014 100 465 90 45 90 144 9015 80 100 233 1 029 11014 100163 10 0 1422 90 126 1 20 12020 140119 110116 1003 1710014 90 17 80 21200 259 12028 120 196 14011607 110 144 100 20 13025 120202 1201172 11 0 145 10011 100 100 90 147 1 11 10019 90 190 24 14 0 255 130276 130140 12 0 149 1101122 71009 100 339 15 0 156 120 190 35 160 28 150 246 140 20 13011460 120118 1109 100 21900 170139 160126 150125 140115 130110 1209 110 2 000 387 170 323 X 160 266 15 0 214 14 0 167 130113 120 100 110 226 14 0 200 47 190 99 17027 16024 150184 7140113 130 105 250 59 210 415 190 30 180 258 160 2600 649 210 49 200138 180 274 17025 15 01 158 140 115 130 293 180 119 16017 150110 1430 290 73 24052 220 38 200 302 18 0 225 160111 15011
176. ENT Battery Commander Vehicle with radio map compass binoculars chemical detection equipment M8A1 M256 and Driver kits M8 paper and IM 93 and IM 174 radiac meter or radiac set AN VDR 2 GPS if available Map grid sheet overlay paper coordinate scale and protractor The 1SG supervises mine detector operations if applicable Vehicle with radio map compass binoculars aiming circle TA 312 DR 8 with RL 39 and chemical detection M8A1 M256 M8 paper and radiac equipment IM 93 174 or radiac uired GPS if available NVGs as needed POC or FDC Guide TA 312 DR 8 with RL 39 OE 254 M17 plotting board tabular firing tables TFTs subtense Gun Guides Compass marking stakes with tape TA 312 DR 8 with RL 39 hammer and panoramic telescope marker two flashlights with extra batteries Communications TM 184 or MX 155 TA 312 and DR 8 with RL 39 Representatives FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 Table 2 2 Primary duties of advance party personnel PHASE PHASE PHASE Battery Conduct map reconnaissance Select platoon position areas Supervise Commander Select primary and or alternate Select azimuth of fire if not given occupation by routes and checkpoints Direct emplacement of survey control if the platoons Determine platoon order of survey support is available or perform march hasty survey Brief platoon leaders GSGs Select trains location if trains are not
177. GE NATURE OF CREST METERS SITE TO CREST PIECE TO CREST RANGE NATURE OF CREST METERS SITE TO CREST PIECE TO CREST RANGE NATURE OF CREST METERS MAX QE LEFT DF LIMIT RIGHT DF LIMIT PROPELLANT TEMPERATURE SENSITIVE ITEMS PART AMMUNITION STATUS FOR 105 HOWITZERS YES or NO PROJECTILES LOT LOT LOT LOT LOT LOT LOT LOT LOT LOT LOT LOT ILLUM 9 9 9 8119 91 19114 REMARKS DA FORM 5969 R 90 PART Il AMMUNITION STATUS FOR 155 MM HOWITZERS PROJECTILES PROPELLANTS FUZES LOT M3A1 GREEN BAG M577 M565 M110 LOT LOT LOT LOT e s M119A1 CHG 8 WB M582 M732 T LOT LOT T M119A2 CHG 7 RED BAG M728 M577 LOT LOT M203 CHG 85 RED BAG LOT LOT LOT M203A1 CHG 8S RED BAG PRIMERS DPICM LOT ILLUM ADAM LOT LOT LOT HAAMS LOT REMARKS LOT SMK LOT WP M825 LOT PART Ill AMMUNITION STATUS FOR 203 HOWITZERS PROJECTILES PROPELLANTS FUZES L L 5 olo g ojja 9 4 ajja 9 911 Ie e LE ao o RAP e id en kj o LOT LOT LOT REMARKS PRMERS REVERSE DA FORM 5969 R 90 GUNNER S REFERENCE CARD For use of this form see FM 6 50 The proponent agency is TRADOC AZ OF LAY DF TO AC DIST TO AC DF TO COLL DF TO SAFETY CIR DF TO AP DF TO DAP RIGHT LIMITS M
178. HOWITZER BACK LAY METHOD a Normally the howitzer back lay method of lay will be used during an a fire mission It should only be used if the grid azimuth and aiming point deflection methods are not possible An M2 compass and an aiming circle are the only equipment needle b The steps for the howitzer back lay method are as follows D Determine the azimuth of fire by using the BCS or LCU hip shoot procedures or scale it from a map after plotting the target and the proposed firing position 4 18 2 Mark the azimuth of fire with stakes and tape 3 Ensure adjusting piece positions are alongside SP or over towed the marked azimuth all other howitzers are on line Ensure the aiming circle is emplaced in the left rear of the position area 4 FDC announces firing data to the adjusting piece and the first round is fired 5 The instrument operator on the aiming circle commands NUMBER so and so adjusting piece IS LAID NUMBER so and so piece REFER AIMING POINT THIS INSTRUMEN 6 The adjusting piece gunner announces NUMBER so and so IDENTIFIED DEFLECTION so much The instrument operator sets the referred deflection on the upper motion of the aiming circle With the lower motion he sights on the pantel of the piece The 3200 line on the aiming circle is now parallel to the howitzer tube after firing the first round He then lays the remaining howitzer
179. ICLE MOVEMENT BY ROAD TERMS AND DEFINITIONS 2 Terms and Definitions used for the purpose of this Agreement a Column A group of vehicles moving under a single commander over the same route at the same time in the same direction b Organized Element Marching groups convoys packets STANAG 2155 refers Movement Number Number allocated to a movement by the movement control staff responsible for the issue of a movement credit The movement number should comprise 1 Two figures indicating the day of the month on which the movement is due to commence 2 Three or more letters indicating the movement agency issuing the movement credit the first two letters being the national symbols of the movement agency see STANAG 1059 8 Two or three figures indicating the serial number of the movement 2 25 FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 4 One letter to identify the element of the column this is optional Example below 1 5 NL 4 1 D d Special Movement Road movement of vehicles equipment with or without load which requires movement credit because of class dimension or movement restriction based on national requirements e Trail Officer A subordinate commander in each column who travels at the rear of the column His duties are to be determined by the column commander His duties may include 1 Reporting type and location of dropped out vehicles 2 Organizing the safety measures at the rear of th
180. IN and will end when the gunner states that the howitzer is boresighted wem Ta poe 6 50 3 1 6 23 Scoring a Standards of precision B 2 were met If applicable b Correct steps were followed to complete the task c If steps a and b were not followed soldier recieves a NO GO and 0 points If soldier received a GO on steps a and b use the chart below to determine score Se 2 4 3 1 B 13 FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 TASK 8C Boresighting the howitzer pantel using a DAP 061 266 2005 Conditions The soldier will be piven a ed in the firing osition Bubbles will be level and special corrections on The cannon tube will be aligned on the DAP but the antel will be aligned 10 mils off the DAP Boresight will e 5 mils off and the cover will be on the detent shaft if applicable The soldier will be given the tools needed to ah ust the sight The soldier positions himself and announces when ready The examiner will say BEGIN Time The time will start when the examiner says BEGIN and will stop when the gunner states that the howitzer is boresighted Scoring a Standards of precision B 2 were met If applicable b Correct steps were followed to complete the task c If steps a and b were not followed soldier recieves a NO GO and 0 points If soldier received a GO on st
181. IRING is announced followed by the corrected element and all subsequent elements 7 22 FIRING REPORTS The section chief reports to the FDC all actions that affect the firing of his weapon in support of the battery mission During firing the following specific reports are made FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 When the special instruction DO NOT LOAD has been commanded by the FDC the section chief reports LAID NUMBER so and so This report is sent when the charge and fuze if applicable have been prepared he howitzer has been laid for deflection and the quadrant or loading elevation has been set b When the special instruction AT MY COMMAND or BY PIECE or BY ROUND AT MY COMMAND has been commanded FDC the section chief reports by voice READY NUMBER so and so This report is sent when the section is ready to fire in compliance with the fire command The report is sent digitally by pressing the READY key on the SCA c voice operations SHOT NUMBER so and so is reported after each round has been fired If however the method of fire is more than one round SHOT is announced only after the initial round For GDU equipped howitzers the ed is sent digitally when the section chief presses the SHOT RC key once on the SCA d ROUNDS COMPLETE NUMBER so and so is announced when the final round designated in the method of fire has been fired If however only one round is to be fired ROUNDS COMPLETE wil
182. LARS left add right subtract LAW light antitank weapon M72A2 or AT4 laying process of orienting a weapon for direction LCU lightweight computer unit LED light emitting diode LIC low intensity conflict Glossary 7 FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 lightweight computer unit the AN GYK 37 field artillery fire direction computer Replaces the BCU as the computer component of the BCS line of fire the direction of the line established by the tube or any line parallel to that line in the firing battery It is an imaginary line extending through the central axis of the tube when looking through the breech to the muzzle of the weapon LOF line of fire LOGPAC logistics package LP listening post LRP logistics release point LU Luxembourg LZ landing zone m meter yh mil MA muzzle action magnetic declination the smaller angle between true north and magnetic north This angle is indi cated in the marginal data of maps as east or west of true north Since the magnetic decli nation varies slightly from year to year a cor rection factor the annual magnetic changes is also shown in the marginal data of military maps magnetic north the direction to the magnetic North Pole MAMT muzzle action mechanical time fuze MAPMOD map modification mnemonic max maximum MCCRES Marine Corps combat readiness evaluation system medium artillery 120 mm through 160 mm bore met meteorology METTAL memory aid mission enemy terrain
183. LIMIT RIGHT DF LIMIT PROPELLANT TEMPERATURE 288 2810 YES or ITEMS YES or amp M2 COMPASS SERIAL 1486 LOST LAST POSITI Figure 2 8 Sample section chief s report front 2 16 FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 PROJECTILES ESTE TECHN 751124 t MENBSSBOLOTRADEK 5 mem LE quer 68 56 Ec que I 000 NER DER MN 18 24 Ty cor Ronee ae CC ee E ee 34 P or uu LE ____ 579 2 MINIMI MN ____ jter uer tor ___ ST O c cd E RENE Figure 2 9 Sample section chief s report reverse FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 Section V TACTICAL MARCHES 2 21 METHODS OF MOVEMENT A tactical march is the movement of a unit or elements of a unit under actual or simulated combat conditions There are several methods of moving the platoon in a tactical configuration Each method has its specific advantages and disadvantages The BC or platoon leader decides which method or combination of methods is best The methods discussed in this section are open column close column infiltration and terrain march 2 22 OPEN COLUMN The open column road movement is used for daylight movements when there is an adequate road network that is not overcrowded when enemy detection is not likely when time
184. LITTLE DIPPER AUG 5 FACE NORTH AND HOLD THE z CHART IN FRONT OF YOU SO DELTA URSAE MINORIS THAT THE CURRENT MONTH IS FACING NORTH THE ES CONSTELLATIONS ARE NOW AS gt 43H CEPHI THEY WILL APPEAR DURING gt THAT MONTH AT 2200 HOURS x T x SEE HOW THEY WILL x ps APPEAR EARLIER TURN THE CHART CLOCKWISE FOR A QU SEIS LATER TIME TURN IT COUNTERCLOCKWISE ONE EN P QUARTER TURN WILL Sy POLARIS INDICATE HOW MUCH THE POSITIONS WILL CHANGE wt DURING A 6 HOUR PERIOD doy THE POINTERS CASSIOPEIA Figure 5 2 Star locations b For rough orientation of the aiming circle the operator first sets the declination constant on the upper motion and centers the magnetic needle with the lower motion Next he determines his latitude to the nearest degree from a map and converts it to mils by multiplying by 18 He then sets this value on the elevation scale of the aiming circle This should place his line of sight very close to Polaris As instrument operators become more proficient at identifying Polaris through an aiming circle they can eliminate this orientation procedure c To establish the orienting line the horizontal clockwise angle from Kochab to Polaris is measured Then the true azimuth is extracted from the appropriate table and the true azimuth is converted to a grid azimuth The steps for establishing direction by observing Polaris are as follows 1 Measure the angle
185. MCWP 3 16 3 FM 6 50 TTP for the Field Artillery Cannon Gunnery U S Marine Corps PCN 143 000004 00 FOREWORD This publication may be used by the US Army and US Marine Corps forces during training exercises and contingency operations General USA Lieutenant General USMC Commanding Commanding General Training and Doctrine Command Marine Corps Combat Development Command FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 PREFACE This publication is designed primarily for the cannon battery It is a how to train manual intended to provide general guidance to the and his poa subordinates It is designed for battery leaders and should be used in conjunction with equipment technical manuals Marine Corps combat readiness evaluation system MCCRES Marine Corps individual training standards ITS Army training and evaluation program mission training plans AMTPs soldier manuals and trainer s guides This publication sets forth duties and responsibilities of key personnel and addresses doctrine and procedures for cannon battery operations and training It is based on current tables of organization and equipment TOE and provides a starting point from which each commander can adjust his battery operations and training based on his modification tables of organization and equipment actual personnel and equipment till local training scenario and mission enemy terrain troops and time available MEIT T This publ
186. MING 4 4 4 5 DECLINATING THE AIMING CIRCLE 4 5 4 6 CARE AND HANDLING OF THE AIMING CIRCLE 4 6 Section II PRECISION LIGHTWEIGHT GPS RECEIVER 4 6 4 7 GLOBAL POSITIONING SYSTEM 4 6 4 8 FA SURVEY 5 4 6 4 9 GPS LIMITATIONS AND CONSIDERATIONS 4 8 SECTION GUN LAYING AND POSITIONING SYSTEM 4 8 4 10 DESCRIPTION OF THE GUN LAYING AND POSITIONING SYSTEM 4 8 Section IV THE 2 ak x REX um Sed Sa RUE RS US 4 10 4 11 DESCRIPTION OF THE 2 COMPASS 4 10 4 12 DECLINATING THE M2 COMPASS 4 10 4 13 MEASURING AN AZIMUTH AND SITE TO CREST WITH THE M2 COMPASS 4 11 4 14 CARE AND HANDLING OF THE 2 COMPASS 4 11 Section V LAYING UE 4 11 4 15 PRINCIPLES OF 4 11 4 16 PROCEDURES FOR LAYING 4 12 4 17 LAYING BY ORIENTING 4 13 4 18 LAYING BY GRID AZIMUTH 4 14 4 19 5 4 15 4 20 LAYING
187. Mils speed 409 6 400 speed 6 400 6 400 Maximum Left Traverse 100 6 400 400 6 400 Mils speed 6 400 speed 6 400 6 400 6 400 Recoil Inches Maximum Charge High Elevation Maximum Recoil Inches Maximum I cU 4 5 B ES 2 FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 CALIBER AND MODEL 105 mm HOW M119A1 TOWED SP Mils per tum of Handwheel ravers Type of EET Vehicle Vehicle Trails Bow shaped Split spade spade spade Spring Spring Spring HP telescope M137A1 M12A7S M113A1 M137 M117 M117A2 M117 AFCS Telescope mount M187 M21A1 M134A1 M171 M146 Elbow telescope M90A2 M16A1D M114A1 M138 M118CA1 M1 quadrant M187 M4A1 M14A1 M17 M18 mM Approximate operating weight mp 9 55 000 2 and 53 940 A3 3 170 mas 62 960 Length traveling feet and inches 16 folded 19 8 21 10 EE 11 30 11 18 Width traveling feet and inches 10 folded 76 6 4 9 2 10 4 10 4 Height traveling feet and inches 4 6 folded 5 2 53 115 Time to lay minutes MTP 2 30 Maximum rate of fire rd min first three Sustained rate of fire rd min 3 3 3 Prime mover Helicopter Helicopter 21 2 ton Helicopter 21 2 ton truck M1037 Mod truck HMMWV 5 ton truck manual 1 2 5 m LEGEND E automatic fire control aa 7 sliding SN BG
188. N 1 COUNTERFIRE ACTION SERIAL TARGET ACCURACY TARGET TIME FIREO NUMBER NUMBER The accuracy OESCRIPTION Against hostile Each if the to which the Dimensions target location weapon or wespon was m that is activity has i located CEP 1 Radius of PROJECTILES produced previously in meters target by a been given and the Target length locating a target means and width in unit is number it location if meters given will be i possible serial entered number here DA FORM 2185 R 1 APR 90 Conforms with STANAG 2008 Edition of 1 May 78 1 obsolete Figure J 11 Completed DA Form 2185 R FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 APPENDIX K MINIMUM QUADRANT ELEVATION RAPID FIRE TABLES K 1 DESCRIPTION OF THE TABLES These rapid fire tables include all the elements of the leader s XO s minimum QE discussed in Chapter except Angle 1 site to crest Separate tables are included for each weapon fuze propellant combination The value listed for elevation in all tables is the sum of the TFT elevation two forks Angle 2 and the comp site factor for the vertica angle of site for 300 mils angle of site The tables are valid only when the sum of Angle 1 and Angle 2 appropriate vertical clearance is 300 mils or less If the sum is greater than 300 mils you must compute the data as shown in Chapter 6 To expedite the of determining angle 2 Table K 1 is provided Table K 1 Angle 2 Quick Reference Guide
189. NATION OF DIRECTION CRATER ANALYSIS LOW ANGLE FUZE QUICK CRATERS ARTILLERY LOW ANGLE FUZE DELAY CRATERS ARTILLERY HIGH ANGLE SHELL CRATERS MORTARS ROCKET CRATERS APPENDIX K MINIMUM QUADRANT ELEVATION RAPID FIRE TABLES DESCRIPTION OF THE TABLES APPENDIX L GUN DISPLAY UNIT FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 1 13 SMALL UNIT TRANSCEIVERS L 13 1 14 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE 2 2222 2 L 14 APPENDIX M SELECTED CHARACTERISTICS OF FIELD ARTILLERY CANNONS APPENDIX N INTERCHANGEABILITY OF AMMUNITION GENERAL 3353 aere cos ds do sib S Ota a ra N 1 N 2 TRAINING N 1 Ness COMBAT sace Bok at Rd N 1 APPENDIX O SAMPLE TESTS AND REPORTS O 1 SAMPLE TESTS FOR THE QUALIFICATION OF SAFETY PERSONNEL O 1 O 2 HANDS ON SAFETY CERTIFICATION 12 O 3 VERIFICATION CHECKLIST O 21 GLOSSARY Glossary 1 REFERENCES e p eni yas a eret Mi blue dE RR ELS References 1 INDEX 5 4 PS ad tee 1 E xiii FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 23 DECEMBER 1996 By Order of the Secretary of the Army DENNIS J REIMER T General United States Army Official Chief of Staf
190. NNER ARE YOU READY GO Evaluation Checklist Were the breechblock obturator group and ae mechanism as applicable disassembled in accordance with the appropriate operator s manual Scoring If a GO rating is awarded the disassembly will be graded according to Speed of execution Table G 4 If a NO GO rating is awarded 0 points will be awarded for this task FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 Table 4 Scoring breech mechanism disassembly momom os _____ ess Note Times are in minutes and seconds 36 12 TASK 4 Assembly of breech mechanism See appropriate tracked tasks Conditions After evaluating task 3 the evaluator should read the following to the chief of Section and the section member s previously selected for disassembly of the breech ASSUME THAT YOU HAVE REPAIRED THE MALFUNCTION IN THE BREECH MECHANISM AT THIS TIME YOU WILL BE EVALUATED ON YOU ABILITY TO REASSEMBLE THE BREECH MECHANISM TO ITS ORIGINAL CONFIGURATION YOU READY GO Evaluation Checklist Was the breech mechanism properly assembled in accordance with the ae appropriate operator s manual Scoring If a GO rating is awarded the assembly will be graded according to speed of execution Table G 5 below If a NO GO rating is awarded 0 points will be awarded for this task Table G 5 Scoring breech mechanism assembly 4 01 4 30 1
191. NTS a Common survey reduces the amount of survey error between fire units Although the survey may contain errors survey related error is considered to be constant Common survey is required to accurately mass fires Normally accurate survey data are provided as time and the tactical situation permit However sometimes accurate survey data are not available Errors in firing due to a lack of survey control can be eliminated by registration However registrations may not be possible or practical due to security and ammunition considerations Consequently battery supervisors must be proficient in the use of the hasty survey techniques described in this chapter Thus they can provide their own survey control effectively mass fires and deliver effective unobserved fires b If accurate survey data are not available the procedures described in this chapter will enable firing units to establish acceptable survey control 5 2 ELEMENTS OF SURVEY CONTROL a The three elements of survey control are direction location and altitude 1 Direction This is the most important element of common survey The inherent error is directly related to the range to each target The mil relation formula states that 1 mil of error in direction at 1 000 meters will result in a lateral deviation from the target of 1 meter EXAMPLES A1 mil error at 10 000 meters will result in a deviation from the target of 10 meters A 10 mil error at 10 000 me
192. OI 18 SINCGARS Pop off operation Mates with protects connector ON199138 Rear Panel Connectors J2 amp J3 Provide access for serial data ports external power external antenna Integral Antenna Flip up swivel compact storage facilitates optimum view angle while receiving satellite signals Figure 4 8 Precision lightweight GPS receiver PLGR 2 Datum Map datum should be the same as the operational datum being used by all other maneuver fire and target acquisition units If the same datum is not used significant position errors are possible 9 Coordinates The UTM coordinate format is referred since it is the standard used by survey and most ire control systems 4 Elevation Mean sea level is the preferred selection n most military maps use it as the basis for the elevation scale 5 Units of measurement Meters is the preferred selection since most military maps refer to distance and elevation in meters 4 7 FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 6 Almanac data Almanac data must be 1 day old If almanac data are not 1 ay old there are possible satellite vehicle or timing errors nof noted by the PLGR b Figure of Merit FOM FOM is an accuracy estimation of the data displayed E the PLGR which ranges from one through nine 1 is the best accuracy estimation displ yed by the system and FOM 9 is the worst For artillery positioning only coordinates determined with a 1 will be considered for u
193. ON CORRECTIONS a The digital link between the BCS and the GDUs will at some point fail to function The problem may be in the BCS one or more of the GDUs or the wire line When the failure occurs voice fire commands must be transmitted to one or more of the howitzers If the failure is at the BCS voice commands must be transmitted to each of the howitzers Therefore it is important that TGPCs be computed These corrections as a minimum should be computed for the primary left and right sectors b TGPCs provide acceptable effects within the transfer limits for which they are produced TGPCs can be produced either manually or with the BCS or LCU Presently there are two methods of producing TGPCs with BCS or LCU see the applicable job aids for step by step procedures Calculate data for the center of the transfer limit for all howitzers in the firing element during peacetime range to center of impact area in wartime center range for the particular charge From the data derived calculate the difference in time deflection and quadrant of one of the howitzers and the rest of the firing element FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 EXAMPLE Number 1 is used as the base weapon 1 2 3 4 Time 22 2 22 4 22 1 22 2 Deflection 3204 3201 3199 3196 Quadrant 405 421 396 408 TGPCs to be announced to the firing element are 1 Time 0 Deflection Quadrant 2 Using a converged sheaf calculate data to the center of trans
194. ON AND GENERAL ORGANIZATION 1 1 quis Sd ER We REDIERE AE E eias 1 1 4 2 FIELD ARTILLERY ORGANIZATION 1 1 4 3 COMMAND AND CONTROL OF BATTERIES 1 1 Section CANNON BATTERIES PLATOON BASED FIELD ARTILLERY BATTALIONS 1 3 1 4 _ ORGANIZATION uto dag AU Be edo ee ee d d d rede ee dod 1 3 1 5 TACTICAL DUTIES OF KEY PERSONNEL 14 1 6 BATTERY COMMANDER 14 1 7 FIRST SERGEANT 1 4 1 8 PLATOON LEADER a EAE E des ABS 14 49 FIRE DIRECTION OFFICER 1 5 1 10 PLATOON SERGEANT gt ee dee 1 5 4 14 GUNNERY 1 5 1 12 HOWITZER SECTION 1 5 DISTRIBUTION RESTRICTION Approved for public release distribution is unlimited This publication supersedes FM 6 50 20 November 1990 MARINE CORPS PCN 143 000004 00 FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 Section III CANNON BATTERIES IN BATTERY BASED FIELD ARTILLERY BATTALIONS 1 13 1 14 TACTICAL DUTIES OF KEY PERSONNEL 1 15 BATTERY 1 16 FIRST SERGEANT 1
195. Once these areas are analyzed any information considered pertinent should be sent back to the firing unit Radio traffic must be carefully monitored to ensure that information does not compromise unit movement i Hip shoots Administrative instructions a Ammunition b Fuel c Food d Maintenance Command and communications platoon leader s and FDO s b CFB sor platoon sergeant s location c BC s location Battalion or battery headquarters location Other locations Signals 1 Unblocked ambush 2 Blocked ambush 3 Air attack 4 Hip shoot 5 NBC attack 6 Artillery attack 7 Radio Figure 2 1 Movement order format FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 Section II SELECTING THE NEW POSITION 2 13 POSITION SELECTION CONSIDERATIONS The BC selects a battery position or two firing platoon osition areas and the battery trains area if needed Once he general areas have been determined the gunnery sergeants conduct the detailed RSOP of their respective position areas and select alternate and supplementary positions Position selection considerations are discussed below a Mission This is the most important consideration The position must facilitate tire throughout the maximum area of the supported maneuver force b Communications position must facilitate communications with stations within assigned and monitored radio nets c Defilade Defilade is protection from enemy ob
196. P gear inventoried and accessible All nonessential equipment stowed and covered Survey teams identified and rehearsed Antidote kits on hand Rehearse buddy aid procedures Review hasty decon procedures Report completion or problems to pit sgt pit Idr Unmasking procedures Platoon PMCS and emplace M8 alarms Rehearse NBC reaction drill and teams Check BOC plotting CMDS and reporting NBC hazard sites to all leaders Rehearse contaminated Medevac Coordinate deliberate decon plan with battalion Map with dirty routes in Medevac vehicles Check BOC has all MOPP sizes for reorder Extra filters and expendable NBC supplies on hand 9 paper Hasty decon team identified Table C 5 Artillery raid PCC Section Ammunition loaded IAW mission Conduct map recon of routes and positions Brief route to all personnel Recovery plan briefed and understood Targets briefed and rehearsed with FDC All vehicle fuel tanks topped off Conduct PMCS on vehicles and howitzers Movement formation plan rehearsed Do threat PCC for likely threat Check all NVGs night sights and lighting devices in section color Report completion or problems to the pit sgt plt Idr Platoon Recon at least by map route and position and brief leader s plan in detail IPB of position with the S2 Verify recovery plan Rehearse Medevac plan Take mission essential vehicles only Verify survey plan for unit and radar Plan and track required logistical support
197. PON SYSTEM POINTS TASK ACHIEVED TASK 10D Fire mission NO GO 0 POINTS TIME POINTS TASK 10E Fire mission NO GO 0 POINTS TIME POINTS TASK11A Direct Fire NO GO 0 POINTS TIME POINTS TASK 11 Direct Fire NO GO 0 POINTS TIME POINTS TASK11C Direct Fire NO GO 0 POINTS TIME POINTS TASK 11D Direct Fire NO GO 0 POINTS TIME POINTS TASK 12 Laying the Howitzer for Quadrant with the Range Quadrant NO GO 0 POINTS TIME 5 TASK 13 Measure the Quadrant with a Range Quadrant NO GO 0 POINTS TIME POINTS TASK 14 Initialize the AFCS NO GO 0 POINTS TIME POINTS TASK 15 Prepare for Firing Using the AFCS NO GO 0 POINTS TIME 5 TASK 16 Conduct Fire Missions Using the AFCS NO GO 0 POINTS TIME POINTS TASK 17 Perform Direct Fire Using the AFCS NO GO 0 POINTS TIME POINTS TOTAL POINTS B 4 B 7 TASKS TASK 1 Laying a howitzer for initial direction of fire using the aiming circle 061 266 2004 Conditions Soldier is given a howitzer in the Mn osition with the cannon tube 50 roils off the azimuth of fire and at loading elevation unit SOP Bubbles will be level and special corrections are 0 An assistant examiner will operate the aiming circle which will be located 50 meters to the left front of the howitzer Soldier positions himself as gunner and announces when ready assistant examiner commands NUMBER 1 ADJUST AIMING POINT THIS INSTRUMENT DEFLECTION
198. RC 68 or AN PRC 126 with vehicular power an amplifier power supply OG 174 is required OG 174 allows the AN PRC 68 or AN PRC 126 to be mounted inside a vehicle interfacing with the vehicle intercom It provides an external antenna Figure 9 8 3 Once the AN PRC 68s or AN PRC 126s are connected to the BCS and GDUs in the FDC and howitzers respectively the Battery CF Net can be used to pass digital traffic between the FDC and the howitzer sections Once quality digital communications is established voice Emu ions should be discontinued and all headsets may e removed 9 5 AN PRC 68 AND AN PRC 126 PLANNING CONSIDERATIONS The AN PRC 68 or AN PRC 126 can be employed in a variety of tactical p lications However limitations sometimes make it less than ideal Therefore wire communications should always be established if logistics time and tactical constraints permit The AN PRC 68 or AN PRC 126 with OG 174 gives the FA cannon battery or latoon the capability to transmit digital as well as voice communications Without the OG 174 the PRC 68 or AN PRC 126 is used routinely for voice communications only in the hand held mode The following planning considerations are provided for use of the SUT a The battery comm chief can set the AN PRC 68 or AN PRC 126 internally on one base frequency frequency change will be a time consuming process Therefore units should request a fixed sole user ftequency to be incl
199. REMARKS Class IX C 4 CRITICAL EVENTS TIME LINE Table C 13 Sample time line Table C 13 is an example time line of critical events to Critical Events determine how much time is available and to schedule the Bn brief battery s preparation for combat Remember to schedule appropriate events during daylight that are difficult to conduct nig t if time permits BC s recon survey linkup Advance party ready to roll Rehearsal Battery warning order C 5 BATTERY WARNING ORDER PCCs complete Table C 14 page C 6 is a sample battery warning order to IPRTF FIRECAP NLT focus the commander s initial mission preparation and to Move NET allow his unit to begin preparation even before completing the plan A good warning order directs actions rather than simply passing information Move NLT R3P LOGPAC C 5 FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 Table C 14 Sample battery warning order WARNO Situation Enemy Reg bde faces the following enemy forces Size Current threat air ground recon Future Friendly Reg bde offense defense LD or ready to defend FA bn critical fire support tasks CFST Task 1 BON Battery Mission Execution Battery critical fire support tasks CFST Task 1 gt 5 Conduct the following PCCs in priority Complete NLT _ _ 1 2 3 4 5 FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 Table C 14 Sample battery warning order WARNO continued Movement Instructions Time line
200. Rehearse security plan Rehearse action on the objective Table C 6 Copperhead CPHD PCC Section Cphd trainer on hand e Execute dry fire mission and round inspection IAW plt Idr s time line e Inspect CPHD IAW 10 Verify and record powder temperature IAW Idr s time line e Set up M90 to capture MVV receive expected MV from FDC e Verify PRF code with FDC e Rehearse extraction procedures and check equipment Report completion or problems to sgt plt Idr Establish Cphd time line from trainer rehearsal to RFT time e Bump BCS to BCS ASAP reverify after met or other changes Verify PRF code with observer Verify angle T is less than 800 mils Confirm observer location Verify GT range is less than 16 400 meters Check OT range is less than 5 000 meters stationary or 3 500 meters moving e Check prop temp by comparing with prop temp across the gun line Compute manual MVV for Cphd from DA Form 2408 4 and the FT 155 AS 1 e Check met schedule against planned hit time to have current met and time to rebump data Conduct tech rehearsal with observer Table 7 FASCAM PCC Section e FASCAM distributed IAW guidance report number of RAMMs and ADAMs e Correct fuzes and powders on hand lots reported to FDC Ammo loaded IAW plan shoot from ground ammo vehicle or gun e Conduct full up rehearsal Be prepared to move out if survival m
201. STAKE SET HERE INITIAL STRAIGHT PORTION USED STAKE SET HERE FURROW e 4 DIRECTION MEASURING INSTRUMENT Figure J 4 Ricochet furrow method b Mine Action This occurs when a shell burst beneath the ground Occasionally such a burst will leave a furrow which can be analyzed in the same manner as the ricochet furrow A mine action crater which does not have furrow cannot be used to determine the direction to the weapon J 11 HIGH ANGLE SHELL CRATERS MORTARS In a typical mortar crater the turf at the forward edge the direction away from the hostile mortar is undercut The rear edge of the crater is shorn of vegetation and grooved by splinters When fresh the crater is covered with loose earth which must be carefully removed to disclose the firm burnt inner crater The ground surrounding the crater is streaked by splinter grooves that radiate from the point of detonation The ends of the splinter grooves on the rearward side are on an approximately straight line This line is perpendicular to the line of flight if the crater is on level ground or on a slope with contours perpendicular to the plane of fire A fuze tunnel is caused by the fuze burying itself at the bottom of the inner crater in front of the point of detonation Three methods may be used to determine direction from a mortar shell crater the main axis splinter groove and fuze tunnel methods a Main Axis Method The four steps to determine direction
202. Scoring Conditions Continuation of task IIB soldier a Standards of precision B 2 announces when ready The examiner commands LEFT were met If applicable 10 ADD 100 b Correct steps were followed to Time The time starts when the examiner states ADD 100 complete the task and stops when the gunner states FIRE If steps a and b were not followed soldier recieves NO GO and 0 points If soldier received a GO on steps a and b use the chart below to determine score TIME IN SECONDS POINTS aC EM 8 1 DN was oe 25 FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 TASK 11D Conditions Continuation from task 11C The soldier announces when ready examiner commands LEFT 15 DROP 100 Time The time will start when the examiner states DROP 100 and will stop when the gunner states FIRE B 26 Scoring a Standards of precision B 2 were met If applicable b Correct steps were followed to complete the task c If steps a and b were not followed soldier recieves a NO GO and 0 points If soldier received a GO on steps a and b use the chart below to determine score FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 TASK 12 Scoring Lay a howitzer for quadrant with the range quadrant a Standards of precision B 2 Conditions The soldier is ma a howitzer in the firing position with the cannon tube at 0 mils eleva
203. Standards of precision B 2 were met If applicable b Correct steps were followed to complete the task c If steps a and b were not followed soldier recieves a NO GO and 0 points If soldier received a GO on steps a and b use the chart below to determine score 6 FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 TASK 3 Scoring Lay a howitzer for initial direction of fire using a distant a Standards of precision B 2 aiming point 061 266 2003 were met If applicable Conditions Soldier is aem a howitzer in urn po un b Correct steps were followed to with the cannon tube 50 roils off the azimuth ot fire and complete the task at loading elevation unit SOP Bubbles will be level and n db special corrections at 0 The soldier positions himself as PT a Sa NOGO unner and announces when ready The examiner commands de T rdc aN d UMBER 1 ADJUST AIMI POINT NAME OF and 0 points d a Xon OBJECT AND LOCATION DEFLECTION 00009 on steps a and b use the chart below to determine score Time Time will start on the last digit of the deflection of the initial command Time will stop when the examiner states that number 1 is laid 5 TIME IN SECONDS POINTS a IE m mm mm a __ x ome 3m Pe o umo iere rt c 2 B 7 FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 TASK 4 Scoring Laying an
204. TIC NORTH Figure 3 8 Machine gun range card 6 50 3 1 6 23 b Once the range cards are collected by the platoon sergeant they are used in constructing the sectors of fire on the defense diagram The result is a completed defense S ram with all pertinent data for the platoon defense Figure 79 N a STINGER OP AT GRID 8085 2599 SCALE 1 5 000 MAP SHEET NUMBER UNIT 2 1 1 171 DATE 12 AUG 90 SIGNATURE PAESE 83 0 LEGEND medium SP artillery Claymore trail T light machine gun us wirehead t heavy machine gun A OP LP Notes Unit shown is 155 mm SP platoon See FM 101 5 1 or STANAG 2019 for military symbols used in defense diagrams Assistant gunners on all machine gun positions should be armed with M203 grenade launchers to cover the dead space A 3x 6 platoon based organization would have one less howitzer than the figure depicts Figure 3 9 Completed defense diagram 3 16 FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 Section IV CONDUCT OF THE DEFENSE 3 16 DEFENSE AGAINST ENEMY ARMOR MECHANIZED FORCE a If an enemy armor or mechanized force detects the battery or its platoons the enemy can be expected to take the following actions 1 Tanks may assault in an attempt to breach or overrun the firing battery positions 2 Threat assault vehicles will maneuver to good standoff fighting positions to fire antitank gu
205. TIONS FOR THE MOVEMENT INCLUDE THE BEFORE OPERATION CHECKS AND SERVICES ON THE CANNON AND PRIME MOVER CARGO CARRIER Evaluation Checklist noco Did the section have all section equipment installed or stowed in accordance with all applicable manuals and unit loading plans Were all necessary items on hand for performing the before operation checks and services on the canhon and prime mover or cargo carrier tor example basic issue items operator s manuals with changes lubrication orders with changes DA Forms 2404 or 5988E cleaning materials and logbooks Were the headings of two DA Forms 2404 or DA 5988 completed properly for the conduct of a daily inspection on the cannon and primer mover or cargo cartier Did the chief of section use all crew members present to inspect both the cannon and the prime mover or cargo carrier in accordance with the TM Did the section inspect each item listed in the Before column of the due maintenance checks and services PMCS tables of the operator s manuals for the cannon and primer mover or cargo carrier Jid the section correct al faults iscovered that they were authorize to correct in accordance with the PMCS tables and troubleshooting tables of the operator s manuals for the cannon primer mover or cargo carrier G 6 Did the section use DA Forms 2404 or DA 5988E to list all faults that they were not able to correct and that wer
206. The platoon sergeants and sergeants will be evaluated on the tasks listed in Table O 4 The howitzer section chiefs will be evaluated on tasks listed in Table O 5 and the chief computer and or fire direction specialists will be evaluated on the tasks listed in Table O 6 4 Howitzer sections will be given a series of dry fire missions which they will be required to process Durin these missions the howitzer section chiefs will be evaluate on their ability to determine if the commands sent are safe to fire The section chief will have his section members pm their individual tasks during fire mission processin o verify proper procedures are being used See paragrap c below 5 There are 17 errors that may occur on the howitzer if the howitzer is not checked before every round is fired Those errors will cause a fining incident They must be revented by the safety NCO who safes the weapon before iring A safety NCO that overlooks any one of these 17 possible errors will eventually fire an unsafe round FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 Table O 2 Battery commander tasks Declinate the aiming circle by using an established or field expedient declination station 2 Orient the aiming circle by using both grid azimuth and orienting angle methods Verify the azimuth to EOL Measure the azimuth 5 Lay platoon using the M2 compass method and distant aiming point method Perform hasty survey Conduct a two leg directional traverse
207. U FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 EXTERNAL POWER VIEW J5 oe INPUT POWER SCSI TCIM REAR VIEW COMM COMM TO WIRE LINE CHNL 4 CHNL3 ADAPTER NOT USED On On ee TCIM RIGHT VIEW INTERNAL TCIM REAR VIEW J INTERNAL TCIM WIRE LINE ADAPTER TO GDU Figure 9 4 Wire and radio connections to the LCU c All wire lines should be identified b taggin them individually at each end as outlined in TC 24 20 and at each stake This facilitates the wire system Wire tags should be prepared and labeled in accordance with the unit signal operating instructions 501 and SOP 9 4 BATTERY RADIO NET STRUCTURE The firing battery in a direct support DS battalion operates in two external radio nets and one internal radio net Figure 9 7 page 9 7 shows the battery i ao net structure Listed below are the radio nets in which the battery operates and a description of how each net is used a Battalion Command Cmd Net FM Voice This is secure net used for command and control and for intelligence information The battalion bn operations and intelligence 9 4 O amp I element is the net control station NCS The battery commander first sergeant platoon leaders platoon sergeants platoon FDCs and the ammunition sections operate in this net b Battalion Fire Direction Nets FB1 FD2 FD3 FM Digital These are tactical fire direction
208. VE Figure J 8 Typical shell 6 FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 Note With the exception of the rotating bands and band seats or the tail fins different types of shells may be identical in one dimension such as wall thickness but seldom will be alike in two or more dimensions Therefore it is necessary to obtain two or more measurements to make a positive identification 60 MM MORTAR HIGH EXPLOSIVE 81 MM MORTAR HIGH EXPLOSIVE FIN ASSEMBLY SH GAS CHECK 4 FINS BAND 4 FIN ASSEMBLY BAND 4 4 FINS ROTATING BAND SEAT 2 INCHES 3 17 32 3 17 32 INCHES INCHES INCHES Figure J 9 Shell fragment and tail identification US ammunition FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 82 MM PROJECTILE DIAMETER 30 79 DIAMETER Note All dimensions are in millimeters To convert to inches multiply millimeters by 0 03937 7 62 6 60 119 41 DIAMETER Figure 10 Other nations ammunition 1 8 FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 122 MM PROJECTILE 6 INDENTATIONS PER CENTIMETER 19 84 19 43 12 95 62 59 39 62 DIAMETER 121 74 DIAMETER 120 57 DIAMETER 121 74 DIAMETER ed 124 77 pud DIAMETER DIAMETER 94 41 152 MM PROJECTILE 2 03 4 06 1 02 6 10 14 zm 2 03 3 05 6 INDENTATIONS PER CENTIMETER DIAMETER DIAMETER 150 88 nyt 4 155 96 DIAMETER 128 02 DIAMETER Figure J 10 Other nations ammunition continued FM 6 50 MCWP
209. WP rounds except for the M825 and M825A1 should be stored upright on their base at all times The filler of these rounds will melt at a temperature of 111 4 F As a result the filler shifts and the ballistic characteristics of the rounds change The WP shell should be in an area free of any combustible materials and away from other ammunition if possible This also applies to the 825 projectiles 10 6 FUZES a The specific fuzes available for each weapon are discussed in the technical manual for the weapon b Fuzes are sensitive to shock and must be handled with Care c Before fuzing a round inspect the threads of the fuze and fuze well for cleanliness and serviceability d The fuze should be screwed into the fuze well slowly until flush with the nose of the projectile Using the M16 or 8 fuze wrench as back the fuze up re quae turn then snap the fuze wrench back to secure the fuze e After tightening the fuze ensure that there is no gap between the nose of the projectile and the fuze If a gap exists remove the fuze from the projectile and segregate both from the ammunition Premature detonation may occur if a fuze is not properly seated 10 4 f A projectile fuzed with a time fuze should not be lifted with a hand around the fuze A slip of the hand might change the fuze setting g Normally fuzes containing superquick elements should not be used during rainstorms or hailstorms They may detonate if
210. XXXX Time Time will start on the last digit of deflection of the initial command Time will stop when the assistant examiner states that number 1 is laid FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 Scoring a Standards of precision B 2 were met If applicable b Correct steps were followed to complete the task c If steps a and b were not followed soldier recieves a NO GO and 0 points If soldier received a GO on steps a and b use the chart below to determine score TIME IN SECONDS POINTS 4 3 Score Example M101A1 howitzer If the soldier performs Task 1 in 29 59 seconds he scores 4 points If the soldier performs Task 1 in 50 59 seconds he scores 1 point B 5 FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 TASK 2 Lay a howitzer for initial direction of fire using the M2 compass 061 266 2003 Conditions The soldier is given a howitzer in the firin osition The cannon tube is 50 roils off the azimuth of ire and at loading elevation unit SOP Bubbles will be level and special corrections at 0 An assistant examiner will be at the M2 compass located 10 meters to the left front of the howitzer The soldier positions himself as the gunner and announces when ready The assistant examiner commands NUMBER 1 ADJUST AIMING POINT THIS INSTRUMENT DEFLECTION XXXX Time Time will start on the last digit of the deflection of the initial command Time will stop when the assistant examiner announces that number 1 is laid Scoring a
211. a system located in the fring battery onsists of three major components light weight computer unit power distribution unit and 1 to 12 gun display units Used to compute accurate firing data and as a digital communications interface For additiona information see ST 6 40 2 battery operations center a facility established to serve as an alternate FDC and as the battery command post Glossary 2 BB basebleed BC battery commander BCS battery computer system BD base detonating fuze BDAR battlefield damage assessment and repair BE Belgium or base ejecting BG box grinder BII basic issue item BMO battalion motor officer BMT battalion maintenance technician bn battalion BOC battery operations center BOMREP bombing report the process by which the optical axes of the weapon sights are aligned parallel to the axis of the cannon tube primary methods of boresighting are the distant aiming point the testin aret or standard angle Boresight is verified with the M140 M139 alignment device BSA brigade support area BSOC battalion support operations center btry battery BUCS backup computer system CA Canada or case assembly cal caliber caliber 1 The diameter of the bore of a weapon obtained in rifled weapons by measuring be tween o uu lands 2 Diameter of a pro jectile 3 Unit of measure used to express the length of the bore of a weapon The number of calibers is determined by dividing
212. a and b were not followed soldier recieves a NO GO and 0 points If soldier received a GO on steps a and b use the chart below to determine score TASK 16 Conduct a fire mission using the AFCS Conditions The soldier is given a howitzer at loading elevation The soldier positions himself as the chief of section and announces when ready The examiner has a digital call for fire transmitted to the AFCS Time The time starts when the fire mission is received at the AFCS and stops when the howitzer is laid on the target M109A6 TIME IN SECONDS POINTS 20 1 22 0 FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 Scoring a Standards of precision 2 were met If applicable b Correct steps were followed to complete the task c If steps a and b were not followed soldier recieves a NO GO and 0 points If soldier received a GO on steps a and b use the chart below to determine score 31 FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 TASK 17 Perform direct fire using the AFCS Conditions The soldier is given a howitzer aligned on the azimuth of fire and out of travel lock The soldier is shown which target he is to engage and an assistant examiner will be provided to lay for deflection The soldier positions himself as the chief of section and announces when ready The examiner will state BEGIN Time The time will start when the examiner says BEGIN and will stop when the soldier states SET M109A6 TIME IN SECONDS POINTS 20
213. a reconnaissance of possible observation posts to provide for early warning to execute hasty displacements or the activation of howitzer direct fire and or tank killer teams e He must make a reconnaissance of the position area for supplemental positions for howitzer direct fire and or tank killer teams e He must make a reconnaissance to determine if the postion provides adequate defilade and terrain masking c Terrain and Weather The BC and or platoon leaders must analyze the routes to be used by the unit assets and the time and distance required to make the move The ability to move one firing platoon while keeping the other in position and firing is critical to the platoon based operations and the accomplishment of the battery mission Moving the battery over long difficult routes requires well planned coordinated movement orders and unit SOPs The effects of the weather on the terrain to be crossed must be analyzed to facilitate rapid movement Weather affects visibility fog haze and trafficability ice rain softened ground d Troops The current troop strength and level of training must be considered The mission may not change but the troops available to accomplish it will As the other factors of METT T vary so will the number of troops necessary 2 3 FM 6 60 MCWP 3 1 6 23 to perform the mission Because of casualties and these varying conditions adjustments must be made during the planning phase e Ti
214. a rocket impacting with a low or medium angle of fall is analyzed in the same manner as an artillery crater resulting from a projectile armed with fuze quick However if the rocket impacts with a high angle of fall the crater is analyzed in the same manner as a crater resulting from a mortar round The tail fins rocket motor body and other parts of the rocket may be used to determine the caliber and type of rocket fired TO MORTAR DIRECTION MEASURING INSTRUMENT TOP VIEW SIDE VIEW Figure 7 Fuze tunnel method FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 J 13 SHELL FRAGMENT ANALYSIS weapon may be identified as to type and caliber from shell fragments found in the shell crater Dimensions of the parts as well as of the complete shell vary according to the caliber and type of shell A typical shell is shown in Figure J 8 a Duds and Low Order Bursts The most logical means of identifying the caliber of a projectile is to inspect a dud of that caliber However since a dud may not always be available or if available may be too dangerous to handle a low order burst is the next best means of identification When the explosive filler is incompletely detonated a low order burst occurs and large shell tragments result Such large pieces can be used to identify thread count curvature wall thickness and other information not obtainable on smaller fragments See Figures J 1 and J 8 b High Order Burst A high order burst normally
215. accurate predicted tire a priority more al discussion of the five requirements is in g Teamwork There are few tactical activities which require more teamwork than an emergency occupation Everyone drivers gunners relays chiefs must know his job and do it Remember engines will Sp running and if success depends on a leader shouting commands and directives to untrained personnel the mission will surely fail 2 40 SUSTAINING ACTIONS Once the occupation is completed and the unit is ready to answer calls for fire sustaining actions begin They are continuous and done in the priority determined by the BC or platoon leader These actions may include the following e Improve position defense plans e Improve camouflage e Bury and overhead wire lines e Harden critical elements e Perform maintenance Rehearse reaction forces e Conduct training e Resupply all classes of supply e Complete position area survey e Be prepared to march order e Improve the technical solution to meet the five requirements for accurate predicted fire b Care must be taken in the way ammunition is resupplied and vehicles are refueled particularly in SP units These FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 activities can reveal the location of the battery If possible these tasks should be done at night c The advance party should always be prepared to leave at a moment s notice 2 41 TRAINING TIPS a During combat a
216. ailed to catch the error The round was fired out of safe resulting in a fatal injury 1 The 5 operator and FDO failed to review the firing data before sending the commands to the firing battery 2 The howitzer crew failed to verify the firing commands against the safety T b During a live fire exercise involving an M109A3 howitzer battery a howitzer misfired The primer had fired but there was no ignition of the propellant The Number 1 crewman stated It s just the primer let me get it As he stepped behind the breech the cannon fired The recoiling tube caught the Number 1 man in the chest and threw him to the rear of the cab Also fire from the breech recess engulfed the cab burning several crewmen The round fell short just inside the buffer zone 1 The crew was not properly trained on misfire procedures 2 The Number 1 man had placed the charge in the owder chamber with the igniter forward failing to announce SEE RED Therefore the propellant was slow to bum D 10 INCIDENTS until the igniter was lit The M109 series weapons have breeches that open automatically when the tube 1s returned Lack of attention to detail improper supervision and failure in battery This resulted in tire escaping out of the breech to make safety checks lead to mistakes and malpractices recess D 6 FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 APPENDIX E LOAD PLANS FOR HOWITZER AMMUNITION This appendix provides loading guidance f
217. aining pieces of the platoon Fach gunner identifies the aiming point and receives his deflection The deflection is set otf the tube traversed until his line of sight is back on the aiming circle and the piece is laid In the interest of time there no rechecks If the initial target location was goo and if the platoon leader accurately laid out the azimuth tape the second volley may well be fire for effect e aiming point is established for each weapon platoon sergeant should remain at the aiming circle during the firing of the mission in case a weapon must be re laid or the lay of the platoon needs to be refined platoon leader using his M2 compass should visually check the gun line to ensure that there is no gross error in the lay of the weapons 4 24 ESTABLISHING AIMING POINTS a During deliberate and hasty occupations after the battery has been laid the crew of each piece sets up the collimator and or emplaces aiming posts before the tube is moved The deflection at which the aiming points are established is recorded by each gunner The direction in which the battery is initially laid and the COPIE common deflection are used 25 references from which the FDC can derive firing deflections for future targets 4 19 FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 Note For further discussion on aiming points see paragraph D 4 b The collimator is the primary aiming point and is placed 4to 15
218. aken Some planning 2 Ammunition for an M102 M119 raid may be hand carried on the aircraft combat only Ammunition for an M198 raid may be strapped to the firing platform combat only or suspended from the howitzer in an A 22 bag 3 A mixture of HE W P and ICM provides excellent munitions effects for a raid 4 An M198 raid may include FASCAM and DPICM 5 Eme data can be precomputed and given to the XO before he leaves the PZ He may want to distribute the data to the section chiefs on the PZ If PADS is available for the mission and digital communications can be established between the LZ and the caret FDC firing data can be computed after accurate weapon location information is sent to the FDC 6 When determining LZ location the highest charge ossible should be planned to increase standoff range owever if charge 7 is used M102 mission time is increased because all eight stakes must be driven in the firing platform 7 Security elements to accompany the raid should be requested from the infantry Attack helicopters should fly cover and provide SEAD especially if the raid is out of range for triendly artillery fires 9 The number of howitzers taken forward on the raid is determined by target analysis munitions effects tables aircraft availability and desired damage criteria F 5 FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 10 In preparation for an M102 M119 raid in which the howitzers are carried internal
219. al projectiles or boxes of projectiles 2 Do not allow smoking open flames or other fire hazards around ammunition storage areas 3 Inspect each round before it is loaded for firing Dirty ammunition can damage the weapon cause the breec not to close or affect the accuracy of the round 4 Keep the ammunition dry and cool 5 Never make unauthorized alterations or mix components of one lot with another 6 If a round has been rammed and then must be extracted return it to the battalion ammunition section The mune band or the fuze may be damaged and should not e fired 7 Leave the eyebolt lifting plug or closing plu screwed into the fue well until t dud is to be fied b Care and handling of projectiles fuzes propelling charges flash reducers and cartridge cases are discussed in paragraphs 10 5 through 10 10 10 5 PROJECTILES a Projectiles must be inspected to ensure the following conditions 1 There is no leakage of the contents 2 The projectile is correctly assembled 3 The rotating band is in proper condition If the rotating band is stained or discolored that minor deficiency can be removed with fine sandpaper or steel wool Projectiles with rotating bands which have minor dents or cuts can be fired However if dents or cuts go through the band the round should be rejected by the using unit The grommets must be secured and tight to prevent nicks and scarring of the rotating band
220. als may be lost due to other noise c Visual signals should be used to warn those personnel arriving at a particular location of an imminent azard d Apart from the audio visual signals detailed at paragraph 2 Note 2 of Annex A normal signal flares are excluded from use as color alarm signal for NBC and air attack e Visual signals need not be used by mobile forces 6 The actual form of a visual signal and method of display are left to the discretion of the local commander Only the color at Annex A is mandatory However to aid recognition it is recommended that the red signal preferably be square and the black signal preferably be triangular 3 21 FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 7 The alarm signals listed in this agreement are primarily intended to serve as alarms of enemy action be used however an emergency when friendly action could produce similar effects on its own forces 8 Conflict with civil regulations Alarm signals for use by NATO forces operating on land are in Annex There are some differences between the alarm signals prescribed herein and some national civil defense alarm signals These differences are considered minor for air attack Reservations are indicated by each nation where nations or local regulations prohibit NATO Forces o puel in their territory for sounding alarm signals in exercises and or alarm signals incompatible with the public warning system in wartime 9 Pratice alarm signals n tho
221. and weather troops available aircraft available load requirements METT T mission enemy terrain troops and time MG machine gun Glossary 8 materials handling equipment MHL manufacturer s hairline mil a unit of measurement for angles There are 6400 mils in a complete circle min minimum minimum quadrant elevation 1 The lowest quadrant elevation of a weapon at which the projectile will safely clear an obstacle between the weapon and the target 2 The lowest quadrant elevation of a weapon at which the projectile will reach the minimum range line of an impact area before detonation min QE minimum quadrant elevation mod modified MOFA multiple option fuze artillery MOPP mission oriented protection posture MORTREP mortar bombing report MRE meal ready to eat MSR main supply route MST minimum safe time MT mechanical time MTOE modification tables of organization and equip ment MTP mission training plan MTSQ mechanical time superquick MV muzzle velocity mvr maneuver MVV muzzle velocity variation modification work order NATO North Atlantic Treaty Organization NBC nuclear biological chemical NCA National Command Authority NCO noncommissioned officer NCOIC noncommissioned officer in charge of NCS net control station ND nondelay fuze NEO noncombatant evacuation operations NET no earlier than NFA no fire area NFL rule memory aid for correcting displacement when using aimin
222. and GDU The AN PRC 68 or AN PRC 126 or other VHF FM radio can be connected to the case assembly thus dispensing with wire to the GDU Cables W33 or W34 are used for the signal and W34 or W34A are used for power See TM 11 7440 283 12 2 and paragraphs 9 4 and 9 5 of this publication Note A 3 x 6 platoon based organization would have one less howitzer than the figure Figure 9 9 Positioning for platoon based battery using one BCS 9 9 FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 CHAPTER 10 AMMUNITION 10 1 REFERENCES The combination of current and developmental ammunition With that being developed makes it essential that battery supervisors on the latest changes The following references will help them a TM 9 1300 251 20 Table 3 2 gives detailed information on ammunition component inspection criteria Chapter 3 explains how to correct any deficiencies noted Appendix M indicates what maintenance the crew and ammunition sections are authorized to perform b TM 43 0001 28 gives detailed characteristics of primers poe propellants and fuzes It includes combination and compatibility charts for all artillery weapons and ammunition components c TM 9 1300 206 gives detailed information on complete precautions for handling artillery ammunition d The operator s manual for the weapon system gives information on the ammunition authorized for use with that system e Appendix M to this publication outlines characteris
223. and attached to the poate terminal and green wire or ground wire attached to the negative terminal FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 e Use electrical ring crimp on connectors to connect the cable to the terminals on the electric plug connector Use a short piece of wire or cable scrap to fill in the extra hole in the Satta connector Finally seal both holes with RTV GE silicone caulk b Location of the GDU on various howitzers is shown in Figures L 11 through L 1 T eed S ALTERNATE n rere LOCATION Ds ASSEMBLY ASSEMBLY Figure L 11 Gun assemblies on M101A1 105 mm howitzer L 11 FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 QE GUN ASSEMBLY QE GUN ASSEMBLY ALTERNATE LOCATION Figure L 14 Gun assemblies on M119A1 105 mm howitzer L 12 L 11 SELF PROPELLED HOWITZER POWER SOURCE a When vehicle power of the SP howitzers is used firing data can be lost This can happen when the 5 horsepower electrical motor is started that is when the loader rammer is being used the vehicle is started or the master switch for the cab is turned on The result is that all seements of the SCA assembly are lit causing a wagon wheel effect on the display window This problem can be solved with the appa onon of a MWO All new GDUs will have this MWO already applied b Until your GDUS are retrofitted this problem can be avoided or minimized by announcing the fire commands before operating the loader rammer
224. ange limits d to compare the announced fire commands with the minimum range limits 23 Which of the following constitutes an unsafe act a failure to swab the powder chamber after each round of seperate loading ammunition b failure of the chief of section to announce ON THE WAY c failure of the gunner to announce READY 24 Who is authorized to announce CHECK FIRING a platoon leader only b safety officer only c chief of section or gunnery sergeant only d anyone noticing an unsafe condition 25 How long may a round remain chambered in a hot tube before it should be fired or removed from the weapon a 1 minute b 2 minutes c 5 minutes d 10 minutes Part 3 Completion 26 How are white phosphorus projectiles stored Explain why 27 VT fuze does not seat properly in the fuze well what actions should be taken 28 Describe the method for placing out safety aids 29 Which of the following diagrams illustrate correct sight pictures Indicate your answer by placing an X in the appropriate spaces provided below 1 _ 2 _ 3 _ b 1 _ 2 _ 3 _ 4 _ FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 an a gt 3 A NN um DN S 30 List the actions taken in the event of a misfire on M109A2 A4 howitzer cold tube charges 2 through 8 Note 31 through 33 are based on the safety T diagram shown below which was computed for charge 4 O 3 FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 DF LIMITS 268515
225. anger areas are computed piece displacement factors are included In pu all weapons must be located within a 200 meter radius of a firing point marker or a grid location Otherwise an extended front must be requested Consult local range regulations to determine restrictions of this type D 6 USING THE M139 OR M140 ALIGNMENT DEVICE TO VERIFY BORESIGHT a Boresighting is the process 2 which the optical axis of the weapons sights libe pantel and the elbow or direct fire telescope are aligned parallel to the axis of the cannon tube When this condition exists the tube can be oriented arallel to the azimuth of tire upon occupation of a position hus a target can be engaged with both indirect and direct ire b When alignment devices were originally developed it was intended that be used to boresight This was desirable because DAPs are not always available and transporting testing targets into a tactical environment is not practical However several problems have since surfaced which invalidate using an alignment device as a boresighting evice e Cross hairs in the alignment devices shift e Locking lever wears and or loosens c Because of the above problems the M139 or M140 should be used only to verify or check boresighting performed by other methods d When fire control alignment tests it is important that comparison tests be performed with the alignment devices to verify their accuracy D
226. ant gunner read back the deflection and quadrant The section chief can recall specific parts of the fire command by depressing the appropriate key on the SCA See Appendix L b Voice Fire Commands Voice fire commands are used by units without BCS or in the event the equipment fails to function properly To facilitate the use of voice commands the FDC will provide the fire command standards to the section chief when the unit first occupies the position Fire S aS standards are discussed in more detail in paragraph c Degraded Digital Communications For BCS lupe units digital communications are the primary means for transmitting fire commands If lost or degraded communications should be reestablished as soon as possible A solution to degraded digital communications is to use the BCS purely as a technical fire direction computer and send the data by voice 1 If one howitzer in the battery or platoon loses digital communications the FDC sends voice commands to that howitzer All parties should try to reestablish the digital capability 2 If two or more howitzers lose digital communications the or platoon notifies them by voice to go to the degraded GDU mode The howitzers will ignore GDU data and take all voice fire commands 3 In the degraded GDU mode the FDC may compute data deflection quadrant from the base piece to center of target and send data to the guns by voice a If the FDC uses TGPCs these w
227. are checking the lay of one aiming circle with a second circle The operator of only one of the two circles will see red He can read red to preclude having to add or subtract 3200 to or from the reading 3 The azimuth micrometer Figure 23 is located on the azimuth knob on the lower right side of the magnetic needle housing It is graduated in 1 mil increments from 0 to 100 mils nd is numbered every 10 mils Azimuth micrometer can be read to an accuracy of 0 5 mils E Upper Recording Motion The upper motion allows the operator to place values on the azimuth scale and azimuth micrometer by means of the azimuth knob Figure 4 3 The values are read on the azimuth scale index which is located below the magnetic needle magnifier The upper motion of the instrument has both a fast motion and a slow motion Pulling back on the azimuth knob enables fast motion Rotation of the azimuth knob produces slow motion Horizontal angles are read in two parts the thousands and hundreds of mils are read from the azimuth scale and the tens and units of mils are read from the azimuth micrometer h Lower Nonrecording Motion The lower motion is controlled by the orienting knobs Figure 4 2 It is used to orient the 0 3200 line of the aiming circle without changing the values on the upper motion Lateral movement of one orienting knob enables fast movement of the lower motion of the aiming circle The two orienting knobs should be used at the same t
228. artillery is organized into medium and heavy artillery on the basis of weapon caliber a Each light artillery 105 mm 102 M101A1 or M119A1 battery has a headquarters section and six howitzer sections b Each medium 155 mm M109A2 A6 and M198 battery is organized in one of two ways 1 A platoon based unit has a headquarters and two firing platoons of three or four howitzer sections each This organization allows for platoon operations Note The M109A5 howitzer battery organic to the regimental armored cavalry squadron is designed to function independently and to perform most of its own j It is organized trained and support functions It equipped to operate in direct support of the squadron 2 A battery based unit has a headquarters section and six howitzer sections c Organization does affect employment In a unit organized with a single six gun battery the battery is employed as a single unit under the direct control of the battery commander In a platoon based unit the battery may be employed in one of the following ways e As two platoons under the control of the battery commander BC e As a single unit with the platoons merged As two separate platoons directly controlled by the battalion S3 through the BC with the battery commander poine reconnaissance selection and occupation of position RSOP and logistical support This last employment option is the least desirable It is us
229. arty division artillery DMD digital message device DNL do not load DODAC Department of Defense ammunition code DODIC Department of Defense identification code DPICM dual purpose improved conventional munitions DS direct support DTG date time group DUD an explosive munition which has failed to function due to fuze or projectile malfunction thus creating a potentially hazardous condition DZ drop zone ED emergency destruction EFC equivalent full charge el elevation emergency mission occupying a position from the march in response to a call for fire without prior reconnaissance or preparation of the position EMP electromagnetic pulse end of the orienting linea point on the orienting line marked by any sharply defined permanent or semipermanent object such as a steeple flag pole or stake It should be visible during darkness EOD explosive ordinance disposal EOL end of the orienting line EOM EPW enemy prisoner of war end of mission equivalent full charge the method used to determine the remaining life of a cannon tube To con vert to EFC rounds the quantity of rounds fired is multiplied by the EFC factor as indi cated in the weapon s technical manual Computations are recorded on DA Form 2408 4 or NAVMC 1055A gun book ET electronic time fuze EW electronic warfare F Fahrenheit FA field artillery family of scatterable mines a group of munitions or devices which contain scatterable mines del
230. as nearly identical as racticable When semifixed ammunition is fired successive rounds should be of the same lot number so that maximum accuracy is obtained When separate loading ammunition is fired successive rounds should consist of projectiles of the same lot number propelling charges of the same lot number fuzes of the same lot number and primers of the same lot number d National Stock Numbers and Department of Defense Ammunition Code National stock numbers example NSN 1320 00 529 7331 have replaced the old Federal stock numbers FSNs the old ammunition identification codes AIC and ordnance stock numbers Each item of supply has a different national stock number The first four digits of a national stock number are always the Federal supply classification FSC to which the it m belongs The next two digits identify the country of origin Continental United States for example uses 00 and 01 Some of the other ATO countries use their assigned digits such as 12 for Germany 15 for Italy and 21 tor Canada to mention a few The next seven digits constitute the national item identification number N The dash between the third and fourth digits of the NIIN serves to reduce errors in transmitting Each item has a different NIIN Department of Defense identification code DODIC is added as a suffix to the national stock number for example 1320 00 529 7331 D544 The Department of Defense ammunition code ODAC
231. ast one distant aiming point efficient organization of the test site The test site will consist MM of the following b Soldiers will use the round robin method to move from M e station to station The examiner will be the same for each 1 An in briefing station station Each examiner will have a clip board and stop 2 A chief examiner watch c The chief examiner will brief each soldier on the test site and what tasks are on each howitzer He will explain the scoring system and answer any questions 3 An examiner for each station and an assistant if required posto d test outline is shown in Table 2 A sample grading 5 An aiming circle with communications sheet is shown in Table B 3 Table B 2 Test outline POINTS SUBJECT ELEMENTS ELEMENT Laying the Cannon for Initial Direction of Fire Using the Aiming Circle 2 Laying the Cannon for Initial Direction of Fire Using the M2 Compass Laying the Cannon for Initial Direction of Fire Using a Distant Aimimng Point 4 Laying Another Cannon Reciprocally NEIN Refer the Piece 6 Aligning the Collimator Aligning the Aiming Post Boresighting the Howitzer 9 Verifying Boresight with the M140 M139 Conducting Fire Missions Direct Fire Laying a Howitzer for Quadrant with the Range Quadrant Measuring the Quadrant with the Range Quadrant Initializing the AFCS Prepare to Fire Using the AFCS Conduct Fire Missions Using the
232. ate with the battalion comm chief on matters of personnel communications security COMSEC materials equipment parts maintenance support and communications training 9 3 BATTERY WIRE SYSTEM a Presently the FA battery or platoon relies on wire to meet its infernal communications needs Three DR 8s are issued to each howitzer section so the battery can have a separate voice digital and advance party capabilities b There are changes to the wire terminals used in the battery wire system The SB 16 is no longer recommended for digital communications The terminal strip TM 184 rovides a cleaner more reliable digital signal The TM 184 NSN 5940 00 238 8493 is a class IX item and can be procured d the unit system Four TM 184s will be required to install the battery or platoon wire system One will serve as the voice wirehead one as the digital wirehead and one for an advance party capability The fourth connects battalion wire lines Two additional TM 184s are required for the second platoon in a platoon based battery 1 Advance party The advance party wire system Figure a provides immediate voice communication upon arrival of the main body between each howitzer the aiming circle and the FDC a When the advance party arrives at a new location a designated platoon representative places a voice wirehea TM 1 the position area usually near the platoon center behind the gun line This will allow personnel to
233. ately balanced and jewel mounted on a pivot to rotate freely The magnetic needle reading is taken when the bubble is centered in the circular level The lifting ELEVATION LEVEL FRONT SIGHT NEEDLE LIFTING LOCKING PIN CIRCULAR LEVEL ELEVATION SCALE mechanism includes a pass locking pin and a needle lifting lever The lower end ot the pin engages the lever The upper end projects slightly above the body of the compass to engage the cover when it is closed Thus it automatically lifts the needle from its pivot and holds it firmly against the glass window f Azimuth Scale Adjuster Assembly The azimuth scale adjuster assembly rotates the azimuth scale to introduce the declination constant Two teeth at the adjuster engage teeth on the underside of the azimuth scale Thus turning the adjuster with a screwdriver rotates the azimuth scale ap D 1 800 mils The scale is read against a fixed index under the rear sight hinge 4 12 DECLINATING THE M2 COMPASS a The procedure for declinating the M2 compass from a puri declination station free from magnetic attractions is as follows 1 Set the M2 compass on an aiming cirde tripod over the orienting station and center the circular level 2 Sight in on the known surveyed azimuth marker 3 Using the azimuth adjuster scale rotate the azimuth scale une it indicates the same as the known surveyed azimuth 4 Recheck sight picture and azimuth to the known point Once
234. ating logistics and all other operational functions normally performed by a headquarters It also serves as the alternate FDC by pondre backup fire direction capability with the lightweight computer unit or manual gunnery techniques a platoon based 3 x 6 or 3 x 8 battery the requirement for functional command and control exists at both platoon and battery levels In the platoon this requirement is met by the platoon operations center POC The POC is nothing more than the FDC with added operational responsibilities The POC is not a separate element and does not require a separate vehicle Its functions are supervised by the tire direction officer FDO Two of the functions of the POC are technical and tactical fire direction the traditional functions of the FDC Additional functions of the POC are reporting accepting and executing orders from higher headquarters Coordinating logistics and all the other operational functions normally performed by a headquarters d The BC of the platoon based battery must also provide for a single point for command and control of the battery Because the battery does not have the personnel or equipment to establish a separate BOC the BC does this i designating an element within the firing battery normally one of the POCs to perform the battery operations fiction In addition to its functions described above the designated POC handles all tactical and logistical information and pers
235. ative of the aviation element s that will provide the aviation support for the mission 1 The AMB sequence established below applies to ideal situations when adequate time is available At times the situation or the mission may preclude a formal meeting Then the AMB will consist of an exchange of information between the ground commander and the lift commanders on the pickup zone PZ 2 The recommended sequence for the brief is as follows e Brief the mission e Brief the threat and the weather light data e Brief the execution as follows Primary and alternate PZ and landing zone locations times configurations markings pathfinder support Planned fires suppression of enem air defenses and or extraction an available supporting fires Troop and equipment loads Air cavalry attack helicopter tactical air employment Abort criteria Code words e Coordinate for the following Aircraft linkup points Air control points Hand off points Downed aviator pickup points Gun target line Primary and alternate routes and penetration points to incl de deception measures Aircraft formations altitude and speed Aircraft crank time Aircraft ordnance Exchange of call signs frequencies SOI edition in effect FF information key list information and challenge and password Synchronization of watches e Mission Execution 1 Pickup zone s
236. ault operations are likely d Other Considerations Logistics resupply is hampered by reduced mobility Survey control is more difficult to establish and survey parties need more time to complete their tasks Target acquisition accuracy is degraded because of heavy foliage Whether fire base operations are used or not weapon systems should be positioned closer together to provide for better security of the battery position F 3 NORTHERN OPERATIONS Fire Support Tasks Northern operations are characterized by frozen earth snow covered terrain intense sunlight and prolonged darkness Smoke lasts longer and travels farther in cold weather however snow usually smothers the smoke canisters White phosphorus gives the desired results but the particles will remain active in the area longer and restrict use of that terrain Artillery fires may be used to start snow slides or avalanches as munitions effects multiplier b Command and Control Radio communications can be unreliable in extreme cold and equipment may become inoperative Emplacement of wire Tings is more difficult and time consuming over frozen or snow covered terrain c Positioning and Displacement Frozen snow covered terrain may limit the number of available positions for battery emplacement Mobility is slowed as wheeled vehicles and trailers are generally not suited for operations in northern areas In extreme cold metal tends to become brittle and parts breaka
237. ay not be visible during the alignment portion paragraph c above of the boresighting process 8 7 STANDARD ANGLE METHOD OF BORESIGHTING For the M101A1 the standard angle must be established during the conduct of a fire control alignment test The rocedures are outlined in the applicable weapon manuals boresight by the standard angle method do the following Establish the recoiling pare in the same relationship to the MT parts as they were when the standard angle was established b Place a pin in the left witness mark on the muzzle c Install the parallax shield d Set the standard deflection angle on the telescope e Using a tested gunner s quadrant set the standard elevation angle f Match all standard angle scribe lines If the weapon is out of boresight do not disturb the ubbles Adjust the vertical hairline onto the junction of the pin and the muzzle Note As soon as possible the boresight should be verified by a more accurate means 8 8 AIMING CIRCLE METHOD OF BORESIGHTING Set up the aiming circle approximately 30 to 50 meters in front of the weapon Figure 8 3 page 8 4 b Insert the boresight disks and strings in the cannon c With the upper motion of the aiming circle set off 0000 for M12 series sights or 3200 M100 series sights d Align the cannon bore on the aiming circle and center the cross level bubble of the pantel e With the lower motion of the aiming circle
238. azimuth of fire 5 Using the upper motion sight on the howitzer pantel d A quick check of survey data prior to la ing the is recommended time permitting and METT T dependent This check is done in minimal amount of time and with the same circle which is set up on the OS Conduct this check in the following manner 4 Confirm the location on the OS tag by map spot GPS or the most accurate means available 2 On the upper motion set off the declination constant 3 On the lower motion float and center the needle 4 On the upper motion sight in on the EOL The instrument reading should be the azimuth to the EOL 10 mils AZIMUTH OF OL 2000 AZIMUTH OF FIRE 0600 ORIENTING ANGLE 1400 AZIMUTH AZIMUTH OF FIRE OA 1400 Figure 4 15 Computation of orienting angle 4 14 EXAMPLE Laying by Orienting Angle The b ttey is being laid on azimuth 0600 The azimuth to the orienting line 15 2000 Do the following Subtract azimuth of fire 0600 from the azimuth of the orienting line This ves you the orienting angle 1400 2000 0600 1400 Set up the aiming circle over the orienting station Rote oriei the 0 3200 line along the azimuth of fire Using the upper motion set off 1400 lower motion sight on the end of the orienting line The line of sight now coincides with the orienting line Make certain that the index remains at 1400 Now the 0 3200 line of the aiming circle has be
239. being employed by the battery or platoon a After considering factors of METT T 1 What type of THREAT target acquisition assets can be identified across the FLOT for example radar sound a or flash This may influence the selection of charge s to fire 2 Is battery or platoon equipment that could be located by radio direction finding dispersed from those susceptible to detection by sound and flash or weapons locating radars M Are antennas remoted Are directional antennas used 4 What is the expected air threat 5 What is the expected counterfire threat 6 What is the expected ground threat b Does the unit display good camouflage discipline c Is battery or platoon equipment sited properly d Has natural camouflage been enhanced and man made camouflage been constructed e Is the unit using all available cover and concealment f Are the of ei ne hiding and blending of equipment within the position being applied g Is light and noise discipline being enforced during periods of limited visibility h Is track plan being enforced to limit identifiable vehicle tracks into the position i Are M 8 alarms positioned correctly H 3 ACTIVE DEFENSIVE TECHNIQUES a Listening and or Observation Posts 1 Are OPs and or LPs positioned to afford early warning 2 Are OP and or LP locations prepared 3 Do OPs and or LPs have binoculars 4 Have OPs been briefed on enemy situatio
240. ble can be fabricated locally 1 The cable can be built by using the following Class IX parts e Connector plug electric NSN 2910 00 567 0128 e Adapter connector NSN 5935 00 322 8959 e Cable power electric NSN 6145 00 643 3482 e Cable assembly power NSN 7025 01 122 2984 2 The power electric cable comes in 250 foot spools From these cables can be cut in varying lengths accordin to the needs of the unit For example about five 50 foo cables can be made from one spool so the cost can be divided by five 3 The assembly power cable is issued with each GDU but is only 3 feet long so it has to be modified at no cost to the er The connector plug on one end the GDU end is all that needs to be used on this cable 4 The total cost of each 50 foot cable will be about 55 09 5 Instructions for fabricating the cable are as follows e Remove the connector plug vu end from the GDU power cable and clean old solder from the connections e Cut the new power cable NSN 6145 00 643 3482 ne the required lengths and strip the insulation from the ends e Connect both the black and white wires of the new cable to pin B of the GDU cable connector Connect the green or ground cable to pin A of the same connector One end of the new cable will be complete e Connect the other end of the new cable to connector plug NSN 2910 00 567 0128 Make sure to observe he same polarity black and white parallel
241. bob normally remains attached to the aiming circle until the firing unit is laid 4 4 TAKING DOWN THE AIMING CIRCLE Take down the aiming circle as follows a Elevate the telescope to about 300 mils b Ensure that the magnetic needle is locked c Cover the tubular leveling vials Be sure the M51 instrument light is turned off and secured in its case d Ensure the caps of the orienting knobs are closed e Place the azimuth knob over the notation pad f Turn the leveling screws counterclockwise until the screws are to their lower stops Then loosen each leveling screw knob one quarter turn g Place the carrying case cover over the aiming circle and latch the cover locks h Unscrew the instrument fixing screw and remove the instrument from the tripod i Replace the tripod head cover Retract and collapse the tripod legs and tighten the thumbscrews k Strap the tripod legs together 4 5 DECLINATING THE AIMING CIRCLE The aiming circle must be declinated when any of the following situations exist e After an electrical storm e Anytime the instrument has received a severe shock for example if it is dropped from the bed of a truck to the ground The magnetic needle is a delicately balanced mechanism and any shock may cause significant change in the declination constant Anytime the aiming is moved outside a 25 mile radius from the area in which it was last declinated Because of l
242. boresight the data derived is inaccurate by the amount of the error Note If the howitzer in question was used to lay the aiming circle or the rest of the howitzers the other howitzers are out of lay by the amount of error found The platoon leader should take corrective action to orient them on the correct azimuth of lay after all howitzers have verified foresight d Boresight is verified as discussed below 1 Howitzers with an alignment device a The azimuth counter not the reset counter and the appropriate alignment device are used when verifying boresight e numerical error of boresight can be determined from the azimuth counter The amount of error is the difference between the required deflection for the alignment device according to the 10 manual and the deflection read on the azimuth counter once the vertical hairline has been aligned b The backwards azimuth rule will be used to determine the correct azimuth of the howitzer tube c Once the error has been measured and reported the platoon leader directs the following actions to be taken to correct the error e Boresight the weapon e Correct the azimuth of lay and piece location in the FDC or re lay the piece FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 2 Howitzers without an alignment device _ a The azimuth scale nonslipping is used during boresighting The tube is pointed at the pu when DAP or test target is used If the sight is pointed to the righ
243. by the main axis method Figure 5 areas follows e Lay a stake along the main axis of the crater dividing the crater into symmetrical halves The stake points in the direction of the mortar e Set up a direction measuring instrument in line with the stake and away from fragments e Orient the instrument e Measure the direction to the weapon TO MORTAR DIRECTION MEASURING INSTRUMENT Figure J 5 Main axis method b Splinter Groove Method The five steps to determine S by the splinter groove method Figure J 6 are as ollows e Lay a stake along the ends of the splinter grooves that extend from the crater e Lay second stake p endicular to the first stake through the axis of the fuze tunnel e Set up a direction measuring instrument in line with the s cond stake and away trom fragments e Orient the instrument e Measure the direction to the weapon c Fuze Tunnel Method The four to determine by the fuze tunnel method Figure J 7 are as ollows e Place a stake in the fuze tunnel e Set up a direction measuring instrument in line with the stake and away from fragments e Orient the instrument e Measure the direction to the weapon Note If the angle of fall is too great a 90 angle the fuze tunnel method cannot be used FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 TO MORTAR DIRECTION MEASURING INSTRUMENT Figure J 6 Splinter groove method J 12 ROCKET CRATERS crater resulting from
244. cally lay the remaining owitzers b The steps for laying with the M2 compass areas follows 1 Place the M2 compass on a stable object such as a collimator cover and aiming circle tripod or a mattock handle away from magnetic attractions Note Laying by the M2 compass method involves the use of the magnetic needle of the compass The compass must be set up where it is free from magnetic attractions The minimum distances are as follows an power lines 55 meters Field gun truck tank Telegraph telephone or barbed wire Machine Steel helmet or 05 meter 4 16 2 Measure the azimuth to the pantel of the howitzer to be laid 3 Determine the deflection to the howitzer b subtracting the azimuth of fire from the measured azimut memory aid SAM Note Memory aids for laying are in tables 4 2 through 4 5 4 Lay the howitzer a using the command NUMBER so and so ADJUST AIMING POINT THIS INSTRUMENT DEFLECTION so much The gunner using the two step deflection method sets off the announced deflection on the pantel and traverses the tube to pick m pop sight picture on the compass He then says NUMBER so and so AIMING POINT IDENTIFIED DEFLECTION so much This howitzer is now oriented on the azimuth of fire and is laid 19 To lay the remaining howitzers command NUMBER so and so IS LAID PLATOON ADJUST AIMING POINT NUMBER so and so gunner on nu
245. case assembly and the power ground and signal binding posts respectively on the quadrant elevation gun assembly 4 The AUDIO connector allows signal connection between the case assembly and the radio 5 The BCU posts allow signal connection between the case assembly and the BCS through the wire line adapter 6 The 28V AUX POWER binding post allows connection to an external 28 volt power source ne GND connector allows connection to earth ground 8 The alarm gives an audible alert to the operator when the GDU is receiving a message p The ALARM control is used to vary the volume of the audible alarm To increase the volume turn the control clockwise 10 The POWER ON OFF switch is used to give primary power to the case assembly 28 O WE DEF 1 POWE GNO AUDIO 11 When placed in the NORMAL position the NORMAL BITE switch allows digital communications between the BCS and the GDU In the BITE position it completes the BITE circuit 12 The SCA connector allows signal connections between the case assembly and the SCA L 4 GUN ASSEMBLY a The gun assembly Figure L 5 provides instant identification of required deflection to the gunner or elevation to the assistant gunner b The display window shows quadrant elevation or deflection information The tenths digit shows on the VU only when the special instruction of GUNNER S QUADRANT is received c Three bi
246. circle and the pantel The AZIMUTH OF FIRE DEFLECTION AIMING CIRCLE alternate interior angles are the deflections as read from the instruments 4 16 PROCEDURES FOR LAYING a When the 0 3200 line of the aiming circle is parallel to the azimuth of fire the instrument operator uses the ED motion to sight on the lens of the pantel and reads the deflection on the azimuth and azimuth micrometer scales He announces the deflection to the gunner on the howitzer Note If the weapons are equipped with M12 series deflection cannot exceed 3 200 mils Therefore the red numbers on the aiming circle are used if the black numbers exceed 3 200 mils b The gunner sets the announced deflection on the pantel He orders the howitzer to be shifted and or traverses the tube until the line of sight through the pantel is again on the reflector of the aiming circle Z step deflection method Note Because the pantel is not directly over the ivot point of the tube the pantel displaces orizontally When the telescope has been sighted on the aiming circle the gunner reports READY FOR RECHECK LINE OF FIRE PANTEL LINE OF SIGHT DEFLECTION 4 4 REARWARD EXTENSION OF LINE OF FIRE 4B Figure 4 12 Principles of reciprocal laying 4 12 c The instrument operator again sights on the lens of the pantel and reads and announces the deflection This procedure is repeated until the gunner rep
247. circle or a compass 7 DETERMINATION OF DIRECTION a Pattern A clear pattern produced on the ground by shell indicates the direction from which the shell came b Factors Affecting Pattern Because of terrain irregularities and soil conditions typical shell crater patterns are the exception not the rule Side spray marks are a principal part of the pattern caused by fragmentation There 15 much less effect from nose spray Base spray is d ible from gun and howitzer projectiles but is e from mortars The width angle and density of the side spray pattern vary with the projectile the angle of impact the type of fuze terminal velocity of the projectile and soil composition In determining direction the following are considered e The effect of stones vegetation stumps and roots in the path of the projectiles e Variations in density and type of soil e The slope of the terrain at the point of impact J 2 From any group only the most clearly defined and typical craters are used c Marks on Vegetation and Other Objects The direction from which a round was fired is often indicated by the marks made as it passes through trees snow and walls The possible deflection of the shell upon impact with these objects must be considered Evidence of such deflection should not be overlooked d Drift and Wind Effects Drift and lateral wind effects do not materially change the direction of the axis of the shell
248. clude target numbers shell lot fuze time deflection and quadrant FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 Was the howitzer laid on the priority target within 30 seconds of the command from FDC Was the charge cut Was a fuze with appropriate setting mated to the announced projectile Was the projectile in the loading tray if applicable Was the weapon laid for deflection and elevatio loading elevation if necessary Was the weapon fired within 20 seconds of the command from FDC For each rating 6 points will be awarded for maximum 0442 points For each NO GO rating O points will be awarded TASK 12 Conduct of direct fire fourth fire mission see appropriate track tasks Conditions A stationary target will be emplaced 400 to 800 meters from the howitz r to simulate a moving target The section chief will be given a series of 3 by 5 inch cards that will require the section to use direct laying procedures The followin sample situation cards may be used for all weapons The examiner should prepare situation cards that are varied and that avoid routine or similar ranges CARD 1 A T62 tank 15 approaching your battery position and is moving straight toward your howitzer at an estimated range of 600 meters CARD 2 The first round fired by your section went over the tank The tank has now turried and is moving from left to right in front of your position at a speed of 25 mp and at the init
249. completed e When met conditions change e When restrictions change 10 Suspend firing when any unsafe condition exists erson who sees an unsafe act Examples of unsafe conditions are as follows e Powder bags exposed to fire Personnel smoking near pieces of ammunition e Improper handling of ammunition e Time fuze previously set and not reset to safe e Personnel or aircraft directly in front of the weapon e Primer inserted into the firing assembly before breech is closed separate loading ammunition e Failure to powder chamber and bore after each round is fired e Failure to swab powder chamber after each round of separate loading ammunition is fired Specific duties of safety personnel after firing are but are not limited to the following 1 Verify that unused powder increments are disposed of at an approved place in the correct manner 2 Verify that all unfired ammunition is properly accounted for repacked and returned to the ammunition resupply point 3 Verify police of the firing position 4 Verify that all safety Ts are collected and properly disposed of FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 11 3 SAFETY AIDS a From the range safety card the fire direction officer prepares a safety diagram and safety Ts for use by the safety certified personnel Safety aids are used to ensure that only safe data are fired from the position Two such safety aids are the safety stakes and safety ta
250. cquisition may be limited Pr terrain masks Emplacing on hills increases the range of howitzer weapons systems Ambushes are likely in this type of terrain F 2 OPERATIONS IN JUNGLE TERRAIN a Fire Support Tasks Jungle operations present roblems because of the high humidity and dense vegetation umidity may degrade the ability of propellant to achieve desired ranges Also it may reduce equipment operability Measures must be taken to ensure that powder is kept dry Dense n degrades munitions effects In thick canopy VT and ICM are ineffective Fuze PD may be set on delay to penetrate to the ground and achieve the desired results White phosphorus can be used to assist observers in adjusting fire in dense jungle b Command and Control Communications equipment is degraded because of high humidity vegetation density and electronic line of sight Antennas may have to be elevated to overcome line of sight restrictions Emplacement of wire lines is more time consuming c Positioning and Displacement High angle fire may be required to overcome potential site to crest problems Selection of firing positions is hampered by soft terrain and thick vegetation The battery must be prepared to clear fields of fire Fire base operations are viable means of providing for defense of the battery as well as for 6 400 mil fire support Mobility is slowed because the ground on available roads is soft and use of terrain march is restricted Air ass
251. ct a column Country NL NL requirements for marking of columns in peacetime only 1 Flagging a nye Bis flags displayed on the first vehicle of an element mounted on the left and right hand front side of the vehicle b One blue flag displayed on each following vehicle of an element except for the last vehicle mounted on the right hand front side of the vehicles 2 Lighting a Headlights low beam of all vehicles moving in column must be switched on at all times b Each vehicle except the last of each element must display a blue filter in the front right hand side headlight c The last vehicle of each element must display a green filter on the front right hand side headlight 3 Legal rights If a part of the column element complying to the above stated national requirements has already moved into a crossing the next vehicles have right of way This right should be exercised with necessary ca tion Civilian drivers are not to disturb or disrupt a column 2 31 FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 1 2 32 Country NO Flagging a See 6 b Minimum lighting and flagging b One sign displayed on the front side of the first vehicle and one sign displayed on the rear side of the last vehicle of an element stating MILITAER KOLDNNE black capital characters on a white board Lighting See 6 b Minimum lighting and flagging Legal rights Columns complying to the above stated national requirements have right of way
252. ct point in mils unless otherwise specified and distance in meters from observer This information must be encoded if paragraph B is encoded when this method is used maximum accuracy possible is essential 2 Dimensions of the area bombed shelled rocketed or mortared to be given by a The radius in meters OR b The length and width in meters RE on NATURE OF GUNS MORTARS ROCKET LAUNCHERS AIRCRAFT OR OTHER METHODS H NATURE OF FIRE Adjustment fire for effect harassing etc may be omitted for aircraft AND CALIBER state whether measured or assumed OF SHELLS ROCKETS OR MISSILES J TIME OF FLASH TO BANG omit for aircraft K DAMAGE encode if required L REMARKS for additional information on Sections I II or III SECTION II LOCATION REPORT M SERIAL NUMBER Each location which is produced by a locating unit is given a serial number TARGET NUMBER If the weapon activity has previously been given a target number it will be entered in this column by the locating units 3 24 FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 P POSITION OF TARGET The grid reference or grid bearing and distance of the located weapon activity Q 22 The accuracy to which the weapon activity has been located CEP in meters and the means of location possible A CEP is 50 meters or better B CEP between 50 meters and 100 meters C CEP between 100 and 150 meters D CEP between 150 and 200 meters E CEP between 200 me
253. cted by using only steps 27 to 31 of method 2 5 13 ALTITUDE DETERMINATION In the absence of altitude data provided by battalion surveyors altitude is obtained directly from the map Once the coordinates of the desired point have been determined by the precision lightweight GPS receiver graphic resection or graphic traverse the altitude of this point is taken from the map sheet Normally altitude can be considered to be accurate to half the contour interval 5 25 FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 CHAPTER 6 MINIMUM QUADRANT ELEVATION 6 1 RESPONSIBILITIES The platoon leader is responsible for determining the lowest quadrant elevation that can be safely fired from his platoon position that will ensure projectiles clear all visible crests Note All references to platoon leader will apply to the executive officer as well Also the gunnery sergeant is responsible for these same duties prior to the platoon s occupation of position 6 2 ELEMENTS OF COMPUTATION Use of the rapid fire tables Appendix K is the fastest method of computing minimum quadrant elevation min QE Manual computations are more accurate than the rapid fire tables and must be used if the sum of the vertical angle and the angle needed for a 5 meter clearance is greater than 300 mils The tables were not constructed for the value of the sum of Angles 1 and 2 to exceed 300 mils Figure 6 1 shows the elements of minimum quadrant ele
254. ction chief computes deflections 3216 and 3246 by subtracting 15 mils from and adding 15 mils to the displayed deflection see Figure 7 1 After firing the displayed fire commands at deflection 3231 the section chief directs the crew in firing the computed deflections in any order Sweep fire always includes an odd number of deflections to be fired DISPLAYED DF AND QE 3246 3281 3216 306 _ 306 306 Figure 7 1 Computations for sweep fire g ZONE so many MILS so many QUADRANTS commands a method of fire used when the standard sheaf does not adequately cover the target and more depth is required Zone fire provides for firing one deflection with several quadrants 1 Digital A sample SCA display for zone fire is Z 53QE that is zone 5 mils 3 quadrant elevations BUE A sample command is ZONE 5 MILS 3 QUADRANTS The section chief computes the required quadrant fires the initial quadrant and then fires the remaining quadrants in any order or as directed by unit SOP EXAMPLE The SCA displays Z 10mM3QE and a quadrant elevation of 409 The section chief computes quadrants 399 and 419 by subtracting 10 mils from and adding 10 mils to the displayed quadrant Figure 7 2 After firing the displayed fire commands at quadrant 409 the section chief directs the crew in firing the computed quadrants in any order Zone fire will always include an odd number of quadrants to be fired DISPLAYED DF AND QE 3295 3295 J 3295
255. ctions against air attack are as ollows 1 The warning signal for an imminent air attack is given See paragraph 3 23 _ 2 Every soldier takes cover and prepares to return ire 3 All weapons in the battery are used to return fire Accuracy is not as important as mass see Figure 3 10 4 A lead equal to two football fields should be used for fast moving aircraft A lead of one half of a football field is used for slow moving aircraft helicopters 5 Ring mounted machine guns 50 caliber are the only Las air defense weapons in the battery Primary or supplementary positions selected by the battery should be occupied by vehicles with ring mounted weapons M992 to return fire 6 Stinger and or Avenger teams from the division or corps air defense battalion engage enemy aircraft If available these teams should be positioned to cover primary low flight avenues of approach into the battery area Reference points for engaging wa aircraft should be planned and their location disseminated throughout the unit These can be terrain features or TRPs established for ground defense The battalion S2 can aid in the likely enemy air avenues of for defense planning purposes reaction drill to counter an enemy air attack should be rehearsed thoroughly Mz T 2 Dru P Tie f n 4 Figure 3 10 Mass battery fires against an air attack 3 17 FM 6 50 MCWP 3
256. ctive circles as shown in Figure 5 4 There is no specific point on the circle on which the stars must be positioned The actual location of the stars on the circle depends on the time of year and the time of observation 7 Emplace an aiming post at least 30 meters from the aiming cirde at the desired location of the EOL 8 Using the elevation knob lower the telescope Use the upper motion to rotate the instrument clockwise until the vertical hairline is centered and at the lowest visible point on the aiming post 9 Read the azimuth to the nearest 0 5 mil directly from the azimuth scales 10 Using the procedures in paragraphs 3 through 9 above determine a second azimuth to the EOL 11 The two azimuths determined to the EOL must agree within 2 mils If the two azimuths agree within these limits determine the mean grid azimuth This is the grid azimuth to the EOL FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 IF TRUE NORTH IS ON THE RIGHT SET THE GRID CONVERGENCE ON THE AZIMUTH SCALE IF TRUE NORTH IS ON THE LEFT SUBTRACT THE GRID CONVERGENCE FROM 6 400 MILS AND SET THE VALUE ON THE AZIMUTH SCALE GN GN Figure 5 5 Convergence rules Polaris 2 5 6 DIRECTIONAL TRAVERSE a Directional traverse is another means of transferring azimuth from one point to another It gives more accurate results than scaling an azimuth from a map or floating the needle of an aiming circle However it should be used only when condition
257. cupation Each section chief must know the route to the alternate position because movement to that position may be by section c A supplementary position is one selected for accomplishment of a specific mission such as offset registration adjustment with a roving gun or defense of the primary position 1 Supplementary position s for defense should be selected to cover likely enemy avenues of approach 2 Position s for offset registrations and roving guns should be far enough away so that counterfire will not affect the primary position Section III ORGANIZING THE NEW POSITION 2 15 ADVANCE PARTY PREPARATIONS a Having arrived in the new position area the advance pu conducts a security sweep and prepares the position or Occupation The purpose of the advance party security sweep is to perform position area reconnaissance 10 confirm its suitability for occupation by the main body in accordance 2 8 with METT T and the absence of enemy mines booby traps NBC hazards and so on Natural cover must be sed to the maximum Security is continuous throughout advance party operations b The advance party is not normally manned or equipped to clear areas of organized enemy activity mines or NBC hazards If these threats or conditions are present in the proposed position area the advance party breaks contact with any enemy forces or marks minefield and hazards and moves on to find another position area battery
258. d Have traverse and elevation T amp E mechanism settings been recorded on range cards Have M2 machine guns been headspaced and timed f Has a final protective line FPL been established 9 Has a signal been announced for firing FPL Do fields of fire interlock i Have fields of fire been cleared 5 Is the IFP properly camouflaged d Reaction Force 1 Has a reaction force been established 2 Has a primary and alternate signal and rally point been disseminated 3 Have alternates been identified for members of the reaction force 4 Has the RF been rehearsed 5 Does the reaction force have a means of communication 6 Has the reaction force been briefed for the tactical situation H 2 H 4 PERIMETER COMMUNICATIONS a Have wire communications been established within the battery perimeter b Do key battery elements have wire communications Does the entrance point have communications d Does the battery have alarm signals for the following types of attack 1 NBC 2 Air 3 Counterfire 4 Ground e Is the wire buried to withstand attack and friendly vehicle movement H 5 ANTIARMOR ASSETS a Have tank killer teams been designated b Have likely engagement areas and hide positions been selected c Have supplementary positions been reconnoitered and prepared d Has the plan been rehearsed e Have the tank killer teams been briefed for the tactical
259. d Aou Red eh ert ned 10 1 EXTERIOR COMPONENTS OF AN ARTILLERY PROJECTILE 10 1 PROJECTILE PAINTING AND MARKING 10 2 CARE AND HANDLING OF AMMUNITION 10 3 PROJECTILES thi EI ik actae hos RE a 10 3 FUZES ed ee ad eese ua ires M e 10 4 PROPELLING CHARGES eG eee e ke ee OA PES COR eH Eu 10 4 FLASH REDUCERS iire qme xn Ve obese by eg t LED die E RU 2 BS 10 5 PRIMERS bg site aor ced od bar h 10 5 CARTRIDGE CASES xe deaur e e eu eR Cd qe 10 5 SEGREGATION OF AMMUNITION LOTS 10 6 FIELD STORAGE OF 10 6 STORAGE AND TRANSPORTATION TECHNIQUES 10 7 ACCOIDEN ISS was Waits ese Hate o eR Cadre M ana ete 10 7 PROCEDURES 5 etie es SP E Oe Yd edes 10 7 FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 10 16 TRAINING Sa bd URB RE NM Rs 10 7 10 17 AMMUNITION PLANNING GUIDE 10 8 CHAPTER 11 SAFETY PROCEDURES 11 1 RESPONSIBIEMMES 4225 ary eae a ege Ve qat kT eer Sets 11 1 11 2 DUTIES OF SAFETY PERSONNEL 11 2 11 3 SAFETY AIDS s vu RES DRUGS er ee 1
260. d a subordinate commander known as the trail officer c reporting officer is to precede each column His fiction is to report the details of the column to each traftic control post or border crossing point as applicable d A reporting officer who may be the trail officer is to be appointed to report to each traffic control post once the column has passed giving details of any occurrences including vehicle casualties e Each vehicle must have a vehicle commander who may be the driver He is responsible for both crew discipline and the execution of the mission May be of any rank as considered appropriate by the column commander 2 23 FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 6 Identification of Columns a Movement Number Example at Annex A 1 Each column which has been allocated a movement credit must be identified by a number known as the movement Seir This number identifies the column during the whole of the movement including the crossing of national oundaries 2 The movement number is to be placed on both sides of each vehicle It must be permanently legible from ground level at a minimum distance of 6 meters in normal daylight 3 The movement number must be white or yellow and remain legible in all weather during the whole movement It must be removed as soon as the movement is completed b Minimum Lighting and Flagging 1 In peacetime headlights of all vehicles moving in the column must be on at all times low beam
261. d automatically on the SCA Voice commands are announced for example FUZE TIME TIME 17 6 or FUZE VT TIME 17 0 Note If shell DPICM is to be fired in the self registration mode SR fuze setting black triangle A 98 mu pe announced for examp 19 SHELL DPIC CHARGE 4 FUZE TI TIME BLACK TRIANGLE 98 0 7 13 DEFLECTION With voice commands deflection is always announced as four digits for a DEFLECTION 0321 zero three two one and DEFLECTION 3300 three three hundred Normally deflection is displayed on the SCA as a four digit value If three numbers appear assume the first number 15 a zero The section chief announces deflection using four numbers The gunner sets the announced or displayed deflection on the panoramic telescope and traverses the tube until he has a correct sight picture on the proper aiming point two step deflection method When the section chief announces deflection the gunner reads back the deflection After the assistant gunner TAG has reported QUADRANT so much SET the Pune will verify his sight picture ensure that his bubbles are centered and reports DEFLECTION so much READY 7 14 QUADRANT ELEVATION a Quadrant elevation gives the section chief permission to load and fire the round unless otherwise restricted by special instructions or unsafe conditions The AG sets off 7 5 FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 the quadrant elevation announced by the FDC or E EE on his gun for exa
262. d here is a sample of a test to be conducted in conjunction with the written safety test The hands on safety certification allows the commander to determine if subordinate leaders are adequately prepared to perform safety related duties during live fire exercises 2 Conduct this test in a field location The battalion survey section will establish the orienting station orienting line end of orienting line and several known aiming points with known direction The unit being evaluated will provide all necessary equipment to perform all listed tasks The 3 will provide inert training rounds fuzes and propellant 3 The certification test must approximate the conditions and stress that a safety certitied person will encounter This test does not specify a maximum allowable time for completion of individual tasks The appropriate AMTP can be used as a standard b Test Administration 1 The test should be conducted to certify as a minimum the battery commander platoon leaders fire direction officers platoon sergeants gunnery sergeants chief computer and howitzer section chiets 2 The battalion commander will evaluate the battery commander on the tasks listed in Table O 2 When the battery commander has been certified he the battalion executive officer and 3 will conduct the certification of the battery personnel 3 The platoon leaders and fire direction officers will be evaluated on the tasks listed in Table O 3
263. d of the flash suppressor 5 18 FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 a 2 e 3 a 3 o a HF 5 m 2 5 LE o 2 lt 5 2 lt o 4 He o ul m o z lt 628 E N o 8 87 5 88 865 766 972 704 702 806 804 799 795 791 788 70 8 65 90 758 937 928 926 923 919 658 5 665 5 19 FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 Table 5 8 Subtense using a 60 meter base continued DISTANCE DISTANCE DISTANCE DISTANCE 105 so 42 5 15 4e 8 49 5 o we 9s f 7 se es ws 0275 s o f 82 4e 476 439 475 1395 1075 sea nez se s 46 566 515 FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 Table 5 8 Subtense using a 60 meter base continued DISTANCE 146 48 1508 Due xe 1465 46 1572 98 14608 4 8 175 387 1682 dy 415 1578 97 1685 35 35 Tara __ 5 44 1738 m 1es 3s 3o 1 39 42 34 1605 360 1502 we _ ____ 3B 4n _____ 1898 3 40
264. d specifies something different EXAMPLE The FDO or poen e leader considers the tactical situation and the other factors mentioned above an determines that the fire command elements designated as standard should be as follows e Pieces to fire and method of fire Number 3 1 round e Projectile HE e Ammunition lot XY e Fuze Quick These standards tell the firing battery or platoon that if not stated in a fire command the piec to fire will be Number 3 and the method of fire will be one round shell HE lot XY and fuze quick 7 24 EXAMPLE OF FIRE COMMANDS a Nonstandard Adjust Fire Mission In this example no standard elements are used See Figure 7 4 STND DATA PIECES FOLLOW PIECES FIRE ADJ PIECE PLT ADJ RECORD OF MISSIONS FIRED SECTION DATE AMMUNITION FUZES ON HAND F f this f FM 6 50 Th ent Agency US Army taining and Doctrine Command C I3 3 Today der il apap SP INSTR MOF 2710 NE RRR 424444240742 Sy perpe memo re py FIRE MISSION PLATOON ADJUST NUMBER 3 1 ROUND SHELL HE LOT XY CHARGE 4 FUZE QUICK DEFLECTI N 3024 QUADRANT 247 2 ROUNDS IN EFFECT 1 Number 3 is announced as the adjusting weapon It fires one round shell HE lot XY fuze quick with the announced charge and at the announced deflection and quadrant The rest of the plat
265. de on the track plan If concealment is critical the gunnery sergeant may dictate FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 the exact route of each vehicle In SP units sharp Dun which will disrupt ground cover must be avoided c The gunnery sergeant does the following 1 He sets up and orients the aiming circle where it will have line of sight to the howitzers If survey is available he directs the survey team to emplace an orienting station ORSTA where it will have line of sight to the howitzers and an end of orienting line EOL where it can be easily identified from the ORSTA Additionally he briefs the survey team on any seat requirements in addition to unit SOP necessary for the EOL He then sets up the aiming circle over the ORSTA and verifies survey by measurin the azimuth to the EOL and spot GP position and altitude before releasing the survey team 2 As soon as the gun guides emplace panoramic telescope pantel marking stakes the gunnery sergeant measures and records the initial deflection to each stake and records the azimuth az to the howitzer on DA Form 2698 R Figure 2 5 Priority is to announce the initial deflection to each gun guide over the wire line to check communications If wire is not in gun guides will come to the aiming circle and record the initial deflection The gun guide gives his initial deflection to his gunner and section when the platoon arrives P He determines the distance and the v
266. der will compute the min QE for each howitzer in his firing unit The highest value is the XO min QE for his tiring unit with this charge 6 6 COMPUTING FOR ARMED VT FUZES LOW ANGLE FIRE The method of computing the XO s minimum QE for ED a projectile fuzed with an M513 M514 M728 or M73 fuze depends on the method in which the fuze is used a The proximity VT fuze is designed to arm 3 seconds rior to the time set on the fuze however some VT fuzes ave armed as early as 5 5 seconds prior to the time set on the fuze Because of the probability of premature arming a safety factor of 5 5 seconds must be added to the time of flight corresponding to the PCR Since time on the setting ring is set to the whole second the time determined is expressed up to the next higher whole second A VT fuze is designed so that it will not arm earlier than 2 seconds time of flight which makes it a bore safe fuze b In combat situations the platoon leader determines the minimum safe time and minimum quadrant elevation at the piece to crest range The QE determined for PD fuzed rounds is safe for VT fuzes if the time set is greater than the min safe time determined paragraph a above If the platoon leader finds it necessary to fire a VT fuze with a time less than the min safe time the vertical clearance for the minimum QE must be increased to ensure the fuze will not function as it passes over the crest c If the projectile is to be tired with t
267. derived position SECTION III GUN LAYING AND POSITIONING SYSTEM 4 10 DESCRIPTION OF THE GUN LAYING AND POSITIONING SYSTEM The gun laying and positioning system GLPS supplements the M2A2 aiming circle and will be the pon instrument used to orient howitzers in cannon units not equiped with Paladins When used in conjunction with the PLGR the GLPS will determine grid location establish directional 4 6 control and allow the operator to transfer directional control to the individual howitzers using standard laying commands Additionally the GLPS eye safe laser range finder eliminates the need to measure subtense to determine the distance to the howitzer The system is man portable and tripod mounted It can be emplaced and used much the same as the M2A2 aiming circle but without the need for external survey support Technical data on GLPS capabilities are located in Table 4 1 and the major components of the system are shown in 4 9 Battery leadership must be proficient in the setup and orientation procedures for the GLPS as listed in the equipment operator s manual An independent check of the GLPS orientation must be made before using it to lay the howitzers Table 4 1 GLPS technical data Gyroscope Accuracy of orientation 0 4 mil PE Theodolite Telescope mag 10X Graduation 0 1 mil Resolution of Hz and V circles 0 1 mil Laser Range Finder Accuracy iim Range 30 m to 2 000 m Eye safe Interfaces PLGR RS232C
268. does not apply to the entire mission it must be announced with each initial or subsequent command Note DO NOT LOAD is a standard special instruction in a Copperhead priority mission The target of opportunity mission is AT MY COMM b AT MY COMMAND or BY PIECE BY ROUND AT MY COMMAND is a restrictive command that FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 prohibits the battery from tiring until directed to do so by the FDC 1 Digital Double bars under AMC on the SCA are lit When the section is laid the section chief presses the READY key at the SCA When the round is to be fired the double bar under FIRE lights and the alarm sounds 2 Voice The command from the FDC would be so many ROUNDS SPECIAL INSTRUCTIONS AT MY COMMAND When directed to fire the rounds the section s would fire all the rounds specified in the method of fire The command BY PIECE AT MY COMMAND would direct the sections to fire all the rounds specified in the method of fire by section s as announced by the FDC The command BY ROUND AT MY COMMAND would direct the section s to fire each of the rounds in the method of fire by volley as commanded by the FDC The command BY PIECE BY ROUND AT MY COMMAND combines the control of both commands explained above AT MY COMMAND remains in effect until the FDC commands CANCEL AT MY COMMAND or BY PIECE or BY ROUND AT MY COMMAND AT MY COMMAND may be cancelled at any time If the FDC has announced 9 ADRANT the command wou
269. during flight e Ricochet Furrows Often when an artillery round with a delay fuze is fired at low angle it bounces or ricochets from the surface of the earth In doing so it creates a groove called a ricochet furrow which is an extension of the plane of fire Care must be taken however to determine that the shell was not deflected before or while making the furrow J 8 CRATER ANALYSIS The first step in crater analysis is to locate a usable crater for determining the direction to the hostile weapon The crater should be clearly defined on the ground and should be reasonably fresh Since the crater is the beginning point for plotting the direction to the enemy weapon the grid coordinates of the crater should be determined as an eight digit grid or as precisely as time and method used will allow The direction to the firing weapon must be determined gar of the methods described in the following paragraphs ell fragments and fuzes must be collected for use in identifying the type caliber and country that manufactured the weapon and or projectile J 9 LOW ANGLE FUZE QUICK CRATERS ARTILLERY The detonation of a projectile causes an inner crater The burst and momentum of the shell carry the effect forward and to the sides forming an arrow which points to the rear ovate the weapon from which the round was fired The uze continues along the line of flight creating a fuze furrow There are two methods of obtaining a direction
270. e not already listed on the DA Forms 2408 14 of DA 5988E Uncorrected Faults Record for the cannon and prime mover or cargo carrier Was the gun guide ready to depart with all necessary equipment according to SOP at the time prescribed Scoring For each GO rating 9 points will be awarded for a maximum of 72 points For each NO GO rating 0 points will be awarded TASK 3 Disassembly of breech mechanism appropriate Tracked Tasks Conditions After giving the howitzer section 30 minutes to complete task 2 above the evaluator reads the following situation to the chief of section DURING THE CONDUCT OF THE BEFORE OPERATION CHECKS AND SERVICES ON YOUR CANNON YOU NOTED A MALFUNCTION IN THE BREECH MECHANISM TO TROUBLESHOOT THE EXACT CAUSE YOU DECIDE THAT YOU MUST DISASSEMBLE THE BREECH MECHANISM YOU MAY SELECT ANY MEMBER S OF YOUR SECTION TO PERFORM THIS TASK HOWEVER YOU MAY NOT PHYSICALLY PERFORM ANY ACTION YOU HAVE 1 MINUTE TO SELECT THE SECTION MEMBER S TO PERFORM THIS TASK AND ASSEMBLE ALL REQUIRED TOOLS AND MANUALS At the end of 1 minute the evaluator gives the following instructions to the section member s performing the task YOU ARE TO DISASSEMBLE THE BREECH MECHA NISM TO INCLUDE REMOVAL OF BREECHBLOCK DIS ASSEMBLY OF FIRING MECHANISM DISASSEMBLY OF OBTURATOR GROUP AS APPLICA BLE EVEN THOUGH THIS IS A TIMED EXERCISE PERFORM ALL ACTIONS IN THE PRESCRIBED SAFE MA
271. e additional information needed to engage the target for example sweep 200 d The measured quadrant and range should be given to the FDC to be converted into a true quadrant Then record the true quadrant on the range quadrant in the QE column e When the range card is completed example in Figure 3 7 make a duplicate card for the platoon sergeant Continue to update and review the range card throughout occupation of the position HOWITZER RANGE CARD For use of this form see FM 6 50 The proponent agency Is TRADOC HEDGE ROW ROAD JUNCTION DA FORM 5699 R AUG 88 Figure 3 7 Howitzer range card 3 14 FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 Q Machine gun range card The machine gun range card consists of two parts a sketch of the sectors of fire and a data section that list data necessary to engage targets during periods of limited visibility The sketch depicts the primary and secondary sectors of fire the location of the weapon azimuths of the left and right limits and or the final protective line target reference points and any dead space sample is shown in Figure 3 8 Note reproducible D of DA Form 5699 R is at the back of this manual For additional examples of completed range cards and a reproducible copy of DA Form 5517 R see FM 7 8 STANDARD RANGE CARD For use of this form see FM 7 73 The proponent agency is TRADOC sapJ sf PLT 157 May be used for all types of direct fire weapons EP a co B MAGNE
272. e best use of the radio and wire resources available at any given time We must always strive to have a system redundant to the one being used be it radio or wire Ideally it would be best to rely first on radio during displacements and initial site occupations Then if time permits install and operate on wire lines If radios are unavailable or unusable a wire system is necessary Accordingly the diagrams and system configurations which follow provide practical and realistic ways of establishing battery commo systems depending on which TOE a unit uses 9 2 BATTERY COMMUNICATIONS SECTION a To help the battery commander meet communications requirements a comm section is authorized at the battery level This section gives battery personnel technical assistance in the installation operation and maintenance of the battery comm system Battery personnel share for installing operating and maintaining the battery comm system b The battery comm chief advises the commander on communications matters The two wiremen help install and maintain the intrabattery wire system and wire equipment The comm chief s specific responsibilities are as follows 1 Provide communications training to battery and technical assistance for communications raining in the unit 2 Advise the BC on communications considerations during selection of positions 3 Supervise the maintenance of comm equipment in the battery 4 Coordin
273. e between the GDU and the BCS The modified reel unit RL 39 A Figure L 7 is used Starting at the TM 184 B Figure L 7 attach the ends of a WD 1 TT wire NSN 6145 00 226 8812 C Figure L 7 on the strip Continue laying wire to the gn position stake it off connect the wire to the binding posts labeled BCU D Figure L 7 on the GDU For this connection prepare both ends of a short piece of WD 1 wire as shown in A of Figure L 8 Connect one end to the connector labeled M 221 on the spool DR 8 E Figure L 7 and the other end to the bindin posts labeled BCU on the GDU Using wire from an RL 3 reel insert the open end in the two binding posts on the TM 184 corresponding to the gun number as shown in F ig L 7 Prepare the wire ends according to A Figure 1 8 and ensure that the TM 184 is prepared as shown in Figure L 6 Connect wire circuits for the rest of the guns in the same manner MODIFIED REEL RL 39 1 wey JACK U 17 GT CONNECTOR Nu M 221 gt f VEHI WIRE LINE ADAPTER E o SPOOL DR 8 Note Only one gun section is shown Figure L 7 Connecting the tactical communications interface module and line wire adapter L 7 FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 c Connector Wire Preparation Prepare wire for connection as follows 1 Cut six pieces of field wire about 25 feet long Strip about 7 inch of insulation from each end A Figure L 8 leaving inch strip o
274. e assembly and the SCA e Cable assembly W33 3 feet long or W33A 15 feet long which provides signal connection between the case assembly and the AN PRC 68 or AN PRC 126 radios e Cable assembly W34 3 feet long or W34A 15 feet ong provides power connection between the case assembly and the AN PRC 68 or AN PRC 126 radios L 6 BCS GDU WIRE LINK a When a unit is not operating with radio wire is used to connect the GDU to the BCS b The BCS GDU digital wire link is sensitive and works best with unspliced wire in w condition A single poor splice or multiple splices will hamper data transmission erminal strip TM 184 should be used when connectin wire in the BCS GDU link The MX 155 has not performe well A good lithium battery BA 5590 should be installed if a battery is required Weak or dead batteries may result in lost data display problems and nonacknowledged messages The TA 312 field telephone and or the AN GRA 39 should always be used on separate wire lines from the BCS GDU digit l data link Use of this equipment on the same wire line as the BCS GDU wire link may hamper communications and damage the GDU The rin T on the TA 312 and the AN GRA 39 can damage the circuitry L 5 FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 L 7 WIRE OPERATIONS The cable and field wire connections discussed below are necessary to y power to and establish wire communications between the GDU the chief of section the gunner
275. e column required at halts 3 Observing and reporting column discipline ANNEX B TO STANAG 2154 Edition No 6 REGULATIONS FOR MA OR VEHICLE MOVEMENT BY SPECIAL MOVEMENT All vehicles equipment exceeding dimensions or qualifications listed below must be considered as special movement and need road movement credit see Annex C all measures in meters Country width length in meters total including single combined articulated vehicles motor height allpro vehicles vehicles tractor and trailers coach including E jections prime total length of and semi length of vehicles train 2 26 22 20 922 GR 25 9 4 18 2 25 9 2 LU 25s J Js J fz NL 28 _ 12 4550 fis hz 25 124 5 8 r4 SP 25 2 65 J 2 TU 2s q4 J u ____ UK US 3 81 2 26 FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 Explanatory notes 1 a Generally in most provinces and designated highways size limits exceed the limitations quoted b In some provinces certain types of articulated trains are not permitted c Weight limitations are based on axle loads axle spacing and tire size They vary by provinces and designated highways Restrictions on weight may be imposed during spring thaws 2 For vehicles and trailers with pneumatic tires the permissible axle load and the permissible
276. e eyepiece before tracking the sun 2 The M2A2 aiming circle at the flank station is set up to observe the prearranged celestial d It becomes the orienting station for the tiring unit If the SIMO is prearranged the flank station can maintain radio silence during the procedure TRACKING TRACKING TRACKING TRACKING MASTER STATION COMMUNICATIONS STATION Figure 5 1 Simultaneous observation 9 The specific steps for the master station and the flank station s and sample radio communications for SIMO are shown in Table 5 1 5 4 POLARIS KOCHAB METHOD a Observation of Polaris is another technique for establishing directional control to within 2 mils It is simple fast and has the distinct advantage of requiring no radio or wire communications The instrument operator must be trained in finding the stars Polaris and Kochab which are FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 ina small elliptical orbit about the North Pole it is commonly referred to as the North Star Polaris is the last star in the handle of the Little Dipper as shown in Figure 5 2 page 5 4 Two stars in the bowl of the Big Dipper actually point toward Polaris and are called the Pointers Polaris is five times the distance between the Pointers along an imaginary line from the Big D On the side opposite the Little Dipper is the constellation Cassiopeia which looks like a lazy W 2 Kochab The second star needed to perform the observat
277. e flanks of the enemy b Unblocked ambush In an unblocked ambush the element should increase speed and move through the ambush area while placing the maximum amount of small arms and automatic weapons fire on the attackers and report 2 A consideration in employment of the main armament of the howitzer from the kill zone is that the may be too close for pope fuze action Only the 105 mm antipersonnel round M546 can be set for muzzle action to engage targets close to the weapon the area was identified during the map inspection as a likely ambush site on call fires are executed Otherwise fire request 15 sent immediately to the battalion FDC 4 If the ambush or any other enemy action is of such magnitude as to cause the column to break up individual elements should proceed to the new position or designated rally point on their own 2 34 OTHER MOVEMENTS a Detailed descriptions of the various pes of movements and marches are in the following manuals e FM 55 30 which includes information on the organization of motor movements the movement of personnel and the planning of motor movements e FM 100 50 e FM 101 10 1 which includes planning guidance for movements b When the unit moves by rail air or water it normally moves as an element of the FA battalion or with a supported unit In any case the battery receives detailed instructions in the form of a movement Order or pertinent extracts from
278. e intersection of the measured angle from Kochab to Polaris on the appropriate graph read the true azimuth to Polaris from the bottom of the table Interpolate for odd numbered values 3 Convert true azimuth to grid azimuth a Determine the grid convergence the angle between true north and grid north in mils from the map sheet for the area of operations or obtain it ii em the survey section b Convert the true azimuth to grid azimuth as shown in Figure 5 3 c This computation results in the determination of the grid azimuth from the OS to the EOL IF TRUE NORTH IS ON THE IF TRUE NORTH IS ON THE LEFT OF GRID NORTH RIGHT OF GRID NORTH ADD SUBTRACT THE GRID THE GRID CONVERGENCE CONVERGENCE FROM TO THE TRUE AZIMUTH TO THE TRUE AZIMUTH TO POLARIS POLARIS GN GN MEMORY AID TRALS TRUE ON RIGHT ADD LEFT SUBTRACT Figure 5 3 Application of grid convergence Polaris Kochab 5 5 FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 Table 5 2 Polaris Kochab determining true azimuth 20 north latitude ENTER TABLE ON LEFT WITH MEASURED ANGLE FROM KOCHAB TO POLARIS READ RIGHT TO GRAPH 1 OR GRAPH 2 THEN READ DOWN TO DETERMINE TRUE AZIMUTH TO POLARIS 3 E KOCHABIS BELOW roians use LT __ N 5 z c c m A E RE ER o 5 c x E Me 2 c 2 gt o
279. e lift sequence on the PZ so adjacent howitzers are not delivered to the LZ at the same time 7 Landing zone execution Signalmen identify themselves and their landing point by holding a road guard vest or an orange panel When the aircraft identifies the signalmen the guide directs the load to the landing point and direct unhooking of the load and landing of the aircraft After the aircraft departs the crew de rigs the load and moves the equipment to the point specified in the ground tactical plan When all equipment has been delivered the unit reestablishes contact with and support of the maneuver force FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 F 8 ARTILLERY RAIDS The artillery raid is the rapid movement of artillery assets by air or poma into a position to attack a high priority target with artillery fires It could involve operations across the forward edge of the battle area FEBA Normally the raid is extremely short and should not involve sustained operations Detailed planning surprise and speed in are the key factors in the successful conduct of a raid a Planning and preparation Most standard air assault procedures apply in the conduct of an artillery raid with some additional considerations Because the target is likel to be perishable the planning phase must be very Effective SOPs are essential Pilots must understand load composition and configuration considerations are as follows 1 Only bare necessities should be t
280. e maintained by the battery Replenishment of the consumed UBL is coordinated through the battalion 5 4 and delivered when the tactical situation permits A or rations are prepared in the field trains and delivered to the LRP and on to the platoon position areas for consumption as part of the LOGPAC Under the field feeding system T rations can either be prepared at the field trains or pushed forward to the platoons and prepared on site b Class II and IV Expendable Supplies NBC Suits Sandbags Concertina Wire and So Forth The consumption varies greatly between Class II items and Class IV items It depends upon the intensity of the battle and the requirements of the battery to displace quickly If the battery is operating in an NBC environment the use of NBC rotective equipment must be closely monitored to allow he supply system to replace items as required Special coordination must take place when the battery goes through a decontamination site Normally the chemical company operating the site does not have the required replacement overgarments Requests for Class and IV items are 12 2 submitted in any form to the ALOC These items are received as part of the LOGPAC c Class III POL Petroleum oils and lubricants are received as part of the LOGPAC Battery vehicles must not be allowed to run low on fuel and must be topped off when fuel reaches the 50 percent level Along with the top off of battery vehicles all fuel
281. e position area Key personnel in the battery must consider hardening and unit defense The diamond formation in platoon based units 2 3 and the star formation in battery based units Figure 2 4 page are optimal in these circumstances They provide excellent 6400 mil firing and unit defense capabilities d Linear formations such as the line and lazy W can best be used during situations such as emergency and hasty occupations which require immediate fire support These formations provide an optimum standard sheaf in the target area and offer excellent command and control However they are vulnerable to air attack Position improvement such as dispersion and concealment should be considered as time and the tactical situation permit e The bumper number of a particular howitzer section is associated with each howitzer number 1 through 8 This association does not change from position to position If a howitzer becomes disabled or lost en route to a new location its associated howitzer number and all other howitzer numbers do not change For example once a ae is designated Number 7 it remains Number 7 The LCU and BCS are initialized with individual howitzer muzzle velocity data which corresponds to a specific howitzer Use of this procedure allows convenience in referring to pieces based on location and at the same time eliminates the requirement to vary the data base in each position The howitzers are numbered from right to lef
282. e round is handed to the number 1 man and the chief of section has verified the charge for each round D 3 LAYING ON THE WRONG AIMING POSTS This mistake is especially possible at night Howitzer sections can color code their aiming posts to preclude this This is an extremely important consideration if the unit is ona fire base D 4 IMPROPER EMPLACEMENT OF AIMING POINTS a Aiming points are emplaced at certain distances from the howitzer so that the proper sight picture may be established This is especially important when one considers the matter of displacement Displacement is the undesired movement of the sight caused by traversing the tube or by the shock of firing That is to say if the sigh is not centered over the pivot point of the weapon or if the weapon shifts backward during firing it will be oriented toward the aiming point from a ditferent angle Corrections for displacement must be made when using the two close in aiming points collimator and aiming posts 1 The primary aming pom is the collimator which is normally emplaced 4 to 15 meters to the left or left front of the weapon Displacement is corrected by matching the numbers in the pantel with the corresponding numbers in the collimator If the collimator is not emplaced within the distance stated above the three graduations visible in the collimator will not align properly the picture will be out of focus Therefore it will be impossible to correct for
283. ect fire is not effective b Types of Targets The most likely direct fire targets are vehicles andor dismounted personnel Vehicles are a as point targets Personnel are engaged as area targets Direct fire priorities should be as follows e Vehicles at short ranges threatening to overrun the position e Stationary vehicles covering the advance of other vehicles e Command and control vehicles c Ammunition 1 Shell fuze combination used against armor and vehicular targets are as follows e 105mm Shell high explosive plastic tracer shell HE with impact mechanical time or variable time fuzes set for superquick action and shell WP with impact or mechanical time fuze set for superquick action e 155mm shell HE with impact mechanical time or variable time set for superquick action and shell WP with impact or mechanical time fuze set for superquick action Note WP projectiles can be used effectively to ignite immobilized vehicles Smoke and WP projectiles can be used to obstruct the vision of vehicle drivers and tank gunners and serve to disorient them 2 Shell fuze combinations used against personnel are as follows e 105mm antipersonnel APERS T and shell HE with impact Set for delay action mechanical time variable time fuzes set for superquick action uze 155mm shell HE with impact set for delay action mechanical time or variable time fuzes set for superquick action
284. ection specialist tasks Construct a safety box on the firing chart or map Construct a safety T by using a safety diagram 3 Insert safety and position data into BCS or BUCS 4 Transmit voice fire commands to the howitzer sections E SE Obtain range clearance O 14 c Dry Fire Mission for Section Chief Safety Test resent a stressful exam that can identify safe chiefs this est consists of 10 fire missions the process of those 10 missions all 17 errors that will cause firing incidents occur The test sight is set up as close to a live fire situation as possible Cannoneers set off the induced errors have them corrected and fire the 10 missions safely to pass the test Annexes to this hands on test are as follows e Annex 1 The 17 errors that can occur in a mission e Annex 2 The 10 fire missions with error annotated e Annex 3 Section member cue cards The data that each one of the section members sets off e Annex 4 The safety Ts that the chief being tested will use e Annex 5 The inbriefing to the test sight e Annex 6 The equipment needed at the test sight e Annex 7 grade sheet ANNEX 1 ERRORS THAT WILL CAUSE A FIRING INCIDENT SAFETY T Errors T1 T6 not authorized T2 Charge not authorized T3 Deflection not authorized T4 Quadrant not authorized T5 Fuze not authorized T6 Time setting not authorized Note The test is written so that t
285. ed Units may also consider the use of chain link fences around gun positions to protect from rocket propelled grenades RPGs and bomblet type submunitions f The defense of the battery must be carefully planned and coordinated Howitzers and crew served weapons are ositioned to provide interlocking tires The star formation E ure 2 4 is ideal for the defense of a battery based unit wide the diamond formation Figure 2 3 optimizes platoon defense Figure F 1 shows a completed hardened position using a variation of the star formation This formation could also be organized into a triangular formation Detailed defense diagrams are prepared by each section chief and the defense plan is integrated by the BC battery first sergeant and or the platoon sergeant perimeter must be continuously manned to the extent possible consistent with the basic mission to provide fire support A plan for the all out defense of the position must be developed and exercised so that every individual soldier in the position knows his function and sector of responsibility A reaction force must be designated and exercised under the control of the first sergeant The composition of the reaction force to include equipment weapons and ammunition should be specified in the unit SOPs The scarcity of personnel in the firing battery and or the nature of th threat may make it impossible for the battery to adequately man if s own erimeter Then the FSCOORD mu
286. ed it is not to correct for displacement Therefore he aiming point must be far enough from the antel to ensure that there is no need to correct or displacement The principle is very similar to that involving the aiming posts The greater the distance between the sight and the aiming point the smaller the angular measurement will be when displacement occurs We do not normally fire deflections of less than 1 mil Therefore we must ensure that the angular measurement caused by displacement is less than 1 mil when we are using a DAP b We know that the greatest amount of displacement ossible with any one weapon system is 1 5 meters That being he case we can determine the minimum distance for a DAP by using the mil relation formula EXAMPLE X is the range to the DAP in thousands 1 5 is the maximum displacement possible in meters 15 1 15 X 1 X 1 5x 1 000 meters or 1 500 meters The minimum distance for a DAP is 1 500 meters b It is important that amine one are positioned and or selected to ensure that the howitzer can be oriented for direction throughout the various transfer limits As a minimum the aiming point should allow the section to cover the primary left and right sectors Note There are eight sectors of fire in a 6 400 mil circle These sectors are derived from the theory of transfer limits see paragraph D 5c below D 5 FAILURE TO COMPUTE TERRAIN GUN POSITI
287. ed a copy to the unit SOP to use during evaluation TASK 1 Written test Conditions All section members except the section chief will take the written test Thirty minutes will be allocated for the test Scoring There is only one correct answer to each question unless otherwise stated The score of the section members are averaged to determine the section score Each of the 25 questions is worth 2 points General Questions _ 1 If any member of battery observes a dangerous situation he can stop a fire mission already in progress by giving the command a STOP FIRING b CANCEL FIRING c CEASE FIRE d CHECK FIRING 2 For best results the collimator should be emplaced how many meters from the howitzer a 0 to 15 b 3 to 10 c 3 to 13 d 5 to 12 3 In a fire command the number 3167 is pronounced a thir tee wun six tee seven b thuh ree thouzand wun six seven thuh ree wun six seven d three thousand wun hundred six tee seven G 4 4 Number 2 wants the FDC to repeat the deflection Number 2 should a REPEAT DEFLECTION NUMBER 2 b NUMBER 2 DEFLECTION c DEFLECTION NUMBER 2 d SAY AGAIN DEFLECTION NUMBER 2 5 When separate loading ammunition is being fired the fire command for lot includes two letters XY The ammunition component s represented by the letter X in lot XY is are a propellant b projectile c propellant and projectile d propellant projectile and fu
288. ed by each of the ammunition vehicles currently shown in various TOEs These are the M992 and the 2 4 and 5 ton trucks These 1 ton trailers can e Increase organic hauling capability e Facilitate resupply and backhaul operations and FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 e Permit ammunition component segregation to reduce the battery s vulnerability to counterfire In towed units the prime mover loaded with ammunition should be positioned near the howitzer Ammunition should be left loaded until it is prepared for firing Other ammunition is stored on the battery ammunition section vehicles or at battery ammunition dump The establishment of a battery ammunition dump is a matter of command decision because it seriously impairs the mobility of the battery d appt E provides the load plan for the M925 5 ton truck for MI 98 units e The M992A1 CATV has specific storage locations for ammunition components depicted in its operator manual TM 9 2350 267 10 f The artillery uses the 11 ton heavy expanded mobility tactical truck HEMTT heavy expanded mobility ammunition trailer HEMATT and the palletized load system PLS for transporting large quantities of ammunition 10 14 ACCIDENTS Generally accidents are serious so all supervisory personnel should know the immediate action to be taken If the ammunition or equipment presents further danger move all personnel out of the area b Do not change any settings
289. ed for each weapon and charge to be fired FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 CHAPTER 7 FIRE COMMANDS AND FIRING REPORTS 7 1 DEFINITIONS Fire commands are used by the FDC to give the howitzer sections all the information necessary to start conduct and cease tiring In a battery without BCS fire commands must be sent by voice In a battery using BCS fire commands are sent digitally from the computer to the gun display unit GDU at the howitzer Initial fire commands include all elements necessary for orienting loading and tiring the piece Subsequent fire commands must include only those elements that have changed except elevation Quadrant elevation is given in every fire command and allows the howitzer section to load and fire if in a when ready WR status Note Section chiefs must VN the entire T fire command on every round In the race to be first e may look only at charge deflection and quadrant need This creates bvious problems when the fire for effect FFE is entered or if shell and fuze setting are changed 7 2 SEQUENCE OF FIRE COMMANDS a The elements of a fire command are always given in the same sequence Table 7 1 This saves time and confusion each member of the section knows the sequence and can anticipate what is coming next This sequence allows actions to occur at the same time For example the propellant charge can be cut and the fuze set if required while
290. ed only when the tactical situation permits no other means of command and control 1 3 COMMAND AND CONTROL OF BATTERIES a The FA cannon battalion issues movement instructions and other orders to the battery regardless of whether the battery is battery or platoon based Orders are issued to the ba y DANS or his operations center These orders specify the artillery requirements of the tire support coordinator Pe D rather than trying to specify how the commander is to accomplish the mission The BC selects latoon positions within the larger battery area selected b he 53 The battery commander will also determine whic patoon is better able to move at any given time The unctions of the FA battalion tactical operations center TOC are to position and control the fires of the batteries The BC positions and controls the tires of his platoons The battalion TOC should be involved with directly controlling platoons only when no other option is available 1 1 FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 b In a battery based 3x6 unit command and control of the ouai is facilitated through the battery commander and the battery operations center The battery fire direction center FDC controls the firing of the battery and is required to maintain the current tactical situation and respond to the supported unit and higher headquarters The BOC serves as a focal point for internal battery operations to include command and control battery defense coordin
291. ed to survive the counterfire threat but those techniques should not be used in isolation a Dispersion is the least expensive method in terms of effort and time Platoon installations howitzers fighting ositions and so forth should be no closer than 50 meters rom each other should not be on line and should present deceptively larger element b If the ground threat or the terrain makes wide dispersion of the battery or platoon elements impractical hardening the position will greatly increase survivability Fightin positions with adequate overhead cover for crew serve weapons and individual soldiers must be prepared and continuously improved Gun pits for towed howitzers and hull defilade positions for self propelled weapons substantially increase the ability of the unit to survive and continue the mission Unplanned movement to an alternate position denies the maneuver force the amount of FA support it requires it may increase the number of casualties The point is do not move unless your position is untenable FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 3 21 DEFENSE AGAINST NBC ATTACK The BC must ensure that the unit SOPs give procedures for dealing with NBC attacks SOPs should cover chemical and radiological survey teams protective measures immediate action decontamination and Guidance for the commander is provided in FM 3 100 3 22 EQUIPMENT AND MATERIEL DESTRUCTION PROCEDURES The DC must ensure that the unit SOP
292. edowns with the litters Table C 11 Medevac PCC Continued Verify communications with BOC Verify battle roster for all personnel Casualty forms filled out and in aid pouch Rehearse buddy aid procedures Account for section personnel in and out of position Report completion or problems to the plt sgt plt Idr Platoon Rehearse Medevac in each position ID BOC representative to collect battle roster at CCP Conduct comm checks with bn and Medevac vehicle Ensure BOC updates and disseminates all active aid stations to leaders Ensure map in Medevac vehicle Recon time route to aid stations Medic bag inventoried Medic has consolidated Class VIII requirements from section Med frequency Medevac procedures rehearsed C 3 BATTERY STATUS INVENTORY Table C 12 is a sample battery status inventory It should be completed prior to the battalion order brief The commander will readily know if he can his tasks or what additional material is required FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 Table C 12 Sample mission analysis worksheet assets available BATTERY STATUS AUTHORIZED OPERATIONAL STATUS REMARKS Howitzers p Ammo Vehicles FDC GEN amen fl Wheeled Vehicles i Voice Comm Digital Comm ooa 5 p AUTHORIZED Crew Served Weapons ___ NN RN RN Ew EL E LE LL Gm EL mw LL mr NM NENNEN M NE COO a 2272 AUTHORIZED OPERATIONAL STATUS
293. edures required in the task will be evaluated by the examiner on the basis of the established procedures in the appropriate reference G 5 SCORING The performance evaluation will be administered within a time framework on a GO NO GO basis the examinee either asses or fails The examiner will base his judgment upon he criteria stated in the evaluation checklist and on the most current reference for that particular task G 6 PREPARATION All preparations as indicated in the conditions for each task will be made before the task begins The examiner will ensure that the examinee understands the task to be performed G 1 FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 G 7 QUALIFICATION a If the evaluation is administered solely for the purpose of determining the state of training of individual sections within a unit no formal score is required The commander can readily determine the strengths and weaknesses of his sections simply by subjectively analyzing the GO and NO GO ratings received for each task performed b The evaluation may be used to determine the best section in a unit by determining a formal score To determine the score for individual sections add the numerical score attained in each of the four scored phases See Table G 1 for the qualification scheme G 8 ORGANIZATION AND SCORING The five phases are organized and scored as shown in Table G 2 A recommended grading sheet is shown in Table G 3 Table G 1 Qual
294. el and the azimuth counter shows 3 200 mils when the panoramic telescope reticle is laid precisely on the left aiming diagram b The chief of section will verify that the elbow telescope cross level bubble is centered the range gauge line of elbow telescope is set on zero elevation and the reticle of the elbow telescope coincides with the right pattern of the testing target Part 4 Performance Note Some of the problems will have cuts listed which exceed the maximum allowable If the maximum allowable cuts are exceeded only the maximum points shown will be lost 24 Weight 15 Angle 18 value 1 Angle2 6 value 1 Angle3 1 value 1 Angle 4 38 value 2 Angle 5 2 value 1 Expression errors 1 Mathematical error 1 a Minimum QE 65 Maximum cut 6 b Minimum safe time 2 8 5 5 8 3 9 0 1 C1 1 Maximum cut for this part of problem 3 Angle 1 18 Angle 2 472 Angle 3 1 Angle 4 38 Angle 5 2 c Minimum QE 131 Maximum cut 6 Entire problem maximum cut 15 Maximum cuts for expression for entire problem 2 25 Weight 25 Diagram construction Deflection and azimuth 1 ea Dog leg positioning 3 Expression errors 1 Math errors 1 Deflection other than 3200 3 Maximum cut 6 RG 7100 MIN ALT 368 AZ 1725 DF 5625 AZ 2555 AOF 2150 DF 2815 RG4200 DF 5200 MAX ALT 541 AZ 1925 DF 3425 MAX ALT 324 ALT jo 25 aie Deere 9
295. eld manual FOM forcing cone tapered beginning of the lands of the rifling of a cannon tube The forcing cone allows the rotating band of the projectile to be gradually engaged by the rifling thereby centering the projectile in the bore figure of merit formations weapons emplacement in position area as selected by the gunnery sergeant forward entry device a lightweight digital data device which replaces the final protective fires FPL final protective line FR France fratricide firing of a weapon which results in the unintended or inadvertent injury or death of allied or friendly personnel FRTP FS fire support or fuze setting flat rack transfer point Glossary 5 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 FSB forward support battalion FSC Federal supply classification FSCOORD fire support coordinator FSE fire support element FSN Federal stock number FT firing tables fz fuze GA gun assembly GB green bag GDU gun display unit BCS GE Germany GFT graphical firing table GLPS gun laying and positioning system G M grid magnetic GN grid north GPS GO gunner s quadrant GR Greece grid declination the smaller angle between true north and grid north Grid declination is indicated in the marginal data of maps as east or west of true north global positioning system grid north the north direction of the vertical grid lines on a military map photomap or grid sheet Since de
296. election The PZ should be at least 500 meters from the battery position because the batter position may have been targeted by enemy ae acquisition assets At a minimum the PZ should meet the following requirements Free of obstructions that would hinder flight operation e Trafficable terrain e Adequate concealment is available for equpment and personnel while awaiting aircraft arrival Note A terrain sketch should be made of the PZ 1 pee and used to brief the XO platoon leader and he PZ team before they occupy the PZ 0 Landing zone reconnaissance and selection daylight visual reconnaissance of the intended LZ area is made whenever pere with the flight being oblique to the area rather than directly over the area If this is not possible the commander will make a map recon and use all available electronic and photo surveillance assets If it is necessary to use pathfinders coordination must be made through the S3 As minimum the following must be done e Determine if the LZ is large enough e Determine if m positions that will support the mission are available nearby e Note the enemy routes of advance into the LZ area and any enemy activity e Note location of friendly forces e Select alternate LZs 3 Pickup zone occupation The commander takes an advance party to the PZ Its mission is to conduct a e sweep and to familiarize the ERU guides with the proposed layout of the equipment on the ground
297. embly SCA the case assembly and two gun assemblies The section chief receives his fire Powder lot commands on the SCA At the same time the deflection e Charge and quadrant elevation are displayed on the gunner s and assistant gunner s gun assemblies respectively Wire the one AN PRC 68 or the AN PRC 126 radio is used for e Fuze setting communication with the BCS e Fire commands L 2 SECTION CHIEF S ASSEMBLY Deflection a The SCA Figure L 1 gives the section chief a display of firing data and commands to fire The SCA can be Quadrant elevation connected to the case assembly and to a headset e FFE data DATA DISPLAY GUN DIRECTION 1D 2123 GKY 29 V OPERATOR CHIEF OF SECTION WEIGHT 36 8 OUNCES LENGTH 9 0 INCHES DISPLAY WINDOW WIDTH 3 5 INCHES HEIGHT 2 1 INCHES POW 5 VOLTS DC 4 TO CASE ASSEMBLY Figure L 1 Section chief s assembly L 1 FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 c The keyboard allows selection of piece data sending status to the BCS and self test The controls indicators and connectors Figure L 2 are discussed below 1 The panel control is used to vary the lighting intensity of keys and legends It has ON and OFF positions 2 The display control is used to vary the brightness of the display window data 3 The display window shows red letters and numbers of firing data and command bars DNL AMC and FIRE bars are not lit except during fire m
298. en established in the desired direction that is on the azimuth of fire The next step is to lay the platoon by using the upper motion This makes the tubes of the howitzers parallel to the 0 3200 line of the instrument The howitzers are oriented on the azimuth of fire e Survey may not be available To establish directional control and lay units by the orienting angle method the orienting line must be established Without survey the orienting line can be established by hasty survey techniques See Chapter 5 Once the orienting line is established the steps shown in c above apply The OS grid location and altitude may be obtained by GPS map spot or by hasty traverse 4 18 LAYING BY GRID AZIMUTH a If surveyed data are not available and hasty survey is not possible the next best method of orienting the aiming circle is to use the magnetic needle Note Laying by grid azimuth involves the use of the magnetic needle of the aiming circle The instrument must be set up where it is free from attractions The minimum distances are as ollows Power lines and electronic equipment 150 meters Railroad tracks artillery tanks and vehicles 75 meters Barbed wire personal weapons and small metallic objects 10 meters b To orient the aiming circle on a grid azimuth by using the magnetic needle complete the following steps 1 Determine the instrument reading be placed on the instrument by subtracting the azi
299. ent on the distance and accessibility to the crest 5 Estimation is least accurate but it is used when other methods are not feasible b Regardless of the method used PCR must be verified by the gunnery platoon leader before computing minimum quadrant elevation He can do this by measuring by m of the five methods listed above and comparing the results 6 5 COMPUTATION FOR FUZES OTHER THAN ARMED VARIABLE TIME a The gunnery sergeant or platoon leader performs the computations indicated in this section if the sum of ane 1 and 2 Figure 6 1 exceeds 300 mils or if the rapid tire tables are not available All angles are determined and expressed to the next higher whole mil He performs the computation for all howitzers The example below shows his computations 6 2 b One howitzer section may report a sight to crest that is unusually high If the platoon leader determines that it is due to a single narrow obstruction such as a tree that piece may be called out of action when firing deflections that would engage the obstruction This would enable the platoon to use the next lower minimum quadrant Other alternatives are to remove the obstruction or move the Weapon EXAMPLE Gun 1 has a range to crest of 1 100 meters the ame of site to crest reported is 16 mils Gun 1 is an M109A2 155 mm howitzer and charge 3 green bag will be fired The platoon leader does the tollowing Note All computations are derived
300. eps a and b use the chart below to determine score POINTS FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 TASK 8D Scoring Boresight the howitzer elbow telescope using a DAP a Standards of precision 2 Conditions The soldier will be eiven a howitzer in the firin were met If applicable position The cannon tube will be aligned on the DAP bu b Correct steps were followed to the elbow telescope will not be aligned on the DAP The complete the task soldier will be provided with the tools needed to adjust the sight The soldier positions himself as assistant gunner and announces when ready The examiner will say BEGIN c If steps a and b were not followed soldier recieves a NO GO and 0 points If soldier received a Time The time will start when the examiner says BEGIN GO on steps a and b use the chart and will stop when the assistant gunner states that the howitzer below to determine score is boresighted TIME IN SECONDS mea e so so so B 15 FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 TASK 8E Boresighting the howitzer pantel using standard angle Conditions The soldier is given a howitzer in the firing osition which has level bubbles and special corrections on The cannon tube will be at 0 mils elevation A parallex shield screwdrivers and a standard angle deflection and elevation will be provided The soldier positions himself as gunner and announces when ready The examiner wil
301. er the movement of another if defense personnel must withdraw to alternate positions e Chase the enemy with artillery fires when he is beaten back Do not dispatch forces to chase him e Use mines barbed wires and other obstacles e Plan Killer Junior on dismounted avenues of approach 3 18 c An additional defense against a ground attack mounted or dismounted is for the battery or platoon to displace to an alternate position 3 19 DEFENSE IN OPERATIONS OTHER THAN WAR OOTW The battery could be involved in any number of possible contingency missions to include OOTW This is particularly true of artillery units that support light forces The specifics of battery defense in OOTW depend largely on the situation Also they are largely determined by the equipment and offensive capability of the threat In most situations the threat consists of paramilitary or guerilla forces with minimum heavy weapons armor or air support The m ground threat to the battery is dismounted attacks by light infantry or infiltration by sappers or saboteurs In this situation the best defensive solution is consolidation of battery elements into a strong defensive perimeter often called a fire base For additional information on fire base operations and OOTW see paragraph F 9 and F 10 3 20 DEFENSE AGAINST INDIRECT FIRE Counterfire continues to be the greatest threat facing the artillery Dispersion hardening and movement are techniques us
302. er against direct fire weapons d Other Considerations High temperature and ever present sand cause failures in mechanical and electronic equipment Fuel and air filters must be cleaned after each operation sometimes twice per day ee must be protected before the glass becomes opaque Static electricity caused by the hot winds interferes with refueling operations and with radio traffic Turning radius of tracked vehicles is limited because of the buildup of sand between the idler wheel and track CAUTION Excess sand built up in this area will throw the track and or shear off the idler wheel F 6 AMPHIBIOUS ASSAULT a Fire Support Tasks Inherent in the concept of an amphibious assault is the projection of a fighting force into an area on shore that is assumed to be heavily defended The force must be built up in combat power from zero strength to a point where it is effective and credible To the maneuver element a battery must be prepared to lay and fire immediately upon landing For further information concerning amphibious operations refer to NWP 22 2 FMFM 1 7 b Command and Control Initially command and control are highly centralized Battery position areas displacements and fire control are centralized at the battalion level Communication between the two platoon main bodies and battalion operations is critical in effecting movement with the least disruption of fires c Positioning and Displacement Because
303. er analysis teams are not authorized by TOE each unit including units normally located in rear areas should select and train at least one team of two or three members adequately support their maneuver unit fire support personnel must know how to analyze and report crater information J 2 EQUIPMENT Three elements direction dimensions and curvature must be measured for crater analysis The used by the crater analysis team should consist of the following items e Declinated aiming circle or M2 com 259 stakes and communications wire used to obtain the direction from the crater to the weapon that fired the projectile e curvature template Figure J 1 to measure the curvature of the fragment to determine the caliber of the shell The template can be constructed of heav cardboard acetate wood or other appropriate material e Defense Intelligence Agency Projectile Fragment Identification Guide DST 1160G 029 85 for measuring fragment dimensions J 3 SHELL CRATER ANALYSIS a The projectiles direction of flight can be determined with reasonable its crater of ricochet furrow accurately locating the crater and determining the direction of flight it is possible to obtain the azimuth of a ray that will pass through or near the enemy position While it is possible to determine the direction to a battery from one crater or ricochet furrow the battery may be located by the intersection of the avera
304. er establishes an aiming point Asthe Xu piece is preparing to fire the first round all other howitzers are pulling on line Positioning is critical Each chief of section must position his howitzer so that his gunner can seethe aiming circle and where the line of sight is not impaired for any other howitzer Immediately after the adjusting piece has tired the initial round of adjustment the platoon sergeant will command FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 NUMBER so and so e iece REFER AIMING POINT THIS INSTRUMENT e hearing the above comment the gunner Using the azimuth knob without moving the tube rotates the head of the pantel and sights on the instrument or object Checks the sight mount bubbles centering t as necessary and rechecks the sigh picture Reads the deflection appearing on the azimuth counter M100 series pantels azimuth and azimuth micrometer scales M12 series pantels or azimuth main and micrometer scales L7A2 pantel Announces NUMBER so and so AIMING POINT IDENTIFIED DEFLECTION SO much Note When referring to the second circle to verify initial ay te gunner must ensure that the tube is on the azimuth of fire before he uses the above procedures e platoon sergeant sets the referred deflection on the upper motion of the aiming circle and with the lower motion sights on the pantel of the adjusting piece The platoon sergeant is now ready to lay the rem
305. er of the block being totaled When a page is filled out in full the totals placed in the AMMUNITION FUZES ON HAND block on the next page are the last listed totals At the end of a mission or upon resupply the amounts of ammunition on hand are totaled on the appropriate line Thus a running count is continually maintained FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 CHAPTER 8 SPECIAL SITUATIONS 8 1 DIRECT FIRE Direct fire is a special technique that demands a high standard of training and requires the section to operate as an independent unit It should be used only as a last resort ee for direct fire engagements are discussed elow a Trajectory Trajectory characteristics change with the range to target and charge fired The following information is based on use of charge 7 Note To produce the highest muzzle velocity and a flat trajectory the maximum charge should always be used for direct fire 1 0 to 400 meters This is the most accurate range at which to engage a target with direct fire during combat because the trajectory is flattest 2 400 to 1 500 meters In this zone the trajectory is flat enough to allow direct estimation of range without actual bracketing of the target Range changes in 50 meter increments give the best results 3 1 500 to 2 500 meters Hits are only reasonabl possible in this zone The bracket method of adjusting will probably be required to obtain a hit 4 Over 2 500 meters Dir
306. erent The battery may also consider making one the enemy D eds 8 P RUNE Tar that there is an in charge and that the force e Notify the FDC BOC of the situation as it develops does not have to assemble 15 effective that is e Re establish the perimeter they are already assembled FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 3 6 DISPERSION Dispersion minimizes the effects of an air attack or a counterfire attack When using this technique units should disperse as a minimum over a 200 by 400 meter area with howitzers no closer than 100 meters apart The FDC should be positioned approximately 100 meters from either flank howitzer Figure 3 1 shows a platoon position with elements not dispersed Figure 3 2 shows a platoon position with elements doeet Dotted lines in both figures indicate the area normally covered by enemy countertire Note With the use of the BCS and LCU howitzers can be accurately located over a widely dispersed area of operation Refer to Chapter 2 for further discussion of weapons dispersion 3 7 PRIORITIES a The BC or platoon leader may be instructed to continue his mission in the position despite hostile counterfire In o he might establish the following tasks in the priority indicated e Harden critical items of equipment e Prepare individual fighting positions e Prepare defensive positions e Select alternate positions displacement routes and a signal in case movement is unavoidable Brief
307. eriods of not more than 3 days and as high as 160 F for periods of not more than 4 hours per day An increase in malfunctions may be experienced with some VT fuzes when the temperature is below 0 or above 120 F Powder temperature affects the muzzle velocity of a fired round and is a matter of frequent concern to the FDC At least two howitzer sections should be designated to keep track of the powder temperature A powder thermometer is inserted into the top powder increment in the canister and care must be taken to ensure the thermometer does not touch metal Note Cannon sections must be careful not to fire the powder thermometer c Only enough ammunition to meet current needs should be prepared for firing 10 13 STORAGE AND TRANSPORTATION TECHNIQUES a In SP units the M992 combat ammunition tracked vehicle is the companion vehicle to the howitzer It serves as an area from which to service the weapon as well as a storage area for ammunition This vehicle should be positioned with its howitzer and replenished in the battery area by the ammunition section Ammunition should be left in pallets until needed for use Note Be sure pallets are adequately cribbed and secured to prevent them from shifting during movement b To increase the ammunition carrying capability of cannon batteries additional M332 ammunition trailers are authorized in the TOE Although mobility m be degraded somewhat an M332 trailer should be pull
308. ers for Use by NATO Armed Forces 6 December 1988 STANAG 2002 QSTAG 501 Warning Signs for the marking of Contaminated or Dangerous Land Areas Complete Equipments Supplies and Stores 26 November 1980 28 September 1979 STANAG 2019 QSTAG 509 Military S Based Systems 16 September 1986 5 March STANAG 2021 05 180 Computation of Bridge Raft and Vehicle Classifications 18 August 1990 12 August 1991 STANAG 2025 05 591 Basic Military Road Traffic Regulations 1 October 1986 16 February 1989 STANAG 2103 0STAG 187 Reporting Nuclear Detonations Biological and Chemical attacks and ici and Warnin Associated Hazards and reas 45 October 1994 15 July STANAG 2155 Road Movement Bid and Credit 26 August 1994 STANAG 2174 QSTAG 507 Military Routes and TOUR Networks 25 February 1994 12 December References 4 STANAG 2176 Procedure for Military Road Movements Across National Frontiers 27 April 1981 Note STANAGs and QSTAGs can be obtained from Naval Publications Center 5801 Tabor Avenue Philadelphia PA 19120 DA Form 1425 may be used to requisition documents TB 43 180 Calibration Requirements for the Maintenance of Army Material 27 November 1992 TM 6 230 Logarithms and Mathematical tables 26 June 1956 TM 9 1100 Series and Organizational Manuals Specific Systems TM 9 1290 262 10 Operator 5 manual for ANS Circle M2 NSN 1290 00 614 0008 and M2A2 NSN 129
309. ersonnel and equipment to perform administration supply communications NBC and maintenance functions Note Supply and NBC operations at the battery level are functions performed by personnel of the battery headquarters There are not sections organized specifically for those functions 2 Each firing platoon has the personnel and equipment to determine firing data to fire the howitzers and to resupply ammunition In some units ammunition assets may be consolidated at battalion CANNON BATTERY BATTERY HEADQUARTERS COMMUNICATIONS SECTION Note A 3 x 6 platoon based organization would have one howitzer less than the figure depicts MAINTENANCE SECTION FIRING PLATOON FIRING PLATOON FIRE DIRECTION HEADQUARTERS CENTER HOWITZER AMMUNITION SECTION SECTION Figure 1 1 Platoon based FA cannon battery 1 3 FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 1 5 TACTICAL DUTIES OF KEY PERSONNEL Paragraphs 1 6 through 1 12 present the suggested duties of key personnel in cannon battery of a platoon based battalion The unit MTOE the commander s preference personnel strength and individual capabilities may require the commander to modify or reassign duties based on METT T and standing operating procedures SOPs 1 6 BATTERY COMMANDER The battery commander is responsible for all aspects of the operations of his battery He locates where he can best command the battery considering the factors of METT T and the l
310. ertical angle VA to each howitzer see Chapter 4 4 Having determined the deflection VA and distance from the aiming circle to each weapon the gunnery sergeant ives the data ul to the FDC representative The ata are applied to the M 17 plotting board for computation of TGPCs fee Appendix D 5 He obtains site to crest and piece to crest range from each gun een He then determines XO s min QE for the lowest preterred charge the unit expects to fire in the position Add a 20 mil safety factor to allow for the accuracy of the M2 compass WEAPON LOCATION DATA AZIMUTH OF FIRE HOWITZER METHOD NUMBER OF LAY DEFLECTIONS ENS NEN e DF AZ TO HOW ADD 3200 IF RED NUMBER IS USED M12 ONLY SUBTRACT 6400 IF SUM EXCEEDS 6400 DA FORM 5698 R AUG 88 AZIMUTH TO HOWITZER pac _ CREE NERONE RENNES EMEN aa ERE ous ORIENTING STATION EASTING NORTHING ALTITUDE VERTICAL DISTANCE ANGLE METERS MILS Figure 2 5 Weapons location data 2 13 FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 d Each gun guide does the following be us the ri by ees i proper 1 He emplaces the pantel marking stake in the P for SP units cannes eT pP designated location This stake marks the location of the Figure 2 7 pantel of the weapon 2 He stops the weapon parallel to the guide stake or 3 Lays wire from the TM 184 to his cannon position tape so that when t
311. es separated by flat basins that may studded by mue created during flash floods Terrain will support all types of artillery but is best suited for SP artillery 2 The rocky plateau desert has slight relief with extended flat areas and good visibility It is characterized by steep walled eroded valleys wadis These are 11 attractive for artillery positions but are subject to flas flooding 3 The sandy or dune desert has extensive flat areas covered with dunes subject to wind erosion The dune size the texture of sand and the leeward gradient may prohibit terrain movement entirely b Command and Control Map reading is difficult and resections are impossible unless a number 0 points are available Survey performed by PADS is most useful otherwise a hasty astro or simultaneous observation is a must for an accurate direction c Positioning and Displacement Lack of vegetation makes camouflage difficult In all cases the artillery battery will be visible to the ground observer as the netting silhouettes against the sky From about 1 200 feet in the air the camouflaged installations appear bigger than the surrounding dunes or mounds of sand and vegetation If assets are available digging in all the battery s vehicles below the surface of the desert and stretching the desert camouflage nets flat or nearly flat over the vehicles rovides not only good concealment from ground observation ut also excellent cov
312. evated at 0 mils place a piece of tape on the trunnion support and draw a straight line as an index b Set off the minimum QE on the fire control quadrant Elevate the tube until the bubble centers in the elevation level vial c Place a piece of tape on the quadrant mount Draw a line across from the index line established on the trunnion support Record the minimum QE next to that line 11 4 d Mark the maximum QE in the same manner e Emplace safety aids on the M109A2 A5 howitzer as follows 1 Deflection safety aids These may be marked on the exterior and or interior of the hull a Make an index mark on the top carriage with a piece of tape b Set off the left deflection limit on the pan using the reset counter Traverse to pickup a proper sight picture on the aiming point c Place a piece of tape on the bottom of the carriage directly under the index mark d Mark the right deflection limit in the same manner 2 Quadrant elevation safety aids These may be marked on the exterior or the interior of the weapon Emplace the safety aids on the interior of the weapon as shown in d 2 above Mark the exterior of the weapon as ollows n Mark an index on the tube with a piece of tape 0 Set off the maximum QE on the fire control Tuo Elevate the tube until the bubble centers in the elevation evel vial c Place a mark on the top carriage in line with the index mark d Mark the m
313. evel of unit training His responsibilities may include the following Supervise and standardize the operations of the platoons b Reconnoiter and select pon position areas after receiving direction from the controlling headquarters Chapter 2 c Determine the azimuth of fire if it is not given by higher headquarters d Plan and direct unit marches and movements in accordance with tactical plans established by higher headquarters Chapter 2 e Plan for survey control and when necessary conduct hasty survey Ch pter 5 f Ensure an effective defense posture is maintained in the platoon areas Chapter 3 Maintain communications and electronics security Chapter 9 h Plan for ammunition resupply Chapter 12 i Plan for logistic resupply of food service supply and maintenance items Chapter 12 Keep the battalion TOC and battery personnel informed k Develop and execute the overall battery defense plan Chapter E 1 Supervise safety during battery operations and conduct risk assessment m Develop the battery standing operating procedure 1 7 FIRST SERGEANT The first sergeant ISG is the principal enlisted advisor to the battery commander His responsibilities may include the following 1 4 a Supervise the platoon sergeants gunnery sergeants and section chiefs and whenever possible maintain a presence on the gun line b Assist and advise during reconnaissance and selection
314. everely affected The height and density of structures will reduce the planning ranges for all organic radio equipment Wire takes on added importance It is less vulnerable to disruption if run on existing telephone poles or through buildings and sewers More use must be made of messengers and prearranged audio and visual signals Imaginative positioning of antennas such as intermingling them with existing civilian antennas or in treetops may increase transmission range and enhance the survivability of the unit Existing civilian communication networks should be actively d ht out and used to supplement the organic capabilities ot the unit c Positioning and Displacement 1 When field artillery is used in an urban environment selected position areas should Be free of civilians Be away from the center of the built up area Minimize masking Have several routes of escape Be off the main high speed avenues Afford as much cover and concealment as possible 2 The use of existing structures such as barns auto repair shops and warehouses as firing or hiding positions maximum protection and minimizes camouflage effort 3 More time must be allotted for the reconnaissance of potential position areas Depending on the density of F 2 buildings in the area the reconnaissance party may have to use infantry techniques for house to house fighting to clear and check the buildings Special techniques f
315. f JOEL B HUDSON Administrative Assistant to the Secretary of the Army 02743 BY DIRECTION OF THE COMMANDANT OF THE MARINE CORPS fd A as PAUL K VAN RIPER Lieutenant General U S Marine Corps Commanding General Marine Corps Combat Development Command Quantico Virginia DISTRIBUTION Active Army Army National Guard and U S Army Reserve To be distributed in accordance with the initial distribution number 110776 requirements for FM 6 50 ve U S GOVERNMENT PRINTING OFFICE 1996 527 027 60031 FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 CHAPTER 1 MISSION ORGANIZATION AND KEY PERSONNEL Section I MISSION AND GENERAL ORGANIZATION 1 1 MISSION a The mission of the field artillery FA is to destroy neutralize or suppress the d cannon rocket and in missile fires and to help integrate a e support assets into combined arms operations b The field artillery cannon battery is the basic firing element of the cannon battalion regardless of how the batter is The battery s capability is enhanced throug the tlexibility and survivability provided under an organization based on platoons In no way should the references to platoon or battery based organizations be construed as the structure for operational employment Rather the terms pertain solely to organizational structure Note For tactics techniques and for the M109A6 Paladin see FM 6 50 60 1 2 FIELD ARTILLERY ORGANIZATION The field
316. f Plan coordinate and execute the evacuation of casualties to the battalion aid station 1 17 EXECUTIVE OFFICER Usually the XO commands the firing battery portion of the battery As the poe commander he is responsible for everything the firing battery does or fails to do During extended field operations he spends on of his time supervising technical operations of the FDC During this time he relies heavily on the chief of firing battery to supervise the battery Also he relies on the GSG to lead the advance party The XO s responsibilities may include the following a Establish and maintain the firing capability of the battery b Supervise the displacement movement and occupation of the battery Supervise the use of the radar chronograph and overall MV management program of the battery d Supervise the maintenance of the battery equipment e Ensure continuous security of the battery with emphasis during displacement and occupation of position f Verify minimum QE for each howitzer g Ensure that the weapon location data report is submitted and updated and that the section chiefs reports are submitted to the FDC Supervise and conduct hasty survey operations for the attery 1 8 i Supervise the ammunition management for the battery j Supervise safety during battery operations 1 18 ASSISTANT EXECUTIVE OFFICER USMC only The assistant executive officer AXO assists the XO and FDO He leads
317. f insulation on each end of the wire and twist the two conductors B Figure L 8 ends of each pair 1 QE 2 and QE 3 C Figure L 8 Connect one end of the pair marked QE 1 to the binding post labeled QE 1 6 Figure 1 7 on the and the other end to the left binding post labeled 1 on the QE gun 2 Take three GET of wire Tag and mark the two assembly Using the same procedure connect the other two pairs to the QE 2 and QE 3 binding posts 3 Tag and mark the other three cables DEF 1 DEF 2 and DEF 3 Connect one end of the pair marked DEF 1 to the binding post labeled DEF 1 H Figure L 7 on the GDU and the other end to the left binding post labeled 1 on the deflection gun assembly Using the same procedure connect the other two cables to DEF 2 and DEF 3 Run the GDU self test to check internal operation Always use a separate wire line for voice TA 312 communications Then make a digital communications check using the BCS RING and the GDU RING Figure L 8 Preparing wire connector L 8 M109 SERIES HOWITZERS The GDU is mounted in the cab of the M109 series of howitzers Figure L 9 Be sure to leave enough slack in the wire leading outside the cab to the DR 8 to compensate for traversing L 9 GUN DISPLAY UNIT POWER The GDU connected by wire to the BCS can be operated from one of two power sources e Internal battery power e External power by power cable SPARE BATTERY 1
318. f the distance to the far post Therefore if the near post is not properly emplaced displacement will not be properly accounted for and the weapon will not be oriented correctly 3 To measure the distance from the piece to the aiming posts the stadia method may be used The pantel and the aiming posts are used as measuring devices a cannoneer in setting out the aiming posts holds the upper section of one of the aiming posts in a horizontal position to the line of sighting The gunner measures the ength of the section in mils by using the reticle of the pantel For example the upper section of the aiming post is 4 72 feet long and measures 14 mils when it is 100 meters from the piece Figure D 1 The proper location of the near aiming post in this case would beat the at which the 4 V foot section measures 28 mils Figure D 2 14 MILS 706050 40 30 20 10 10 2030 40 50 60 70 80 Figure D 1 Aiming post sight picture at 100 meters 80 706050 40 30 20 10 10 2030 40 50 60 70 Figure D 2 Aiming post sight picture at 50 meters D 2 b In many cases the ideal spacing of 50 and 100 meters cannot be obtained However the aiming posts are separated when the near aiming post is set at a point where the 4 Y foot section measures twice the number of mils it measured at the far aiming post location This measurement maybe made at night by attaching the night lighting device at the 4 foot marks o
319. fer limit for all howitzers and for a ghost gun whose location is center of battery Calculate the difference between the ghost gun data and those of the mie element The ghost gun at battery center uses the average platoon or battery muzzle velocity This method is not as desirable as that in 1 above because all howitzers must carry a TGPC c Transfer limits are defined as an area 400 mils left and right of center and 2 000 meters over and short of the center pe TGPCs derived for a given transfer limit are effective as long as all weapons are within 200 meters of battery center d Enemy attack capabilities may be so great and concealment so poor that the firing element must be spread over an abnormally large area This may require that TGPCs be produced for two or more dum within the firing element individually For example if the howitzers are positioned about 250 meters apart it would not be feasible to compute only one set of TGPCs for a given transfer limit A solution to the problem would be to compute TGPCs for sections 1 and 2 and then for sections 3 and 4 both computations deriving corrections from separate ga centers The FDC could then transmit the two sets of data rather than four sets This would speed up the delivery of fires and ensure that there would be effects on target FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 Note This consideration is extremely important when live fire exercises are conducted during peacetime vanme When surface d
320. fts are as follows e Deflection 50 to 80 mils e Quadrant 600 to 800 mils Note The tube will be returned to loading elevation after each round is fired if applicable The time for each test begins when the section chief states the first word of the command and ends when the appropriate cannoneer has fired the weapon The cannoneers will perform all of the actions required to fire the weapon to include using dummy ammunition if available Firing is on the command of the section chief Evaluation Checklist Were all bubbles exactly centered when round was fired 5 for any unentered ubble Was the pantel correctly aligned on aiming point when round was fired 5 if not aligned Did the section chief verify the sight picture before firing Were the correct data fired 5 for any Incorrect data Were correct and complete commands issued by all sections members SET READY CLOSE and so forth 1 for each incorrect or omitted command Scoring 4 missions x 30 points per mission 120 points possible TASK 10 E of conventional ammunition for firing 061 266 1505 061 266 1506 second fire mission Conditions Dummy ammunition is available The section chief is given four 3 by 5 inch cards that require the section to prepare selected nonnuclear ammunition for firing Standard data Tested section is adjusting piece shell HE lot XY fz Q EXAMPLE DNL AMC FIRE EST GUN OTRDADJ SH HE LOT
321. g 8 _ ___ 1 35 L 0100 o 50 13 120 7196 __ 165 13 81 5 L 130 2n 16 13 1 8 8 4 140 228 J 19 13 m 2 e 4 150 23 24 19 7 160 26 _ 27 11 10e 71577 24 24 19 19 5 ___ 800 32 25 23 1 17 1 1900 165 3 9 285 228 5 62 43 7 ag 10 13 2200 42 19 8 o 2300 X27 208 13 13 74 ___2 500 49 385 30 28 16 __ 260 69 49 38 24 t5 55 2700 32 25 182 134 280 4e 95 13 9 290 76 sn 25 198 4 ___5000 712 57 25 66 so 39 217 157 23200 60 447 _ 39 24 12 12 22330 66 39 233 168 116 340 725 fF 757 7o n o 193 134 380 390 __ o bae o ees 22 18 pap qr cu 245 3 5000 ____ __ 284 Se o ru 600 ei 650 _ s50 J o o 22569 39 ___ 500 ol p 8 __ 465 E 900 RS
322. g battery or battery gunnery sergeant Additional responsibilities may include the following a Lay the battery b Perform hasty survey as required c Initiate the development of the battery defense plan when necessary d Assist in the sustainment of 24 hour operations e Ensure there is an initial fire direction capability with the advance party FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 f Compute the XO s min QE for the lowest preferred charge the unit expects to fire g In a USMC battery the local security chief plans and executes overall battery defense The AXO lays the battery performs hasty survey as required ensures an initial fire direction capability with the dvance party and computes the XO min QE for the lowest preferred charge the unit expects to fire 1 22 HOWITZER SECTION CHIEF The section chief is responsible for the training and proficiency of his section the operational readiness of his equipment and the safe firing of his weapon His responsibilities may include the following Ensure the weapon is properly emplaced laid and prepared for action The memory aid TLABSPAP will be used as a guide for accomplishment of the following tasks e T rails spades and or firing platform emplaced e L Lay the weapon e A Aiming point emplaced e B B oresight verified or performed e S Second circle Verification of lay performed with a second aiming circle e P checks in accordance with
323. g posts The post far post and pantel line are an equal number of mils apart NICAD mnickel cadmium NIIN national item identification number NL Netherlands NIT no later than NO Norway NSN national stock number o orienting angle O amp I operations and intelligence OD olive drab OEG operational exposure guide OIC officer in charge OL orienting line OOTW operations other than war OP observation post OPORD operation order OPSEC operations security orienting angle a horizontal clockwise angle from the ine of fire to the orienting line orienting linea line of known direction in the battery area that serves as a basis for laying the bat tery for direction The azimuth of the orient ing line is the direction from the orienting station to a designated end of the orienting ne orienting stationa point established on the ground which has directional control The aiming FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 circle is set up over this point to lay the pieces by the orienting angle method ORSTA orienting station BCS or BUCS mnemonic ORSTB second orienting station BCS or BUCS mnemonic OS orienting station PADS position and azimuth determining system pam pamphlet panoramic telescope usually called the sight or pantel a fire control instrument used for either direct or indirect fire Panoramic tele scopes used on current field artillery weapons are as shown below MAXIMUM COMMON WEAPON SERIES DF
324. g the boresight of each weapon is the specific responsibility of the section chief b OIC of firing c platoon leader d OIC of firing and FDO 12 The FDO has computed a minimum QE of 186 mils and plt Idr has determined a minimum QE of 195 mils for shell HE and fuzes quick and time Which QE should be used as the safe minimum QE a 186 b 190 195 d either 186 or 195 FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 13 To inscribe a GFT setting on a GFT after a registration has vod completed the manufacturer s hairline 1s placed over the a adjusted time b adjusted elevation c chart range d adjusted quadrant Part 3 Completion 14 Before leaving for the field all officers in the chain of command responsible for safety should read and understand five references They are s follows b C 4 15 Equipment and material required by safety personnel in the field include the following b m a 16 Upon arrival at the prescribed tring poini the position commander must check and verify the following b d 17 When the battery is laid by the grid azimuth method the aiming circle can be no closer than meters to artillery weapons 18 The platoon has been laid on an azimuth of 0430 mils You are prepared to check the The declination constant of your aiming circle is 0130 mils What instrument reading would you place on the scales by use of the upper O 6 moti
325. ge azimuths from at east three widely separated groups of craters b In crater analysis differences in aee of fall projectile burst patterns directions of flight and time fuze settings will help to distinguish between enemy batteries firing on a given area Note Refer to FM 3 100 for pue on friendly troop safety from the effects of craters contaminated with chemical agents Refer to STANAG 2002 in FM 3 100 for guidance in marking craters containing chemical biological or radiological contamination Figure J 1 Curvature template JA FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 4 VALUE OF ANALYSIS By analyzing shell craters it is possible to do the following e 1 as confined locations suspected locations that have been obtained by other means e Confirm the presence of enemy artillery and obtain an approximate direction to it e Detect the presence of new types of enemy weapons new calibers or new ammunition manufacturing methods J 5 INSPECTION OF SHELLED AREAS Shelled areas are inspected as soon as possible Craters that are exposed to the elements or are abused by personnel deteriorate rapidly thereby losing their value as a source of information J 6 SURVEY OF CRATER LOCATION Areas must be located accurately enough for plotting on charts maps or aerial photographs Deliberate survey is not essential hasty survey techniques or map spotting usually will suffice Direction can be determined by use of an aiming
326. ge increases Convoys must travel in closed column during whiteout conditions and prolonged darkness Air assault operations are likely d Other Considerations ee resupply is hampered by reduced mobility and difficulty in nine grid locations Target acquisition equipment can be adversely affected by snowstorms and intense cold Without the use of PADS survey may be more time consuming F 1 FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 F 4 MILITARY OPERATIONS ON URBANIZED TERRAIN Fire Support Tasks The massive growth of urbanized areas and man made changes to the landscape significantly affect the conduct of future battles Avoidance of these areas during periods of conflict is no longer possible Therefore commanders at all levels must be aware of the unique advantages and disadvantages associated with operations conducted in and around cities towns villages and similar built up areas The special artillery technique of direct fire may be used more frequently on urbanized terrain than elsewhere Within the built up area high angle fires are most effective in attacking the defiladed areas between buildings b Command and Control Command and control of a tiring platoon operating in an urban area are demanding Decentralization to the maximum feasible extent may be required The reduced ability to communicate and extended D frontages necessitate more detailed orders and SOPs actical communications in the urine platoon area are s
327. gistration position or to a roving gun from a surveyed battery or platoon position The technique is similar to that used in directional traverse However the personnel performing the traverse must measure not only the horizontal angle at each occupied station but also the distance to each forward station The data needed to begin a graphic traverse include the coordinates of a known point and the direction to an azimuth mark The only equipment required is an aiming circle aiming osts for the marking of stations and FDC equipment procedures for conducting a graphic traverse are as ollows a Degin the traverse at the known survey control point SCP Follow the procedures for directional traverse to measure the station angle from the azimuth mark rear station to the first forward station Compute the azimuth of the first leg of the traverse b Measure the distance from the occupied station to the forward station The procedures for making this measurement are discussed in paragraph 5 10 c Plot the coordinates of the SCP starting point on the FDC grid sheet Using a target grid a protractor or an RDP establish an azimuth index that corresponds to the computed azimuth from the to the forward point and draw a line representing the azimuth of the first traverse leg Scale this azimuth line as close as possible With the plotting boxwood scale measure the distance of the traverse leg and mark the forward station
328. h the aircraft must d Roadblocks An element may be halted by a roadblock The maximum amount of firepower available including howitzer direct fire should be placed immediately on the roadblock and on both sides of the roadblock If nonorganic support such as close air support covering artillery or armor is available it should be called on immediately to help If the roadblock cannot be neutralized the unit must try to disengage under cover of supporting fires Upon disengaging the element should meet at designated rally oint and resume its march by an alternate route An attempt crash vehicles through a roadblock before it is checked for mines may result in unnecessary losses and a complete blocking off of the road by disabled vehicles e Ambush 1 There are two types of ambushes blocked and unblocked Both must be countered in the same manner get out of the kill zone neutralize the ambushing force with firepower and report a Blocked ambush If the route is blocked maximum available fire should be Tu immediately on the attackin forces Personnel in the kill zone should immediately dismount attack as infantry and report n in the kill zone is the worst course of action The portion of the element that is not in the Kill zone must also reac There few ambushing forces that can equal the organic firepower of an artillery unit Use the howitzers to place fire on the ambushing force then roll up th
329. hapter reinforces AR 385 63 However if local range regulations are more restrictive than the material in this chapter the local range regulation must be followed responsibilities for safety are fixed as discussed elow a Commanders of Field Artillery Units Commanders establish and maintain a m training and certification program for their personnel The purpose of this program Is to train and quality individual members of the firing battery in the safety for their areas of responsibility When the responsible artillery commander is satisfied that the individual members are qualified to erform the safety duties as the firing battery e certifies them as competent to perform those duties Sample tests for qualification of safety personnel are in Appendix O b Battalion Commander The FA battalion commander is responsible for safety during all phases of a firing exercise under his control commander selects tr ins and certifies the personnel necessary to assist him in dischargin this responsibility These personnel include but are no limited to the firing battery commander executive officer fire direction officer leader chief of firing battery gunnery sergeant FDC chief computer and howitzer chief of section If any position is not filled by a command safety certified person another person who is certified and qualified to fill that position performs the safety checks Note The title
330. has the same performance characteristics as fuze M728 EXAMPLE Gun 1 155 mm howitzer M109A3 range to the crest is 900 meters Angle of site reported by the chief of section is 80 Determine the minimum quadrant elevation for charge 5 white bag fuze M564 for Gun 1 SOLUTION e Angle of site to crest Angle 1 e Add Angles 1 and Angle 2 e Sum is 300 mils or less Use rapid fire tables e Using Tables K 8 through K 16 enter the appropriate table with the appropriate fuze and propellant type Extract elevation at the appropriate charge and piece to crest range e Add Angle 1 to the minimum elevation e Gun 1 minimum QE Note Always compute the XO s minimum QE for all howitzers and select the largest value as the platoon tables only when firing less than min safe time leader s or battery XO s minimum QE FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 Table K 2 Rapid fire table for M101A1 M557 and M564 fuzes 5 2 U m 2 a CREST RANGE CHG 1 CHG 2 CHG 3 CHG 4 CHG 5 CHG 7_ 6e a p e ee L3 1 2 4 4 4 _ __ a gt gt 3 2 7 25 5 1 aa ot 4 s 73 s 4 2 L 70 15 7 _ 3 2 __ o 8s w 5 30 i 9 __ 2 _ 1000 to
331. he AZ field of the AFU UPDATE The BC operator executes the AFU UPDATE d Upon notification of an emergency occupation the BCS operator does the following M He displays the emergency occupation mission FM CFP en after ensuring that the gun number FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 corresponding to the emergency occupation position is specified in the adjustment field he executes the format 2 From the ge set of firing data he determines the new azimuth of fire by using the BACKWARD AZIMUTH RULE paragraph 4 25 3 He enters the new azimuth of fire in the AZ field of the AFU UPDATE format and re executes the format EXAMPLE Step 1 Place possible emergency occupation positions in BCS PIECES format and 3200 in AZ field of AFU UPDATE format Step 2 Upon receipt of fire mission request FM CFF select pieces to fire PTF corresponding to appropriate position in BCS PIECES and execute Step 3 Review firing data Step 4 Use BACKWARD AZIMUTH RULE to compute the new azimuth of fire as follows 3200 AZ 3200 4550 Decrease of 1350 1350 new AZ 1850 Common deflection Computed deflection Increase of 3200 AZ 3200 2500 increase of 700 700 new AZ 3900 Common deflection Computed deflection Decrease of Step 5 Replace AZ in AFU UPDATE with new AZ Step 6 Re execute related fire mission request message FM CFF Data now correspond with common deflection 3200 and appropriate mission data F 11 FM 6 50 MCWP
332. he VT fuze set at a time less than the minimum safe time allowance must be made for vertical clearance of friendly elements Vertical crest clearances for M513 M514 M728 and M732 VT fuzes fired over ordinary terrain are shown in Table 6 1 Table 6 1 Vertical clearance VERTICAL CLEARANCE FOR FUZES 514 513 728 732 155 mm howitzer 100 meters d If the projectile is to be fired over marshy or wet terrain the average height of burst will increase Therefore the vertical clearance shown in Table 6 1 should be increased by 50 percent If the projectile is to be tired over water snow or ice the vertical clearance shown in Table 6 1 should be increased by 100 percent e The minimum QE for fuze VT when a fuze soing less than the minimum safe time is fired is based on PCR and FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 a greater vertical clearance as indicated in Table 6 1 instead of the 5 meters as stated in paragraph 6 2c f The rollon tip is an example of computations to determine minimum QE for armed VT fuzes EXAMPLE The howitzer is a 155 mm M109A3 charge 4 green bag and armed variable time fuzes M514 are to be fired The angle of site reported by the chief of section is 16 mils The PCR is 1 700 meters The platoon leader computes the minimum QE as follows e ANGLE 1 The angle of site to crest reported by the chief of section l6mils e ANGLE 2 The vertical clearance in mils Divide the vertical clearance in mete
333. he amount of time available for training the platoon in the particular immediate actions for example infantry squad tactics in response to a blocked ambush e The type of communications to be employed with the immediate actions flags radio arm and hand signals and so forth e How best to neutralize the attack e Planned tires along the route of march In all cases of enemy attack conduct immediate action rocedures and then report the situation to higher eadquarters b March Column Under Artillery Attack The immediate actions in defense against hostile artillery fire are to move out of the danger zone report the situation to 2 22 higher headquarters and request immediate counterfire If a platoon expects hostile artillery tire during the march it can reduce its vulnerability by moving e By open column or infiltration e Under the cover of darkness or during other periods of reduced visibility e By terrain march c March Column Under Air Attack In the event of an air attack all available personnel should engage the aircraft immediately On order of the convoy commander the column either disperses or halts If ordered to halt vehicles should disperse alternately off both sides of the road A high performance aircraft cannot be engaged effectively by leading it with low volume independent small arms fire As the aircraft approach all personnel fire their weapons in to form wall of bullets through whic
334. he tactical situation the threat and the position area to be occupied following points should be considered a In areas where enemy attack is probable the cannons should be dispersed throughout the entire column b If feasible there should be two air guards per vehicle One scans the sky forward of the vehicle while the other scans the sky rearward c Machine guns should be distributed evenly throughout the column and should be aimed alternately to the left and right sides of the route of march FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 d Unit instructions should specify that some personnel fire 3 5 round bursts and some personnel fire on semiautomatic to maintain continuous fire e The NBC and monitoring equipment should be located with the lead vehicle of the convoy The unit could upgrade its MOPP level during movement Section VII CONDUCTING THE MARCH 2 30 MARCH DISCIPLINE a Officers and NCOs ride where they can best control the march The senior person in each vehicle is responsible for ensuring that all orders concerning the march are carried out b Key personnel should disperse throughout the column This should preclude losing a disproportionate number of these persons as a result of enemy action c The column must keep moving Procedures for the pick up of mission essential personnel and equipment if a vehicle breaks down should be indicated in the unit SOP For example the driver stays with the vehicle and
335. he weapon is emplaced the pantel will hooks up to his TA 312 telephone AZIMUTH OF FIRE PANORAMIC 4 TELESCOPE MARKING STAKE REAR HOWITZER SIGHT ALIGNED OVER PANORAMIC TELESCOPE MARKING STAKE AZIMUTH PANORAMIC HOWITZER SIGHT TELESCOPE ALIGNED OVER MARKING PANORAMIC STAKE i TELESCOPE MARKING STAKE STEP 2 Figure 2 5 Use of stakes for towed weapons 2 14 4 Receives and records the deflection to his pantel marking stake 5 He helps the GSG determine the distance from the aiming cirde to his gun position primary means of determining distance trom the aiming circle to each howitzer position is the subtense method With this technique the gun guide positions a 2 meter subtense bar see Table 5 6 page 5 16 or M 16 rifle see Table 5 7 page 5 17 over the pantel marking stake while the GSG measures the angle If necessary the gun guide paces the distance from his howitzer position to the aiming circle and reports the distance to the GSG double checks the distance by pacing back from the aiming circle to the pantel marking stake 6 He determines site to crest by using the M2 compass or M2A2 aiming circle see chapter 4 He then determines piece to crest range and relays site to crest and piece to crest range to the GSG 7 He walks the track plan as directed the GSG He walks the selected route from the battery or platoon entry point to the howitzer position and makes sure tha
336. hese two values is placed on the safety T FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 Table 6 2 Computation of minimum quadrant elevation ELEMENTS OF COMPUTATION HOW TO DO THE COMPUTATION Fuze PD Fuze MTSQ or Fuze VT With a Fuze Setting Less Than Minimum Safe Time VT Mith a Fuze Setting PCR Greater Than Minimum Minimum Arming Range Arming Range Greater Than PCR Equal to or Greater Than Angle 1 Angle of site reported As reported As reported Minimum Safe Time Angle 2 Vertical angle for 5 meters divided by PCR Appropriate vertical clearance Appropriate vertical clearance clearance of friendly elements expressed up to a whole mil divided by PCR divided by minimum arming range Angle 3 Complementary Comp site factor at PCR or Comp site factor at PCR or Comp site factor at minimum angle of site next greater listed range next greater listed range arming range or next greater multiplied by the sum of multiplied by the sum of listed range multiplied by the Angles 1 and 2 Angles 1 and 2 sum of Angles 1 and 2 Angle 4 Elevation At PCR At PCR At minimum arming range Angle 5 2 forks At PCR At PCR At minimum arming range Note All angles above are expressed up to the next higher whole mil The sum of Angles 1 through 5 equals minimum QE CAUTION A large PCR may cause the value of Angle 4 to override the effects of site to crest Angle 1 Therefore minimum quadrant elevation must be comput
337. hington DC US Government Printing Office 1975 STANAG 2934 Chapter 13 QSTAG 503 Bombing Shelling Mu and Location Reports 20 June 1989 30 August 1994 STANAG 2041 05 520 Operational Orders Tables and Graphs for Rond Movement 1 August 1980 25 August 1981 STANAG 2047 05 183 Alarms 0 Hazard or Attack NBC and Air Attack Only 2 March 1985 14 August 1991 STANAG 2113 Denial of a Unit s Military Eu pinen and Supplies to an Enemy 15 December 1989 STANAG 2154 0STAG 539 Regulations for Mn Motor Vehicle Movement by Road 19 October 1987 2 October 1980 TC 24 20 Tactical Wire and Cable Techniques 3 October 1988 TM 9 1300 206 Ammunition and Explosives Standards 30 August 1973 TM 9 1300 251 20 Organizational Maintenance Manual Including Kepair Parts and Special Tools List Artillery Ammunition for Guns Howitzers Mortars Recoilless Rifles and 40 mm Grenade Launchers 21 December 1973 TM 11 7440 283 12 2 Operator s and Organizational Maintenance Manual for Data Display Groups Gun Direction OD 144 V GYK 29 V 27 September 1982 43 0001 28 Army Ammunition Data Sheets for Artillery Ammunition Guns Howitzers Mortars Recoill ss Rifles Grenade Launchers and Artille Fuzes 5 1310 1315 1320 1390 28 April 1994 DOCUMENTS NEEDED These documents must be available for the intended users of this publication ARTEP 6 127 30 MTP Mission Training Plan for tlie Cannon
338. howitzer range card 3 14 machine gun range card 3 15 responsibilities 3 2 resources 3 4 3 5 direct fire 8 1 through 8 3 duties of key personnel battery commander 1 4 1 6 2 5 3 2 11 1 12 1 chief of firing battery 1 9 executive officer 1 8 fire direction officer 1 5 1 8 11 1 first sergeant 1 4 1 8 2 5 3 2 12 1 gunnery sergeant 1 5 1 9 2 5 Index 1 FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 platoon leader 1 4 3 2 11 1 platoon sergeant 1 5 3 2 11 1 section chief 1 5 1 9 3 2 3 8 11 1 evaluation cannon section App G fire commands correcting 7 7 elements 7 2 through 7 7 examples 7 8 repetition 7 7 reports 7 7 sequence 7 1 special methods of fire 7 6 standardizing 7 7 formations battery 2 10 through 2 12 gun assembly L 4 L 5 gun display unit App L Killer Junior App I lay data determining and reporting correct azimuth orienting angle reporting 4 24 through 4 27 correct deflection reporting 4 24 correcting boresighting error 4 26 gun laying and positioning system 4 8 4 9 line of fire measuring 4 24 through 4 27 orienting angle measuring 4 24 4 25 and 4 27 precision lightweight GPS receiver 4 6 through 4 8 training 4 27 load plans 2 20 App E marches and movements close column 2 18 contingencies 2 22 control measures 2 21 discipline march 2 21 halts 2 22 and 2 26 infiltration 2 19 loading plans E 1 open column 2 18 orders 2 20 Index 2
339. hree safety Ts apply in the firing point The chief must pick the appropriate safety T on the basis of the charge given in the fire commands and then safe the mission using that safety T ASSEMBLY OF PROJECTILE Errors Al A4 1 Wrong fuze used A2 Wrong shell used A3 Wrong charge used A4 Wrong fuze setting Notes 1 This test is written to work with vernier scale fuzes M564 M565 or the digital fuzes M577 M582 Even though 105 mm ammunition often comes prefuzed the chief should be familiar with authorized shell fuze combinations and must check ammunition to preclude any incidents 2 This test is designed to work with both standard 105 mm propelling charges 1 7 and 155 mm propelling charges for green bag INCORRECT DATA SET ON THE WEAPON Errors W1 W7 W1 Pantel Bubbles not centered W2 Pantel individual piece correction set off W3 Pantel Wrong deflection set off a Numbers transposed b Azimuth and reset counter not in synchronization for aiming point used W4 Pantel Sight picture off a Aiming posts b Collimator W5 Quadrant Bubbles not centered W6 Quadrant Individual piece correction off W7 Quadrant Numbers transposed on elevation counter Notes 1 This test was written with a bias for the M100 series sights The induced errors are those errors most likely to occur on the pantels with digital counters transposed mabes Should you test an M101A1 weapon system chief the test sho
340. hrough 5 23 observation of Polaris 5 2 through 5 10 special operations App F simultaneous observation 5 1 5 2 subtense tables 5 17 through 5 23 standardization agreements movements 2 23 tests STANAGs QSTAGs cannon section App G 2041 520 2 23 gunner s qualification App B 2047 183 3 21 safety personnel qualification App O 2113 none 3 19 threat capabilities 3 1 2154 539 2 23 2934 503 3 24 troop leading procedures 2 1 Index 3
341. ial rang of 600 meters The second round fired by your section was short of the tank and on line The tank has turned again and is now moving from right to left at a 45 angle going away from yo r positi n at a speed of 20 mph The tank was hit by your third round but was onl artially disabled however it is still capable of firing gunner and assistant gunner continue to lay an fire on the target until it is destroyed or subsequent fire command is given by the chief of section G 11 FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 Evaluation Checklist Standards and Scoring Each situation card is worth a total of 22 points Each section should be evaluated on four separate situation cards for a total of 88 possible points Each situation will be evaluated and penalties assessed as shown in Table G 8 G 13 PHASE V CRITIQUE During this phase conducted as soon after phases II through IV as possible the following actions are taken e All section personnel are thoroughly briefed on the detailed results of the evaluation e Outstanding performances are recognized highlighted Weak areas are critiqued in a constructive manner aimed at establishing specific tasks requiring further training emphasis e questions are answered Section feedback should be encouraged in an effort to improve the content organization or administration of the evaluation Table G 8 Scoring direct fire mission
342. ical communications interface module of the see Figure 9 4 and paragraph 9 5 of this publication b Cabling Radio sets AN PRC 68 and AN PRC 126 are cabled to the weapon as follows refer to Figure L 16 1 Connect one end A of cable W33 or W34 B to the connector labeled RADIO on the GDU and the other end to the connector labeled GDU C on the OG 174 2 Connect the interface cable D between the OG 174 qoi E and the connector labeled AUDIO F on the N PRC 68 or AN PRC 126 3 Connect power cable CX 4720 G to the vehicle power system penas connector or the 24 volt DC connector on the OG 174 case assembly L 14 L 14 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE a Solder all splices and wrap them in insulating tape b For WD 1 TT wire ensure all seven strands are intact at the connections or splices c Ensure all electrical equipment is protected from rain and moisture d Inspect all cables and wires for cuts and rotting e Ensure all connectors are clean with no bent pins or corrosion f Clean the connectors on the GDU LCU wire line adapter TM 184 terminal strip and M 221 connector with cleaning eae FREON TF NSN 6850 00 3084 and a clean cloth g Clean the female end of the connection on the modified reel RL 39 and the holes in the M 221 connector with cleaning compound FREON TF and a Q tip h When splicing WD 1 TT wire to cord CX 231 use either a standard field wire splice TC 24 20 or the expedient ie W
343. ical manual for the weapon 3 Nonadjusting pieces load the shell to be fired in effect on receipt of the initial fire command This procedure also applies 10 all projectile fuze combinations not ve mechanical time or VT fuzes When fuze VT is to be fired in effect the FDC calculates the VT fuze setting corresponding to the initial target location and sends it to the nonadjusting pieces If terrain weather and enem capabilities permit the FDC can in wartime send the V minimum safe time to the nonadjusting pieces Note If a howitzer has automatically reloaded durin the adjust pie and END OF MISSION is announce the phase the following precautions should be taken e Leave weapon laid on last fired data e Announce to FDC NUMBER so and so IS LOADED e Evaluate hot or cold tube situation e Decide to compute safe data to shoot round or unload weapon 7 15 METHOD OF FIRE FOR EFFECT This element indicates the number of rounds and type of ammunition to be used in effect When applicable it is announced in the initial fire command after the quadrant and must be announced before the last subsequent command in an adjust fire mission This is displayed automatically on the SCA With voice commands it is announced aft r Gan for example 2 ROUNDS FUZE VT 7 16 SPECIAL METHODS OF FIRE There are voice fire commands that cannot be displayed on GDU SCA Shown below are the commands and their fini
344. ication presents standardized procedures relevant to cannon battery operations Appendix A These procedures are denoted in text by an asterisk This publication implements the following North Atlantic Treaty Organization NATO standardization agreements STANAGs and quadripartite standardization agreements QSTAGs STANAG 2934 Edition 1 Chapter 13 Artillery Procedures and QSTAG 503 Edition 2 Bombing Shelling Rocketing Mortaring and Location Reports STANAG 2041 Edition 4 and QSTAG 520 Edition 1 Operation Orders Tables and Graphs for Road Movement STANAG 2047 Edition 6 and QSTAG 183 Edition 3 Emergency Alarms of Hazard or Attack NBC and Air Attack Only STANAG 2113 Edition 5 Denial of A Unit s Military Equipment and Supplies to an Enemy STANAG 2154 Edition 5 and QSTAG 539 Edition 1 Regulations for Military Motor Vehicle Movement by Road As used throughout this publication the words howitzer gun cannon weapon and piece are synonymous The proponent of this publication is HQ TRADOC Send comments and recommendations on DA Form 2028 Recommended Changes to Publications and Blank Forms directly to Commandant US Army Field Artillery School ATTN ATSF DD Fort Sill Oklahoma 73503 5600 Unless this publication states otherwise masculine nouns and pronouns do not refer exclusively to men xiv FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 PREFACE This publication is designed primarily for the canno
345. icle combinations with more than 4 axles 34 0 t 4 vehicle combinations with more than 4 axles 40 0 t three axle vehicle with two or three axle semi trailer which transports a 40 foot ISO container in combined 5 freight traffic within the meaning of Directive 73 130 EEC on the determination of common rules for specific transports in combined freight traffic between member nations in the version dated 28 July 1982 Official EC Bulletin No L247 page 6 44 0 t 3 4 2 28 MU vehicles with one rear axle 11 m IT motor coaches excluded Motor vehicles with two or more axles m 18 m less if turning radius a exceeds 12 m and or circular crown of turning way b is more than 5 30 m 50 highways can be considered up to class 120 in peacetime forbidden for tracked vehicles Vehides with a 1 axle 7 m b 2 axles 10 m more axles 12 Maximum total weight 50 000 kg 50 tons single axle load 10 000 kg 10 tons double axle load 8 000 ke 18 tons 20 000 ke 20 tons axle distance gt 2 00 m triple axle load 24 000 24 tons 15 m for container transporters a maximum length of 15 50 m is allowed Max load per single axle 13 t Max load per tandem axle 21 t single axles separated 1 5 m or less are considered a tandem axle rom a separation of 1 35 m down the maximum limit of 21 t has to be reduced in 700 kg for each decrease of 0 05 m in the distance between the twi
346. ided missiles ATGMs direct fire cannons and crew served machine guns 3 These actions will be followed by a hasty mounted or dismounted attack through the battery area b The preferred defense against a armor or mechanized ground attack is for the battery or platoon to move to a osition from which it can continue the fire support mission position without a direct confrontation with the enemy However in some circumstances fighting an enemy mechanized force may be unavoidable Some combat proven rules for fighting mechanized forces are as follows 1 Separate the infantry from the tanks 0 Slow down the tanks Use smoke mixed with HE to obscure the enemy s vision and keep tanks buttoned up 3 Canalize tanks into predetermined engagement areas by using obstacles and fire support means 4 Use antitank weapons Rehearse tank killer teams Direct fire engagements must be controlled The unit SOP must address who controls the fires how to control the fires and how to mass the direct fire assets Units may consider self illumination during periods of limited visibility 3 17 DEFENSE AGAINST AIR ATTACK a The primary way for an FA battery to survive when the enemy has air parity or is to be so well concealed that an enemy cannot detect the battery as a target If the battery is detected and attacked the key to survival is dispersion and engaging attacking aircraft with a large Hs of fire Immediate a
347. iercing fuze c proximity fuze VT 14 If the MTSQ fuze M564 dated 1970 is to be used for superquick impact action the fuze may be set a 90 0 b 95 5 c 98 0 d S 15 A misfire occurs You find that the primer is not dented You know that the cause of the malfunction is a defective a powder charge b firing mechanism c primer d igniting charge 16 The fuze wrench used to seat and tighten a fuze into a standard HE projectile is the a M18 b M27 c M34 d M63 17 The onl Pme authorized to be used with the M185 cannon tube is a M82 b MK2A4 c M2 d 18 1 18 The threaded steel plug that facilitates the handling of separate loading projectiles is called a closing plug b nose plug c eyebolt lifting plug d fuze plug FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 19 When the distant aiming point method of boresightin is used the minimum distance between the aiming poin and the weapon should be a 1 300 meters b 1 400 meters c 1 500 meters d 7 200 meters 20 In boresighting by the testing target method the testing target must be located at least how many meters in front of the howitzer a 4 15 b 50 c 60 d 100 21 On a weapon that fires separate loading ammunition excessive blowback around the breechblock may mean the split rings are less than 180 apart a True b False 22 Fire control alignment tests should be performed a at the discre
348. ification scheme distinguished sections 951 1000 900 950 800 899 700 799 0 699 Note Appropriate awards such as distinctive patches certificates and passes can be given to recognized outstanding and Table G 2 Organization and scoring ORIENTATION AND ORGANIZATION Task 1 Written test PREPARATION FOR FIRING OPERATIONS position Task3 Disassembly of breech mechanism Task4 Assembly of breech mechanism quadrant Task6 Performance of the end for end test DELIBERATE OCCUPATION Task 7 Preparation of position by gun guide Task8 Emplacing the cannon TLABSPAP FIRE MISSIONS Task 11 Planned priority targets Task 12 Conduct of direct fire G 2 Task2 Preparation for deliberate occupation of a prepared Task5 Performance of micrometer test on the gunner s Task9 Conduct of an indirect fire mission using the GDU Task 10 Preparation of conventional ammunition for firing Note The scoring breakdown is a suggested means of evaluating competing sections on a graded basis The unit may change this scheme to fit its particular situation or training needs and priorities POSSIBLE POINTS PER POSSIBLE POINTS TASK PHASE PER TASK PHASE FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 Table G 3 Grading sheet CANNON SECTION EVALUATION UNIT SECTION DATE Section Chief Gunner Ammo Team Chief Assistant Gunner No 1 Cannoneer Phase I Orientation
349. ift Operations AFM 2 50 31 January 1985 FM 101 10 Series Staff Officer s Field Manuals FM 101 10 1 Staff Officer s Field Manual Organizational Technical and Logistical Data Unclassified Data 7 October 1987 FM 101 60 2 C Joint Munitions Effectiveness Manual Surface to Surface J MEM SS Electiveness Data For Howitzer 105mm M101A1 FMFM 4 7D 1 8 March 1978 FM 101 60 24 C Joint munitions Electiveness Manual Surface to Surface IMEM SS Effectiveness Data For Howitzer 8 M110A2 4 7D 8 1 May 1984 References 3 FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 101 60 25 S NOFORN Joint Munitions Effectiveness Manual Surface to Surface 55 Data For Howitzers 155mm M198 and 109 2 4 7D 9 1 September 1984 C FM 101 60 29 Joint Munitions Effectiveness Manual Surface to Surface IMEM SS Electiveness Data For Howitzers 105mm M102 and M119 FMFM 4 7D 12 U 30 May 1986 Note These JMEMs may be obtained through 5 2 channels from S amp I Director USA Materiel Systems Analysis ATTN AMXSY J Aberdeen Proving Grounds MD 21005 5071 FMFM 6 9 Marine Artillery Support 29 June 1993 FMFM 6 18 Techniques and Procedures for Fire Support Coordination 27 March 1992 6 18 1 Marine Corps Fire Support System Techniques and Procedures 5 October 1994 NWP 22 2 1 7 Supporting Arms in Amphibious Operations STANAG 1059 National A e Lett
350. igh explosive antitank tracer high explosive dual purpose high explosive plastic light antitank weapon machine gun quick tracer technical manual tube launched optically tracked wire guided missile United States Air Force variable time fuze white phosphorus ow n n n m n n n u n n n n mn m b The PSG or platoon leader will assign supplementary d A suggested composition of the reaction force is as positions and ensure that they are depicted on the defense follows diagram These positions will reinforce the primary position m allow the unit to perform specific missions such as direct fire The signal to occupy supplementary positions must be disseminated throughout the unit and the movement to e One man per howitzer section those should be rehearsed by the platoon leader and platoon sergeant with all howitzer sections c If the platoon is attacked or penetrated by enemy forces e Reaction force NCO in charge for example the platoon sergeant e One man from the fire direction center or POC e One man from the communications section if ilable the reaction force will respond by assembling at the avatar predetermined location to e One man from the maintenance section if available and in position Assess the situation and deploy to augment the existing permeter Note This is only a guide actual SOP may be e Deploy using fire and maneuver to expel and or destroy diff
351. ignated to provide security 4 The XO recalls the lift helicopters by a code word on the FM net Upon arrival of the aircraft normal PZ procedures are followed 5 Following departure of the sling loads the executive officer recalls the advance party aircraft F 9 OPERATIONS OTHER THAN WAR OOTW a Artillery batteries TWO to support operations other than war OOT W include missions that are F 6 not considered conventional such as noncombatant evacuation operations NEO security assistance counterterrorism counterinsurgency peacekeeping an peace enforcement Because of the unconventional nature of these missions units must consider additional factors when executing these difficult missions Table F 1 gives a comparison of the battlefield factors involved in both conventional wartime operations and OOTW b In OOTW the battlefield is normally nonlinear with maneuver elements conducting patrols local air assaults and convoys Therefore the artillery cannot always ollow the units The placement of the artiller must be considered in planning for fire support OOT may require the firing units to remain in position for longer eriods of time Due to the length of their stay units will ave to harden the position to increase their survivability The defense of a static firing unit requires different planning considerations than when the unit constantly moves Since the unit is stationa
352. igned a number and each weapon is laid on its assigned priority target In such cases unit SOP usually designates command or a pen ed signal to fire ori the priority target bypassing the usual sequence of fire commands EXAMPLE Target AC7343 has been designated as a priority target Firing data have been computed and have been transmitted to one of the atoons On the command 7 RIGHT SUPPRESS 7343 the right platoon engages Target AC7343 with the previously arranged method of fire b In defensive operations the command FIRE THE FPF causes the firing battery to fire the final protective fires on which it is laid 7 21 REPETITION AND CORRECTION OF FIRE COMMANDS a One section normally the adjustin piece of the firing unit should be designated to read back all voice fire commands to ensure that the howitzer sections have received the fire commands correctly When a command has not been heard or has been misunderstood the en for repetition is stated as a question for example DEFLECTION NUMBER 2 When the FDC replies the repetition of a command is RUE receded by NUMBER so and so THE COMMAN AS for example NUMBER 2 TH COMMAND WAS DEFLECTION 2768 b If an incorrect command has been given but the command QUADRANT has not been announced the FDC commands CORRECTION followed by the correct command and all subsequent elements If QUADRANT has been announced the FDC commands CHECK FIRING CANCEL CHECK F
353. iguration for M109A2 A5 lt gt HOWITZER OPTIONAL a Np 2 y OPTIONAL Figure E 4 Camouflage configuration for 109 2 5 L shape Figure E 5 Camouflage configuration for M198 FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 Figure E 6 Camouflage configuration for M101A1 E 3 FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 APPENDIX F SPECIAL OPERATIONS F 1 OPERATIONS IN MOUNTAINOUS TERRAIN a Fire 20008 Tasks More ammunition maybe required to support the maneuver force in mountainous terrain because of reduced munitions effects Cross country restrictions force the enemy to use roads and trails which will enhance interdiction fires b Command and Control The command and control of the battery are degraded because of decreased effectiveness of radio communications Movement control is more difficult on winding mountain roads Emplacement of wire lines is more difficult and time consuming c Positioning and Displacement Because of the closeness of terrain masks fewer suitable battery positions are available High angle fire may be required to accomplish the mission Displacement is limited to the use of available roads which enerally are narrow and twisting Terrain march may be impractical or impossible Air assault operations are likely d Other Considerations Logistics resupply is more difficult because of the limited number of roads and the slower convoy speeds Survey may not be as accurate and target a
354. ill be applied and used until the command CANCEL TGPCs is given by the FDC This command is usually given after digital communications are reestablished b Time permitting FDC will send firing data for each individual howitzer When this occurs FFE may be AT MY 7 2 COMMAND AME to maintain the element of surprise and achieve maximum effect on the target 7 4 ELEMENTS OF THE FIRE COMMAND The elements of the fire command are discussed in paragraphs 7 5 through 7 15 below 7 5 WARNING ORDER warning order is always announced to alert the firing unit to the mission In a BCS equipped battery the warning order is a steady alarm signal from the case assembly of the GDU which indicates the start of the fire mission The section chief depresses the cycle key of his SCA to silence the alarm and acknowledge the receipt of fire commands When a firing battery is using voice commands a warning order of FIRE MISSION is announced The warning order is not given in subsequent commands 7 6 PIECES TO FOLLOW PIECES TO FIRE AND METHOD OF FIRE This element designates the weapons that will follow the mission the weapon s that will fire initially and how they will engage the target a Pieces to follow tells the platoon who will follow the commands given for an adjust fire mission BATTERY ADJUST or PLATOON ADJUST indicates that the mission will be an adjust fire mission and that all weapons will copy the commands follow the miss
355. illery or mortar unit is determined from analysis of the shell crater Additionally shell fragments are collected to determine the type of shell that caused the crater Copperhead crest a terrain feature of such altitude that it limits the minimum elevation of a weapon crew served weapons weapons such as machine guns or howitzers that require two or more persons to operate CS chlorobenzaimalononitrile riot control agent CSL chemical storage location CSS combat service support Glossary 3 FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 CUCV commercial utility cargo vehicle D delay fuze DA Denmark or Department of the Army danger close field artillery frees delivered within 600 meters of friendly forces DAP distant aiming point DC declination constant or direct current DCT digital communications terminal declination constant the horizontal clockwise angle from grid north to magnetic north the grid azimuth of magnetic north The declination constant is recorded for every instrument equipped with a magnetic needle The con stant for any instrument will vary in different localities and the constant of different instru ments in the same locality will also vary This variation is due to slight differences in manu facturing to the shock from handling the in struments during normal use and to the shift of magnetic north deflection the horizontal clockwise angle from the line of fire or the rearward extension of the line of fire
356. ime for slow movement of the lower motion Caps are provided for covering the orienting knobs to prevent unintentional use of the lower motion i Leveling Screws The three leveling screws Figures 4 2 and 4 3 are used to level the aiming circle These screws are on a spring plate located below the orienting knobs and above the baseplate assembly TELESCOPE SLOTTED BRACKET ELEVATION KNOB ELEVATION MICROMETER SCALE FILTER STORAGE LOCATION MAIN HOUSING AZIMUTH Figure 4 3 Aiming circle right side view j Base Plate Assembly The base plate assembly Figure 4 3 serves as the base of the instrument when it is mounted on the tripod and also serves as the base of the carrying case It is a flat circular plate to which the instrument 1s attached by means of the spring plate An instrument fixing screw is threaded into a socket on the underside of the base plate assembly to attach the instrument to the tripod The socket is kept clean and free of obstructions by a spring loaded cover that remains closed when the instrument is not attache to the tripod The base plate is fitted with a rubber gasket FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 that forms a watertight seal when the cover is latched to the baseplate k Notation Pad A rectangular notation pad Figure 4 2 on the baseplate is used for the declination constant date of declination and initials of the person performing the declination 1 Filter The filter Fig
357. in a deliberate occupation is allowing too much activity during preparation thereby risking compromise ny the minimum number of vehicles and personnel should go forward When the tactical situation allows a very good method of occupying a new position is to do the advance preparation prior to darkness and move by night Nighttime movement nighttime reconnaissance 15 often necessary but it can be more time consuming b The hasty occupation differs from the deliberate occupation mainly in the amount of time available for reconnaissance preparation Generally it results from unforeseen circumstances The hasty occupation begins as a deliberate occupation but due to limited time for advance party preparation of the next position it becomes a hasty occupation It reinforces the importance of the batter commander s planning ahead and establishing priority tasks c An emergency occupation results when a call for fire is received while the battery or platoon is conducting a tactical movement 2 37 DELIBERATE OCCUPATION a A guide meets the battery or platoon at the pickup point and leads the vehicles to the entrance of the position area There the vehicle guides are waiting to lead the vehicles to their selected locations b Each gun guide his weapon on the azimuth of fire and gives the initial deflection to the gunner c Intrabattery communications are used for laying d The GSG implements the security and defense plan
358. in item Item D is not applicable when this form is used for crater analysis SECTIONS II and III are completed by the target production section of the div arty TOC The information contained in a SHELREP is forwarded by the DS artillery 92 to the targeting cell at div arty He plots m a SHELREP overlay the location of the crater and a ne representing the direction measured to the weapon He compares the information with that received from other sources and attempts to locate enemy weapons from the are uns of direction lines to weapons of the same caliber FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 ARTILLERY COUNTERFIRE INFORMATION For use of this form see FM 6 121 the proponent agency TRADOC RECEIVED BY FROM NUMBER SECTION BOMREP SHELRER MORTREP OR ROCKREP Cross out items not applicable POSITION DIRECTION TIME TIME AREA BOMBED NUMBER NUMBER TIME OF DAMAGE Grid bearing FROM TO SHELLEO OR AND NATURE of FLASH MORTARED OF GUNS SOUND or Grid ref clear Mortars rocket GROOVE of or grid bearing to launchers SHELL state Impact mits aircraft or which in and distance from other methods mils uniess observer in of delivery or MISSILES otherwise meters encoded AND BOMBS on laction stated Omit Dimension of the tor aircraft area in meters by the radius or length and width EA NA 0545 ii TOME is WEE ae SECTION LOCATION REPORT SECTIO
359. in skinned vehicles are combined 2 Heavy Light This option positions all of the soppor elements in one platoon position area These elements should locate near the FDC on the extremity of the position area a The advantages of this option are e Local security of one platoon is enhanced e Support is responsive to one platoon 0 The disadvantages are e One platoon has a larger visual signature e Maneuverability may be limited in one platoon area e Logistic support to the light platoon is decreased 3 Light Light This option positions all of the batter support elements in a separate location away from bot platoon areas a The advantages of this option are e Each battery element has the smallest visual signature e Howitzer positioning and movement flexibility are maximized 0 The disadvantages are e Local security of platoons and battery elements is reduced e Combat service support CS5 responsiveness is reduced FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 Section II CANNON BATTERIES IN PLATOON BASED FIELD ARTILLERY BATTALIONS 1 4 ORGANIZATION a An FA battalion with FA batteries organized into two firing platoons for platoon operations is considered a platoon based organization b Each cannon battery in a platoon based FA battalion consists of a battery headquarters and two firing platoons Figure 1 1 This configuration allows for conduct of platoon operations 1 The battery headquarters has the p
360. in use Ensure that these primers are not fired and are turned in to the ammunition section b Primers for semifixed ammunition are attached to the base of the cartridge case The best way to protect them is to leave them covered with a fiber container cap until needed c Before use inspect all primers for signs of corrosion If a seal has been broken it is very like that the primer has been affected by moisture and should be turned in 10 10 CARTRIDGE CASES The cartridge case of semifixed ammunition should be checked for corrosion Light brown staining is norma oxidation but black green yellow or white stains mean heavy corrosion which must be cleaned off as soon as possible see Figure 10 4 page 10 6 b Cartridges must be checked for cracks bulges and burs c The primer must be flush with the base of the cartridge If it sticks out too far it is dangerous If it sits in too far the round will not fire See Figure 10 5 page 10 6 10 5 FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 Figure 10 4 Cartridge case DANGEROUS WON T FIRE Figure 10 5 Primers 10 11 SEGREGATION OF AMMUNITION LOTS a Different lots of propellant burn at different rates and give different effects in the target area For this reason the registration corrections derived from one lot do not necessarily apply to another lot Ammunition must segregated by lot b The FDC designates the lot of ammunition to be fired for each
361. inimum QE in the same manner 11 4 SAFETY COMPUTATIONS a Information on manual safety computations is in FM 6 40 Appendix B b Safety can be computed by computer using the automated range safety system ARSS FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 CHAPTER 12 COMBAT SERVICE SUPPORT 12 1 RESPONSIBILITIES Combat service support CSS consists of the logistics and service support required to sustain the cannon attery Detailed coordination and are required to obtain supplies and services The battery must relinquish CSS assets to the battalion trains to facilitate resupply operations for the battery Key personnel provide direction and are responsible as follows a The battery commander has overall responsibility for CSS operations When authorized he is assisted in this area by the battery executive officer b The first sergeant of the firing unit coordinates and directs the activities of the supply sergeant who is the primary executor of the logistics function The first sergeant ensures the timely evacuation and reporting of casualties he also replacements is responsible for assigning enlisted personnel within the battery 12 2 BATTALION TRAIN a The execution of CSS functions is removed from the BC as much as possible and is centralized under the control of the battalion The CSS responsibility at battery or platoon level is to report and request requirements and to ensure that CSS
362. initial updated location data will be available 2 39 EMERGENCY OCCUPATION a General 1 The nature of the emergency occupation requires a modification of the normal procedures used to occupy and The procedures apply to all artillery units towed and self propelled 2 33 FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 2 The key to success for the mission is a well rehearsed 3 The XO or platoon leader must know exactly where he is at all times during a road march He must constantly be selecting possible emergency mission RE postion by map and visual reference If possible the BC or gunnery sergeant should ull suitable position areas for emergency missions along the route while performing his reconnaissance and pass this information to the platoon leader or XO b Actions Upon Receipt of the Mission D The XO platoon leader or FDO receives the call for fire and does the following Authenticates the mission e Ensures FDC personnel monitored the call e Notifies the driver e Signals the convoy e Selects a firing position and passes the proposed coordinates to the FDC personnel e Determines the best method to lay the unit In order of preference the methods areas follows Grid azimuth method Howitzer backlay method Aiming point deflection method 2 The FDC does the following Determines the azimuth of fire Starts computing initial data See Appendix F for BCS emergency occupation procedures
363. ion Section chie 2 Supervise safety personnel in the performance of their duties OIC or safety officer 3 Verify that the charges projectiles and fuzes being fired are only those prescribed on the safety card Section chief platoon leader or platoon sergeant 4 Visually inspect to ensure that the correct shell fuze combination time if required and charge are properly prepared and loaded on each round Verify that the correct number of remaining powder increments are removed to the powder pit before loading and firing each round Section chie 5 Verify that rounds are not fired below the minimum QE or above the maximum QE Section chief platoon leader or platoon sergeant 6 Verify that rounds are not fired outside the lateral de lection safety limits specified on the safety card ear chief platoon leader or platoon sergeant 7 Verify that time fuzed rounds are not fired with fuze settings that are less than the minimum time prescribed on the safety diagram Section chief platoon leader or platoon sergeant o On all commands that are unsafe to fire command CHECK FIRING and give the reason s why the command is unsafe Section chief EXAMPLES UNSAFE TO FIRE 3 MILS OUTSIDE RIGHT SAFETY MILS ABOVE MAXIMUM QUADRANT and UNSAFE TO FIRE 5 MILS BELOW MINIMUM QUADRANT ELEVATION 9 Recompute and issue updated safety Ts under the following conditions FDC e When a registration is
364. ion Begin by reviewing your starting point ORSTA to ensure it is correct UPDATE FU Select endline REV1 Ix PROPTENPR Ay BTRY G2 Note Steps 29 to 33 display the same data entered in steps 4 to 8 Steps 35 to 37 display the OS start point data entered in steps 10 to 12 Steps 40 to 43 display the grid coordinates of each traverse station x mme 35 36 OSN Endline DISPLAY AT 38 ORSTB LOC IP Select endline ORSTBwasnotused ACTION TAKEN UPDATE FU Select P endline Note Thenumber that appears after the symbol in steps 40 to 43 is the number of the first forward station computed The easting northing and altitude should be recorded if required Remember When performing a graphic traverse keep track of the number of forward stations DOPAJ Enne Exe RA px b Ifthe location of subsequent forward stations is desired continue to press endline The prompts for steps 40 to 43 will appear Note that the number in each prompt is increased by each forward station Example Four forward stations and the prompt 4E 123456 P appears The easting northing and altitude are the data of the last forward station in the survey c After all required coordinates are retrieved select endlinetoreturntothe UPDATE FU index Se
365. ion and participate in the FFE phase Any weapon or number of weapons may be announced in this element for example PLATOON ADJUST or NUMBER 1 AND NUMBER 3 ADJUST In a BCS equipped unit the do not load DNL indicator bars will be lit on the SCAs of those howitzers that are to follow the mission If the mission is an FFE mission pieces to follow is not given b Pieces to fire indicates which weapon s will fire the data given in the initial fire command PLATOON ADJUST NUMBER 3 indicates that during an adjust fire mission Number 3 will fire the initial round of adjustment 1 In a BCS equipped unit the SCA of the to fire Number 3 in this example would show 1RD A and the double indicator bars under the word FIRE woul light 2 voice command would be NUMBER 3 1 ROUND 3 If the mission were fire for effect then PLATOON would be sent c Method of fire tells the piece how many rounds to fire PLATOON ADJUST NUMBER 3 1 ROUND indicates that during this adjust fire mission Number 3 will fire one round at the data given in the initial fire command PLATOON 1 ROUND indicates a FFE mission with all weapons firing one round at the data given in the initial fire command 7 7 SPECIAL INSTRUCTIONS Special instructions are used when actions that are different from normal are required Within the battery restrictive commands DO NOT LOAD or ATM COMMAND are signified by the double indicator bars under DNL or
366. ion float and center the magnetic needle See Figure 4 7 page 4 6 5 Read the declination constant directly from the azimuth scales to the nearest 0 5 mil 6 Using a second azimuth repeat the above steps If a second azimuth marker is not available use the first marker again 7 Compare the two declination constants determined If they agree within 2 mils determine the mean Express it to the nearest whole mil by using artillery expression On the notation pad record the mean four digit number the date and the initials of the individual pertorming the declination MAGNETIC WHITE PORTION CENTERED Figure 4 7 Centering the magnetic needle FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 Note If the two values differ by more than 2 mils repeat the entire process 4 A declination station maybe established by simultaneous observation hasty astro observation of Polaris or circumpolar observation See Chapter 5 e Declination can be performed by scaling a grid azimuth to two distant points The following procedures are used Place the aiming circle over the selected point and level it 2 Select two distant points on a map Scale the direction to each from the occupied point 3 Using the direction scaled from the map declinate the aiming circle by the procedures previously discussed 4 Compare the two values determined They must agree within 10 mils 5 If the values determined agree within 10 mils
367. ion is Kochab which is the other bright star as bright as Polaris in the Little Dipper It is the front star of the bowl and is the only bright star between Polaris and the Big Dipper Of the two front stars in the bowl of the Little Dipper Kochab is the brighter and the closer to Polaris in the constellation known as Ursa Minor Little Dipper 1 Polaris Polaris is one of the two brightest stars in the constellation Ursa Minor Because it appears to move Table 5 1 Simultaneous Observation Procedures MASTER STATION FLANK STATION S STEP 1 Set the known azimuth value on the instrument scale STEP 1 With the upper motion set 0 0 mils on the aiming circle upper recording motion and sight on the known pointor azimuth mark with the lower nonrecording motion STEP 2 Using the upper motion identify and sight on the STEP2 Contactthe master station and report that you are ready predetermined celestial object to observe THIS IS NOVEMBER 38 START TRACKING OUT NOVEMBER38 THIS IS NOVEMBER 37 READY TO OBSERVE OVER STEP 3 With the lower motion sight on and track the celestial object until the master station announces TIP STEP 3 Using the upper motion track the celestial object and announce TIP THIS IS NOVEMBER 38 TRACKING TRACKING TRACKING TIP OUT 4 Read the azimuth to the celestial object from the azimuth scale and announce it to the flank statio
368. ions at night subtense may be obtained by attaching two lights on the pantel marker The lights are separated by the length of an M 16 rifle i e aiming circle operator measures the vertical distance from one light to the other using the elevation micrometer knob He performs this twice and determines the mean angle b Pacing A soldier who has measured his pace should be able to pace 100 meters to an accuracy of 1 meter over level ground However the paced distance follows the contour of the earth Therefore in sloping or rough terrain 5 15 FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 the determination of a horizontal distance becomes more difficult A soldier can try to adjust his pace length to the degree of slope he is pacing but his accuracy is decreased Pacing should be used only over relatively flat terrain or when no other method is available c Use of Premeasured Length of Communications Wire A premeasured length of communications wire WD 1 also may be used as a means of distance measurement This method is substantially more accurate than pacing but requires two soldiers to hold the ends of the wire The wire may be of any length although it is recommended that a length of 60 meters be used The wire should be marked with tape at every meter increment and with color coded tape at every 10 meter increment 1 The two soldiers holding the wire begin at the occupied station and measure in a straight line to the forward station A
369. is an important factor and when there is considerable travel distance involved Vehicle interval in an open column is generally 100 meters a Advantages of this method are as follows e 5peed the fastest method of march e Reduced driver fatigue e Improved vision on dusty roads e Ease in passing individual vehicles e Ease in dispersing vehicles as a passive defense measure against an air attack e Less chance of the entire unit being ambushed b Disadvantages of this method are as follows e Greater column length requires more road space e Other traffic often becomes interspersed in the column e Communication within the column is complicated 2 23 CLOSE COLUMN For close column movement the vehicle interval is less than 100 meters At night each driver can observe the cat eyes of the blackout markers on the vehicle in front of him and maintain an interval of 20 to 50 meters Figure 2 10 If the driver sees two marker lights the interval is too great If the driver sees eight marker lights he is too close If the driver sees four marker lights he is maintaining the proper interval During daylight close column is used when here is a need for maximum command and control for 2 18 example during periods of limited visibility or when moving through built up or congested areas a Advantages of this method are as follows e Simplicity of command and control e Reduced column length e Concentration of defensive fire
370. is likely A platoon may move safely on road for some distance and change to terrain march at a poni where enemy observation becomes likely or vehicle congestion provides the enemy an inviting target a Advantages of this method are as follows e Strength and nature of a column are difficult to determine e Avoids traffic Provides passive defense against air and artillery attack FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 b Disadvantages of this method are as follows e Displacement time may be increased e Ground reconnaissance is required e Soil conditions may complicate this type of movement e Improper movement leaves wheel or track marks to the new position e Extensive coordination is required to avoid traveling through other unit areas c The battery ain the terrain march may move in open or close column or by infiltration The battery can displace either as a unit or by echelon Continuous fire support is essential Figure 2 11 Terrain march 2 19 FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 Section VI PREPARING FOR MOVEMENT 2 26 ORDERS The details given in a march order depend on the time available the tactical situation and traffic conditions The order may be supplemented by strip maps sketches and march tables The main items in a march order are based on the battery commander s reconnaissance order They are as follows e Oituation e Mission e Destination e Organization to include order of march and composi
371. is made up of eight characters the four character SC code number and the DODIC For example 1320 D544 a typical DODAC consists of FSC class 1320 and DODIC D544 which identifies a 155 mm HE projectile M107 and the NSN 1320 00 529 7331 indicates that the Re are packed eight per wooden pallet The same DODIC suffixed to more than one NSN indicates items that are interchangeable See Appendix N Table 10 1 Weight zone marking CALIBER OF PROJECTILE WEIGHT ZONE SYMBOL e 9 E WEIGHT ZONE MARKING CALIBER AND TYPE OF WEAPON KIND OF FILLER IHE TS TYPE AND MODEL OF SHELL D LAU JU I FOR DEEP CAVITY SHELL CONTAINING SUPPLEMENTARY CHARGE DEPARTMENT OF DEFENSE IDENTIFICATION CODE UNDER THE PAINT e LOT NUMBER OF EMPTY SHELL YEAR OF MANUFACTURE CALIBER AND DESIGNATION OF SHELL Note 1 Improved conventional munitions ICM projectiles have a band of yellow diamonds around the ogive between the weight zone and caliber sections 2 FASCAM projectiles have a band of yellow triangles around the ogive with the letter S or L inside the triangles Figure 10 2 Markings of a separate loading projectile 10 4 CARE AND HANDLING OF AMMUNITION a If ammunition is to function properly it must be handled properly Some of the basic principles of proper handling are listed below FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 1 Never tumble drag throw or drop individu
372. is properly executed once it arrives in the unit area b The battalion commander task organizes the CSS assets and normally echelons his trains The combat trains are located 5 to 8 kilometers behind the battery or platoon firing ositions The administration and logistics operation center is the combat trains CP and is the focal point for 55 for the battalion The ALOC anticipates requests coordinates and supervises CSS execution c The battalion field trains collocate with the forward support battalion FSB in the brigade support area BSA The field trains CP is referred to as the battalion support operations center BSOC The BSOC coordinates directly with the ALOC to ensure that the CSS requirements of the batteries are met in a timely manner Note CSS in battery based units is accomplished through the unit trains which are collocated with the forward area support team ate in the BSA The light FA battalion logistics CP at the unit trains is the ALOC There are no combat trains 12 3 LOGISTICS PACKAGES Normally support is provided by the automatic push of supplies and equipment to the battery at specified times The logistics Apes e LOGPAC includes most classes of supply less Class V mail and replacement personnel and pply 1 weapons systems as appropriate TU PY means of receiving LOGPAC is through a logistics release point An LRP is an identifiable location where the battery supply represe
373. issions 4 The MSN MOF 1 key is pressed to show the section number and mission number in the display window 4 THESE KEYS ARE LIT GREEN e FFE 4 THESE KEYS ARE tor LIT YELLOW shor 14 THESE KEYS READY RC LIT WHITE Note See TM 11 7440 283 12 2 for explanation Figure L 2 Section chief s assembly controls indicators and connectors L 2 5 The SP INST 2 key is pressed to display special instructions of azimuth hig a or quadrant or to enter the section number in the display window 6 The SH 3 key is pressed to show the shell to be used in adjustment or to enter the section number in the display window 7 The LOT 4 key is pressed to show the projectile and powder lot or to enter the section number in the display window 8 The CHG 5 is pressed to show the charge to fire or to enter the section number in the display window 9 The FZ 6 key is pressed to show the to to be used in adjustment or to enter the section number in the display window 10 The FZ SET 7 key is pressed to show the fuze setting or to enter the section number in the display window 11 The DF 8 key is pressed to show the deflection or to enter the section number in the display window 12 The QE 9 key is pressed to show the quadrant elevation in adjustment or to enter the section number in the display window 13 FFE SH key is pressed to show the FFE shell data in the
374. ith either method be sure to solder and tape the splice i Ensure that personnel do not use solvent to clean the case assembly This destroys pin parts inside the pressure relief valve allowing water to enter that personnel do not use high pressure water oses on the equipment The pressure relief valve on the case assembly is designed to open at 3 to 4 pounds of pressure thus pressure from the hose will allow water to enter the case assembly k Inspect the case assembly to ensure that there are no missing screws and that all screws are tightened securely FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 AN PRC 68 126 CABLE TO SECTION CHIEF S ASSEMBLY Figure L 16 Gun section cabling for howitzer sections L 15 FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 APPENDIX M SELECTED CHARACTERISTICS OF FIELD ARTILLERY CANNONS CALIBER AND MODEL TOWED Maximum RAP Meters 20 100 15 100 15 300 c 23 500 30 000 30 100 24 000 18 100 750 6 375 2 650 TIS ESI E ccs PER Range Without RAP 11 400 Tube Life EFC Rounds Type of Firing Mechanism Mechanism HPV HPC Charge Low Elevation Minimum Elevation Mils 100 Maximum Elevation Mils 1 155 1 333 1 275 1 333 1 333 1 333 Mils per Tum of Handwheel Elevation 20 10 10 ouem Traverse Nut and screw socket race race race Maximum Right 100 6 400 400 6 400 Traverse
375. itis Therefore the lot designator should be prominently displayed for each stack of ammunition c Whether stored in the field on vehicles or at an ammunition supply point ASP different lots of ammunition must be conspicuously marked 10 12 FIELD STORAGE OF AMMUNITION a The four greatest hazards to ammunition in the battery area are weather enemy fire improper handling and careless 10 6 smokers Regardless of the method of storage these hazards must be considered Specific storage techniques are discussed later but here are some general considerations 1 Stack ammunition by type lot number and weight zone Figure 10 6 2 If ammunition is being stored on the ground use ood at least 6 inches high under each stack Figure 10 7 3 Keep the ammunition dry and out of direct sunlight by it in a vehicle or covering it with a in Be sure acequate ventilation is provided Figure 10 8 TARPAULIN COVER SECURELY STAKED Figure 10 8 Ammunition protection 4 Provide ammunition if off loaded as much protection from enemy indirect fires as time and available materials allow If sandbags are used for protection keep the walls at least 6 inches trom the stacks and the roof at least 18 inches from the stacks to ensure proper ventilation b Particular attention must be paid to ammunition temperature Most ammunition components can be stored at temperatures as low as 80 F for p
376. ity ammunition trailer HEMTT heavy expanded mobility tactical truck HEP HEP T high explosive plastic tracer high explosive rocket assisted HMMWV high mobility multipurpose wheeled vehicle horiz high explosive dual purpose high explosive plastic horizontal hot section a cannon section designated to maintain full crews at their posts for instant reaction to a fire mission This technique minimizes reaction time to calls for fire and allows the other section to accomplish the various tasks that must be done during position improve ment how howitzer howitzer field artillery weapon characterized by a medium length barrel between that of a mortar and a gun a relatively high angle of fire and a medium muzzle velocity HP hydropneumatic HPC hydropneumatic constant HPV hydropneumatic variable HSW horizontal sliding wedge HUMINT human intelligence IAW in accordance with ICM improved conventional munitions IFF identification friend or foe IFP individual fighting position IFSAS initial fire support automated system illum illumination IMINT imagery intelligence immediate suppression field artillery fries required when the enemy has freed from or has been firing and can fire from a given location such that direct fire weapons and supporting field artillery must respond instantaneously initial fire support automated system a tactical fire direction system which replaces the older TACFIRE i
377. itzer Center the cross level and pitch level bubbles and read the elevation this is the greatest angle of site The four methods of determining piece to crest range are taping map measurement pacing and estimation FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 QUALIFICATION TEST II Part 1 True and False 1 The must compare the safety card minimum QE with the XO s minimum QE and use the larger 2 In indirect fire the safety officer must ensure that the visible portion of the impact area is clear of personnel 3 The OIC may authorize the firing of all types of ammunition from a firing point if he ensures that the proper charge is being fired 4 Before illuminating rounds are fired the position commander must ensure that the firing of those rounds is authorized on his safety card 5 The OIC must ensure that range clearance has been obtained before the battery may fire 6 ____ FIRING will be commanded only by the plt Idr 7 Firing will be halted when the range control commands CHECK FIRING 8 The plt ldr will verify the boresight of each piece prior to firing in each position 9 Excess powder should be piled as high as possible for burning to prevent spreading of the flames and to reduce the chance of starting a range fire 10 Because of the great range of the M110A2 howitzer drift must be considered in the computation of safety limits prior to the registration Part 2 Multiple Choice 11 Verifyin
378. itzer panoramic telescope pantel is used to measure 4 11 FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 horizontal clockwise angles from the line of fire or the rearward extension of the line of fire to the line of sight to a given aiming point In reciprocal laying the aiming point for the howitzer pantel is the aiming circle 2 The line of fire as it relates to the principle of reciprocal laying is any line parallel to the azimuth of fire It is first established by the aiming circle in order that the circle can be used to orient the howitzer on the azimuth of fire 3 The rearward extension of the line of tire is the exact opposite of the line of fire 9 A deflection is defined as a horizontal clockwise angle measured from the line of fire or the rearward extension of fire to the line of sight of a given aiming point with the vertex of the angle at the pantel That is to say the angular measurements taken when reciprocally laying with the aiming circle and the howitzer pantel will always be deflections b The principle of reciprocal laying is based on the following geometric theorem given two lines cut by a common transversal whose alternate interior angles are equal then those two lines are said to be parallel The parallel lines are the 0 3200 lines of the aiming circle and the line of fire and rearward extension of the line of tire of the howitzer The common transversal is the line of sight established between the aiming
379. ivered by aircraft rocket artillery or vehicle The artillery has four 155 mm pro jectiles of which two M692 M731 are area denial artillery munitions and two M718 M741 are remotely activated antitank mines The liste are ordered for either long or short self destruct The mode is not selected by the firing unit Some of the mines are equipped with antidisturbance devices FASCAM family of scatterable mines FASP field artillery support plan FAST forward area support team FC field circular FD fire direction raido net FDC fire direction center FDO fire direction officer FEBA forward edge of the battle area FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 FED forward entry device FFE fire for effect final protective fire a continuous fire mission that creates a wall of steel to protect units in a defensive posture fire control alignment tests tests performed to etermine if the on carriage fire control equip ment the gunner s quadrant and the align ment device are in correct adjustment Firefinder AN TPQ 36 mortar locating radar or AN TPQ 37 artillery locating radar fire support team in fire support operations a team made up of a team chief FA lieutenant and the additional personnel and equipment required to request coordinate and direct fire support efforts for company size maneuver units 1SG first sergeant FIST fire support team FLOT FLS forward landing strip forward line of own troops FM frequency modulated fi
380. k the aiming circle off level or over Inadvertently moving the lower motion when movement of the upper motion is desired When this occurs the 0 3 200 1 line will be reoriented along a different azimuth FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 e Making a 100 mil error in reading or setting deflections instrument readings and so forth on the upper motion This is easy to do if one is not careful to read the numbers on the azimuth scale in a clockwise direction When setting readings on the upper motion it is best to set off 00 on the azimuth micrometer knob and then set off the first two digits of the reading on the azimuth scale Using an improper base length to perform subtense for distance measuring for example using the M16 when distance is greater than values listed in the appropriate table Failure to update piece location in the FDC with final lay deflections or when survey closes Verifyin before the primary aiming point is emplaced or boresight is verified Leaving aie circles attached to tripods during movement so they later become unserviceable Failure to verify the azimuth to the EOL To verify the azimuth to the EOL Set off the declination constant on the upper motion Float and center the magnetic needle with the lower motion Sight on the EOL with the upper motion and check the reading on the scale with that given to the EOL Map spot the grid coordinates b The result of an error in determini
381. key personnel on this information e Camouflage b The BC or platoon leader may be instructed to displace upon receiving fire In that case he would have a different list in mind For example he might establish the following tasks to be done before receiving incoming fire e Camouflage e Prepare limited protection for personnel and equipment e Reconnoiter and or select alternate positions displacement routes and march order signal e Prepare alternate positions 3 6 e l repare defensive positions e Improve individual protection e Improve equipment protection c The duties of the section members may be different if they are ordered to continue the mission or displace on receiving fire Tables 3 2 and 3 3 page 3 8 are samples of duty breakdowns Actual priorities should be included in unit SOPs 3 8 DEFENSE IN ALL DIRECTIONS The enemy can attack from any direction so the platoons must be able to defend in all directions Based upon METT T the unit may consider dispatching patrols to maintain security to FM 7 8 for specific instructions on the conduct of patrois 3 9 MUTUAL SUPPORT Mutual support is one unit helping another unit or one soldier helping another soldier Battery and or platoon defensive fire plan targets should be submitted to the battalion FDC and updated as needed Reports of any type of enemy attack should be forwarded to the battalion as soon as possible after contact is made to
382. l say BEGIN Time The time will start when the examiner says BEGIN and stop when the gunner states that the howitzer is boresighted M101A1 TIME IN SECONDS POINTS 4 21 61 89 90 120 ERE ND B 16 Scoring a Standards of precision B 2 were met If applicable b Correct steps were followed to complete the task c If steps a and b were not followed soldier recieves a NO GO and 0 points If soldier received a GO on steps a and b use the chart below to determine score TASK 9 Verifying boresight with the M140 M139 alignment device 061 266 2239 Conditions The soldier is given a howitzer in the firin pun with level bubbles and special corrections on 0 he cannon tube will beat 0 mils elevation and the azimuth counter will be set at 1600 The soldier will be provided with an M 140 M139 alignment device The soldier positions himself as pane and announces when ready The examiner will say BEGIN Time The time will start when the examiner says BEGIN and will stop when the gunner states that boresight is either verified or not verified FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 Scoring a Standards of precision B 2 were met If applicable b Correct steps were followed to complete the task c If steps a and b were not followed soldier recieves a NO GO and 0 points If soldier received a GO on steps a and b use the chart below to determine score POINTS 4 3 1 B 17
383. l nol be reported after SHOT For GDU equipped howitzers the report of rounds complete RC is sent when the SHOT RC Key on the SCA is pressed a second time For a GDU equipped howitzer to receive subsequent fire commands in any mission rounds complete must be transmitted to the FDC e MISFIRE NUMBER so and so is announced when a misfire has occurred voice only f Ammunition status is reported The number of rounds expended type and lot number is reported when requested by the FDC voice or per unit SOP g Data fired in error are reported The chief of section reports to FDC the actual data fired in error for example NUMBER 2 FIRED DEFLECTION so much 7 23 STANDARDIZING ELEMENTS OF THE FIRE COMMAND Certain elements of fire commands may be standardized after the tactical situation weapon and personnel capabilities ammunition status and enemy counterfire threat have been considered As shown in Table 7 1 the following elements of the fire command may be designated as standard pieces to follow pieces to fire method of fire proce ammunition lot and fuze If the FDO decides to vary from fire command standard data he must administratively cancel the existing standard and issue the replacement standard data Only one set of standard data can be in effect at any particular time 7 7 FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 Once standard data are placed in effect the platoon will fire the standard data unless the fire comman
384. laid when the main body occupies the firing position 2 0 Main body occupation Soon after the main bod is in position a second wire system is installed for digital communications second TM 184 digital wirehead is also placed near the battery or platoon center behind the gun line The rocedure for installing this system is identical to that used b he advance party except the wireline is connected to the GD at the howitzer and to the BCS in the FDC ure 9 2 In the howitzer the wire line is connected to the BCS binding posts labeled BCU of the case assembly Figure 9 3 The wire line at the FDC is routed into the vehicle and connected to the wire line adapter of the BCS 9 4 page 9 4 Stakes should be used at the howitzer and the FDC to secure incoming wire lines TO GUN 1 TO GUN 2 TO GUN 3 TO GUN 4 AIMING CIRCLE TO BCS TERMINAL GUN STRIP TM 184 PLT FDC POSITION POSITION to reduce damage to the wire system by moving vehicles and personnel Again if terrain and available wire permit the digital system should be routed to the front of the gun line to minimize system damage CAUTION Avoid any ringing type comm device on the digital case assem line as the potential to destroy GDU y 3 Complete system If time and assets pon a wire line can be installed as necessary between the BCS of the two platoon FDCs by using an RL 27 and RL 159 Figure 9 5 page 9 5 This
385. ld be CANCEL OMMAND QUADRANT so much c HIGH ANGLE is announced or displayed as HA on the SCA to alert the section that the mission is to be fired at an angle of elevation greater than 800 mils Light artillery weapons can be elevated before loading Medium and heavy artillery weapons normally must be loaded at loading elevation d USE GUNNER S QUADRANT is announced or displayed as GQ on the SCA when the FDC desires the quadrant be used to set or check quadrant elevation is is more often used when tiring danger close or precision fire missions which require greater accuracy e AZIMUTH is announced or displayed as AZ on the SCA to alert the sections to a large shift in the direction of fire The command AZIMUTH will be followed by the azimuth in mils f SWEEP so many MILS so many DEFLECTIONS commands a method of fire used when the standard sheaf does not adequately cover the target and more width is nue Sweep fire provides for tiring several deflections with one quadrant 1 Digital sample SCA display for sweep fire is 5 105DF which indicates sweep 10 mils 5 deflections 2 Voice sample command is SWEEP 10 MILS 5 DEFLECTIONS The section chief computes the required 7 3 FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 deflections and after firing the displayed deflection fires ds deflections in any order or as directed by unit EXAMPLE The SCA displays 5 15 43 and a deflection of 3231 The se
386. ld have a wooden stake on end and a nose plug on the other end To mark the azimuth the platoon leader throws the nose plg in the direction of the azimuth of fire Then using the MZ compass he aligns the tape on the azimuth of fire by moving the stake end of the tape At the same time the platoon le der is marking the azimuth these other actions are taking place platoon sergeant takes the aiming circle to the left flank of the firing position He ensures he has moved far enough to the left rear of the weapons so that he is beyond the p where the left flank howitzer will be positioned He then sets up the aiming cirde levels it and is prepared to accept referred deflection from the adjusting piece e chief computer positions the FDC vehicle so that the rear of the vehicle is facing the gun line This allows the FDC to observe the state of readiness of the firing sections and announce voice tire commands platoon leader guides pean piece into position where the erigineer tape is aligned along the azimuth of fire Self propelled weapons drive alongside the line while towed howitzers are brought in from the direction of fire and centered over the tape The piece is laid on the target as soon as it is aligned on the engineer tape The FDC has provided firing data charge and quadrant to the platoon leader These are announced to the adjustin and the first round is fired The gunn
387. le and the verification circle deflections are within 10 mils or as specified by local range regulations the instrument operator on the verification circle places the deflection read by the lay circle on the upper motion of the verification circle With the lower motion he sights back on the lay circle This serves to align the 0 3200 line of the verification circle parallel to the 0 3200 line of the lay circle Note When an aiming circle is used to verify another aiming circle for direction the readings between the two circle will be 3 200 mils apart Figure 418 This is because both circles measure horizontal clockwise angles from the line of fire To Do confusion remember that if you see red read Ted LINE OF FIRE DEFLECTION 1 SAFET DEFLECTION 1 CIRCLE i Lay 71 LINE OF SIGHT CIRCLE Figure 4 18 Orienting the verification circle FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 4 The instrument operator on the verification circle commands PLATOON REFER AIMING POINT THIS INSTRUMENT All gunners refer and announce the deflection to the verification circle If the deflection referred by a howitzer is within that tolerance given in the local range regulations the operator on the verification circle announces that the howitzer is safe Once all howitzers are safe the operator announces THE PLATOON IS SAFE Note When referring to the verification circle to verify lay the gunner must ensure that the tube is on the
388. lect endline to return to the DATA INDEX 2 Method 2 Method 2 starts at the same location as method 1 step 27 The difference between method 1 andmethod2isthatmethod2 backs upthrough the program This allows the computed data for the last forward station entered to be reviewed and recorded first IDGP Select P endline Note Remember atthis point in the program the number following the symbol will be one larger than the number of forward station entered FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 DISPLAY ACTION TAKEN Note number following the symbol will be the number of the last forward station computed Steps 29 to 31 display the coordinates of the last forward station Nem Ede ATs Emme 4t BUMP amp IDGPx Select P endline Note Atthis point in the program all the desired data for the last forward station is recorded if required Pressing P will cause the computer to return to the BUMP of the last forward station again IDGPx Select P endline wwe Note The number following the symbol in step 34 is the number ofthe next to last forward station The use of endline through the ALT data will provide all the data for this station You can continue this process all the way back to the first forward station If only the last forward station coordinates are required they are extra
389. lete the safety diagram and compute the safety data Show work SOLUTION TO QUALIFICATION TEST II Part 1 True and False 1 True 3 False 5 True 7 True 9 False 2 True 4 True 6 False 8 True 10 True Part 2 Multiple Choice 11 a 13 c Part 3 Completion 14 Before leaving for the field all officers in the chain of command should read and understand five references They are as follows a AR 385 63 b FM 6 50 Chapter 11 c TM 43 0001 28 d Appropriate TM for the weapon e Post range regulations O 9 FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 15 Equipment and material required by safety personnel in the field include the following a authorized safety card b applicable tabular fining tables c applicable graphical firing tables d applicable graphical site tables e map of the area f aiming circle 16 Upon arrival at the prescribed firing point the platoon leader must check and verify the following a that the safety card applies to the firing unit exercise and date b that the platoon is in the position as specified on the card c the boresighting of each weapon d the laying of the platoon 17 When the battery is laid by the grid azimuth method the aiming circle must be no closer than 75 meters to artillery weapons 18 The platoon has been laid on an azimuth of 0430 mils You are preparing to check the lay The declination constant of your aiming circle is 0130 mils What instrument
390. lly the commander needs to set a timeline for all critical events from issuing the warning order to execution b Issue the Warning Order The commander takes his battery mission critical fire support tasks PCC priorities and timeline and issues a warning order to maximize battery time Even incomplete information can allow he sections to accomplish most of their required preparations A modified five paragraph order works well c Make a Tentative Plan The commander must gather information to make his plan by focusing on ed level METT T and intelligence preparation of the battlefield IPB if available The commander is concerned with positioning movement logistic support rehearsals and defense as he makes his plan d Initiate Movement If the mission requires repositioning the commander should start his battery 2 1 FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 movement as early as possible in accordance with METT T to make use of available time e Conduct Reconnaissance Depending on METT T the reconnaissance may be a simple m p reconnaissance Ideally it will consist of ground reconnaissance establishing and Xeno uve control full prune position to receive the battery and developing the battery defense Coordination for survey engineer route security adjacent unit coordination and fire support can be accomplished f Complete the Plan The commander must organize the information into a coherent order to issue
391. lnerable and dangerous Personnel may not be available in a fluid fast moving situation to provide the necessary security Night operation of the R3P is the optimum tactical solution a Selection The site should e Be on or near the route of march for the firing elements e Provide good trafficability e Allow cover and concealment b Organization In organizing the site the following should be considered e Dispersion e Camouflage e Operations security OPSEC c Activities Some of the activities that can take place at the R3P are as follows e Key personnel firing battery briefing e Tailoring to meet the needs of the unit e POL ammunition maintenance and rations priorities resupply e Local security augmented by firing battery e Ammunition transfer point activities FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 TO NEXT FIRING MAINTENANCE POSITION CHECKPOINT MESS TRUCKS TRAILERS BATTALION AMMUNITION 2 03 TRANSFER KILOMETERS ROUTE OF POL MARCH RESUPPLY POINT ASSEMBLY AREA REMOTED ANTENNA Figure 12 3 R3P site 12 5 FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 APPENDIX A STANDARDIZED PROCEDURES The procedures listed in Table A 1 have been standardized under the Department of the Army standardization program Table A 1 Standardized procedures MAJORCATAGORY MEASURE REFERENCE Emergency actions Defense against air attack Physical configuration Page E 1 Figure E 1
392. ly during insertion and extracted externally i sling load the loads should be partially rigged in the PZ belore the mission begins 11 Emplace false insertions along the flight path False insertions are only effective if howitzers are being carried internally b Air Mission Brief The AMB for the artillery raid contains the same elements as for a battery air assault mission with the following additions 1 Because artillery raids involve the extraction of all and equipment laager site must be designated or the aircraft during the firing of the mission The aviation representative designates the site The artillery commander ensures that it provides for the rapid extraction at the end of the mission 2 Code words and or ER must be arranged for the recall of aircraft at the end of the mission c Pickup Zone Operations The PZ operations are generally the same as with the air assault mission d Landing Zone Operations 1 The executive officer controls the LZ The advance party guides orient aircraft on the landing points as with he ir assault mission 2 When the aircraft have delivered their loads to the LZ they move to the laager area 3 When the fire mission is complete the howitzer crews prepare the weapons for sling load extraction Designated members of the advance party assume the duties as hookup team s Security for the area is most difficult at this time and howitzer section members must be des
393. materials and documents 1 2 Petroleum oil and lubricants 3 Sophisticated weapons systems or electronic equipment 4 Heavy weapons and associated ammunition 5 Communications equipment 6 Ferrying and bridging equipment 7 Air sea and land transport b As a second priority Any other military stores military equipments and supplies or military facilities which may e of use to the enemy 5 Implementation of the Denial Instructions for the denial of an item of military equipment or of supplies should be included in the appropriate national support publication in sufficient detail to enable their direct use to be denied to an enemy and also to prevent the enemy from making use of them after cannibalization between similar equipments 3 20 FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 3 23 EMERGENCY ALARMS OF HAZARD OR ATTACK The BC must ensure that alarms of hazard or attack are provided in the unit SOPs The applicable details to be included in the SOPs have been extracted from STANAG 2047 and are shown below EXTRACT STANAG 2047 Edition 6 EMERGENCY ALARMS OF HAZARD OR ATTACK NBC AND AIR ATTACK ONLY Audible and visual alarm signa must be given by means which cannot easily be confused with other sounds or sights encountered in combat The alarm signals will be given in all cases as soon as an attack or the presence of a hazard is detected The alarm signals will be repeated throughout the
394. may require check of weapon direction be made Normally this check is made after a registration or after survey control is established It serves to e Check the data fired e Check the accuracy of lay c Weapon direction may be verified by Reporting the correct deflection e Measuring the azimuth e Measuring the orienting angle d Reporting will reveal any sloppy procedures being used by the gun crews such as failure to level the bubbles and improper sight picture Measuring provides a check on the accuracy of the lay These checks must be made before END OF MISSION is received at the firing weapon 4 29 BACKWARD AZIMUTH RULE a The backward azimuth rule is a mathematical relationship used to apply equal changes in angles used in the laying process This rule establishes the relationship between three elements as follows An increase in deflection causes an equal decrease in azimuth and an equal increase in orienting angle A decrease in deflection causes an equal increase in azimuth and an equal decrease in orienting angle b Using this rule and assuming that there are no errors in the lay of the weapons weapon direction may be verified 4 30 REPORTING THE CORRECT DEFLECTION Upon completion of a mission and before announcing END OF MISSION the FDC may request that the executive officer or platoon leader report the correct deflection To report the XO or platoon leader e Goes to the weapon 4 24
395. mber so and so would then reciprocally ay the remaining howitzers in the platoon as outlined in paragraph 4 16d using the commands in paragraph 4 19 c This method of lay has advantages and disadvantages that must be considered before it is used 0 fAdvantages The main to using this method is that all howitzers will be oriented parallel 2 Disadvantages The compass is every 20 mils and can be read to an accuracy of 10 mils The accuracy depends a great deal on the ability of the instrument operator EXAMPLE Laying by M2 Compass The advance patty is preparing a position for occupation on an azimuth of 4550 Because of combat loss no aiming circle is available The platoon leader has determined that line of sight will exist between number 4 and the remain howitzers The MEN eant is told to lay number upon occupation using the M2 compass method of lay The G takes a mattock handle from the advance party vehicle and moves 100 meters to the left front of number 4 position Upon arrival of number 4 the GSG using the mattock handles as a stable platform for the compass measures an azimuth to the pantel of number 4 He subtracts the azimuth of fire from the measured azimuth adding 6 400 mils to the measured azimuth if necessary 0730 6400 7130 Azimuth of Fire 4550 Deflection 2580 Measured Azimuth The gunnery sergeant commands NUMBER 4 ADJUST AIMING POINT THIS INSTRUMENT DEFLECTION 2580 The gunner on
396. me The amount of time available for the RSOP will effect all phases of its accomplishment The time factor will change due to events on the battlefield Whether minutes or tue are allowed for the RSOP adjustments must be made 2 8 THE RECONNAISSANCE PARTY The reconnaissance party should consist of enough individuals to accomplish successful RSOP An example of a reconnaissance party is the commander the GSG and representatives from each howitzer FDC and support section If enough survey or position azimuth determining system PADS sections are available a survey capability should be allocated to the commander This capability will depend upon survey priority established by the battalion 53 The commander of a firing battery chooses position areas for the platoons or the battery and determines the azimuth n The GSG then performs detailed position area 2 9 ASSEMBLING THE ADVANCE PARTY For either a deliberate or a hasty occupation a prearranged signal or procedure should be used to alert and assemble the advance party The signal should be in the unit SOPs which will also list the personnel equipment vehicles and place of assembly see Tables 2 1 and 2 2 The advance party is normally assembled no later than the prepare to march order phase Table 2 1 Advance party equipment NVGs as needed First Sergeant Gunnery Sergeant set AN VDR 2 as req tables and DA Form 5698 R PERSONNEL EQUIPM
397. me position for extended periods Failure to plan for proper field sanitation such as waste disposal may result in nonbattle casualties f Depending on the commander s assessment of the factors of METT T the roe may increase the success of the unit in OOTW e Air defense artillery SHORAD e Radar countermortar e Survey e Meteorological section e Civil affairs teams e Psychological operations PSYOPS teams e Infantry armor or MPs to aid in security e Ground surveillance radar Table F 1 Comparison of conventional and OOTW battlefield factors Factors Conventional Enemy threat Artillery armor Dismounted order air dismounted indirect fire terrorist attacks Enemy missions Defend attack Causes US maneuver casualties involves civilians Friendly missions Defend attack Search and maneuver attack protect convoys defend Terrain consider Linear multiple Restrictive limited ations positions positions 6 400 mil firing FA survival Movement Hardening techniques dispersion avoid defense detection g If the firing unit is not deployed as part of a battalion It must consider how classes of WR will be handled and if a logistics representative should be attached Hardenin a position will require large quantities of fortification an barrier material This will almost certainly cause the shipment of class IV items to become a priority If the supported maneuver unit is n
398. ming circle M2A2 care and handling 4 6 components 4 1 through 4 3 declination 4 5 leveling 4 3 4 4 setting up 4 3 taking down 4 4 ammunition accidents 10 7 care and handling 10 3 field storage 10 6 10 7 interchangeability App N misfire procedures 10 7 planning guide 10 8 through 10 11 projectile description 10 1 through 10 3 training 10 7 10 8 N 1 battery position area occupation 2 12 through 2 17 2 33 through 2 35 deliberate 2 33 emergency 2 33 2 34 hasty 2 33 types of 2 33 preparation 2 8 2 12 through 2 15 day 2 12 through 2 15 night 2 15 RSOP operations 2 2 selection considerations 2 1 2 8 types 2 33 boresighting 8 3 camouflage 3 2 E 2 E 3 case assembly L 3 L 4 characteristics of FA cannons App M combat service support maintenance 12 3 responsibilities 12 1 R3P site 12 4 trains 12 1 common mistakes and malpractices App D communications radio systems 9 4 through 9 8 small unit transceiver 9 8 wire system 9 1 through 9 6 compass M2 care and handling 4 11 components 4 10 declination 4 10 crater analysis J 1 through 1 5 defense battery area against air attack 3 1 3 17 H 3 armor 3 1 3 17 2 dismounted attack 3 1 3 18 indirect fire 3 1 3 18 basic considerations 3 2 through 3 6 camouflage 3 2 through 3 6 checklist App H defense diagram 3 9 through 3 16 emergency alarms 3 21 through 3 23 equipment destruction procedures 3 19 3 20
399. mple QUADRANT 318 He elevates the tube to that quadrant elevation after the projectile has been loaded When the section chief announces quadrant the AG reads back the quadrant that is set on the range quadrant After the AG has centered the bubbles on the range quadrant he reports QUADRANT so much SET b To increase responsiveness loading procedures may be changed per the unit SOP as follows 1 Round is loaded on deflection This procedure can be used when loading will not interfere with receipt of the remaining fire commands 2 Adusting piece loads subsequent rounds immediately after tiring This loading method can be used for all projectile fuze combinations not using a mechanical time fuze It is possible that the piece may not have the correct projectile fuze combination loaded when entering FFE If this occurs the loaded round is fired and the remaining FFE rounds are fired with the correct projectile fuze combination At the end of the mission the Chief of section reports to the FDC that his howitzer fired ammunition not specified in the fire command EXAMPLE Suppose the fire command was 3 ROUNDS VT IN EFFECT Number 4 fired one round with fuze quick and two rounds with fuze VT The chief of section NUMBER 4 FIRED 1 QUICK AND 2 VT IN EFFECT The FDC then updates the ammunition count accordingly CAUTION Do not leave rounds in a hot or warm tube for a period longer than that specified by the techn
400. muth of fire from the declination constant DC of the aiming circle add 6 400 mils to the declination constant if necessary 2 Place this value on the upper motion 3 Using the lower motion center the magnetic needle See Figure 4 7 The 0 3200 line is now parallel to the azimuth of fire c The next step is to lay the platoon reciprocally by using the upper motion and sighting on the howitzer pantel EXAMPLE Laying by Grid Azimuth The platoon is being laid on azimuth 3900 The DC of the aiming circle is 0400 mils See Figure 4 16 page 4 16 e Subtract the azimuth of fire from the declination constant The larger number 3 900 cannot be subtracted from the smaller number 0400 mils So 6400 mils must be added to the smaller number Thus 6400 0400 6800 mils 6800 3900 2900 The horizontal clockwise angle from the desired direction of fire to magnetic north aiming point is 2 900 mils Roughly orient the 0 3200 line along the azimuth of fire Using the upper motion set 2900 black numbers Center the magnetic needle by using the lowrer motion This action places the 0 3200 line of the aiming circle on grid azimuth 3900 Make certain that the index remains at 2900 After establishing the 0 3200 line of the aiming circle on grid azimuth 3900 lay the battery reciprocally by using the ae motion This procedure places ac howitzer tube on grid azimuth 4 19 COMMANDS The following commands are u
401. n as part of a battalion move the start point is also the pomni at which control of the marching element is normally assumed by battalion b Normally a checkpoint is a geographical feature identifiable on the ground and on map It is used in reporting rogress along the route of march It may be used as arget when planning fires in defense of the convoy c Normally the release point is normally a geographical feature identifiable on the ground and on a map The last vehicle of a convoy must cross the RP at the specified time The BC is responsible for determining the route from the RP to the new position area If the unit is displacing as part of a battalion move the RP is also the point at which control of the marching element is regained by the platoon The BC or GSG may send a vehicle from the advance party to the release point to lead the unit into the new position area d A pickup pointis a location normally within the position where the gun guide meets the howitzer and guides it into position e Normally a rally point is a geographical feature identifiable on the ground and on a map It is used as a point of assembly and recovery from dispersion due to enemy attack The designated rally point s should be located near or on the alternate route to the new position f Route marking aids in the move The route marking detail marks the route by posting signs and or personnel at those critical locations where elements
402. n which the Sight of a weapon is aligned when the weapon is laid for direction There are two general types of aiming points distant and close in aiming posta striped rod used in pairs as a close in aiming point ALOC administrative and logistics operations center alt altitude alternate position the position given to a weapon unit or individual to be occupied when the pri mary position becomes untenable or unsuit able for carrying out the mission The alter nate position is located so that the unit can continue the mission it had when in its pri mary position AM amplitude modulated AMB air mission brief AMC at my command ammunition lot number code number assigned to a articular lot of ammunition when it is manu actured This manufacturer s lot number is alphanumeric and is different from the lot number assigned to an ammunition lot by the unit ammunition supply point location at which conven tional ammunition is available for distribution to using units ammunition transfer point location established in the maneuver trains area to issue high usage conventional ammunition to using units AMTP ant antenna AOF azimuth of fire AOP allied ordinance publication AP or APERS antipersonnel AP BAF memory aid az to the aiming point minus back azimuth of fire APERS T antipersonnel tracer app appendix AR Army regulation ARTEP mission training plan area denial artillery munitions projectiles M692 a
403. n adjustment 2 AMMUNITION FUZES ON HAND 7 10 a On the first line enter the type of ammunition b On the second line list lot designators for preces propellants fuzes and the primer nomenclature pe es and propellants are recorded separately for separate loading ammunition c On the third line list the actual count of each 3 Fire mission data a Record fire command elements in this portion unless they are already standardized b Record resupply and transfer of ammunition 4 AMMUNITION EXPENDED In this column record all ammunition expended or received b Circle each round shot in a fire mission and record the cumulative count Upon receipt of EOM subtract total rounds ue S opa circled number in the column from the initial or atest total c Entries for resupply and transfer of ammunition are not circled c The DA Form 4513 or 4513 R should be turned in usually to the GSG platoon sergeant or platoon leader once every 24 hours for the pupos of updating the DA Form 2408 4 The unit SOP applies The PAGE OF block is completed at this time The form should be filled out completely to eliminate errors The chief of section should check it periodically for neatness and accuracy Note A cumulative count is kept to reduce errors in devine totals Once totals are derived except those listed in the AMMUNITION FUZES ON HAND block they are represented by two slashes in the upper left hand corn
404. n and their responsibilities a Have range cards been constructed for crew served Weapon and checked by a unit leader to ensure integrated fields of fire b Have two means of communications been established with the LPs and or OPs 3 Has a system been established to man the OPs and or LPs on a 24 hour basis 4 Has a prearranged signal been established to recall the OP and or LP b Hardening 1 Is key battery equipment such as ammunition and generators hardened 2 Are available urban terrain man made structures and or natural terrain features being used to the maximum extent possible 3 Are available cover and concealment being used H 1 FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 c Fighting Positions 0 Have individual fighting positions IFPs been established if required for every section 2 Are IFPs prepared Have range cads been constructed for crew served and checked by a unit leader to ensure integration of ees b Are individual and section fighting positions dug c Has battle site zero been set on all M16 weapons T 9 Are the IFPs integrated into the overall defensive 4 Are sufficient crew served weapons M60 M2 positioned to provide security for key battery elements Are range cards prepared b Are visibility diagrams prepared c Have firing stakes been emplaced to identify the primary and alternate sectors of fire Are they marked for day and night and if so how
405. n axles Vehicles with two axles max weight 20 t Vehicles with three axles max weight 26 t Vehicles with more than three axles max weight 38 t Combined or articulated vehicles max weight 38 t Max load density between farthest axles 5 t per meter Max pressure to the road 9 Kg per square centimeter FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 10 In UK there is no legal limit applied to the of a semi trailer however due to the constraints of the Construct and Use Regulations OK which limit the maximum tractor semi trailer combination length to 15 m the semi trailer length cannot exceed 12 2 m in practice this is reduced normally to 12 m 11 12 m for trailers with 4 or more wheels and a distance between the heart of the two outmost rear axles of more than three fifth of the trailers overall length and provided that own weight of the tractor is 2030 kg or more otherwise the length of a trailer may not exceed 7 m 12 12 m for a motor coach fit up for more than 8 seated passengers which can turn within a circle of 24 m diameter 13 457 m for a large motor coach as described at note 12 For motorlorries there is no limit but certain vehicles over 3 658 m height must carry a notice stating height in feet and inches in the cab Bridge heights on secondary roads allow vehicles up to 3 962 m height ANNEX C TO STANAG 2154 Edition 6 REGULATIONS FOR MILITARY MOTOR VEHICLE MOVEMENT BY ROAD TABLE LISTING THE MINIMUM NUM
406. n battery It is a how to train manual intended to provide general guidance to the and his poa subordinates It is designed for battery leaders and should be used in conjunction with equipment technical manuals Marine Corps combat readiness evaluation system MCCRES Marine Corps individual training standards ITS Army training and evaluation program mission training plans AMTPs soldier manuals and trainer s guides This publication sets forth duties and responsibilities of key personnel and addresses doctrine and procedures for cannon battery operations and training It is based on current tables of organization and equipment TOE and provides a starting point from which each commander can adjust his battery operations and training based on his modification tables of organization and equipment actual personnel and equipment till local training scenario and mission enemy terrain troops and time available MEIT T This publication presents standardized procedures relevant to cannon battery operations Appendix A These procedures are denoted in text by an asterisk This publication implements the following North Atlantic Treaty Organization NATO standardization agreements STANAGs and quadripartite standardization agreements QSTAGs STANAG 2934 Edition 1 Chapter 13 Artillery Procedures and QSTAG 503 Edition 2 Bombing Shelling Rocketing Mortaring and Location Reports STANAG 2041 Edition 4
407. n corresponding to the azimuth of fire that the FDC has input into the BCS and BUCS The common deflection for all weapons with an M100 series sight is 3200 For the M101A1 it is 2800 common grid the extension of survey control direction location and altitude from a base datum to all fire support assets requiring orientation and positioning data within a com mand Note that the USMC terminology is common survey complete rounds term that includes the various components of a round required to perform the firing function There are tour components in a complete round a primer a propellant a projectile and a fuze comp 3 site complementary angle of site COMSEC communications security continuous fire fires delivered by loading and firing as rapidly as possible consistent with accurac and within the prescribed rates of fire for the pieces cookoff of chambered ammunition caused by the heat of the weapon rather than by normal firing coppering metal fouling left in the bore of a cannon by the rotating band of a projectile corr correction counterfire fires directed against indirect fire systems to include their weapons command con trol communications ammunition and target acquisition components counterrecoil forward motion of a cannon returning to firing in battery position after recoil CP command post or concrete piercing fuze Cphd crater analysis process by which the direction to an art
408. n the aiming posts 4 Paay often occurs during emplacement of aiming posts when cannoneers move both the near and far aiming posts to achieve correct alignment The procedure discussed below allows accurate placement of aiming posts in a minimum amount of time Use of this method consistently results in posts requiring no more that 2 mils adjustment often 0 mi ls even when emplaced by entry level soldiers is method when used with aiming post lights also greatly simplifies and speeds the night emplacement of aiming posts a Visually pick a point about 100 meters from the howitzer and walk toward it in as straight a line as possible from the pantel Place the near post in the ground 50 meters from the howitzer in as vertical a position as possible b Walk another 50 meters with the other post Hold this post vertically in front of you Looking toward the pantel move the post left or right as directed by the gunner until the far post near post and the pantel of the howitzer are all on line c Ensuring the post is aligned with the gig line of your uniform grasp the aiming m raise your hands above your heat and stick the post vertically in the ground The post should be vertical adjust if necessary Move to the near post and with your right hand adjust the post if necessary as indicated by the gunner 5 The DAP not emplaced must be roperly selected en a single aiming point ot er than the collimator is us
409. nate with dd for positioning of listening posts LPs and or OPs fighting positions direct fire targets target reference points or range markers to direct the firepower of the platoon into the engagement area b The first sergeant is responsible overall for the execution of battery defense The first sergeant integrates the platoon defense plans into an overall battery defense plan This may not be possible due to the distances platoons may be dispersed from each other If this is the case the 15G will review both platoon defensive plans and forward them to battalion He also will coordinate for resupply all Class IV material and support as necessary Note In a USMC battery the local security chief is responsible for the execution of battery efense c Once the BC s time line and defensive priorities are established the platoon leader will coordinate with the platoon sergeant to accomplish the following e Establish a rally point immediately upon occupation e Develop the platoon defensive plan e Supervise the defense forces e Direct and sight in the positioning and preparation of the following Crew served weapons Antitank weapons Observation posts and or listening posts e Ensure that communications are installed checked and functioning e Designate air TRPs e Select positions for TRPs and range markers e Organize and rehearse the reaction force e Ensure that unit members know equipment and
410. nd 31 are 155 mm mine munitions containing 36 antipersonnel mines each arming range the range at which a fuze becomes operational ARTEP ARSS automated range safety system Army training and evaluation plan ASP ammunition supply point antitank guided missile Glossary 1 FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 ATP automated safety system a computer software application which allows for the automated computation of range safety data or safety Ts ammunition transfer point axis of tube imaginary center line of the tube of a cannon AXO assistant executive officer az azimuth azimuth horizontal clockwise angle measured from north A grid azimuth measured from erid north is the azimuth normally used in the field artillery A magnetic azimuth is measured from magnetic north a true azimuth is measured from true north azimuth of fire the direction expressed in mils that a battery is laid oriented on when it occupies a position back azimuth the back azimuth is equal to the azimuth plus or minus 3 200 mils BAS battalion aid station base ejection shell a type of projectile that ejects its pa 6 from the base such as the ICM pro jectile basic load of ammunition the amount of ammunition a unit is authorized to maintain to initiate combat and sustain itself until resupplied battery center the chart location of the battery The geographic center of all weapons battery computer system an automated dat
411. nding posts allow connection to the case assembly as follows The TERM 1 binding post is used to connect field wire between the gun assembly and the power binding post on the case assembly 4166 QQ DEF 2 DEF 3 Figure L 4 Case assembly controls indicators and connectors L 4 FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 MOUNTING HOLES DISPLAY DATA DISPLAY DEFLECTION OR WINDOW ELEVATION ID 2124 GYK 299V0 OPERATOR GUNNER OR ASSISTANT 24 0 OUNCES 6 1 INCHES 4 8 INCHES 1 8 INCHES 5 VOLTS DC WEIGHT LENGTH WIDTH HEIGHT POWER DATA DISPLAY RECALL SWITCH DISPLAY e BRIGHTNESS CONTROL Figure L 5 Gun assembly 2 The TERM 2 ned post is used to connect field wire between the gun assembly and the ground binding post on the case assembly 3 The TERM 3 hnding ost is used to connect field wire between the gun assembly and the signal binding post on the case assembly d When the RECALL switch is pressed the display reappears The display normally stays in the display window for 15 seconds The display also goes blank when the GDU receives FOM CEASE LOAD or CHECKFIRE and it stays blank until data for the next mission is received e The display brightness control is used to vary the brightness of the display window data L 5 CABLES The following cables are provided for connecting the GDU e SCA cable W35 15 feet long which provides signal DM connection between the cas
412. ndirect laying the aiming of a pet by sighting at an aiming point other than the target The piece is laid for direction by setting a given deflec tion on the sight and traversing the tube until the line of sight of the pean telescope is on the aiming point The piece is laid for elevation on the range quadrant or gunner s quadrant by depressing the tube until the appropriate bubble is centered instrument reading the horizontal clockwise angle from the line of fire to magnetic north FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 intermediate crest a crest lying between the firin osition and the target that is not visible rom the firing position IOC initial operational capability IPB intelligence preparation of the battlefield IPRTF in place ready to fire IR instrument reading IT Italy ITS individual training standards ga jamming the intentional transmission of interferin electronic signals in order to disrupt the recep tion of other signals 5 Joint Chiefs of Staff kg kilogram km kilometer KOK cryptographic operational keying device L left or long duration suffix with ADAMS or RAAMS laid a weapon is laid when the axis of the tube is accurately aimed in a predetermined direction lands raised portion between the grooves in the bore of a rifled cannon tube Spiral channels cut in the bore of the cannon tube are the ooves These in conjunction with the rotating band impart spin on the projectile
413. ng nar osition The howitzer is laid and the pantel is oriented on lt and b use the chart he collimator Bubbles are level and special corrections at below to determine score 0 The cannon tube is at 0 mils elevation and is oriented so that the trails will not have to be shifted during the mission to engage the direct fire target The soldier will be told which direct fire target he is to engage The soldier positions himself as gunner and announces when ready The examiner commands FIRE MISSION TARGET THAT XXX direction SHELL HE CHARGE XX FUZE QUICK LEAD RIGHT 15 MILS RANGE 600 FIRE AT WILL Time The time will start when the examiner states FIRE AT WILL and will stop when the gunner says FIRE TIME IN SECONDS POINTS crow 11 B 23 FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 TASK IIB Scoring Conditions Continuation from 11A Soldier announces a Standards of precision B 2 when ready The examiner commands RIGHT 5 ADD were met If applicable 100 b Correct steps were followed to Time The time will start when the examiner states ADD complete the task 100 and will stop when the gunner says FIRE ME followed soldier recieves a NO GO and 0 points If soldier received a GO on steps a and b use the chart below to determine score TIME IN SECONDS POINTS 11 12 11 12 11 12 11 12 w 9 7 B 24 FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 TASK
414. ng azimuth can be computed as it is a function of the mil relation formula An error has a direct effect on direction and the accuracy of the fired round See Figure D 3 and the example below ACTUAL IMPACT OF m MET FIRED ROUNDS TARGET WHEN LOCATION W SHIFT IN METERS R PIECE TO TARGET RANGE EXPRESSED IN THOUSANDS TO THE NEAREST HUNDRED METERS ANGULAR DEVIATION IN MILS TO THE NEAREST MIL Figure D 3 Mil relation formula D 5 FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 EXAMPLE Your unit initially laid on an azimuth of 5900 by using the grid azimuth method during a hasty occupation The rounds fired by your unit are off the target You determine after obtaining accurate survey control for direction that you are actually laid on an azimuth of 5880 At a range of 10 000 meters m initial data would include a lateral error of 200 meters This lateral error is determined by using the mil relation formula as shown in Figure C3 R 10 000 10 range to target rang get 10 000 is already expressed to the nearest 100 5900 5880 20 Always subtract the smaller value from the larger value Wz Rx w 10x 20 200 meters that cause equipment failure and injury or death to personnel Some examples of incidents are discussed below a During a live fire exercise involving an M109A3 howitzer battery unsafe charge data was transmitted from the BCS to the GDU Both the FDC and the howitzer crew f
415. ng battery driver returns to the battery location with the loaded flat rack The ammunition section chief returns to the ATP with the empty vehicle to receive more ammunition and discard the residue in peacetime This method minimizes problems of battery movement and saves time because both drivers know the procedures and routes If coordination has been done between batteries the S4 ATP and so on this is the fastest method of ammunition resupply See Figure 12 1 2 Push to battery single loop method In this method the ammunition is drawn from the ATP and the same operator delivers the ammunition to the battery position Success on the ability of drivers to find both the batter and the ATP Use of this method depends upon the driver s familiarity with the area and the UE of need for the ammunition by the battery See Figure 12 2 TRUCK TRANSFER POINT LOADED TRUCK EMPTY TRUCK Figure 12 1 Double loop method of resupply LOADED TRUCK a EMPTY TRUCK Figure 12 2 Single loop method of resupply 3 Rearm refuel point This technique usually emphasizes Class III and V requirements Spies along the route of an extended battalion road march e battalion XO designates a key combat service support leader to execute the R3P The site will PEN Class III and V facilities service station layout along the route of march to the subsequent firing position e Class VII Majo
416. ng charges or powder like other components of ammunition must be kept cool and dry Powder containers must be closed tight to keep moisture out c Propellant bags must be firm clean and well laced or tied and the increments must be inserted in the proper sequence d Propellant must be inspected before the charge is prepared The following are examples of things to check Missing increments extra increments and or incorrect sequencing order of increments e Increment bags Bags must not be damaged to the extent that black powder or propellant spills out e Rotting chemical odor e red igniter pad on the base of the base charge 155 mm propelling charges e Do not fire unused powder increments They should be removed to some storage area commonly called powder it preferably 30 to 40 feet from the nearest weapon until hey can be burned or otherwise disposed of The procedures for burning powder are discussed below 1 For safety select a burning site at least 200 feet from grass and loose debris as well as personnel and equipment 2 Determine the direction of the wind 3 Place charge increments in a single layer row not more than 12 inches wide 4 Arrange the row so that the powder will burn into the wind Figure 10 3 5 Lay a train of combustible material about 15 feet long perpendicular to and at the downwind end of the row of charge increments Light this train at the end farthe
417. nimum elevation limits are not violated 4 During heavy rain the M557 fuze should not be fired 5 The chief of section will verify the serviceability of ammunition 6 Chemical and high explosive projectiles can be stored together FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 7 Projectiles and fuzes that have been removed from a cannon by means of extraction should be fired on the next mission 8 Time fuzes previously set but not fired must be reset to safe 9 If the left deflection limit is 3 650 mils it is safe to fire a round at deflection 3700 0 The maximum and minimum quadrants do not change even if the charge or type of ammunition changes diagram 12 Once a howitzer is initially laid for direction with the aiming circle it should never be traversed before the primary aiming point is emplaced 13 A registration will cause the deflection limits minimum time and maximum and minimum quadrants of the safety diagram to change 14 Before firing a round the chief of section must ensure that the correct number and types of remaining charge increments are held up at the rear of the piece 15 The chief of section has final responsibility for the safety of the crew and the settings on his weapon before the command to FIRE Part 2 Multiple Choice 16 Who is responsible for ensuring that the proper time is set on a fuze before a round is loaded into a howitzer When the firing point changes so doe
418. ning aids inventory These rounds are designed to train the entire howitzer crew from loading ammunition to setting fuzes area denial artillery munitions antipersonnel basebleed base detonating fuze base ejection fuze concrete piercing fuze riot control agent delay Department of Defense ammunition code Department of Defense identification code dual purpose improved conventional munitions electronic time fuze family of scatterable mines green bag blister agent mustard hexachloroethane blister agent distilled mustard high explosive high explosive antitank high explosive plastic high explosive plastic tracer high explosive rocket assisted cutting charges loading and firing Keep an up to date TASC catalog and take advantage of these devices 10 17 AMMUNITION PLANNING GUIDE Tables 10 2 through 10 4 pages 10 9 through 10 11 give information on ammunition available for various FA weapons Figure 10 9 provides a list of acronyms and abbreviations for Tables 10 2 through 10 4 improved conventional munitions illumination initial operational capability long duration suffix with ADAM or RAAMS muzzle action muzzle action mechanical time fuze modified mechanical time mechanical time super quick fuze nondelay fuze point detonating fuze proximity remote antiarmor mine system rocket assisted projectile short duration suffix with ADAM or RAAMS second superquick to be de
419. nique was in oa snipers from around base areas The name Killer came from the radio call sign of the battalion that perfected the technique To speed the delivery of fire the crew of each weapon used a firing table containing the quadrant fuze settings and charge appropriate for each range at which direct fire targets could be acquired 1 2 TYPES OF TARGETS The most likely target for which Killer Junior would be used is dismounted infantry Careful consideration must be given to weapon to maximize fields of fire and to complement other organic or attached weapon systems 1 3 AMMUNITION a Shell Fuze Combination Shell HE is fired with mechanical time super quick fuze M564 M582 b Charges Minimum authorized charge should be fired to facilitate the engagement of targets at close range If the maximum charge is used it will serve only to increase the range to fuze function I 4 PROCEDURES ering The three primary methods of sighting outlined in Chapter 8 are used when firing Killer Junior b Firing data 1 105 mm Pocket size firing tables for charge 1 shell n nue MTSQ can be ordered through normal publication annels Note These tables are incorrect in that they do not contain the warning shown below WARNING Firing a fuze setting lessthan what corresponds to a range of 650 meters is restricted to combat emergency conditions only Firing a fuze than this value results in a danger
420. nit as necessary 12 1 FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 4 Note Maintenance supply and ammunition assets may be organic to the FA battery or may be consolidated at battalion by design or fask organization At battery level supply is a function rather than a section b Supplies logistics services replacement weapons systems mail pay personnel actions and all other services will come from the field trains through coordination with the BSOC The battery first sergeant through the battery motor sergeant and supply sergeant coordinates with the appropriate staff officer in the ALOC to obtain required qp or services Some and services come to the battery as part of the LOGPAC These are mail pay bulk petroleum oil and lubricants POL and rations Ammunition is not a part of the LOGPAC Ammunition resupply is a continuous process to ensure the battery mission can be fulfilled c The unit basic load UBL is a specified amount of Class I I III IV V VIII and preprinted forms with which the unit will deploy on organic transportation In some cases the UBL is a set number or amount In other cases it is based upon the number of miles to be traveled or personnel authorized within the battery Local commands provide the data necessary to compute the basic load for the battery 12 5 CLASSES OF SUPPLY a Class I Rations Normally the UBL specifies that combat rations meals ready to eat MREs for 3 to 5 days will b
421. nitor M8A1 Help in security sweep Lay wire from TM 184 to POC or FDC position Set up OE 254 Record initial deflection distance and vertical angle on updated DA Form 5698 R Reconnoiter route from RP to section position Compute terrain gun corrections if necessary POC or FDC Guide Help in security measures Meet section at RP and guide it to assigned position FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 Table 2 2 Primary duties of advance party personnel continued RECONNAISSANCE SELECT AND OR ORGANIZE OCCUPATION PHASE PHASE PHASE Gun Guides Help with security during Help in security sweep Meet howitzer at movement Prepare section position RP and guide it Lay wire from TM 184 to assigned gun to assigned position position Hold subtense bar or M16 to aid GSG Align weapon on collecting TGPC information azimuth of fire Record initial deflection and pass it to and give gunner section chief upon occupation initial deflection Determine initial site to crest with M2 compass Reconnoiter route from RP to section position Communications Help with security during Emplace TM 184 Meet section Representative movement Establish internal wire communications vehicle at RP for transmission of firing data and guide it to Establish communication with outposts assigned position and make wire drops to designated unless locations communications vehicle was with advance party 2 10 TAKING A FIRING Friendly
422. ns s STEP 4 Depress the telescope of the aiming circle and place the EOL squarely along the aiming circle line of sight at least 30 meters away from the OS Record the azimuth that is announced by the master station STEP 5 With the upper motion track the celestial object until the master station announces TIP THIS IS NOVEMBER 38 AZIMUTH 3741 5 OVER STEP 5 Repeat steps 2 and 3 and determine a second angle for verification THIS IS NOVEMBER 38 TRACKING TRACKING TRACKING TIP OUT STEP6 Determinetheclockwiseangle thecheckangle between the first and second azimuths Announce the check angle to the flank station s STEP 6 Read the angle that was measured read the horizontal scale and copy the check angle from the master station THIS IS NOVEMBER 38 CHECK ANGLE 2 MILS OUT STEP 7 Ensure thatthe check angle from the master station and the horizontal scale of the aiming circle agree within 2 mils the azimuth to the EOL is the azimuth that was recorded in step 4 If the check angle is out of tolerance the entire procedure must be repeated 1 Sight on the center mass of the celestial object With the M2A2 aiming circle you can see celestial objects even when they are only half visible to the naked eye 2 TIP telescope in place 3 The second TIP on the celestial object serves to verify the accuracy of the orienting line 5 3 FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23
423. nt or returning fire Advance parties use this technique when enemy contact is expected and time is limited Reconnaissance by fire does not work in all cases For example disciplined troops in repared positions will not react to the advance party s tires ome situations in which reconnaissance by fire may be employed include e Bunker complexes that mayor may not be occupied Existence of an obvious enemy Kill zone e Signs of recent enemy activity Key considerations for reconnaissance by fire include e Indirect fire is very difficult to coordinate and requires much more time to execute and control e Direct fire will disclose the advance party s location e Requires a high degree of situational awareness to that no friendly units are fired upon or retum fe 4 Some situations might dictate a combination of mounted and dismounted reconnaissance any case battery commanders and gunnery sergeants can use the following guidelines to ensure maximum security and mission accomplishment e Always use an element with appropriate firepower to overwatch the reconnaissance party If possible use prominent terrain to gain a vantage point to visually sweep the area with binoculars or night vision devices prior to entering e se pee select a concealed secure dismount site well outside the position area e Develop and rehearse a contingency plan for each security sweep e The following are positioned in the ba
424. ntative or guide can link up with the support pac eae move it forward to the battery or platoon location e LRP site is selected by the ALOC and is announced to all elements Usually the LRP is located astride the main supply route MSR near the combat trains 12 4 BATTERY INTERFACE WITH THE ALOC a The CSS necessary to the battery is normally located within the battery area and consists of maintenance supply and ammunition sections All or part of these elements may be organic to the battalion or consolidated under battalion control Support may be provided by contact teams attached to the battery or support may be pushed forward to the battery on an as required basis The maintenance section may be attached to the firing batteries during tactical operations In this situation the battery is configured with either two heavy platoons maintenance assets split between them a heavy platoon and a light platoon maintenance contact team collocated with the heavy platoon or with two in platoons and a battery trains The supply section supply sergeant can remain with the battery and act as the primary logistics executor for the battery or the supply section can operate from the field trains unit trains to coordinate resupply requirements and execute LOGPACs The food service and ammunition sections are normally consolidated in the field trains They provide the needed support for the battery pushing food and ammunition forward to the u
425. ntered e Ensure DA Form 4513 Record of Missions Fired is current legible and accurate Chapter 7 f Maintain DA Form 2408 4 and compute and record equivalent full charge EFC data g Ensure DA Form 5969 is completed for each position Occupied h Ensure data on DA Form 5212 R Gunner s Reference Card are correct and current Note reproducible copy of DA Form 5212 R is at the back of this manual i Ensure range cards for the howitzer and crew served weapons are properly prepared and actively manage the assigned sector of th platoon defense plan j Ensure preventive maintenance checks and services PMCS are performed in accordance with the appropriate technical manual Section III CANNON BATTERIES IN BATTERY BASED FIELD ARTILLERY BATTALIONS 1 13 ORGANIZATION cannon battery in a battalion consisting of a headquarters battery service battery and firing batteries without TOE designated platoons is considered a battery based battery b Each cannon battery in a battery based FA battalion es of a battery headquarters and a firing battery Figure 1 The battery headquarters has the personnel and to perform food service supply communications NBC and maintenance functions In some units food service and maintenance may be consolidated at battalion 2 The firing battery has the personnel and equipment to determine firing data fire the howitzers and resupply ammunition
426. number 4 uses the two step deflection method to ee up line of sight on the compass and announces NUE 4 AIMING POINT IDENTIFIED DEFLECTION The GSG commands NUMBER 4 IS LAID PLATOON ADJUST AIMING POINT NUMBER 4 4 22 AIMING POINT DEFLECTION METHOD a Normally the aiming point deflection method of lay is used during an emergency fire mission when the need to expedite the mission is more critical than the need for first round accuracy A distant ain point DAP is required and must be at least 1 500 meters trom the position See paragraph p Also all howitzers must be able to pick up a line of sig t to the DAP A compass or a map nd protractor are the only equipment needed Note The aiming point deflection method can be used for a deliberate occupation if an aiming circle or an M2 compass is not available If this method is used for a deliberate occupation it is desirable to lay only one howitzer by using the DAP Once that howitzer is laid the gunner eop lays the remainder of the firing element to ensure all howitzers are oriented parallel FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 b The steps for laying by the aiming point deflection method are as follows 1 Determine the azimuth from the center of the batter or platoon to the DAP scale from the map or measure wit a vo compass or use the BCS procedures in paragraph 2 Derive the back azimuth of fire by adding or subtracting 3 200 mils to or from the azimuth of fire
427. o perform various air assault missions Aircraft available for external load operations are the UH 1H Huey UH 60 Blackhawk and CH 47 Chinook A D models c Mission Planning 1 Many factors influence the commander s planning for an air assault mission The commander must plan more extensively than for a conventional operation In planning he considers the following e M Mission e E Enemy e T Terrain and Weather e T Troops available e A Aircraft available e L Load requirements equipment which will be taken Ensure cross loading of critical equipment and identification ofthe aircraft and personnel bump plans These actions are critical to ensure minimum mission essential equipment arrives on the LZ 2 Firing elements are moved by air in four phases e Planning and preparation e Rigging and loading e Movement e Occupation of position FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 3 Thorough and timely planning for an air assault operation is critical to the success of the mission 4 The commander plans the operation by using the reverse planning sequence The sequence of planning for an air assault operation are as follows Ground tactical plan e Landing e Air movement e Loading e Staging 5 Coordination is made through the 3 AIR with final coordination being made at the air mission brief AMB d Air Mission Brief The AMD is a coordinating meeting attended by the ground commander and a represent
428. o do reinforce How much ammunition do need When and how will get this ammunition Observer call sign frequency MULE G VLLD OBCO When will the task be executed trigger points frequency Where are the positions must fire from and are they clear e What are adjacent units call sign frequency and actions e What is my movement priority approved routes What event triggers my movement C2 PRECOMBAT CHECKLISTS Tables C2 C 11 provide sample precombat checklists PCC tor cannon mission and survivability preparations a battery will execute By incorporating some version of these sample PCCs into a battery SOP the commander will have preparation steps to specify to subordinates based on METT T With precombat checklists in the hands of all battery leaders the commander can more efficiently communicate exactly what must be done For example it is easier to direct the section to complete the than to individually specify all subtasks required Table C 2 Airthreat PCC Sections Set M2 50 cal MG headspace and timing Clean M2 50 cal MG Test fire M2 50 cal MG Practice changing M2 barrels Practice stoppage and immediate action drills Review aircraft threat cards Review battery air attack signals Check camouflage Nets serviceable cover vehicles Windshields lights covered Netoff M2 50 cal MGs Verify ADA warningAWCS Verify signal flags are on hand Orient air guard
429. o survey control When survey closes the unit will want to know if the azimuth of fire it has been firing on is different from the originally intended azimuth of fire There are two methods of measuring the azimuth of the line of fire The difference depends upon Whether or not survey control is available b If the line of tire is being measured following a firing incident the crew of the howitzer in question will not move the tube but will simply refer to the aiming circle If on the other hand the platoon leader wishes to measure the azimuth of fire he must first ensure that the tube of the howitzer being measured is at lay deflection These steps are performed first regardless of whether or not survey control is available 1 The aiming circle operator e Orients the 0 2200 line generally parallel to the tube of the weapon e Commands NUMBER so and so REFER AIMING POINT THIS INSTRUMENT Note Memory aids for reporting are tables 4 6 through 4 8 page 4 28 2 The gunner measures the deflection to the aimin circle without moving his tube and announces NUMBE so and so POINT IDENTIFIED DEFLECTION so much 3 The aiming circle operator e Sets the announced deflection off on the upper recording motion of the aiming circle Note If the weapon has an M12 series sight the referred deflection may have to be set on the aiming circle by using the red numbers A general rule is that if a
430. obs must be rotated so as to approach the aiming point from left to right f The appropriate deflection correction must be set on the gunner s aid g Correct terms must be used h Correct hand and arm signals must be used i If any questions arise refer to the appropriate technical manual and then to FM 6 50 B 3 ASSISTANCE The soldier will not receive assistance on the individual tasks but will be provided an assistant on those tasks which require one If the soldier fails any task because of the fault of the assistant that task will be retested B 4 TASK SCORING Scoring will be in accordance with the standards for each task A NO GO will be given if any of the standards of precision B 2 or the standards of a specific task are not met and 0 points will be awarded If the soldier receives all GO ratings for the standards the score for the task will depend on the speed of execution B 5 QUALIFICATION SCORES Scores determining the qualification status of the gunner are shown on Table 1 Table B 1 Gunner qualification scores Gunner Second Class Unqualified SCORE m Classification M101A1 M102 M119A1 M198 M109A2 A5 M109A6 56 50 FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 B 6 EQUIPMENT PERSONNEL 6 Two direct fire targets 600 meters in front of the AND SITE REQUIREMENTS test site and 50 meters apart a Successful administration of the test is enhanced by 7 At le
431. ocal magnetic attractions any move of the aiming circle may result in an appreciable change in the relationship of grid north and magnetic nort as measured by the instrument e A minimum of once every 30 days to determine if any changes in the declination have occurred because of the annual shift of magnetic north or because of accidents involving the instrument that may not have been reported If a radical change is observed the instrument should be declinated again within a few days to determine if the observed change is a real change in the characteristics of the instrument e When the instrument is first received e Anytime the instrument is returned from ordnance repair b The aiming circle must be declinated in an area free from magnetic attractions Azimuths must be known to two or more azimuth marks preferably in opposite directions These azimuth marks should be a minimum distance of 300 meters preferably 1 000 meters c Declinate the aiming circle as follows 1 Set up the aiming circle and level it 2 With the upper recording motion set the known azimuth to the azimuth marker 3 With the lower nonrecording motion sight on the azimuth marker that corresponds to the azimuth set with the upper motion See Figure 4 6 Note At this time the 0 3200 line will be aligned with grid north FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 Figure 4 6 Proper sight picture 4 Release the magnetic needle With the upper mot
432. of rounds charge fuze and projectile Chiefs of section often look at only the deflection and quadrant e Failure to cross level the collimator e Firing a round through an oily tube e Moving an SP howitzer when there is no intercom communications between the track commander TC and the driver of the howitzer e Improper shifting of trails on a towed howitzer Refer to 10 TM for that weapon system e Failure to perform PMCS on a routine basis especially cleaning the tube of the howitzer D 9 ERRORS IN SETTING UP AND ORIENTING THE AIMING CIRCLE a Some typical errors are as follows e Failure to in the instrument fixing screw securely The head of the aiming circle will turn on the tripod causing errors in readings given to the howitzers Not clearing the area of magnetic attractions especially weapons steel helmets and eyeglasses when the magnetic needle is used e Failure to use a plumb bob and properly level the aiming circle which could result in incorrect lay data e Failing to first roughly orient the 0 3 200 line when measuring an azimuth or an orienting angle This could lead to a 3 200 mil error Inadvertently reading the red numbers rather than the black numbers on the azimuth scale Failure to set up the tripod so that one leg is oriented in the direction of sighting This puts one tripod leg in the instrument operator s v as he moves around and increases the likelihood he will knoc
433. officer s XO s min QE for the lowest preferred charge the unit expects to fire 1 12 HOWITZER SECTION CHIEF The section chief is responsible for the training and a of his section the operational readiness of his equipment and the safe firing ot the howitzer Appendix B presents sample tests to help in training the gunners The section chiefs responsibilities may include the following a Ensure the weapon is properly emplaced laid and prepared for action The memory aid TLABSPAP will be ue as a guide for the accomplishment of the following tasks e T Trails spades and or firing platform properly emplaced e L Lay weapon e A Aiming point emplaced e D Boresight verified or performed e 5 Second circle Verification of lay performed with second aiming circle e P Prefire checks on the weapon system performed 1 5 FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 e Ammunition prepared e P Position improvement site to crest determined XO s report rendered alternate aiming points established azimuth markers emplaced camouflage and defensive hardening of position Note Unit SOP and the weapon technical manual will dictate when to dig in spades on towed weapons b Ensure digital and voice communications with FDC are established and maintained c Ensure ammunition is properly segregated stored handled and prepared d Ensure only safe data is fired by serving firing data correct sight picture and bubbles ce
434. officer gives the OIC of the firing unit the following safety data e The grid coordinates of the firing position e he lateral safety limits FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 e The minimum and maximum ranges e The authorized ammunition to be fired fuze projectile and charge e The maximum ordinate high angle or low angle e The hours during which the firing may be conducted 11 2 DUTIES OF SAFETY PERSONNEL separate battery safety officer is not required during the firing of field artillery Normally the platoon leader will erform these functions The platoon leader is not required o verify all data placed on the on carriage fire control equipment He may use safety stakes safety tape or physical constraints on the weapon fo ensure that the safety limits are not exceeded All key personnel must be porou familiar with six references AR 385 63 FM 6 40 FM 6 50 TM 43 0001 28 the appropriate TM for the weapon and local range regulations In case of conflict local range regulations always take precedence Note These references are penne that may be used in developing units SOPs a Specific duties of safety personnel before firing are but are not limited to the following Verify that the data the range control officer gives the OIC apply to the unit firing that the unit is in the correct ea and that the data are correct OIC and safety officer 2 Compute and verify the safety diagram At least 2 safety cer
435. on Declination the AC from the constant declination constant Do this last Report the measured azimuth to the FDC Note You must use the deflection given to you from the howitzer and the declination constant Table 4 7 Measuring the orienting angle with survey control SEQUENCE MEMORY AID STEPS Place the Do this first deflection read to you from the howitzer on the Do thissecond Do this third upper motion of Do this fourth azimuth to the your aiming Do this last FDC circle Note You must use the deflection given to you from the howitzer the howitzer pantel With the upper motion sight on the EOL Math step Subtract the orienting angie on the AC from the azimuth of the orienting line L With the lower motion sight on SOL Subtract the Orienting angle from the orienting Line Report the measured Table 4 8 Reporting SEQUENCE STEPS Do this first Go to the howitzer Do this second Check to ensure that the bubbles on the sight mount are level If they are not level them with the leveling knobs Do this third Check the sight picture If incorrect correct it by moving the head of the pantel only Do not traverse the tube Do this last Read and report the deflection on the pantel 4 27 FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 CHAPTER 5 HASTY SURVEY TECHNIQUES Section I SURVEY CONTROL 5 1 REQUIREME
436. on or modify the position of the weapon in any way until an investigation has been completed c Record the lot number of the ammunition involved in the accident or malfunction and report it to the battalion ammunition officer If there is good reason to suspect a particular lot of ammunition its use should be suspended d If it is suspected that the propellant was with no recoil of the tube misfire procedures must follow Perhaps no projectile was loaded and the propellant is still burning 10 15 MISFIRE PROCEDURES Misfires do occur When they do there are certain actions that must be taken within specific time limits For that reason personnel must be thoroughly familiar with the misfire rocedures for their weapon system These In AR 75 1 and weapons technical manual for the appropriate weapons 10 16 TRAINING Traditionally ammunition training has been a weak area annoneers seldom practice setting time fuzes or cutting poe charges until the battery goes to the field to conduct ive firing There are several training extension course TEC 10 7 FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 lessons on ammunition to enhance individual training Also Training and Audiovisual Support Centers IASCs ave a wide selection of ammunition training materials b Collective training is enhanced by using training rounds which are available through the local TASC New training rounds are constantly introduced into the trai
437. on by gun guide GO ratings x 10 points maximum 80 Emplacing the cannon GO ratings x 27 Total Phase III points maximum 350 Phase IV Fire Missions Cond of an indirect fire mission using e 120 minus _ _ points maximum 120 Task 10 Preparation of conventional ammunition for iring GO ratings x 10 points maximum 100 Task 11 Planned priority targets Task 7 Task 8 points maximum 270 Task 9 GO ratings x 6 _____ points maximum 42 Task 12 Conduct of direct fire 88 minus __ points maximum 88 Total Phase IV points maximum 350 Overall total points maximum 1000 AN Phase Critique During this each problem evaluation area will be critiqued in detail It is strongly suggested that the section chief for each howitzer take notes on each individual in his serio so he will know the strong and weak areas in each ask FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 G 9 PHASE I ORIENTATION AND ORGANIZATION During this phase preferably conducted on a day before of the remaining phases the following are one e All personnel will be briefed as to the conduct and purpose of the training e The scoring system will be explained e The organization of the training area and general administrative and safety procedures will be explained e All questions will be answered e The written test will be administered to all section personnel e The examiner will be provid
438. on the back of the defensive diagram Figure 3 6 page 3 13 e Verify that the defense diagram depicts the defensive plan and that it graphically portrays the range card data to include TRPs avenues of approach and so on See Figure 3 6 page 3 13 3 14 DISPOSITION OF THE DIAGRAM Based upon guidance from the BC or 156 the GSG begins to construct the defensive diagram during the advance party operations Once the main body occupies the new position the GSG gives the platoon sergeant platoon based 156 battery based the diagram to be completed to be checked and verified If the battery is a platoon based unit the 15G will collect both platoon diagrams and integrate them into the battery defensive diagram The battery diagram is then sent to the battalion TOC for further consolidation 3 15 PREPARING RANGE CARDS a The platoon sergeant establishes the sectors of fire for the crew served weapons When these sectors have been determined and assigned a range card will be constructed in duplicate for each primary position A range card will be partially completed for each alternate and supplementary osition Range cards are continually updated and revised hroughout the occupation of the position Platoon or battery TRPs must be on range cards This allows the battery leaders the ability to control and mass direct fire assets The battery leaders must verify the proper construction of all range cards 1 Howitzer
439. on when T are preparing to orient your aiming circle on the azimuth of fire 19 If a VT fuze does not seat properly in the fuze well what actions should be taken 20 Describe the procedures for burning unused powder increments 21 At the firing point how do you verify the declination constant on the aiming circle 22 How does the position commander verify the initial lay of the platoon at a firing point if the laying circle used the orienting angle method 23 Describe the procedures used by the chief of section in the testing target method to verify that the panoramic telescope and the direct fire telescope of each howitzer are aligned with the bore of the howitzer Part 4 Performance 24 Situation You are the platoon leader of a 155 mm M109A3 platoon firing shell HE charge 5 green bag fuzes 557 564 and 728 piece to crest range is 1 000 meters The reported angles of site are as follows Number 1 14 mils Number 2 15 mils Number 3 18 mils Number 4 14 mils Required a What is the platoon leader s minimum QE for firing fuzes quick and mechanical time What is the minimum safe time for fuze VT c What is the platoon leader s minimum QE for firin fuze VT with a fuze setting less than the minimum safe Show work FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 25 Situation You are the platoon leader of a 155 mm M109A3 firing charge 4 green bag The platoon is laid on azimuth 2150 a Y
440. ond letter for the propellant Semifixed ammunition has only a one etter designation The lot designators are automatically displayed at the SCA When voice fire commands are used the lot designators must be announced when they differ from standard Note Large quantity lots are normally set aside to be fired during registrations and missions when more uniform effect is important Small quantity lots should be used for missions when uniformed effect isnot critical Each section will E ate ammunition by lot and keep accurate record on D Form 4513 FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 7 10 CHARGE The charge indicates the amount of propellant to be used and grants permission for the crew to cut the propellant Charge is automatically displayed on the SCA or announced by the FDC It is never standardized 7 11 FUZE The required fuze type is announced for example FUZE or displayed on the SCA The section chief announces the fuze displayed on SCA Fuze is announced in subsequent command only when a change in type is desired Note The GDU does not between M564 and M582 mechanical time superquic fuzes displayed on the SCA Unit SOPs must be established if both fuzes are used for the same mission 7 12 FUZE SETTING If fuze quick is to be fired on the delay mode DELAY is announced by the FDC or ee on the SCA If the fuze is a mechanical type MT 5 or proximity VT faze the fuze setting is displaye
441. onnel and maintenance reports for the battery as a whole One of the POCs should be designated as the casualty collection point for the battery and the medic is located with this POC This POC may require augmentation to perform this function The battery NBC noncommissioned officer NCO can provide this By augmenting the in this manner the NBC NCO also enhances his ability to perform his own monitoring and reporting functions Note This manual will refer to the designated POC as a DOC to indicate that it is performing the BOC functions of a battery based unit e In a platoon based firing battery the location of the BOC and the battery trains must facilitate command control and logistical support of the battery There are three basic options 1 2 for positioning the battery elements The options can be termed heavy heavy heavy light and light light 1 Heavy Heavy This option divides the support elements in half and assigns them to each platoon These elements should be dispersed in positions to the rear of the platoon position area to enhance survivability Yet they should be near the POC to facilitate coordination within the platoon a The advantages of this option are e Local security of both platoons is enhanced e Responsiveness of support elements to platoon is enhanced b The disadvantages are e More elements give a larger visual signature e Tracked and wheeled vehicles and thick and th
442. ontrasting color markings or bands in addition to the basic color has also been used to identify the particular of high explosive or chemical used as a filler Color coding of recently produced projectiles is somewhat different For example illuminating and smoke rounds are no longer painted gray the basic color for chemical shells Illuminating rounds are now painted basically white or olive drab and the smoke rounds are painted green The basic color for dummy ammunition has been changed to ronze b Weight Variations in weight are inherent in the manufacture of PS Since a high degree of accuracy is required in artillery firing one must compare the data stenciled on the Figure 10 2 with the data provided in the firing tables to obtain the proper ballistic corrections The weight zone marking symbols for projectiles are shown in Table 10 1 c Ammunition Lot Number When ammunition is manufactured an ammunition lot number is assigned in accordance with pertinent specifications This lot number is an essential part of the ammunition marking When the size of the item permits this lot number is stamped or marked on the item itself and on all packing containers The lot 10 2 number is required for all records including reports on the ammunition condition and functioning and on any accidents in which the ammunition is involved To ensure uniform functioning all the components in any one lot are manufactured under conditions
443. oo ol 54 40 24 4 8 200 ___ ____ 221 5 uz S 242 a 590 _ 22021 0 3 ___ 15 ______2600 _ 393 28 210p 15 19 7 910 ____ ___ ____ 101 ______2800 39 24 1 129 290 1 2 _ 14 247 1 385 22 15 320 398 264 A 96 10 320 4 46 23 A2DA 22 27 155 O 40 1 241 2 87 136 _____3500 49 30 18 _ 390 _ ___ 25 o 09mm s jp G n p I 3380 52 2 33 24 18 390 4 339 189 __ 4 __ ee O or uc Sw 1j 55 _ 2 _ O aw 2 __ 6 _ Oe aco x cog els o o oeste o c co i 9 5 7 9 2497 3 1 483 __ _ 850 ____ Note Charge 1 restriction due to possibility of a sticker see TMs 9 2350 311 10 and 9 1025 211 10 FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 Table K 9 Rapid fire table for M109A2 A6 M198 WB 4 2 Chg 3 7 and M119 Chg 8 propellant FUZE M557 M564 PROPELLANT White Bag M4A2 Chg 3 7 M119 Chg 8 CHG5 CHG 6 N y EN N
444. oon prepares 2 HE rounds with fuze quick and follow the fire mission 2 The first subsequent fire command is as follows DEFLECTION 2978 QUADRANT 218 Number 3 fires one round shell HE lot XY charge 4 fuze quick at the new deflection and quadrant 3 The second subsequent fire command is as follows PLATOON 2 ROUNDS DEFLECTION 2950 QUADRANT 210 The entire platoon fires two rounds at the announced deflection and quadrant END OF MISSION is commanded as At END OF MISSION an ammunition update is required as shown in Figure 7 4 Le o v oll 745 2222 AMMUNITION EXPENDED lee Figure 7 4 Use of DA 52 5 4513 E a ed data 00 b Nonstandard FFE Mission standard elements are used FIRE MISSION NUMBER 3 AND NUMBER 4 3 ROUNDS SHELL WP LOT DY CHARGE 7 FUZE QUICK DEFLECTION 2870 QUADRANT 320 Number 3 and Number 4 each fire three rounds as commanded END OF MISSION is commanded as appropriate and ammunition expended is updated see Figure In this example no c Standard Adjust Fire Mission Elements designated as standard in this example are Number 3 firing one round in adjustment shell HE lot XY and fuze quick FIRE MISSION PLATOON ADJUST CHARGE 4 PETE TON 3024 QUADRANT 247 2 ROUNDS IN 1 Number 3 fires one round shell HE lot XY fuze uick with the announced charge and at the announced eflection and quaden
445. operator s manua e A Ammunition prepared e P Position improvement site to crest determined XO s report rendered alternate aiming points established azimuth markers emplaced camouflage and defensive hardening of position Note Unit SOP and the weapon technical manual will dictate when to dig in spades on towed weapons b Ensure digital and voice communications with FDC are established and maintained c Ensure ammunition is properly segregated stored handled and prepared 4 Ensure only safe data is fired by verify firing data correct sight picture and bubbles center d e Ensure DA Form 4513 is current legible and accurate Chapter 7 1 9 FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 f Maintain the DA Form 2408 4 and compute and record EFC data In a USMC batter the battery gunnery sergeant will complete the NAVMC 10558A and compute and record EFC data g Ensure DA Form 5969 R is completed for each position occupied 1 10 h Ensure data are correct and current on DA Form 5212 R i Ensure range cards for the howitzer and crew served weapons are properly prepared and actively manage assigned sector of the defense plan j Ensure PMCS are performed in accordance with the appropriate technical manual FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 CHAPTER 2 RECONNAISSANCE SELECTION AND OCCUPATION OF A POSITION This Chapter Implements STANAG 2041 QSTAG 520 and STANAG 2154 QSTAG 539 Section I RECONNAISSANCE AND TH
446. or ammunition carrying vehicles that are peculiar to a specific howitzer A loading plan for a prime mover for a towed weapon is in Figure E 1 Standard camouflage configurations for the M109 howitzers are in Figures 2 through E 6 General information on the plans follows a The load pas are based on the rated load carrying capability of the vehicle Allowance of 200 pounds per man was made for the crew that would occupy the vehicle b The plans illustrated in this appendix are for basic loads However because of mission and allocated amounts of ammunition load plans may vary from unit to unit according to unit SOPs c The weight of the load must not exceed the rated capability of the vehicle d Ammunition capabilities and limitations for the M992 are in TM 9 2350 267 10 Chapter 2 Load plans and capabilities for the M992A2 are in TM 9 2 350 293 10 Chapter 2 Notes 1 Camouflage net systems are stored on top of the vehicles M203 2 Ammunition mix varies depending on mission PROPELLING 3 Troop seats are in the stowed position CHARGES TROOP SEATS M4 M4 WHITE WHITE BAG BAG Figure E 1 Example 5 ton prime mover load plan for M198 section E 1 FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 DIRECTION OF FIRE OPTIONAL OPTIONAL Figure E 2 Camouflage configuration for M102 M119A1 Q 4 HOWITZER OPTIONAL Ced Plo gt x e x sion lt gt Figure E 3 Camouflage conf
447. or material destruction procedures e Ensure that howitzer direct fire targets are established and integrated into overall defensive plan e Ensure that killer junior targets are computed by the FDC and distributed to each howitzer section and that each section chief knows how to compute 10 R e Ensure there is a plan for medical evacuation d The section chief does the following e Ensures that the howitzer range card is prepared according to the sectors assigned by the platoon sergeant 15G e Studies the route to and locations of alternate and supplementary positions e Ensures that the crew served weapons range cards are prepared in accordance with assigned sectors e Ensures that individual and crew served fightin positions are properly prepared and have overhea cover e All battery leaders must become familiar with the defense plan rehearse the plan and brief their subordinates on its execution Section II CONSIDERATIONS FOR DEFENSE Note Paragraph F 10 and Appendix H provide further guidance and checklists for battery defense 3 2 3 3 USE OF TERRAIN a Camouflage If it can be seen it will be hit If it can be hit it will be killed A battery that is concealed or cannot FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 be recognized has greatly increased its odds for survival There are six factors of recognition pn color shape shadow texture and movement Following the principles of concealment camouflage construction
448. or oe RAM semiautomatic fire M203 grenade launcher Per TOE 400 meters area 200 FM 23 9 M433 HEDP excellent meters point against personnel carrier M60 light MG Per TOE 1 100 meters 600 meters FM 23 65 grazing Tripod mounted Air defense 325 meters FM 23 67 M2 heavy barrel 50 One or two per Best used on tripod with howitzer section SP traverse and elevating Tripod mounted 2 430 meters area mechanism 1 800 meters point 1 500 meters area 1 000 meters point 725 meters Ring mounted Air defense FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 Table 3 1 Battery defensive resources continued Issue or Caliber Max Effective Range Reference M72A2 LAW Issued as ammunition FM 23 33 Used in pairs Target stationary 250 meters Target moving 100 meters ATA 500 meters Cannons Direct fire AP 155 mm Minimum reliable range Killer Junior HE T 155 mm 500 meters APERS M546 105 mm Muzzle Direct fire antitank 155 mm 105 mm See TM on weapon System HE Q 105 mm See TM on weapon system HEP M327 105 mm See TM on weapon system FM 44 18 Teams assigned from Stinger Excess of 3 000 meters FM 44 3 battalion Surface to air Vulcan Multibarrel 20 mm 1 200 meters FM 101 52 6 cannon LEGEND AP app cal CP DPICM antipersonnel also APERS appendix caliber concrete piercing fuze dual purpose improved conventional munitions family of scatterable mines high explosive h
449. or night for crew served weapons and howitzers e Measure obtain ranges to dead space key terrain TRPs e Sight and compute data to TRPs from all weapons e Complete range cards for crew served weapons howitzers Rehearse direct fire crew drill Plan Killer jJnior for dead space PMCS functions check all weapons PMCS functions check all night sights NVGs Ammunition on hand for all weapons Fighting positions complete with overhead cover section stakes e Review threat vehicle identification Verify boresight e Report completion to the plt sgt plt Idr Platoon e Position weapons to cover enemy avenues of approach C 3 FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 Table C 9 Mounted ground threat PCC continued Establish battery engagement areas with triggers and RPs ID natural TRPs or emplace TRPs with PLGRs FDC computes range and azimuth to each TRP FDC computes self illumination targets Position weapons to maximize fires in engagement areas Rehearse tank killer teams and reaction forces Rehearse Medevac see Medevac PCC e LP OP established Table 10 Dismounted Threat PCC Same as Table C 9 except Platoon e Use formation to maximize perimeter security Use defensive wire Focus on 360 degree security Use patrolling e dead space Table C 11 Medevac PCC Section Combat lifesaver bags inventoried Casualty collection point identified and briefed e Litters located and cross loaded e Straps and ti
450. or obturation band b Most HE projectiles issued for use with proximity VT fazes are standard projectiles with deep fuze cavities to accommodate the longer VT fuze Each of these projectiles is issued with a removable supplementary charge so that the projectile may be used with an impact a mechanical time or a long intrusion VT fuze The supplementary charge is removed only when the projectile is used with a long intrusion VT fuze It must be in place when the projectile is used with a mechanical time fuze impact fuze or short intrusion VT fuze 10 3 FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 CAUTION Do not try to remove the pcenis charge by any means other than the li ting loop If the charge cannot be removed by the lifting loop the round ma be disposed of or fired with an impact or an MTS fuze The deep cavity maybe lined with a pe tube and bottom cup which help support the high explosive filler This lining should not be removed t any time c Because of their contents toxic chemical and the WP shells require special handling and storage 1 Chemical rounds When toxic chemicals are being fired all personnel in the area should wear protective masks and anyone handling the shell should wear gloves b An ample supply of decontaminating agents should be available in ae they are fedeli i c If IDE these shells should be stored away from other types of ammunition and downwind of the battery area 2 White phosphorus
451. or the emplacement of howitzers may be required if the ground is not suitable for normal emplacement Consideration should be ae to placing howitzer spades against curbs rubble or building walls Also concrete or asphalt surfaces may also be softened for howitzer emplacement by use of shaped charges 5 Because of the expanded occupation required in the urban area displacement by platoon may be impossible In this case displacement may be by howitzer section d Other Considerations 1 Battery personnel must be prepared to use hasty survey techniques to establish directional and positional control Magnetic instruments are impaired when operating in a built up area and their accuracy is degraded 2 Plotting of current friendly positions perhaps down D atoon or squad level maybe critical in reducing incidents of fratricide F 5 DESERT OPERATIONS a Fire Support Tasks Deserts are arid barren regions that cannot support any quantity of life because of lack of fresh water They are characterized by temperature extremes 136 F in Libya or Mexico to bitter cold in the Gobi Desert with fluctuations exceeding 70 Fire support considerations vary according to the type of desert however considerations common to all include munitions effects due to the temperature extremes and a lack of identifiable terrain features The three types of deserts are discussed below 1 The mountain desert is characterized by barren rang
452. ord Units should keep a record of all safety certifications The record should include the following e Name and rank e Unit Position in which safety certified e Date of safety exam e Date of certification e Name of certifying officer e Test scores 2 Statement Units should keep on file a statement signed by the certified individual indicating that he understands that e For every function connected with firing there is a person responsible for doing it and there is a safety certified person responsible for seeing that it is done properly e The person checking data must be safety certified himself e At no time may an individual perform a function related to firing and check himself e The individual understands his duties as a safety certified person and will do his duties without compromise O 3 VERIFICATION CHECKLIST The verification checklists pone below may be modified as necessary to meet local requirements FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 PLATOON SERGEANT OR GUNNERY SERGEANT VERIFICATION CHECKS 1 Verify lay and referred deflections of weapons 2 Verify sight to crest and distance to crest of weapons 3 Verify posted safety limits of weapons 4 Ensure azimuth of fire is verified with M2 compass on each howitzer 5 Verify Boresight CHIEF OF SECTION VERIFICATION CHECKS 1 Verify the lay of the weapon as follows a Lay deflection b Referred deflection to the second circle and to the aiming
453. organization 2 20 terrain march 2 19 minimum quadrant elevation computation 6 1 6 2 fuze other than armed VT 6 2 6 3 piece to crest range 6 2 VT fuzes 6 3 6 4 elements 6 1 measuring 6 2 angle of site to crest with M2 compass 6 2 4 11 M2A2 aiming circle 4 21 howitzer 6 2 piece to crest range 6 2 rapid fire tables App K mission 1 1 operations other than war F 6 organization battery battery based 1 6 general 1 1 platoon based 1 3 rapid fire tables App K reciprocal laying 4 11 through 4 20 aiming point deflection method 4 17 commands 4 15 establishing aiming points 4 19 grid azimuth method 4 14 howitzer back lay method 4 18 M2 compass method 4 16 orienting angle method 4 13 procedures 4 12 training 4 27 verifying 4 20 reconnaissance 2 1 through 2 7 definition 2 1 methods 2 2 2 3 planning 2 3 RSOP considerations 2 1 safety during firing computations 11 4 FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 duties of safety personnel 11 2 O 21 standardized procedures App A general responsibilities 11 1 safety aids 11 3 through 11 4 survey techniques hasty safety test App O automated computations 5 22 through 5 25 determining altitude 5 25 ion chief bly L 1 thr L 3 SE uL cd determining location 5 13 through 5 23 shell fragment analysis J 6 through J 9 directional traverse 5 11 general 5 1 shelling reports 3 23 J 10 J 11 measuring distance 5 15 t
454. orized safety Ts for this firing point 2 The platoon sergeant just assigned you to be the safety NCO for this howitzer because the chief was sent on emergency leave 3 Your crew consists of a gunner an ammunition team chief an assistant gunner cannoneers 1 and 2 and a driver I will be both the FDC and test administrator 4 The weapon is laid and safed and prefire checks have been done FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 5 Your GDU is down so you will be getting voice fire commands 6 There are no individual piece corrections for this weapon in this position 7 You will be given 10 fire missions you must fire all missions 8 If you encounter an error on your weapon state UNSAFE and the nature of the unsafe condition to me 9 After I check the error and the error is corrected continue to safe the weapon till all errors are corrected and then fire the mission 10 The round will not be rammed That will be simulated 11 The gunner may sight on either the collimator or the aiming posts to fire the mission Both aiming reference pois ave been safety checked by the platoon sergeant earlier 12 The evaluator will read your section all 10 missions If you have any questions about a fire command have him repeat the needed command 13 You must score GOs on all induced safety errors to pass this test ANNEX 6 REQUIRED EQUIPMENT Howitzer with section equipment Howitzer crew 7 men Collimator with 10 mils dis
455. orrections to the gunner s aid These corrections are applied to any corrections already on the gunner s aid and remain in effect until changed within a fire mission or until the command END OF MISSION is given 4 SPECIAL CORRECTIONS LEFT CENTER or RIGHT SECTOR is announced when terrain gun postion corrections for other than the primary sector are eing used If TGPCs are computed the corrections for rimary sector are set on the gunner s aid of all weapons ese corrections are announced administratively and recorded on the DA Form 5212 R To change sectors the FDC commands LEFT CENTER or RIGHT SECTOR Upon termination of the mission the howitzer sections reapply the corrections that were in effect before the mission 5 CANCEL TERRAIN CORRECTIONS indicates that all howitzer sections are to set their gunner s aid counters to zero At the end of the mission the TGPCs that were in effect before the mission usually the primary sector will be reapplied unless the FDC directs otherwise 7 8 PROJECTILE This element deal the type of projectile to be used in the fire mission The type of projectile that is to be prepared and loaded is always displayed in the SCA When voice fire commands are used the projectile must be announced when it differs trom standard 7 9 AMMUNITION LOT Ammunition lot numbers should be coded for simplicity ammunition has two designators the first letter for projectile and the sec
456. ort DA Form 2185 Note reproducible copy of DA Form 2185 R is located at the back of this manual c Fragments Any usable fragments obtained from crater analysis should be tagged shoe tag and sent to the battalion 52 As a minimum the tag should indicate the following J 10 e The location of the hostile weapon e The direction to the hostile weapon e The date time group of the shelling e Mortor artillery or rocket if known EXAMPLE The information in the following situation is illustrated on the completed DA Form 2185 K Figure J 11 You are the executive officer of Battery 1st Battalion 3d Field Your cell sign is A3F22 which is located at grid 39288415 At 0545 hours the enemy shelled your position for 2 minutes with a total of eight rounds of HE shells The tempo and nm of bursts suggest an enemy four gun battery Your attery commander believes that the enemy s intent was harassment Your SHELREP team determined the direction to the enemy battery to be 4 810 mils n also located a fragment which included a portion of the rotating band seat The S has been identified as an enemy 122 mm howitzer projectile The four blanks above SECTION I of DA Form 2185 R are not completed by the SHELREP team They are filled in b the receiving agency for example the battalion 5 section Items B and K or SECTION I are encoded for security reasons The current call sign or code name for the unit is used
457. orts a difference of 0 mils between successive deflections The piece has then been laid d If all pieces are not able to see the aiming circle one iece can lay others reciprocal laying The commands for aying reciprocally from another howitzer are the same as those given in paragraph 4 19 If weapons are with the M100 series panoramic telescopes the D between any two weapons will be 3 200 mils apart To prevent confusion the gunner on the ayin piece adds or subtracts 3 200 mils to or from his reading before announcing it to another howitzer If the howitzer to which the layin 15 referring is on his left the gunner must add 3200 fit is on his right he must subtract 3200 left add right subtract LARS rule See Figure 4 13 e The methods by which the battery or platoon can be laid are as follows DEFLECTION LEFT ADD LAYING PIECE FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 1 Orienting angle This method requires the use of M2A2 aiming circle and a known azimuth established y survey m Grid azimuth This method requires the use of a declinated M2A2 aiming circle P M2 compass This method requires the use of a declinated M2 compass 4 Aiming point deflection This method requires that an aiming point at least 1 500 meters from the battery or platoon position be visible 5 Howitzer back lay This method requires the use of a declinated M2 compass and M2A2 aiming circle f The deflection to each
458. ot capable of correcting maintenance problems and vehicle recovery a maintenance representative or contact team should be attached F 10 FIRE BASE HARDENED ARTILLERY POSITION OPERATIONS a When the primary threat is light infantry guerrilla or commando units without heavy weapons units ma expect to support the maneuver forces from tire bases Units may occupy fire bases during conventional war but this defense technique is most often used in operations other than war OOTW Hardened or fortified positions are similar to fire bases but they lack the combined arms support from maneuver units found in fire bases plannin considerations for fire bases and hardened or fortifie positions are the same A fire base is a deliberate defensive POR similar in many ways to a maneuver strong point n situations such as OOTW it is not difficult for the enemy to determine the location of firing units therefore concealment is not a primary concern with respect to survivability Hardening and a carefully planned and coordinated defense against ground attack re the essential elements for the battery to survive and continue to provide support during operations from a fire base b Positioning of the firebase will be dictated by the mission and terrain The primary consideration is that the fire base must be positioned so that it can support the maneuver unit Individual battery fire bases are positioned so that they are mutuall
459. other howitzer reciprocally 061 266 2002 a Standards of precision B 2 Conditions The soldier is given a howitzer in the firing were metet applicable position and already laid for initial direction of tire Bubbles b Correct steps were followed to will be level and special corrections at 0 The pantel will complete the fask be 50 mils off the howitzer to be laid An assistant examiner c If steps a and b were not Will act as the gunner of the howitzer to be laid The soldier follows d NECO positions himself as and states when ready The examiner will say and 0 points If soldier received a GO on steps a and b use the chart Time Time will start when the examiner says BEGIN The below to determine score time will stop when the gunner says NUMBER 2 IS LAID TIME IN SECONDS POINTS pw ee ae ee EET 1 1 12 2 4 12 12 ruere B 8 FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 TASK 5 Scoring Refer the piece 061 266 2231 a Standards of precision 2 Conditions The soldier is given a howitzer in the firing pete BE Mappe postion that has already been laid for initial direction of Correct steps were followed to ire Bubbles will be level and special corrections at 0 complete the task The pantel will be oriented on the collimator An assistant n db examiner will be operating the aiming circle 50 metersto Steps a and b were not followed soldier recieves NO GO the howit
460. otion sight on the known point Release the magnetic needle and using the upper motion center it Read the value on the scales and compare it to the declination constant If the two values compare within 2 mils the declination constant is valid If not the aiming circle should be redeclinated in accordance with FM 6 50 Chapter 4 22 How does the position commander verify the initial lay of the platoon at a firing point if the lay circle used the orienting angle method A declinated aiming circle oriented on the azimuth of lay will be set up at least 10 meters away from the lay circle Referred readings will be taken between the two aimin circles and they must agree within 10 mils or as dictate by local range regulations unit SOP The platoon leader will command the pieces to refer to the verification circle after the weapons have established an aiming point and verified boresight The referred readings between the verification circle and the pieces must agree with criteria established by local range regulations unit SOP 23 Describe the procedures used by the chief of section using the testing target method to verify that the panoramic telescope and the direct fire telescope of each howitzer are aligned parallel to the bore of the howitzer The chief of section will verify that the panoramic telescope gunner s aid counter is set to 0 the muzzle cross hairs are centered on the center aiming diagram the telescope mount is lev
461. ou have determined the following data Maximum Minimum altitude altitude Maxmum range 377 368 Intermediate range 341 327 Minimum range 324 320 b Platoon location grid 6072 3426 altitude 339 c The following data were taken from the safety card Safety limits for 155 mm SP howitzer shell HE fuzes M557 M564 and M514 are as follows Left limit Azimuth 1725 Minimum range 3 700 meters Right limit Azimuth 2535 Maximum range 7 100 meters Charge 4 green bag only Low angle fire only Special instructions From azimuth 1725 to azimuth 1925 the minimum range is 4200 meters Required Complete the safety diagram Show work 7 FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 26 Situation continued The platoon has completed a recision registration and the FDC determined the following FT setting Chg 4GB lot XY rg 4750 el 260 ti 15 2 Total deflection correction R12 Required Using these registration corrections compute the modified safety diagram you will now use Use the given data from requirement 25 Show work 27 Situation You are the fire direction officer for a 155 mm M109A3 platoon firing charge 4 green bag The platoon is laid on azimuth 5900 a You have determined the following data Maximum Minimum altitude altitude Maximum range 395 389 Minimum range 388 364 b Platoon location grid 5845 4213 altitude 341 c The following data were taken from the range safety card Left limit Azimuth 5580 Minim
462. out movement credit may overtake another column in the following circumstances a When the other column is halted and it is safe to do so b When the column commander of the leading column gives clear intention that the following column may overtake and it is safe to do so c Road Movement of Outsized or Heavy Vehicles Equipment Special Movement Special application for the movement of outsize or heavy vehicles must be made before movement credits are pue National restrictions above which special application to move must be made are contained in Annex B d Tactical Situation 1 On principle the directions from the local police and from the military police must be obeyed In times of crisis or in wartime the tactical situation may require a deviation from one or more regulations laid down in this agreement Such situations may occur for the units in case of immediate danger of enemy threat 2 In times of crisis or in wartime night movements will also have to be accomplished without or with restricted lighting black out li ting depending on the situation with due regard to regulations in force to the host nation It 1s desirable that a device be incorporated in the vehicle lighting switch in order to prevent the driver inadvertently on driving lights passing lights or direction indicators while the vehicle is operating under black out conditions ANNEX A TO STANAG 2154 Edition No 6 REGULATIONS FOR MILITARY MOTOR VEH
463. ove planned Report completion or problems to pit sgt pit Idr e Receive compute aimpoints e Direct ammo breakdown by gun and verify Conduct full up technical rehearsal report rehearsal time to battalion 63 e Plot aimpoints on chart and verify e Cancel TGPCs if applied Platoon or Battery Prepare alternate position completely e Brief immediate action status FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 Table C 8 Massing PCC Section Ammo distribution IAW FDC guidance Report number of rounds by lot e Correct fuzes and powders on hand and reported to the FDC Ammo loaded IAW plan and segregated by lot Conduct full up rehearsal Measure and report powder temperature of massing lot every 30 minutes e Rehearse changing aiming reference points Store massing ammo uniformly e Verify boresight e GDU hooked up and tested Problems with above items reported Determine ammo requirements e Direct ammo breakdown by gun and lot verify with pit Idr pit sgt Conduct ful up technical rehearsal report times to S3 FDO e Compensate for all nonstandard conditions meet five requirements for accurate predicted fire GDU dry missions conducted Platoon Battery e Prepare alternate positions completely e Brief immediate action status Survey in positions and guns e Verify uniform storage of massing lots Table C 9 Mounted ground threat PCC Section e Sector marked day
464. p the battalion keep equipment available Consideration should be given to placing this team in the combat trains for ease of coordination 12 3 FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 The FA maintenance support team gets DS level repair parts from its parent unit c Battery maintenance responsibilities are as follows 1 Commanders are responsible to ensure that each item of has an assigned operator The operator is responsible for operator level maintenance using the appropriate 10 technical manual 2 The first line supervisor supervises the individual operator and crew in maintenance activities 3 The maintenance section performs battery level maintenance with the assistance of the crew This includes minor repairs and limited battlefield recovery maintenance section also assists in evacuation 4 The motor sergeant supervises the maintenance section He ensures the necessary repair parts are requested and that required test equipment and tools are available 5 Normally the motor officer is the platoon leader platoon based unit or XO battery based ml He supervises maintenance within the unit and establishes priorities for repair d The complete unit maintenance team consists of the operator and or crew and battery maintenance personnel 1 The operator and or crew must perform PMCS as directed by the 10 technical manual PMCS includes inspecting servicing tightening and lubricating the piece of equipmen
465. paon leader is responsible for the safety practices of the firing element He will ensure that the chiefs of section have safety data He determines the lowest QE that can be safely fired from his firing position and ensures that projectiles clear all visible crests min QE see Chapter 6 He is assisted by the FDO platoon sergeant and the gunnery sergeant e Fire Direction Officer The FDO has primar responsibility for safety data and ensuring all safety diagrams are updated after registrations and receipt of current met data He is responsible tor plotting the impact area on a map or chart in the FDC He is assisted in his duties by the chief computer He ensures all firing data are within prescribed safety limits before they are sent to the firing sections He adj sts minimum QE for intervening crests f Platoon Sergeant The platoon sergeant helps the latoon leader in his duties He performs many of the platoon eader s duties in his absence His main responsibilities are laying the platoon the duties as platoon leader and working in shifts with the platoon leader g Howitzer Section Chief The section chief supervises all practices that take place at or near his weapon These include verifying that the announced safe data are applied to his weapon and that the proper charge fuze and projectiles are fired He has the final responsibility for the firing of his weapon h Range Control Officer The range control
466. pe These aids are then used as a visual check to ensure that the howitzer is laid within safety limits b Emplace safety aids for the M101A1 howitzer as follows 1 Deflection safety aids a Set off the left deflection limit on the pantel using the non slipping scale Traverse the tube to establish the proper sight picture on the aiming point b Place the safety stake against the left side of the tube and drive it firmly into the ground c Mark the right deflection limit in the same manner but emplace the safety stake on the right side of the tube 2 Quadrant Elevation Safety Aids a Set off the maximum QE on the range quadrant b Mark the elevation scale with a piece of tape in line with the index mark c Mark the minimum QE in the same manner c Emplace safety aids for the M 102 or M119A1 howitzer as follows 1 Deflection safety aids n Set off the left deflection limit on the pantel by using the deflection counter Traverse the tube to establish the proper sight picture on the aiming point b Emplace the safety stake against the right side of the lunette and drive it firmly into the ground c Mark the right deflection limit in the same manner but emplace the safety stake on the left side of the lunette 2 Deflection safety aids M119A1 14 a Lay in the center of traverse A Figure 11 1 page b Determine the left limit and traverse the tube to the maximum left Traverse the carriage
467. pected 3 7 FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 They must constantly evaluate METT T and be prepared to deal with situations that are not in the plan Table 3 2 Sample duties assigned unit to maintain present position ASSISTANT SECTION CHIEF GUNNER SECTION MEMBERS DRIVER Prepare range card Sandbag the Install camouflage net Harden critical items of Bury the wire collimator equipment with sandbags 992 all truck tires and so forth Brief personnel on Help with camouflage Continue to improve Prepare individual and Become familiar with displacement route s camouflage for defensive positions displacement route s alternate position and example use natural signals to be used vegetation Supervise at Continue to improve Prepare supplementary Selected members Help at supplementary supplementary position camouflage position prepare supplementary position assign members to positions crater analysis team Take cover mask and or vest and man defensive positions as necessary Continue the mission 1 crater analysis data should be reported by use of the shelling report SHELREP bombing report rocketing report ROCKREP or mortar bombing report MORTREP format outlined in FM 6 121 and STANAG 2008 Table 3 3 Sample duties assigned unit allowed to displace ASSISTANT SECTION CHIEF GUNNER SECTION MEMBERS DRIVER Prepare range card Sandbag the Install camouflage net Help with camouflage
468. placement at DF 3200 Aiming posts with 10 mils displacement at DF 3200 Dummy or inert rounds HE WP HC smoke Dummy or inert fuzes M564 or M582 M565 or M557 M728 M514 or M732 Dummy or inert charges two complete sets for 105 mm two complete green bag sets for 155 mm DA Form 5212 R Gunner s Reference Card O 19 FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 NAME ANNEX 7 GRADE SHEET RANK DATE EVALUATOR WEAPON SYSTEM MISSION ERROR A2 T2 W3a A3 W6 Al A3 T6 A4 W7 O 20 DESCRIPTION Incorrect shell used Charge not authorized on safety T Transposition of numbers on reset counter charge bags not initially present Shell not authorized on safety T Sight picture on aiming post off Quadrant not authorized on safety T Individual piece correction set off QE Explosive time fuze M564 or M582 used on base ejecting round Incorrect charge cut Time setting not authorized on safety T Time fuze not set correctly for desired action M564 or M582 Sight picture on collimator off Transposition of numbers on elevation counter VT fuze used instead of time fuze Deflection not authorized on safety T Bubbles not level on pantel mount Individual piece corrections set off on pantel Fuze not authorized on safety T Azimuth and reset counters out of synchronization for aiming point used Bubbles not level for quadrant mount d Safety Certification 1 Rec
469. power b Disadvantages of this method are as follows e Column is vulnerable to enemy observation and attack e Strength and nature of the column are quickly apparent to enemy observers e Convoy speed is reduced e Driver fatigue increases TOO FAR MORE THAN 50 METERS JUST RIGHT 50 METERS TO 20 METERS TOO CLOSE LESS THAN 20 METERS Figure 2 10 Blackout markers cat s eyes 2 24 INFILTRATION When the platoon moves by infiltration vehicles are dispatched individually or in small groups without reference to a march table This technique is time consuming and the vehicles are difficult to control It is used when the enemy has good target acquisition means and quick reaction capabilities a Advantages of this method are as follows e Least vulnerable to hostile observation Ideal for covert operations e Boe passive defense against air and artillery attack e Deceives the enemy as to the size of the unit b Disadvantages of this method are as follows e Time consuming e Most difficult to command and control e Small elements are more vulnerable to ground attack e Individual vehicles may get lost 2 25 TERRAIN MARCH The terrain march is an off road movement A unit using this type of movement should travel close to tree lines along gullies and close to hill masses see Figure 2 11 A terrain march should be conducted when enemy observation or interdiction by artillery fire or air attack
470. r The bubble always moves in the same direction as the left thumb 9 Rotate the instrument 1 600 mils and center the bubble by turning the third leveling screw 4 4 3 Rotate the instrument back to the first position and relevel the bubble if necessary 4 Repeat these steps until the bubble remains centered in both positions 5 Rotate the instrument 3 200 mils from the first position If the bubble remains centered in this position rotate the instrument 3 200 mils from the second position If the bubble remains centered in this position rotate the instrument throughout 6 400 mils If the bubble remains centered the instrument is level If the bubble does not remain centered when the instrument is rotated 3 200 mils from the first the leveling vial is out of adjustment To compensate using the same leveling screws that were used to place the instrument in the first position move the bubble halfway back to the center of the leveling vial Rotate the instrument 3 200 mils from the second position and using the other leveling screw move the bubble halfway back to the center of the level vial The instrument is now level and the bubble should come to rest in its vial at the same off center position within one graduation regardless of the direction in which the instrument is pointed If the leveling vial is out of adjustment the instrument should be turned in for repair at the first opportunity 6 The plumb
471. r End Items These items will be issued as individual item of equipment or using weapon system replacement operations ROI items A WSRO item is to be issued complete with fire control and communications equipment The crew should have had the opportunity to test the fire system and ensure it is operational nce the crew has in processed at the BSOC the FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 WSRO prescribed item will come forward to the battery as part of the next LOGPAC f Class VIII Medical Supplies Medical personnel request d lies from the next higher medical activity When received these supplies will come forward as part of the battery LOGPAC The battery medic s consolidate their resupply requirements and those of the combat life savers and forward these to the battalion aid station g Class IX Repair Parts The prescribed load list PLL identifies the quantity of combat essential repair parts authorized to be on hand or on order at all times The unit PLL derk will est repair parts from the ALOC When the part is procured it comes forward as part of the LOGPAC Parts necessary to repair nonmission capable equipment should be sent forward under the control of the battalion motor officer BMO battalion maintenance technician BMT or senior mechanic 12 6 MAINTENANCE RECOVERY AND REPAIR a Success on the battlefield is directly related to the ability of the unit to keep equipment and material in effective operating
472. r may receive movement orders ranging from a five paragraph operation order OPORD to a simple authenticated radio message A movement order from higher headquarters should include the general location of the new position the azimuth of fire no earlier than NET time the unit can cease firing capability no later than NLT time to be in position ready to fire route if applicable and any specific instructions danger areas intelligence alternate positions movement techniques Unit SOP should determine which if any of the above items are delegated to the battery commander 2 4 ARTILLERY TROOP LEADING PROCEDURES Troop leading procedures TLPs provide a mental framework to ensure complete preparation dissemination and execution of the battery mission The process provides a checklist for the commander from receipt of the mission to execution The steps may occur out of order or simultaneously after receipt of the mission a Receive the Mission aon receipt of the FA support po FASP or a warning order the commander must analyze he mission in order to identify critical fire support tasks He defines the task purpose method and success for each task to determine specitic ammunition logistics and unit preparation requirements He should identify the precombat Checks d in priority that the sections must accomplish A battery SOP should have PCCs that support routine tasks These checklists streamline mission preparation Fina
473. raining and Doctrine Command TRALS TRP target reference point TSFO training set fire observation TU Turkey two step deflection method 1 Set off the announced deflection on the fale bi the reset counter scale 2 Traverses the weapon until line of sight is back on the aiming point UBL unit basic load UK United Kingdom US United States USAF United States Air Force USAFAS United States Army Field Artillery School memory aid true on right add left subtract Glossary 12 USMC United States Marine Corps UTM universal transverse mercator VA vertical angle VE velocity error vertical angle the angle measured vertically up or down from a horizontal plane or reference The vertical angle is expressed as plus or minus depending on whether the position is above plus or below minus the horizontal plane vertical interval the difference in height between the weapon and the desired burst point VFMED variable format message entry device VI vertical interval vol volume VSW vertical sliding wedge VT variable time fuze WARNO warning order WB white bag WP white phosphorus WR when ready WSRO weapon system replacement operations wt weight XO executive officer SECTION CHIEF S REPORT For 105 mm 155 mm and 203 mm Howitzers For use of this form see FM 6 50 The proponent agency is TRADOC GENERAL DATA DTG HOWITZER BUMPER NUMBER AZIMUTH OF FIRE LAY DF METERS NUMBER SITE TO CREST PIECE TO CREST RAN
474. raining level of his unit D 2 PRECUTTING CHARGES Charges will be cut only after the command CHARGE is iven or if CHARGE is not announced after a subsequent element of the fire commands fuze deflection and quadrant is announced Often when charges are precut the increments placed in a powder pit This causes two problems as ollows The increments are exposed to moisture direct sunlight and so forth Thus it is impractical and unsafe to use them again b If placed in a powder pit the unused increments are normally burned before the unit leaves the position If the fire missions involve the use of various numbered charge increments there is a good chance that a wrong charge could be fired If the propellent is not used and is missing one or more increments it cannot be returned to the ASP because it is not a complete charge report of survey for accountability is required WARNING Firing an incorrect charge is the single most common reason that a unit fires out of safety limits This can result in fratricide Do not place remaining bos increments for precut ad in the powder pit until the rounds for which the charges were cut are fired For separate loading ammunition keep the remaining increments in the powder canister with the respective charge For semifixed ammunition dangle the remaining increments over the lip of each cartridge case and seat the projectile However do not break the cord until th
475. range card The DA Form 5699 R Howitzer Range Card consist of two parts A sketch of the sector of fire depicts targets and reference points A data section lists data necessary to engage targets durin eriods of limited visibility Procedures for completing D orm 5699 R are as follows a Having been pudo a sector of fire begin a sketch of the area Depict left and right limits and potential targets and or reference in the SECTORS OF FIRE section Identify the targets and or reference points in your sketch by numbering them in order from the most probable fo the least probable 3 9 FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 b While signing along the bottom of the bore direct the to traverse and the assistant gunner to elevate or depress until the weapon is sighted on the left limit Direct the gunner to turn the head of the pantel without moving the tube onto the collimator or primary aiming point and to read the deflection df from the reset counter or azimuth and azimuth micrometer SN m 5 ro ps xo x5 xo 5 SS NS gt NN N IM zx IL gt gt 22 gt 72 2 Z ISYY SN S SALE D 52222 704 02 52 12 198 DE of the AR scales Record this deflection on the range card in the space marked LEFT DF If the left limit is also a target record the deflection in the DF column on the appropriate line for the targe
476. rate occupation the lay of a unit is verified immediately following the verification or conduct of boresighting It is the S step in TLABSPAP The unit SOPs will specify the method and sequence of verifying lay during an emergency occupation PANTEL COLLIMATOR RETICLE RETICLE Nw NO DISPLACEMENT PANTEL RETICLE COLLIMATOR RETICLE CORRECTED FOR LEFT DISPLACEMENT PANTEL RETICLE COLLIMATOR RETICLE CORRECTED FOR RIGHT DISPLACEMENT Figure 4 17 Proper sight picture from the weapon 4 20 c After the platoon is laid the platoon leader verifies the lay by use of another M2A2 aiming circle referred to as the verification circle To verify lay of the platoon the following steps are taken 1 The platoon leader or designated safety officer sets and orients an M2A2 aiming circle by using a method other than that used by the lay circle However in combat situations the BC authorize the orientation of the verification circle using the same method as the lay circle METT T dependent This aiming circle must be located where it can be seen by all howitzers and should not be any closer than 10 meters to the lay circle 2 The verification circle operator picks up a line of sight on the lay circle Then he commands LAY CIRCLE REFER AIMING POINT THIS INSTRUMENT The lay circle operator will sight his instrument onto the verification circle by use of the recording motion 3 If the lay circ
477. rcle and the pantel 4 25 SAFETY AND VERIFYING THE LAY OF THE PLATOON a Safety and verification of tasks by leaders are disciplines that exist in the field artillery regardless of whether operations are performed in combat or in pec me For every task that is performed there is another person in a lead rship pun section chief platoon sergeant platoon leader or O FDO or BC who verifies the accuracy of the action pertormed This system of double checks is inherent in all operations and is not to be considered a limiting factor in timely fire support Therefore commanders must ensure that their units have a system of independent safety checks These checks ensure that all cannon battery and platoon operations for example FDC mission processing and orienting howitzers for direction affecting firing is checked by someone other than the person who performs the action Though most independent checks take place before missions are received performing independent checks is a continuous process and must be rigidly enforced to ensure fires are timely accurate and safe These checks may include but are not limited to the following e Verification of entered azimuth of lay LCU or BC5 by the FDO and the platoon leader e Verification of target grid e Verification of battery or platoon lay e Verification of AFCS data Paladin units only e Verification of weapon location e Verification of met data b During a delibe
478. re natural materials when available used to help camouflage the section position FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 Were the range cards prepared for both the howitzer and th secondary armament for primay supplementary positions Was the section sear arranged according to the unit SOP Did conditions exist which would make the howitzer unsafe during firing Did the howitzer or prime mover driver follow the n er shutdown procedures according to the appropriate TM Did the section maintain track discipline an camouflage vehicles to include all reflective surfaces Was the section in the proper uniform throughout the occupation Did each section member perform his duty with minimum orders Scoring For each GO rating 10 points will be awarded for a maximum of 270 points For each NO GO rating 0 points will be awarded G 12 PHASE IV FIRE MISSIONS TASK 9 Conduct of an indirect fire mission using the GDU first fire mission Conditions See applicable track tasks FDC send data over the GDU EXAMPLE DNL AMC FIRE TEST GUN 01 Ml OTRDAD SH HE LOT X Y CHG 3 FZ QUIC T1 0 DF 2938 SUBSEQUENT COMMANDS DF so much QE so much For rounds 2 and 3 the size of the deflection and quadrant shifts from the last round fired are as follows G 10 e Deflection 20 to 40 mils e Quadrant 20 to 30 mils For rounds 4 and 5 high angle fire is required The size of the deflection and quadrant shi
479. re not followed soldier recieves NO GO and 0 points If soldier received a GO on steps a and b use the chart below to determine score TIME IN SECONDS POINTS Con ae ee eee ee wes p oes pw pee 21 FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 TASK 10E Scoring Conditions Continuation from 10D The soldier announces a Standards of precision B 2 when ready The examiner commands GAS waits for the were met If applicable soldier to mask DEFLECTION 3242 M101A1 use deflection 2842 QUADRANT 315 Time The time starts on the last dieit of deflection and c If steps a and b were not stops when the gunner states READY followed soldier recieves NO GO and 0 points If soldier received a GO on steps a and b use the chart below to determine score TIME IN SECONDS POINTS b Correct steps were followed to complete the task 14 15 14 15 14 15 14 15 16 17 16 17 16 17 B 22 FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 TASK 11 Scoring Direct fire 061 266 2235 a Standards of precision B 2 The fire mission in task 11 is one continuous mission The central or reticle method of sighting may be used Onl b Correct steps were followed to the one man one sight technique of direct fire will be used complete the task TASK 11A c If steps a and b were not Conditions The soldier is howitzer in the firi
480. rectional traverse requiring four angles to establish the azimuth to the EOL would have an accuracy of 2 mils The steps for conducting a directional traverse are as follows 1 Set up and level the aiming circle over the occupied station 2 With the upper motion set 0 0 mils on the aiming circle 3 With the lower motion sight on the known reference point rear station 4 With the upper motion measure the angle to the unknown point forward station Read this first reading to the nearest 0 5 mil and record it 5 With this reading still on the scales sight again using the lower motion on the known reference point rear station 6 With the upper motion again measure the angle to the forward station Read this second reading to the nearest 0 5 mil and record it 7 Divide the second reading by 2 to determine the mean angle If the second reading is smaller than the first reading 6400 mils must be added to the second reading before dividing by two Express the quotient to the nearest 0 1 mil The mean angle must agree with the first readin within 0 5 mil If it does not the angle must be remeasured The mean angle is the angle used in the computation of the directional traverse and is referred to as the station angle EXAMPLE 1 Ist reading 1036 0 2d reading 2072 5 2072 512 1036 2 The mean angle is valid because it agrees with the 1 st reading within 0 5 mil 5 12 EXAMPLE 2 Ist reading
481. referred method is to level the aiming circle b using the circular leveling vial fisheye bubble as follows 1 Loosen the leveling screws approximately halfway 2 Rotate the head of the aiming circle until the circular leveling vial is over the leveling screw adjacent to the notation pad 3 Using the thumb and forefinger of each hand turn the other two leveling screws in opposite directions The bubble will move in the same direction as the left thumb Note This is known as the left thumb rule 4 When the bubble moves on line with the fisheye center the bubble by using only the third leveling screw Rotate the head over each of the other two screws If more than half the bubble moves out of the center ring relevel the instrument If the bubble cannot be centered use the technique discussed in b below Then turn the instrument in for repair as soon as possible b Level the aiming circle by using the tubular leveling vial as follows 1 Loosen the three leveling screws approximately halfway to permit the instrument to be leveled Rotate the instrument until the axis of the tubular leveling vial is parallel to any two of the three leveling screws Center the bubble by using these two leveling screws Grasp a screw between the thumb and forefinger of each hand Turn the screws simultaneously so that your thumbs move either toward each other or away from each other This movement tightens one screw as it loosens the othe
482. results in small deformed fragments These fragments are useless for identification purposes unless they include a section of either the rotating band or the rotating band seat Fragments of either of these sections positively identify the shell since each shell has its own distinctive rotating band markings EXTERIOR SECTION BOURRELET WIDEST PART BODY c Rotating Bands and Band Seats See Figure J 9 A shell may be identified as to caliber type and nation of origin from the following e Pattern or rifling imprints e Width number and size of rotating bands e Dimensions and pattern of keying or knurling on the band seat e Dimensions and pattern of keying and knurling impressed on the rotating band Note Spin stabilized artillery projectiles require a rotating band and band seat d Tail Fins A mortar may be identified from the tail tin Figures J 9 and J 10 Often tail fins are found in the fuze tunnel of the crater A mortar that is not fin stabilized may be identified from the pieces of the projectile on which the rifling is imprinted e Fuzes Since the same type of fuze may be used with several different calibers or types of projectiles it is to establish the type and caliber of a weapon by this means IMPRINTS ON ROTATING BAND OF FIRED ROUND WALL THICKNESS LS 7 S IMPRESSION OF LAND ROTATING BAND SET IMPRESSION IMPRESSION OF GROO
483. rized it is because it has not yet been determined to be safe to fire or it has been determined that the munitions items cannot be safely fired from the US weapon systems Table N 1 Cartridge propellant charge authorized for use by the US in training 105 mm howitzers 105 mm M1 M1 M1 Charge M67 Charge M67 Charge M67 N 3 COMBAT Ammunition combinations acceptable for onl during combat are described in the appropriate STANA and the Land Forces ammunition Interchangeability Catalogue Short Title Allied Ordnance Publication AOP 6 Table N 3 describes the cartridge and fuze combinations acceptable for exchange in combat for 105 mm howitzers Tables N 4 page N 3 and N 5 page NA show the projectile and ant charges acceptable for exchange in combat for 155 mm howitzers When Tables N 3 N 4 and N are used in conjunction with Table N 7 page N 5 complete round combinations which can be exchanged in combat can be determined CAUTION Do not mix ammunition components of one nation with those of another Additionally components in Tables N 3 through N 7 are to be exchanged only in combat Table N 2 Fuzes permitted by US for firing in training 155 mm wwe ws e wr MTSQ M564 M564 M582 M582 M577 ET M762 E dul qb pu 1203 mm only Pending agreement for training M557 557 557 557 241 557 739 739 739 739 M5
484. rly traine and positioned throughout the unit Has an alternate soldier been chosen for unmasking procedures Are litters properly placed by SOP Are triage and casualty collection points established and briefed H 4 c Has a landing zone been identified for MEDIVAC aircraft d Are combat service appar n graphics on hand and posted in the Are they current e Where do corpsmen medics go when the signal for the reaction force or any signal is given H 11 ENEMY PRISONERS OF WAR EPWs a Are EPW collection points established b Is there a plan for evacuation treatment of EPWs c Has the plan been rehearsed d Who has primary responsibility for the EPWs FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 APPENDIX I KILLER JUNIOR DESCRIPTION The following description of killer junior is given by Major General David Ewing Ott in Vietnam Studies Field Artillery 1954 1973 ven ton D C US Government Printing Office 1975 page 61 paragraph 4 Another effective direct fire technique was Killer Junior The technique was designed to defend fire bases against enemy ground attack and used mechanical time fuzed projectiles set to burst approximately 30 feet off the ground at ranges of 200 to 1 000 meters This technique proved more effective in many instances than direct fire with Beehive ammunition because the enemy could avoid Beehive by lying pane or crawling Another successful application of the iller tech
485. rocess of digging spt support SQ superquick square in artillery a mark or measurement on projectiles to denotes standard weight or deviation from a standard weight SR self registration STANAG standardization agreement STIS stepped thread interrupted screw STP soldier s training publication supplementary positiona position selected for accomplishment of a specific mission other than the primary mission SUT small unit transceiver T tracer TACFIRE tactical fire direction system tan tangent T amp E traverse and elevation TASC Training and Audiovisual Support Center TB technical bulletin TBD to be determined TC training circular or track commander TEC training extension course TFOOL petty ke the azimuth of fire out of the orienting line TFT tabular firing tables terrain gun positioning correction tgt target ti time TIP telescope in place Glossary 11 FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 TIS thread interrupted screw TLABSPAP ei aid trails spades and or firing platform properly emplaced lay weapon aiming point emplaced boresight verified or performed second circle prefire checks on the Weapon system performed ammunition pre pared position improvement TLP troop leading procedure TM technical manual TOC tactical operations center TOE tables of organization and equipment TOF time of flight TOT time on target TOW tube launched optically tracked wire guided missile TRADOC US Army T
486. rom the battery area OPs and LPs are located depends on terrain visibility likely threats and how much time the battery requires to displace or occupy preselected fighting positions Locate OPs to observe likely avenues of approach so the enemy can be engaged at long range with artillery mortars or close air support Man OPs wi at least a two man team and provide them with antitank weapons a map binoculars night vission goggles food water and two means of communications OPs must be able to quickly identify target reference points TRPs in avenues of approach and communicate to higher OPs must be briefed on their responsibilities and the enemy situation 3 5 SECURITY The cannon battery platoon is highly vulnerable to attack as it occupies or E from a position The first order of business is establishing security Due to personnel constraints a unit may not be able to both fully man an effective defensive perimeter and provide continuous fire support In accordance with the factors of METT T the commander may consider alternatives such as requesting an element from the maneuver unit or calling out one of his sections to man the perimeter a Upon occupying a position each section must have a predetermined sector of responsibility It must make maximum use of primary weapons and ensure there is a coordinated all around defense with interlocking fires The defense plan includes defensive resources able 3 1 age 3
487. roximately 45 to the face of the compass Figure 4 11 so that the elevation scale reflection can be seen in the mirror Sight on the crest of the highest object in the sector of fire Center the elevation scale tubular level with the lever on the back of the compass and by viewing the elevation scale in the mirror Read the elevation in mils on the elevation scale Measure the sight to crest two additional times and record the average CAUTION When measuring an azimuth be sure no magnetic materials are near the compass 4 14 CARE AND HANDLING OF THE M2 COMPASS The M2 compass will not stand rough handling or abuse Keep the compass in the carrying case with the mirror side facing in protected from dust and moisture MIRROR HAIRLINE M2 compass observer s view Section V LAYING 4 15 PRINCIPLES OF LAYING a Reciprocal laying is a procedure by which the 0 3200 line of one instrument and the 0 3200 line of another instrument are laid parallel To M understand the principle behind reciprocal laying Figure 4 12 page 4 12 you must first understand several concepts and definitions 1 As was mentioned previously the aiming circle is the primary means by which the cannon battery orients weapons on the azimuth of fire The aiming circle is used to measure horizontal clockwise angles from the line of fire to the line of sight to a no aiming point In reciprocal laying the aiming point tor the aiming circle is the how
488. rs 100 meters by the _ CR of 1 700 meters in thousands 1 7 By reading under the M gage point of the GST derive 0 59 mils ANGLE 3 Comp site for PCR of 1 700 meters FT 155 AM 2 Table G charge 4 GB column 12 range ge 4GB 2 000 meters gives comp site factor of 0 010 99 75 79 X 0 010 0 750 expressed to the next higher whole mil mils e F column 90 mils ANGLE 5 The value of 2 forks at PCR TFT Table F column 6 2 x 2 mils 4 mils Minimum safe time time of light TOF at the PCR 5 6 5 5 11 1 or 12 0 seconds 12 0 seconds The MINIMUM QUADRANT ELEVATION FOR THIS GUN IS 170 MILS CHARGE 4 GREEN BAG MINIMUM SAFE TIME 12 0 SECONDS M514 FUZE ARMED VT The platoon leader wil compute the min QE for each gun in his firing unit The nighes value is the XO min QE for his firing unit with this charge If the fuze ibd to be fired is equal to or greater tin the minimum safe time the minimum QE determined for fuzes quick and time applies If the fuze setting to be freed is less than the minimum safe time the minimum quadrant elevation determined for armed VT applies h Table 6 2 is a recapitulation of the steps for computing minimum quadrant elevation It should be used as a reference by the platoon leader and in training individuals to compute minimum quadrant elevation i The XO min QE is compared to the min QE to the minimum range line as computed by the FDC The greater of t
489. ry it is almost certainly going to be detected This is the most fundamental difference between the two survivability techniques of moving and hardening The threat on nonlinear battlefields is not one of armor or aircraft attacks or even heavy artillery fire Rather the threat in most OOTW situations is dismounted attacks and mortars It is not fore less than in the conventional conflict it is simply c In OOTW it is critical that all personnel filly understand the mission military and political people and rules of engagement ROB Artillery units may occupy positions with their i n maneuver element in a fire base see aragraph F 10 or in an operating base possibly shorter erm and more mobile th n a fire base The unit must maintain a strong defensive perimeter with clear kill zones interlocking fields of tire and maximum grazing fires d Standing operating procedures SOPs must be developed rehearsed and coordinated to effectively deal with typical OOTW situations such as e Sniper fire e Mortars e The media e Displaced civilians e Handling of refugees e Use of weapons lock and load instructions e Interaction with local military forces check points local police In addition guidelines must be established on how to carry weapons sling arms port arms muzzle up or down FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 e Field sanitation requirements must be well planned because a unit may be in the sa
490. s IAW SOP Rehearse ADA movement drills Report completion status to plt sgt plt Idr Function check FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 Table C 2 Air threat PCC Continued Platoon Assign air sectors of fire Establish air TRPs Verify coverage on defense diagram Disseminate ADA warningAWCS Conduct air attack rehearsal Conduct Medevac PCC Assign air avenues of approach Maximize dispersion Coordinate for ADA coverage with the battery TOC for small arms ammo authorization Table C 3 Counterfire PCC Sections Survivability positions dug for all personnel with overhead cover Verify and recon alt positions and route Sandbag collimator and bury wire ID and train crater analysis team Rehearse hasty displace drill Rehearse hasty occupation Check camouflage if visual threat Nets serviceable cover vehicles Windshields lights covered Inventory aid backllitters Minimize the equipment on the ground Report completion status to sgt plt Idr Platoon C2 Maximize dispersion Position in defilade and avoid high angle Request engineer support ID immediate action status ID volley to move criteria Fully prepare positions Request critical fire zone for battery Conduct Medevac PCC Rehearse hasty displacement and occupation Check Class IV on hand Table C 4 NBC PCC Sections M291 kits on hand if available M256 kits on hand M11 M13 DAPs on hand Masks and hoods fitted and checked MOP
491. s SG the upper motion by commandin PLATOON ADJUST AIMING POINT THI INSTRUMENT Note Normally only one deflection will be read to each howitzer and the piece is laid 8 Internal battery communications small unit transceiver runners or wire whichever is the most expedient is established 9 The remaining battery platoon vehicles establish a perimeter defense to the rear of the gun line c This method has advantages and disadvantages which must be considered before its use 1 Advantages Firing capability with the adjusting piece is immediate b Minimal preparation of position is required 2 Disadvantages Laying process is not as timely as other methods 0 If boresight errors exist at adjusting piece these will be passed onto the remaining howitzers EXAMPLE Laying by Howitzer Back Lay Method The platoon receives an emergency fire mission while en route to a new position and signals the convoy The BCS operator inputs the target grid into a BCS He determines the azimuth of fire and the initial firing data using the BCS amg fire mission procedures He gives this intormation to th FDO and the platoon leader Upon occupation of the position the platoon leader aligns his vehicle in the general direction of fire The platoon leader then marks the azimuth of fire for the adjusting piece by using a strip of engineer tape approximately the same lerigth as the weapon system is tape shou
492. s agreement the denial will be accomplished by means of destruction immobilization removal ard or pollution If possible when multiple same type weapons systems or equipment are to be destroyed or immobilized identical components are to be destroyed or removed to prevent re assembly of the weapon system or equipment by the enemy DEFINITIONS 3 The following terms and definitions are used for the purpose of this agreement a Denial To prevent the enemy use of a units military equipment and supplies by means of destruction removal or pollution b NATO Commander A military commander in the NATO chain of command AAP 6 3 19 FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 c Unit Any military element whose structure is prescribed ji competent authority such as a table of organization and equipment specifically part of an organization AAP 6 d Unit s Military Equipment and Supplies This includes unit facilities and installations civilian equipment and supplies used by allied forces but excludes medical equipment and supplies e Pollution pollute Destroy the purity of or sanctity of make foul or filthy contaminate or defile man s environment DETAILS OF THE AGREEMENT 4 Priorities The priorities and the extent of the denial of military equipment and supplies must be decided by the commander ordering it taking into account the their potential value to the enemy Some examples could be a As a high priority Classified equipment
493. s include the procedures for the destruction of unit lau and material He designates personnel to perform t e destruction and ensure that adequate emergency destruction ED material is available See DA Pamphlet 25 30 equipment technical manuals and STANAG 2113 for guidance in unit SOPs The applicable details from STANAG 113 are shown below FROM STANAG 2113 Edition 5 DENIAL OF A UNIT S MILITARY EQUIPMENT AND SUPPLIES TO AN ENEMY AGREEMENT 2 Participating nations agree that a b 5 enemy should be denied use of military equipment and supplies of allied forces The denial to the enemy should if possible not preclude the later use by allied forces The destruction of military equipment and supplies will only be ordered when their falling into enemy hands cannot be prevented food and water may be destroyed or removed but must not be polluted After commencement of hostilities in a tactical emergency and provided that forces have passed to NATO operational command or control a NATO commander may order the denial of a unit s military equipment and supplies The denial of military equipment and supplies to prevent their use by the enemy is the responsibility of the user The provision of instruction and means for and training in the denial of military equipment and supplies is a national responsibility For the purpose of thi
494. s period they should ave access to the following references e AR 385 63 e 6 40 e FM 6 50 e TM 43 0001 28 e Local range regulations SOPs and any other local publications pertaining to safety Weapon technical and field manuals 2 The following should be Pond by the examiner for use by the examinee for Test II part 4 only e Applicable tabular and graphical firing tables e Graphical site table e AR 385 63 e FM 6 50 e One copy of local range regulations d Grading Table O 1 presents a recommended method of weighing this examination Test 115 valued at 55 raw points Tests and II together are valued at 196 raw points Table O 1 Recommended grading procedure CUTS PER TOTAL PART PROBLEM WEIGHT Qualification Test 1 True and false 2 Multiple choice 3 Completion 1 point each 2 points each 2 points each Qualification Test 1 True and false 2 Multiple choice 3 Completion 4 Performance 24 25 26 27 28 29 10 Note Mathematical errors and expression errors should be assessed a cut of 1 point each QUALIFICATION TEST I Part 1 True and False 1 Each section chief must be informed of the minimum and maximum quadrants and the left and right deflection limits 2 1 point each 2 points each 2 points each It is safe to fire a projectile without a fuze In direct fire the chief of section must ensure that mi
495. s prohibit the use of the simultaneous observation Polaris Kochab or the Polaris two reticle FORWARD STATION 800 0 MILS OCCUPIED STATION 5 000 MILS STATION ANGLE method The only fieldwork required is to measure horizontal clockwise angles at each of the traverse stations Figure 5 6 At the occupied station Point AJ these angles are always measured from the rear station clockwise to the forward station Point B At Point A the azimuth to an azimuth mark EOL is known The azimuth from A to B can be found by measuring the angle at A and adding that angle to the known azimuth from A to the azimuth mark AZ FROM POINT A TO AZ MARK STATION ANGLE AZ TO FORWARD STATION A TO B 800 0 MILS 5 000 MILS 5 800 MILS REAR STATION KNOWN AZIMUTH Figure 5 6 Fieldwork requirements for directional traverse 5 11 FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 b The number of stations in a directional traverse should be kept to a minimum to minimize the loss of accuracy The only limiting factor on the length of a traverse leg is line of sight The directional traverse should be planned so that the final forward station is the orienting station for the battery or platoon The orienting line then becomes the back azimuth of the last leg c At battery or platoon level angles are measured with the M2A2 aiming circle to the nearest 0 5 mil Each angle that is measured Teras the accuracy of the initial azimuth by 0 5 mil For example a di
496. s that any celestial body is so far away that for practical purposes the lines of sight to it from two or more points on the surface of the earth are parallel Figure 5 1 Note For units equipped with BUCS revision 1 ROMs a similar technique know as a hasty astro will rovide accurate directional control A hasty astro as the advantage of not requiring a master st tion or radio communications as the simo does Step by step procedures for conducting the hast astro technique are listed in FM 6 2 and in the BUC revision 1 job aids ST 6 40 31 b During daylight the sun is used for observation At night any predetermined celestial object may be tracked Simultaneous observation requires the following e Clear weather that permits observation of a celestial object AZIMUTH MARKER e Communications between the master and the flank stations e ae directional control a grid azimuth to known point e Distance between the master and flank stations cannot exceed 26 km distances greater than 26 km may result hasty survey direction tolerances of 2 mils c Procedures for the conduct of a SIMO are 1 The point having known directional control a grid azimuth to a known point becomes the master station It can be occupied by survey personnel or personnel from the firing unit All positions requiring the establishment of directional control become flank stations CAUTION Place the sun filter over the aiming circl
497. s the safety a platoon sergeant b platoon leader c number 1 cannoneer d section chief 17 Who are the individuals specifically responsible for safety in service practice a range officer OIC safety officer chief of section and fire direction officer b platoon leader safety officer and battery commander platoon leader safety officer unit commander and chief of section d platoon leader platoon sergeant and safety officer 0 2 18 What is the P fuze setting to cause the M564 MTSQ fuze made in 1969 to function on impact a 90 0 seconds b Safe c 100 0 d PD 19 When the end for end test of the gunner s quadrant M1 or is performed the maximum allowable error is plus or minus a 4 mils b 1 mil c 1 mil d 0 1 mil 20 The proper command for verifying the lay of number 1 howitzer is NUMBER 1 REFER AIMING POINT THIS INSTRUMENT b NUMBER 1 REFERRED DEFLECTION THIS INSTRUMENT c NUMBER 1 ADJUST d NUMBER 1 ADJUST AIMING POINT THIS INSTRUMENT 21 Ammunition will NOT be fired if a itis over 6 months old b the lot number is not known c it is more than 1 year old 22 Which of the following best describes the use of a safety diagram a to check the fire commands against right and left deflection limits only b to compare announced fire commands against the safety limit data c to graphically check the impact area against the r
498. s the soldiers move along the traverse leg the should count the number of whole wire lengths measured By use of the meter increments marked on the wire they measure the last partial length of wire The distance of the leg can be determined multiplying the number of whole wire lengths by 60 the length of the wire and adding the partial length 2 The premeasured wire method is fast and meets accuracy requirements for hasty survey techniques However the wire must be held horizontally to obtain horizontal distance That means that in rough terrain when one end of the wire is much higher or lower than the other it will be extremely difficult to measure long horizontal distances In such cases a portion of the 60 meter wire can be held horizontally and the entire distance measured using these shorter lengths EXAMPLE You are using a 2 meter m subtense bar and measure an angle of 10 5 mils pi You determine the horizontal distance by use of the formula Distance 1 2 base 1 1 194 meters tan 1 2 angle tan 5 25 0 005154 Note You must convert mils to degrees by dividing 17 778 into the angle determined To determine the tangent tan of an angle you will need a calculator or TM 6 230 5 16 FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 Table 5 6 Subtense using a 2 meter base bar JO 5 95 5 17 FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 Table 5 7 Subtense using an M16A1 A2 as base p ALTA E G
499. s will be level and special corrections on The pa will be 10 mils off the test target and the cover of the detent shaft will be on The cannon tube will be aligned on the test target which will be posted 50 meters in front of the howitzer Boresight will be off by 5 mils and the soldier will be provided with the tools needed to make corrections to the sight The soldier positions himself pumer and states when ready The examiner will say Time The time will start when the examiner says BEGIN and will stop when the gunner states that the howitzer is boresighted TIME IN SECONDS B 12 Scoring a Standards of precision B 2 were met If applicable b Correct steps were followed to complete the task c If steps a and b were not followed soldier recieves a NO GO and 0 points If soldier received a GO on steps a and b use the chart below to determine score 52 TASK 8B Boresighting the howitzer elbow telescope with the test target 061 266 2005 Conditions The soldier is given a howitzer in the firing osition The cannon tube is aligned on the test target but he elbow telescope is not aligned on the test target The test target will be located 50 meters in front of the howitzer and the soldier will be given the tools needed to adjust the sight The soldier will position himself as the gunner and announce when ready The examiner will say BEGIN Time The time will start when the examiner says BEG
500. se 2 APERS T rounds are intended primarily for antipersonnel use at close range The round comes fuzed F 9 FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 and set for muzzle action however it can be set for up to 100 seconds The round is loaded with 8 000 8 grain steel flechettes The APERS T round is devastatingly effective exposed infantry There are two important cautions When using the M546 APERS T First the round may not be used over the heads of exposed friendly troops even in combat emergencies Second the aluminum casing of the round is thin and easily damaged Damaged rounds are unpredictable and should not be fired The APERS T round is available in only 105 mm caliber 3 ICM in the wire is a 105 mm and 155 mm technique For 105 mm systems it requires firing shell M444 ICM fuzed with the M565 MT fuze at charge 1 With a minimum time setting of 2 seconds and a QE of 1 250 mils the round can be brought in as close as 300 meters from the howitzer By decreasing QE and or increasing the time setting the range can be extended to 2 000 meters Detailed instructions for this technique are in the approved wine tables The 155 mm technique involves firing shell M449 ICM fazed with the M565 MT fuze at hare 2 green bag M3A1 With a minimum fuze setting of 2 seconds and a QE of 1 193 mils rounds can be brought in as close as 400 meters Detailed instructions for 155 mm systems are also in the appropriate firing tables It is emphasized
501. se c Mode of Operation The PLGR offers the choices of FIX CONTINUOUS or AVERAGING as modes of operation The AVERAGING mode yields the most accurate data and is preferred when determining a position for indirect fire weapons d Verify Position Position verification to check for unacceptable errors must always be done prior to firing The following are possible methods of verifying a PLGR derived grid coordinate 1 Always use two persons to check the PLGR data 2 Use two different PLGRs to independently determine the position data 3 Use or graphic resection if identifiable points are visible 4 Conduct a Spot of the location map spot is the minimum acceptable verification and should be used in conjunction with the other available means WARNING Azimuth determined with the PLGR is for navigation only The PLGR azimuth is not accurate enough for use in establishing directional control and should never be used for that purpose Tests show that the PLGR determined azimuth maybe in error by as much as 200 mils 4 9 GPS LIMITATIONS AND CONSIDERATIONS GPS receivers rely on electronic line of sight with the satellites The PLGR must be able to acquire at least four satellites before a three dimensional position can be determined Dense foliage buildings mountains and canyons will mask GPS signal and cause the receiver to fail All GPS receivers automatically try to track satellites to a
502. se case where nations or local regulations preclude sounding alarm signals during exercises local commanders should negotiate with local authorities to obtain authorization to sound alarm signals periodically In the absence of agreement small alarm devices emitting sounds similar to the prescribed audible alarm signals and having limited range should be used during exercises to keep personnel familiar with the audible alarm signals IMPLENTATION OF THE AGREEMENT 10 This STANAG is implemented when the necessary orders instructions have been issued directing forces concerned to put the content of this agreement into effect ANNEX A TO STANAG 2047 Edition 6 EMERGENCY ALARMS AND WARNING SIGNALS The following are emergency alarms and warnin signs for NATO Forces operating on land In respect of the audible alarm signal one or more of the signals listed below shou TYPE OF HAZARD la Imminent Air Attack 3 22 be used VISUAL WARNING SIGN Ib Red Preferably square in shape AUDIBLE ALARM SIGNAL 1c 1 Unbroken warbling siren for one minute 2 Succession of long blasts on vehicle horns whistles bugles or other wind instruments in a ratio of 31 TION 3 seconds on and 1 second off 3 Vocal Air Attack or corresponding national term where only one nation is involved TYPE OF HAZARD VISUAL ee SIGN AUDIBLE ALARM FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 TYPE OF HAZARD 2a Imminent arrival
503. seconds is a danger 0 e crew and should not be fired unless firing Killer Junior 1 1 FM 6 60 MCWP 3 1 6 23 Note howitzers firing ue Od pte ammunition direct fire tables e produced for both green bag and white bag propellants a Format a Killer Junior table as shown in Figure I 1 Label it with the charge to be fired Column 1 is range in meters Column 2 is quadrant elevation in mils Column 3 is fuze setting Column 4 is 10 R in mils SHELL HE KILLER M107 FUZE JUNIOR MTSQ DIRECT M564 M582 FIRE CHARGE 2 prae d e es f e QUADRANT RANGE ELEVATION METERS MILS Figurei 1 Killer Junior direct fire table format b Using the appropriate firing table enter the minimum authorized charge Table F c Enter ranges in column 1 in increments of 100 meters from e The minimum range corresponding to 2 0 fuze setting for graze burst Example 203mm charge 1 green bag minimum range used would 200 meters e Maximum range is 1 500 meters d Calculate 10 R factor for listed ranges and enter it in column 4 Note 10 R factor should be listed to the nearest whole mil to simplify uses for howitzer crew members 1 2 e Add 10 R factor to the elevation listed in the firin table and enter the sum to the nearest whole mil in column 2 Note additional value of 10 R should be applied to compensate for each 10 meter difference in vertical interval VI between the
504. section green Light discipline must be controlled 2 15 FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 2 20 SECTION CHIEF S REPORT a DA Form 5969 R samples in Figures 2 8 and 2 9 enables the platoon leader to consolidate information in preparation of his report and in his determination and verification of the minimum QE The report should contain the following information e Date time group DTG e Howitzer number and bumper number e Azimuth of fire e Lay deflection from the lay circle or other howitzer number e Distance from the lay circle to the howitzer e Site to crest in mils e Distance to crest in meters e Crest object such as a tree or ridge line e Minimum quadrant elevation e Maximum quadrant elevation e Left and right deflection limits e Propellant temperature e Sensitive items e Ammunition status which consists of dug e types square weights amounts and lot numbers fuze types and amounts and primer types and amounts b The report is required for each position area or firing point occupied For centralized control of the the Section chief will submit the report directly to the FDC The position commander and FDO will t ke necessary actions SECTION CHIEF S REPORT For 105 mm 155 mm and 203 mm Howitzers For use of this form see FM 6 50 The proponent agency is TRADOC PIECE TO CREST RANGE MILS 70 SITE TO CREST 184 METERS SITE TO CREST OF CREST MAX QE DF
505. section will include coordinates and height of the orienting station and the grid azimuth from the orienting station to te EOL When survey control is not available the desired location may be determined through the use of graphic resection or graphic traverse Note If automated fire direction capability is not available battery center in addition to the orienting station should be surveyed 5 8 GRAPHIC RESECTION a Graphic resection is a quick method of determining a position based on the known locations of certain visible points The equipment needed to perform a g hic resection includes an aiming circle map sheet grid sheet overlay paper and standard FDC plotting equipment Graphic resection may be done in one of two ways both of which are discussed below 1 No azimuth control available a Select a location from which three distant points which appear on a map are visible These points should be well defined vertical features such as towers trig markers or church steeples b With the aiming circle measure the three clockwise angles between these points For each angle use the standard oe procedure outlined in paragraph 5 6c See Figure Figure 5 8 Measuring angles 5 13 FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 c Check that the sum of the three angles equals 6400 mils 415 mils This verifies that each angle is accurate to 0 5 and that the three angles together encompass the entire orizon d Scale
506. sed in laying a platoon with an aiming circle The deflections announced examples only For brevity only the exchange between the instrument operator and the gunner of number 3 is given Instrument operator PLATOON ADJUST AIMING POINT THIS INSTRUMENT FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 All gunners identify the aiming point Normally pieces are laid in the order of their readiness Gunner of number 3 NUMBER 3 AIMING POINT IDENTIFIED Using the upper motion the instrument operator turns the head of the aiming circle until the line of sight is on the pantel of the number 3 He then reads the azimuth and azimuth micrometer scales Instrument operator NUMBER 3 DEFLECTION 3091 Gunner of number 3 NUMBER 3 DEFLECTION 3091 The using the two step deflection method sets the deflection on his sient and fraverses the weapon until he is sighted back on t Gunner of number 3 NUMBER 3 READY FOR RECHECK The instrument operator un turns the head of the aiming circle until the line of um is on the pantel of the number 3 and announces the deflection Instrument operator NUMBER 3 DEFLECTION 3093 Gunner of number 3 NUMBER 3 DEFLECTION 3093 2 MILS This indicates a difference of 2 mils from the previous deflection of 3091 which the gunner had placed on the antel The SIE sets 3093 on the pantel and traverses he tube until he is sighted on the aiming circle Meanwhile the instrument operator nial
507. servation and direct fire weapons by use of a terrain mask Defilade positions should be used however they should not be so Close to the mask that low angle fire capabilities are restricted d Defensibility The position should facilitate both active and passive defense so that it e Can be entered without enemy observation e Offers effective cover and concealment with emphasis on concealment Also survivability positions can also be dug by engineers to enhance both cover and concealment e Avoids high speed enemy approaches e Has more than one entrance and exit route preferably in the rear of the position e Trafficability Soil should be firm enough to support all vehicles f Weather The effects of weather on terrain must be considered Survey Control Survey must be established or it must e available in a short amount of time 2 14 TYPES OF POSITIONS The BC or platoon leader must select primary alternate and supplementary positions a primary position is one from which the firing element will accomplish its assigned mission b An alternate position is the one to which the unit moves in case its primary position becomes untenable Since the unit will continue its mission from the alternate position it must meet the same requirements as the primary position and should be far enough away to escape the effects of enemy indirect fire on the primary position It should be reconnoitered and prepared for oc
508. sh an EOL at least 100 meters away Upon closing the survey team porde ou with a grid to your OS and an azimuth to the EOL of 5 363 mils With the howitzers at their lay deflections you now measure the OA of 4400 Your final step is to solve for the azimuth of the line of fire OL 6400 if needed OA az of the LOF 5363 4400 0963 Your platoon howitzers have been laid on 0963 all along You have two options at this point e Leave the platoon laid on 0963 and have the FDC one its computer entries for azimuth of fire and piece ocations Re lay the platoon on the originally intended azimuth Note The first option requires less time and effort and is thus normally preferred if the tubes were laid parallel However if the unit was laid by an alternate method of lay where the tubes are not fruly parallel then re laying would be preferred 4 32 CORRECTING BORESIGHT ERROR a If the battery or platoon is to deliver accurate fire the boresight of the weapon must be correct Boresighting is the process of ensuring that the optical axis of the weapon sights are pue to the cannon tube The primary methods ot boresighting are the distant aiming point test farget and standard angle 1 If a howitzer is not in boresight the tube is disoriented in relation to the amount of boresight error If the sight is off to the right the tube is disoriented by that amount to the left If the sight is off to the left the tube reflec
509. shock other than tiring e Before firing in a new firing position verify e Anytime the howitzer fires inaccurately for no apparent reason b The primary methods of boresighting are e Distant aiming point e Test target e Standard angle c When time is not critical and the tactical situation permits use of the test target may be preferred over the DAP method because of its accuracy d Boresighting methods are discussed in detail in the applirable weapon manuals The following paragraphs escribe several boresighting techniques that may be used if for some reason one of the primary methods is not possible 8 6 COLLIMATOR METHOD OF BORESIGHTING The collimator may be used to boresight weapons Procedures are as follows a Prepare the weapon for boresighting in the same manner as for the DAP method b Place the collimator about 20 feet in front of the tube c Sight through the tube and align the 0 of the collimator with the vertical muzzle boresight string d With the pantel sight on the collimator and match the numbers on the reticle pattern of the sight with the numbers on the collimator The reading should be as follows e 3200 on the azimuth scale of the M 100 series sight FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 e 0 on the slip scale of the M12 series sight Note This method may not work with the MI09A31A6 or MI98 howitzers Because of the length of the tubes on these howitzers the numbers in the collimator m
510. sible construct obstacles to delay stop divert or canalize an attack force All obstacles should be covered by fire Types of man made obstacles and techniques for their employment are found in FM 5 103 4 In fast moving situations or when emergenc displacement is anticipated hardening might be limited to digging fighting positions on the perimeter placing sandbags around sensitive equipment such as collimators and tires and constructing individual shelters for prone personnel Placing sandbags on or around the engine compartment and the ballistic shield improves survivability of the howitzer If natural cover is limited or unavailable individual fighting positions should be constructed FM 7 7 gives instructions on how to construct fighting positions machine gun pun range cards and how to establish sectors of tire with crew served weapons 5 Camouflage the spoil from position hardening 3 4 DEFENSE IN DEPTH Defensive operations should be planned so that the BC and platoon leaders are warned of an impending attack soon enough to displace the unit or defend the position Maneuver forces operating in the same area can provide early warning of enemy attacks The BC should talk to these elements OPs and LPs are also key elements for early warning When determining the location of the OPs and or LPs consider observation and field of fire cover and concealment obstacles key terrain avenues of approach and METT T How far f
511. situation H 6 MOVEMENT a Has the battery commander or platoon leader planned mutually supporting indirect frees in of his movement plan and provided this information to higher headquarters b Has the battery commander or GSG selected and reconnoitered an alternate position c Have rally points been established d Have the rally points location and route of egress been disseminated e Has the alternate position been prepared f Have organic mine detectors been used during the route reconnaissance g Have convoy signals been established for the following 1 Blocked ambush 2 Unblocked ambush 3 Air attack 4 Artillery attack Emergency occupation See STANAG 2047 on this topic 6 Are the vehicles prepared for the tactical situation and is security available H 7 LOCAL SECURITY Have local patrols been deployed if necessary See FM 7 8 Chapter 3 on this topic b Have obstacles been integrated into the defensive plan c Has a defensive diagram been prepared 1 Has prominent terrain been indicated 2 Have mines and or barriers been annotated 3 Are primary and supplementary positions marked 4 Are direct fire sectors marked Day and night 5 Are interlocking fields of fire and the FPL marked 6 Are OPs and LPs with delay and withdrawal plans included in the defensive diagram 7 Is dead space annotated and covered 8 Have target reference points
512. smission and for power conversion required for GDU operation b In the battery compartment are the active battery and a spare battery c The power supply unit provides power and data circuits CASE ASSEMBLY DATA DISPLAY C 10327 GKY 29 V OPERATOR CHIEF OF SECTION WEIGHT 16 0 POUNDS LENGTH 17 3 INCHES WIDTH 7 0 INCHES HEIGHT 6 6 INCHES POWER 28 VOLTS DC AUDIBLE CAPTIVE ALARM SCREWS BATTERY COVER PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE ALARM VOLUME FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 d There are connectors for the SCA power and data e Binding posts allow for the connection of the following e Quadrant elevation gun assembly e Deflection gun assembly e LCU labeled BCU on the case assembly e Auxiliary power f The controls indicators and connections Figure L 4 are discussed below 1 The POWER connector allows power connection between the case assembly and the radio 2 The DEF 1 DEF 2 and DEF 3 binding posts allow connection of field wire between the case assembly and the power rout and signal binding post respectively on the deflection gun assembly POWER CONNECTOR AUDIO CONNECTOR EXTERNAL POWER BINDING POSTS POWER SUPPLY UNIT QE BINDING POST DEF BINDING POSTS SCA CONNECTOR BCU BINDING POSTS NORMAL SWITCH SWITCH ON OFF Figure L 3 Case assembly L 3 FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 3 The 1 QE 2 and QE 3 binding posts allow connection of field wire between the
513. st from the increments Figure 10 3 f Burning powder creates a very large flash and a lot of smoke In a tactical environment the platoon leader must ensure that burning powder does not compromise the camouflage and concealment effort PLACE UNUSED FLASH REDUCERS HERE DIRECTION OF WIND CHARGE INCREMENTS Figure 10 3 Layout for burning powder increments FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 10 8 FLASH REDUCERS For some propellants separate flash reducers containing black powder and potassium sulfate must be used to reduce flash at night The flash reducers speed up the combustion of unburned propellant gases which helps prevent excessive muzzle blast b Flash reducers absorb moisture readily so they must be kept dry Keep them off of damp ground and sealed in their containers until needed for use c Destroy flash reducers as shown in Figure 10 3 Flash reducers the highly flammable It is critical that they be disposed of properly to prevent injury d The M119A2 charge 7 red bag propellent for 155 mm is manufactured with flash reducers attached Do not remove these from the propelling charge 10 9 PRIMERS a Primers are sensitive to both shock and moisture Primers for separate loading ammunition should be kept away from the pen bags and left in their sealed containers until needed Note Older series propellants may contain the MK4A2 This primer is not authorized to be fired with any howitzer currently
514. st request augmentation rom the maneuver commander Such augmentation should F 8 include a battalion mortar platoon inside the battery perimeter this increases survivability and makes resupply of mortars easier Also the addition of ground surveillance radar enhances detection outside the perimeter While the maneuver commander will naturally be reluctant to divert any of his assets from their primary mission the temporary loss of these assets is generally preferable to the permanent loss of a substantial portion of the brigade fire support g Unit SOPs and plans for the defense must be detailed enough to ensure that all battery personnel know their individual responsibilities once an enemy attack commences If maneuver CSS or allied personnel are habitually present in the fire base they must be incorporated into the battery defense plan Personnel temporarily in the compound must be briefed on what their actions should be in case of an attack A standard set of visual symbols to tell fire base personnel when to execute various parts of the defense plan must be developed and disseminated to all personnel in the perimeter The plan must be rehearsed critiqued and improved on a continuing basis h If the field artillery unit is proficient in the conduct of patrols or if infantry is available patrols should be conducted outside the perimeter Their purpose is to prevent the enemy from staging in areas just beyond the line of sight of
515. struck by rain or hail However a new rain insensitive fuze has been developed and is available to be fired through storms with reduced possibility of premature functioning Note Units must be aware of the ammunition restrictions that appl to their caliber of weapons t Restrictions are 1n the technical manual for the weapon h To prevent the accidental functioning of the oint detonatin elements of fuzes M564 and Visas the uzes must not be dropped rolled or struck under an circumstances Special care must be taken to ensure that a fuzed round does not strike the breech of a weapon during loading i Any mechanical time fuze that is set and not fired must be reset to SAFE and the safety wires if applicable must be replaced before the fuze is repacked in the original carton Note Never fire a projectile without a fuze or with a fuze that is not authorized for that projectile 10 7 PROPELLING CHARGES a Procedures for p aring and verifying propellin charges are published in respective weapon technica manuals These procedures are safe simple and easy to train CAUTION When firing multiple round missions the possibility of firing an incorrect charge is greater than when firing single round missions because of increased tempo and because sections are rarely allowed to fire multiple round missions during training Procedures in the weapon technical manual always must be used b Propelli
516. t number Direct the assistant o measure the quadrant and record the quadrant Complete the DESCRIPTION column by annotating a brief description of the target 000 METERS 01234567 8 91000 1000 92878543210 5 METERS 02468100 su SL OU sd QUI SC S OM Figure 3 3 Defense diagram matrix with scale of 1 5 000 3 10 FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 200 METERS 200 METERS Figure 3 4 Constructing the matrix 3 11 FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 Qu 4 G Ay zu LEGEND wirehead ws Claymore LAW 4 heavy machine gun il howitzer light machine X Note 6 platoon based organization would have one less howitzer than the figure depicts Figure 3 5 Defense diagram scale 1 5 000 for a platoon FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 wur 4 A 2 81 FA DATE 09 08 90 SCALE 115000 PLT FIRE SPT DEFENSIVE 767 GRID sence HEN ME NN ME AIR DEFENSE STINGERIAVENGER TEAM LOCATED AT GD 388642 LEGEND alt altitude spt support RJ road junction tgt target Figure 3 6 Related information 3 13 FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 c Repeat these procedures for the right limit and for all target reference points Determine the shell charge and fuze to be fired for each target and record that information in the columns Use the REMARKS column to indicat
517. t and from front to rear when facing the azimuth of fire FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 AIMING CIRCLE Figure 2 2 Terrain gun positioning 400 METERS ECs a Note A 3 x 6 platoon based organization would be minus one howitzer Gun 3 Figure 2 3 Diamond formation 2 11 FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 100 Figure 2 4 Star formation Section IV PREPARATION FOR OCCUPATION 2 17 DAYTIME OCCUPATION The finalizes his of occupation He gives priority to performing those tasks that facilitate immediate fire The plan is not limited to but should include following e The general location for the FDC or POC and howitzer positions e The azimuth of tire materialized by a terrain feature or by pointing his vehicle in the direction of fire e Entrance and exit points and guidance to the gunnery sergeant for the track plan e Guidance on the scheme of defense e Location of the ground guide pickup point b The first sergeant or gunnery sergeant establishes the track plan organizes the vehicle dispersal area selects a position for each element in the service area and plans the defense of the position Considerations are as follows 1 Use existing roads 2 Select separate exit and entrance routes 3 Ensure routes follow natural terrain features such as gullies and tree lines and take advantage of natural overhead cover and concealment 4 Brief vehicle pu
518. t as well as caring and accounting for the basic issue items BIIs Equipment faults that cannot or should not be repaired by the operator or crew are recorded on DA Form 2404 uo ment Inspection and Maintenance Worksheet or D Form 5988E This form is submitted through the first line supervisor to the battery motor sergeant 2 The battery maintenance section with operator and or crew assistance performs services listed in the 20 technical manual These include scheduled periodic services authorized repairs road testing assistance in battlefield recovery and limited assembly replacement e Recovery capabilities of the battery are limited Therefore vehicles should be repaired on site if possible If evacuation or repair by a higher level maintenance 12 4 organization is required a request should be submitted to the battalion motor officer or maintenance technician FM 20 22 gives detailed information and guidance for all recovery operations 12 7 REFUEL REARM AND R SUPPLY POINT When the tactical situation permits a battalion R3P site be established to provide critical 55 to the battery This technique involves the movement of critical battalion CSS elements Trains to a location where the firing elements can pass through and take on needed ammunition and POL Then the combat trains elements march order and proceed from the site to a new location Daylight operations unless conducted expeditiously are vu
519. t elevation for the charge computed PIECE TO CREST RANGE VERTICAL CLEARANCE Angles in platoon leader s minimum QE FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 6 3 MEASURING ANGLE OF SITE TO CREST During advance party operators site to crest is measured with the M2 compass or M2A2 aiming circle refer to chapter 4 for these procedures If the M2 compass is used 20 mils to allow for the accuracy of the M2 compass During position improvement the chief of section verifies the angle of site to the crest and reports it to the platoon leader To verify the angle of site to crest the chief of section sights along the bottom edge of the bore has the tube traversed across the probable field of fire and has the tube elevated until the line of sight clears the crest at the highest point He then centers all bubbles on the elevation mount and reads the angle of site to the crest from the elevation counter The angle of site is read and expressed to the nearest whole mil This angle of site and PCK are reported as part of the section chief s report paragraph 220 6 4 MEASURING PIECE TO CREST RANGE a There are five methods that can be used to measure piece to crest range 1 Taping the most accurate method is normally too time consuming 2 Subtense is fast and accurate 3 Map measurement is fast and accurate if the obstacle can be located for example a lone tree will not appear on a map 4 Pacing is time consuming and depend
520. t of the aimin pom the tube is pointed to the left of the 0 3200 line of sign efore this correction is made any azimuth measured will be greater than the azimuth of the tube and any orienting angle will be smaller than the true orienting angle The opposite relationship also exists b The amount of error is determined by referring the sight to the aimin nu and reading the deflection This deflection is compared with the deflection used for boresighting and the difference is the amount of error in boresight The XO applies the appropriate correction for the boresight error to the measured azimuth or orienting angle prior to to the FDC He corrects the lay of the pieces as required 4 33 TRAINING Training in the proper methods of reports data should be part of at p to lay the platoon Tables 4 6 through 4 8 will help personnel remember procedural steps These procedures are performed with the aiming circle and the howitzer pantel Table 4 6 Measuring the azimuth without survey control SEQUENCE MEMORY AID STEPS Do this first U Place the deflection read to you from the howitzer on the upper motion of your aiming circle Do this second L With the lower motion sight on the howitzer Do this third U With the upper motion center the magnetic needie pantel Do this fourth SID Subtract the Math step Instrument Subtract the reading from the instrument reading
521. t there are no obstacles He uses the existing roads and trails Selected routes should follow natural terrain features such as gullies and tree lines and should take advantage of cover and concealment a 48 He takes up defensive position as directed by the 9 He and the other pon uides assemble at the pickup point when directed by the GSG e The FDC or POC representative does the following e Emplaces the TM 184 when the communications representative 1s not present e Lays wire from the TM 184 to the FDC position e Guides the FDC or POC vehicle into position Frects the OE 254 antenna e Over a secure radio relays survey and lay data to the main body f The communications representative does the following e Emplaces the TM 184 e Ensures that all other wire lines are laid tagged and propery connected to the TM 184 and lays wire to he aiming circle e Assists with erection of the OE 254 antenna FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 Note communications representative s first priority is to establish internal wire communications to transmit firing data His second priority is to establish communications with outposts and make drops at various other locations the GSG indicates 2 18 LIMITED TIME PREPARATIONS a When the advance has limited time to prepare a position the BC or GSG must establish priority tasks As a minimum he must ensure the following 1 Cannon positions are selected
522. tacles in the area are not expected e Enemy contact is not likely The advantages of a mounted reconnaissance include e Speed e The use of the advance party vehicle depending on which type of vehicle is used radio GPS possible armor protection firepower e Easy to break contact and move on The disadvantages of a mounted reconnaissance include e Loss of stealth Loss of some reconnaissance detail 2 Dismounted reconnaissanceis used when e Detailed reconnaissance is required e Maximum stealth is necessary e Enemy contact is expected or likely e Terrain is restrictive or is surrounded by wooded areas e ime is not limited e Mines are likely in the area The advantages of a dismounted reconnaissance include e Allows the advance party to obtain detailed information about the position area Less chance of enemy stay behind forces remaining undetected e Allows for maximum security of the advance party The disadvantages of a dismounted reconnaissance include e lime consuming e Difficult to overwatch entire advance party with a crew served weapon e Advance party is removed from the support of their vehicle comm GPS and so on e More difficult to command and control 3 In reconnaissance by fire advance parties place direct tire on positions where there is a reasonable suspicion of enemy occupation the goal is to cause the enemy to 2 9 FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 disclose his presence by moveme
523. tams BIlIIIAZ _ 4 IIl V TL LL I __ IS BELOW POLARIS USE GRAPH d A 4 4 LX FE Tp 50 LATITUDE LLL TL LTILLELLVLLLVILILLLLILLIL LI 4 111114 7 _ 4 44 E i ES IF KOCHAB IS ABOVE POLARIS USE GRAPH 2 NE E EN 2 s o 2 E o 9 Me 2 o c ge E o 2 9 T I 1142 E HEIL ET DAS ES 5 9 FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 5 5 POLARIS 2 METHOD Polaris 2 is a hasty survey technique used to establish accurate direction It is simple fast and has the distinct advantage of requiring no radio or wire communications The instrument operator however must be in the Northern hemisphere and must be able to locate the stars 43H Cephei Polaris and Delta Ursae Minoris Figure 5 2 page 5 3 Note The Polaris II reticle will exceed its original service life in January 1996 In January 1996 the accuracy is 2 5 mils The reticle can still be used but the accuracy is degraded 0 1 mils each year after January 1996 The procedures for establishing direction by the Polaris 2 method are as follows
524. target and the howitzer f Subtract 0 1 fuze setting increments from the fuze setting for graze burst Enter that number in column 3 EXAMPLE You are in an M198 howitzer firing battery Minimum authorized charges are charge 2 green bag and charge 3 white bag Authorized firing tables for your unit are on hand Step 1 Format the Killer Junior direct fire table for charge 2 iin M198 charge 2 may result in a round lodged in the tube or early functioning if using fuze M564 Step 2 Compute 10 R factor for ranges 500 to 1 500 meters Using ad expression express to the nearest whole mil Range 500 when data are input in column 4 express to the nearest whole mil 10 0 5 20 mils ee 900 10 0 9 11 1 mils Range 1300 10 1 3 7 mils Step 3 Add 10 R factor to elevation corresponding to listed range Using artilley expression express to the nearest whole mil Range 500 45 4 20 65 4 or 65 mils Range 900 82 8 11 1 93 9 or 94 mils Range 1300 121 6 7 7 129 3 or 129 mils Step 4 Subtract 0 1 fuze setting increments from the listed fuze setting for a graze burst Range 500 2 1 0 1 2 0 Range 900 3 8 0 1 3 7 Range 1300 5 6 0 1 5 5 FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 APPENDIX J CRATER ANALYSIS AND REPORTING J 1 CRATER ANALYSIS TEAM Although greater reliance should be placed on reports from trained teams all personnel should know how to analyze craters and make the proper report Since crat
525. tenance Management System TAMMS 27 September 1991 STP 6 13B14 SM TG Soldier s Manual and Trainer 5 Guide 13B Cannon Crew Member 15 August 1989 TM 9 1015 203 12 Operator Crew and Organizational Maintenance Manual for Howitzer L t Towed M101A1 NSN 1015 00 322 9752 21 April TM 9 1015 234 10 Operator s Maintenance Manual for Howitzer Light Towed 105 mm M102 NSN 1015 00 086 8104 19 August 1985 TM 9 1015 252 10 Operators Manual for Howitzer Light Towed 105mm M119A1 5 October 1992 TM 9 1025 211 10 Operator s Manual Crew for Howitzer Medium Towed 155 mm M198 NSN 1025 01 026 6648 14 January 1991 TM 9 2350 267 10 Operators Manual for Carrier Ammunition Tracked M992 NSN 2350 01 110 4660 4 October 1991 TM 9 2350 311 10 Operator s Manual for Howitzers Medium Self Propelled 155 mm M109A2 M109A3 M109A4 arid M109A5 27 June 1986 RECOMMENDED READING These readings contain relevant supplemental information AAP 6 NATO Glossary of Terms and Definitions March 1986 Note AAP 6 can be obtained from NATO Terminology Coordinator Military Agency for Standardization MAS NATO Headquarters 110 Brussels Belgium 6 Land Forces Ammunition Interchangeability Catalogue in Wartime May 1989 Note AOP 6 can be obtained from Logistics Specialist TRADOC Munitions System Managers AOMMCS ATTN ATSK Z Redstone Arsenal AL 35897 6095 References 2 AR 75 1
526. tense using a 60 meter base continued DISTANCE ul o 2 DISTANCE DISTANCE 5 22 FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 Table 5 8 Subtense using 60 meter base continued 5 11 AUTOMATED COMPUTATIONS a The BCS and LCU allow battery commanders to disperse their howitzers over larger position areas than ever before BCS and BUCS have weapon location routines that allow us to determine the grid location and altitude of each howitzer by simply the azimuth distance and vertical angle to the howitzer from the orienting station mnemonic ORSTA Thus we can use this application to help us determine grid locations and altitudes to traverse stations while performing a graphic traverse b Location and altitude at each of the traverse stations are determined by entering a number of successive polar coordinates direction distance and vertical angle in the weapon location tile 5 12 AFU INPUT FOR GRAPHIC TRAVERSE USING BUCS REV 1 Note ST 6 40 31 is the user s manual for BUCS Rev 1 id Rev 1 read only memory ROM can be is procedure caliber of weapon used for t system does not matter only information required in the database to begin this procedure is the map modification MAPMOD Follow the steps and information in Table 5 9 to determine location and altitude with BUCS Table 5 9 input for graphic traverse DISPLAY ACTION TAKEN MAIN FDISAP x Select D endline D
527. termination of firing data for direction is based on grid north the term azimuth normally means grid azimuth GSG GST gun display unitdigital display unit on the howitzer that will receive and display firing data com pus and transmitted by the BCS in the FDC e GDU consists of a section chief s assem two gun assemblies and the case assem y gunnery sergeant graphical site table gun laying and positioning systema tripod mounted positioning and orienting device which uses Glossary 6 global system GPS and a laser range finder to allow precise laying of howit zers GLPS eliminates the need for external survey gunner s reference card DA Form 5212 R which is used to record essential mission data and referred deflections given aiming points H blister agent mustard HA high angle hangfire temporary failure or delay in the action of a primer an igniter or a propelling charge hasty occupation the occupation of a position that has not been fully prepared for occupation by the advance party hasty survey techniques used to establish rapid and sufficiently accurate direction and or position data through simplified procedures and with cannon battery TOE equipment See Chapter 5 for detailed procedures HC hexachloroethane smoke hdst headset HE high explosive HEAT high explosive antitank HEAT T high explosive antitank tracer heavy artillery more than 160 mm bore HEDP HEMAT heavy expanded mobil
528. termined variable time fuze nerve agent persistent white phosphorus Figure 10 9 Acronyms and abbreviations for Tables 10 2 through 10 4 10 8 FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 Table 10 2 Field artillery ammunition planning guide M101A1 M102 and M119A1 MAXIMUM RANGES 1 PROJECTILES DODOC 101 1 M119A4 FUZE ACTIONS M546 APERS T 1315 C513 11 600 12 400 12 400 Comes set for MA Can be set to 100 sec M360 gas GB 1315 C441 11 000 11 500 11 500 M60 gas HD 1315 C442 11 000 11 500 11 500 M629 gas tactical CS 1315 468 11 000 11 500 4450 Mr ET M1 HE deep cavity 1315 C445 11 000 11 500 11 500 CP PD MTSQ VT ET M444 ICM 1315 462 11 000 11 500 11 500 MT modified M548 RAP HE 1315 C463 14 500 15 100 11 500 PD VT ET 1 Most 105 mm rounds come complete with primer propellant projectile and fuze The exceptions are the HE HERA M548 and some lots of WP M60 that come without fuzes CP PD MTSQ or VT fuzes as appropriate must be drawn as separate items for these rounds See KEY TO FUZES block below for fuze DODACs KEY TO FUZES DODAC 1390 PLUS DODIC NUMBER AS SHOWN CURRENT DODIC REPLACEMENT DODIC FUTURE CP delay MK399 MOD1 N659 nondelay PD SQ D M577 N335 M739 N340 XM773 SQ D M572 N311 M739 N340 773 MT 565 N248 ETM762 N248 XM773 M577 N285 XM773 MTSQ M564 N278 ETM767 XM773 M582 N286 VT M513 N412 M728 M732 N463 N464 XM773 M514 N41
529. ters and 300 meters and I CEP worse than 300 meters R TIME OF LOCATION The actual time the location was made 5 TARGET DESCRIPTION Including dimensions if possible 1 Radius of target in meters OR 2 Target length and width in meters attitude if possible SECTION III COUNTERFIRE ACTION T TIME FIRED Against enemy target U FIRED BY V NUMBER OF ROUNDS TYPE OF FUZE AND PROJECTILES 3 25 FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 CHAPTER 4 LAYING THE BATTERY MEASURING AND REPORTING Section I THE AIMING CIRCLE 4 1 DESCRIPTION OF THE AIMING CIRCLE The 2 2 aiming circle is the primary means of orienting the cannon battery or laying weapons on the azimuth of fire This section presents information that should be the starting point for any training program on the aiming circle The aiming circle components are discussed below a Telescope The telescope is a four power fixed focus optical instrument with a reticle pattern like the one shown in Figure 4 1 Note Some aiming circles may not be equipped with the P 2 reticle pattern national stock number NSN 1240 01 1 52 8516 which is used to perform the POIARIS 2 method of hasty survey modification can be made at direct support maintenance Verify the expiration date in the lower right hand corner of the P 2 reticle pattern If it has expired turn in the aiming circle to direct support DS maintenance for repair LIMIT FIELD OF VIEW
530. ters will result in deviation from the target of 100 meters An error such as the one in the last example will cause the to have little if any effect on the target See paragraph D 9 2 Location Accurate location of the firing unit is second in order of importance When higher order survey techniques are used to establish the tiring unit location a high degree of accuracy is assured An alternative is to estimate by map spot the location of the firing unit If the unit s positon is NS for example 200 meters too far to the east the initial rounds will impact 200 meters to the east of the actual location of the target 3 Altitude Altitude is the last of the three elements of survey control If not established by formal survey rocedures it must be obtained through the use of contour ines on the map sheet covering the area of operations Generally a map spotted altitude introduces only a minor error into the computation of site b The hasty survey techniques discussed in this chapter fall into two categories directional control and determining location FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 Section II DIRECTION 5 3 SIMULTANEOUS OBSERVATION a Simultaneous observation SIMO of a celestial body is a fast and easy method of transferring directional control It is ideally suited for field artillery units because many units can be placed on common directional control in minutes The principle of simultaneous observation i
531. that this 155 mm procedure is for charge 2 green ne Firing charge 1 green bag at ne angle from a 109 3 6 or M198 is een hazardous as the round may not clear the tube sticker Resupply of the tire base will most likely be by air If so a suitable LZ or drop zone DZ within or near the perimeter is a major positioning consideration If the battery 1s to be resupplied by ground transport the fire base must be positioned near a suitable road 1 If the unit is to be resupplied by ground transport the entrance to the position can become a critical weak point in the tire base defense A series of barriers must be established to slow the approach of vehicles to the entrance This keeps the vehicles from crashing the gate at high speed and entering the compound Gate must have the means immediately at hand to destroy any vehicle that tries to force entry into the perimeter m For the final defense of the position an internal perimeter is established around each gun position each support section and around the FDC il BOC If the outer perimeter is puis sections should stay in place and defend the attery platoon from these positions Once the situation stabilizes the battery leadership executes a counterattack to reestablish the perimeter followed by a security sweep of each defensive position inside the perimeter F 10 n Priorities of work must be established to efficiently occupy and defend a firebase or hardened posi
532. the deflection and quadrant are being set Table 7 1 Fire commands sequence ELEMENT WHEN ANNOUNCED Initial Fire Commands Subsequent Fire Commands 1 Warning order 2 Pieces to follow When applicable Pieces to fire Method of fire Special instructions Do not load At my command High angle Use gunner s quadrant Azimuth Special corrections Sweep and or zone fire Aways Never o When changed When other than standard When other than standard When applicable When changed 9 Deflection When changed 10 Quadrant 11 Method of fire for effect When applicable When changed These elements may be designated as standard Elements so designated will be announced only when something other than standard is to be fired 7 1 FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 b Certain elements of the fire command may be standard and these need not be sent on each subsequent fire command Quadrant elevation may never be standardized It is given in each fire command 7 3 TYPES OF FIRE COMMANDS a Digital Fire Commands Digital fire commands are used by units equipped with BCS The entire fire command is displayed on the section chiefs assembly SCA Also the deflection is displayed on the gunner s gun assembly GA and the quadrant elevation is displayed on the assistant unner s GA The section chief however still announces e entire fire command including the deflection and uadrant As a data check the gunner and assist
533. the fire base As a rule of thumb patrols should push out to the maximum range of the enemy s heaviest weapon enerally a light mortar Should the patrol encounter enemy orces it will very likely require fire support to disengage and to break up the enemy element Fires must be planned in advance and the fire plan rehearsed with dry fire if possible before the patrol goes out Once patrols are outside the wire they must remain in constant communications with the CP and their progress must be carefully tracked In jungle or heavy forest contact between the patrol and the enemy may well be made at ranges of less than 100 meters The FDC must know the location of the patrol very precisely if it is to provide effective fires without endangering the patrol Refer to FM 7 8 for specific instructions on the conduct of patrols i The defenses must be constantly checked for evidence of un The patrols will examine the perimeter from the outside looking for cut wire disabled sensors or mines that have been deactivated or turned around in the case of Claymores Any evidence of tampering should be regarded as warning of likely enemy attack and alert states should be increased j Unit SOPs must contain provisions for battery self defense These include gunnery techniques such s Killer Junior firing flechette APER T rounds or firing APICM into the wire FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 Azimuth of Fire OS SO 9 High Mobility Rp
534. the center stake e Hold a length of communications wire or another appropriate field expedient means to each side spray stake and strike an arc forward of the fuze furrow e Place a stake where these arcs intersect e Set up a direction measuring instrument in line with He center stake and the stake at the intersection of the arcs FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 e Orient the instrument e Measure the direction to the firing weapon DIRECTION MEASURING INSTRUMENT Figure J 3 Side spray method J 10 LOW ANGLE FUZE DELAY CRATERS ARTILLERY There are two types of fuze delay craters ricochet and mine action a Ricochet The projectile enters the ground in line following the trajectory and continues in a straight line for a few feet causing a ricochet furrow The projectile normally deflects upward and at the same time it changes direction usually to the right as the result of the spin or rotation of the projectile The effect of the airburst can be noted on the ground Directions obtained from ricochet craters are considered to be the most reliable The five steps to determine direction from a ricochet furrow Figure J 4 are as follows e Clean out the furrow e Place stakes at each end of a usable straight section of the furrow e Set up a direction measuring instrument in line with the stakes and away from fragments e Orient the instrument e Measure the direction to the weapon FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23
535. the coordinates of the three known points off a map to eight digits and transfer the plots onto a grid sheet 7 1 000 firing chart trig list of known points may also be used e Place a pin at a random point near the center of the overlay tracing paper Using target grid a mil graduated p or a range deflection protractor RDP draw a line Tom the pinhole to any comer of the pen and label it as the ray to the first of the three points With the target grid protractor or RDP measure clockwise the number of mils corresponding to the angle between the first and second known points Draw and label the secondray to represent the second known point Measure clockwise the number of mils corresponding to the angle between the second and third known points Draw and labela third ray representing the third known point You will note that the third angle between the third and first known point is now alread constructed on the overlay paper It should be measured to ensure that plotting errors have not occurred See Figure 5 9 f Place the overlay paper on the grid sheet and position it so that the three rays pass directly through their respective points The of the pin now represents the location of the aiming circle on the grid sheet See Figure 5 10 2 Azimuth control available In some cases the aiming circle is positioned over the orienting station with a known orienting line established If only two known points are
536. the length of the bore of the weapon from breech tace of the tube to the muzzle by the diameter of its bore chemical agent monitor FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 CANCEL command which when coupled with an order rescinds that order For example CANCEL CHECK FIRING indicates the order to check firing is no longer in effect CATV CBR chemical biological and radiological combat ammunition transport vehicle CCL combat configured loads CEASE LOADING a command that prohibits a section from loading another round CECOM Communications Electronic Command CEP circular error probable CF command fire radio net CFB chief of firing battery CFST critical fire support task chan channel charge the propellant of semifixed or separate loading ammunition CHECK FIRING a command given to cause an immediate halt in firing chg charge close in aiming point an aiming point set up in the platoon area The primary close in aimin point is the infinity collimator a lightweight optical instrument that simulates an aiming point at infinity A secondary close in aiming point is a set of two aiming posts When aligned the two posts establish a line alon which the panoramic telescope is sighted when laying for direction cmd command radio net COB collimator an infinity reference device used as a close in aiming point during indirect fire center of battery comm communications common deflection the deflectio
537. the method for placing out safety stakes Set on the sight in turn the left intermediate and right deflection limits determined from the safety card and take up a proper sight picture on the aiming point 2 through the breech end of the tube and sighting along the left edge of the tube for the left limit and the right edge of the tube for the right limit align the safety stakes 29 Which of the following sight diagrams illustrate correct sight pictures Indicate your answer by placing an X in the appropriate spaces below a 2 b 4 30 List the actions taken in case of a misfire on an M109A2 A4 howitzer cold tube charge 2 through 8 After a failure to fire try to fire two additional times If the weapon still fails to fire wait 2 minutes from the last attempt to fire and then remove and inspect the primer a If the primer is not dented the fault is in the firing mechanism Repair the firing mechanism prime and then fire the weapon b If the primer is dented the primer is at fault Replace the primer with another primer and then fire the weapon c If the primer fired the fault is with the propellin charge Wait 10 minutes 8 minutes after removal an inspection of the primer open the breech and remove and dispose of the defective propelling charge Reload the weapon with a new propelling charge and primer for firing 31 Unsafe deflection exceeds left limit by 10 mils 32 Unsafe time is 0 4 second less
538. tics of FA cannons and Appendix N discusses interchangeability of ammunition for those weapons 10 2 EXTERIOR COMPONENTS OF AN ARTILLERY PROJECTILE Since the first projectile was manufactured the demand for ad accuracy and range has influenced projectile esign Without speci constructed shapes and exterior parts there would be no standard ballistic characteristics for any group or type of projectiles lack of ballistic standardization would prevent the computation of firing tables Modern projectiles are designed for maximum stability and minimum air resistance in flight The exterior components of an artillery projectile are shown in Figure 10 1 and explained below a Eyebolt Lifting Plugs and Fuze Well Plugs A separate loadin p ectile has an eyebolt lifting plug Other types of projectiles have metal hex head or plastic closing plugs The plug is for lifting to keep the fuze well clean dry and free of foreign matter and to protect the fuze well threads The ing is removed and the appropriate fuze is inserted at the firing position Some special purpose semifixed projectiles are issued with the fuzes already assembled in the projectile b Ogive The ogive is the curved portion of a projectile between the fuze well and the bourrelet It streamlines the forward portion of the projectile The curve of the ogive usually is the arc of the circle the center of which is located in a line to the axis of the
539. tified personnel normally the platoon leader and 3 Ensure that all personnel and equipment are clear from surface danger area E before firing see AR 385 63 for the dimensions of surface danger area E for specific Weapon systems 4 Check the DA Form 581 Request for Issue and Turn In of Ammunition and range safety card to ensure that only authorized ammunition 15 fired Platoon leader or platoon sergeant 5 Ensure no safety violations occur at or near the weapon s All members of the firing unit 6 6 E the weapons for correct boresighting ection chie 11 2 7 Verify the lay of the battery Platoon leader or platoon sergeant D Compute and verify MIN QE Platoon leader or 9 Compare minimum QE with the QE for minimum range shown on the safety diagram Use the larger of the two as the minimum QE Platoon leader or FDO 10 Verify that the section chief has safety data safety T Ensure section chiefs are advised of all friendly pue in the area that m inadvertently be exposed to FA direct or indirect fires Platoon leader or platoon sergeant 11 Supervise and check the emplacement of safety aids stakes tape and other devices Platoon leader platoon sergeant or gunnery sergeant 12 Verify that range clearance has been obtained Platoon lead r or FDO b Specific duties of safety personnel during firing are but are not limited to the following E 0 Verify serviceability of ammunit
540. tillery and Field Artillery Brigade Headquarters 7 January 1993 FM 6 30 Tactics Techniques and Procedures for Observed Fire Procedures 16 July 1991 FM 6 40 Tactics Techniques and Procedures for jon Artillery Manual Cannon Gunnery 26 August FM 6 121 Tactics Techniques and Procedures for Field Artillery Target Acquisition 25 September 1990 7 7 The Mechanized Infantry Platoon and Squad APC 15 March 1985 FM 7 7 The Mechanized Infantry Platoon and Squad Bradley 7 May 1993 FM 9 6 Ammunition Service in the Theater of Operations 1 September 1989 FM 10 63 Handling of Deceased Personnel in Theaters i 143 3 FMFM 4 8 28 February 1986 FM 11 50 Combat Communications Within the Division 4 April 1991 FM 19 25 Military Police Traffic Operations 30 September 1977 FM 19 30 Physical Security 1 March 1979 Vehicle Recovery Operations 18 September Map Reading and Land Navigation 7 May FM 21 60 Visual Signals 30 September 1987 23 9 M16A1 Rifle and M16A2 Rifle Marksmanship 3 July 1989 FM 23 23 Antipersonnel Mine M18A1 and M18 CLAYMORE 6 January 1966 23 25 Launcher and Cartridge 84mm M136 AT4 HEAT 22 November 1988 FM 23 31 40mm Grenade Launchers M203 and M79 1 May 1972 23 33 66 m Heat Rocket M72A1 M72A2 Light Antitank Weapon 20 April 1979 23 65 Browning Machine Gun Caliber 50 HB M2 19 June 1991
541. ting the corresponding grid sheet The LCU or BCS can simplify the process of determining grid coordinates and altitude of inde in and around the platoon or battery area omputations can be made by using the piece location format See ST 6 40 31 or the applicable job aids for the steps a Constructing the Matrix There are different methods of constructing a matrix on which to draw your diagram The key is to pick a scale for your casting and northing gi lines which will enable you to plot all or most of the esired locations The FDC section has preprinted grid sheets which are scaled to 1 25 000 Each gid square represents 1 000 meters on these sheets Examples of the scale interval you could choose are as follows e 1 12 500 Each grid square represents 500 meters e 1 5 000 Each grid represents 200 meters Figure 3 3 page 3 10 b Constructing the Diagram The steps to construct a platoon diagram could be as follows e Construct the matrix Figure 3 4 page 3 11 e Add terrain features including dead space e Draw the azimuth of fire to orient the diagram e Plot the required positions such as howitzers TRPs FDC or POC LPs or OPs crew served weapons tank killer team positions and Killer Junior targets Use the grid coordinates obtained from the BCS LCU PLGR or from a map spot e Draw sectors of fire for howitzers and crew served weapons Figure 3 5 page 3 12 e Record the related information and grids
542. tion Bubbles b Correct steps were followed to will be level and special corrections at 0 mils The soldier complete the task positions himself as assistant gunner gunner and announces When ready The examiner commands QUADRANT 215 c If steps a and b were not followed soldier recieves NO GO Time The time will start when the examiner states and 0 points If soldier received a QUADRANT 215 and will stop when the assistant GO on steps a and b use the chart gunner gunner states SET below to determine score moai ERES TIME IN SECONDS B 27 FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 TASK 13 Scoring Measure the quadrant using the range quadrant a Standards of precision 2 Conditions The soldier is given a howitzer in the firing were ace applicable position with the cannon tube at 245 mils The range b Correct steps were followed to uadrant is at 0 mils and the cross level bubble is centered complete the task he soldier positions himself as the assistant gunner eunner If db and announces when ready The examiner states BEGIN c I steps a and b were not followed soldier recieves a NO GO Time The time will start when the examiner states BEGIN and 0 points If soldier received a and will stop when the assistant gunner gunner states GO on steps a and b use the chart QUADRANT 245 below to determine score TIME IN SECONDS 10 11 10 11 10 11 10 11
543. tion The following is a typical priority of work 1 Advance party a Selection of a site that will support maneuver forces and is defensible with open fields of fire preferably out to 300 meters b Scratch out positions for howitzer and equipment berms bunkers vehicle positions critical equipment positions machine gun sectors of fire howitzer direct fire sectors and so on c Construct individual hasty fighting positions 18 36 deep to lie in for protection from ground burst indirect fire and small arms fire if attacked d Lay out initial defensive perimeter 2 During occupation a Site emplace crew served weapon systems 0 All personnel dig individual hasty fighting positions c Determine final locations for defensive fighting positions and howitzer sectors of fire d Finalize perimeter 3 After occupation a Emplacement of perimeter wire obstacle mines and early warning devices 0 Improving individual positions from hasty positions to one or two man fighting positions c Hardening digging in critical material and equipment in priority e First 1 18 inches of overhead cover for all personnel e Second FDC BOC e Third howitzers e Fourth ammunition e Fifth remaining support vehicles and equipment d Identify and plan defensive targets Improve perimeter wire f Tie in internal defenses assign direct fire sectors 9 Verify of defensive weapons preparation
544. tion chief gives subsequent commands based on the observed effects 1 Change in lead adjustment the lead in mils is changed to a new total lead command EXAMPLE The initial fire command was LEAD LEFT 5 After spotting the burst the section chief decides a lead of 10 A target His subsequent command is LEAD 2 Change in range Panina amen the range is increased by the command ADD so many meters and is decreased by the command DROP so many meters Another option is that the section chief announces a new range based on the desired increase or decrease in range to hit the target Unit SOPs will dictate which technique to use 80 70 60 50 40 30 20 10 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 Figure 8 2 Gunner s sight picture central laying lead R20 deflection 3180 d When commands for direct fire are issued firing battery personnel must ensure that direct fire engagements do not result in fratricide This is the puts responsibility of the howitzer crew section chief FDO platoon leaders and platoon sergeants in a platoon based unit and of the XO Chief of tiring battery and GSG in a battery based unit See AR 385 63 on minimum engagement ranges 8 5 EMERGENCY BORESIGHTING a Doresighting is the only means a gunner has of ensuring that the optical axis of his sights are parallel to the tube of the weapon The weapon should be boresighted in the following cases e Anytime the sight has been subjected to any
545. tion of the battery commander b every 3 months when firing or once each year if no firing takes place c when fires are inaccurate for no apparent reason d at all of the above times is 7 When should you record information on the DA Form after each mission b after the day s firing is done c when you get back to the motorpool d after any fire mission data are received 24 Boresight should be verified every a mission b occupation c year d week 25 If you can t emplace aiming posts at 50 and 100 meters What should you do a don t emplace aiming posts b put both out as far as you can c emplace the far aimin Post as far as you can and the near aiming post half that distance d use a tree and the near aiming post FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 G 10 PHASE II PREPARATION FOR FIRING OPERATIONS TASK 2 Preparation for deliberate occupation of a prepared position Conditions The chief of section is in the unit motor pool with his crew The evaluator reads him the following situation YOUR SECTION IS PREPARING TO DEPART THE UNIT MOTOR POOL FOR A DELIBERATE OCCUPATION OF FIRING POSITION THE GUNNERY SERGEANT HAS JUST INFORMED YOU THAT THE ADVANCE PARTY WILL LEAVE IN 15 MINUTES AND THAT HE WANTS GUN GUIDE FROM YOUR SECTION READY TO LEAVE AT THAT TIME THE PLATOON SERGEANT HAS ALSO TOLD YOU THAT THE MAIN BODY WILL DEPART IN 30 MINUTES AND THAT YOUR SECTION SHOULD MAKE ALL NECESSARY PREPARA
546. tion of the column e Instructions from the XO or platoon leader to the main body These should include start point checkpoints designated rally points release point times for arrival at and clearance of these points rate of march vehicle interval route of march order of march and review of immediate actions to take in case of trouble e General instructions regarding restrictions on use of roads maximum speed mardi units catch up speeds alternate routes detours use of lights and any special instructions regarding march discipline or defense against air or ground attack e Communication instructions regarding the use of radio messengers flags whistle or horn signals pyrotechnic signals and hand and arm signals 2 27 LOAD PLANS A load plan prescribes efficient loading of personnel and equipment for movement Each vehicle should have one A good load plan is insurance that a unit will move into the new position with all its equipment The load plan for a vehicle must be such that the equipment most essential to the mission is loaded last The load plan should be recorded and graphically portrayed Load plans should be identical between like sections within the same battalion The load plan should be combat configured complete rounds based on the to war basic load Steps in preparing the load plan include the following e Examining the battery TOE to determine the personnel equipment and vehicles authorized
547. tions CONTINUOUS FIRE is given when it is desired that the howitzer crews continue to fire within the prescribed rates of fire for their howitzer until the command CHECK FIRING or CEASE LOADING is given b FIRE AT WILL is used in a direct fire role primaril for perimeter defense command is TARGE so and so FIRE AT WILL Howitzer crews fire under the control of their section chief 7 17 CHECK FIRING The command CHECK FIRING can be given by anyone but it should be used only in emergencies or if a safety violation is noted All firing ceases immediately The command may be given by voice displayed on the SCA and or given by hand signals all at the same time Immediate action must be taken to determine the nature of the check fire and to correct the situation 7 18 CEASE LOADING The command CEASE LOADING allows the firing battery to fire rounds that have already been loaded but no additional rounds may be loaded It is a voice command only with the um of final protective fire missions processed wit 7 19 END OF MISSION The command END OF MISSION EOM means that the fire mission has been terminated The howitzer sections should return to the azimuth of lay or priority target data The SCA displays EOM for that howitzer for example GUN number so and so EOM 7 20 PLANNED TARGETS The battery may be el dx planned ae for which current firing data must be maintained Each target is ass
548. to a hostile ea ie from this type of crater The best results are obtained etermining a mean or average of several directions obtained by using both methods a Fuze Furrow and Center of Crater Method In this method stakes are placed in the center of crater and in the fuze furrow Then fhe direction is measured to the hostile weapon See Figure J 2 A variation of this method is to place a stake where the shell entered the ground instead of the fuze furrow and determine the direction in the same manner This method is rarely possible however since indications of the m of entry are usually destroyed by the explosion of the shell The five steps of this method are as follows e Place a stake in the center of the crater e Place a second stake in the fuze furrow at the point where the fuze was blown forward to the front of the crater e Setup direction measuring instrument in line with the stakes and away from fragments e Orient the instrument e Measure the direction to the hostile weapon SIDE SPRAY DIRECTION MEASURING INSTRUMENT Figure J 2 Fuze furrow and center of crater method b Side Spray Method Another method to measure the direction to a hostile weapon is to bisect the angle formed by the lines of side spray 3 The seven steps in the side spray method are as follows e Place a stake in the center of the crater e Place two stakes one at the end of each line of side spray equidistant from
549. to ground forces is the AN PSN 11 precision lightweight GPS receiver PLGR The PLGR can provide location information precise enough for use by cannon artillery For detailed 4 6 information on the GPS PLGR operation maintenance and additional equipment refer to TM 11 5825 291 13 Major components of the PLGR are shown in Figure 4 8 4 8 FA SURVEY APPLICATIONS The PLGR can be used to determine the grid location of the orienting station Individual howitzer locations can also be determined but individual PLGR derived positions are not on common survey control The following actions must be taken to ensure accuracy when using the PLGR as an artillery positioning device a Verify PLGR Setup 1 Crypto The proper crypto keys must be loaded before the PLGR will function using the precise positioning system PPS The PPS must be used to achieve the necessary accuracy and to avoid enemy electronic warfare measures If the crypto variable is not loaded the PLGR cannot be used to establish artillery positions Prime Battery Cover Twists off for easy field replacement of prime power battery Display 4 line x 16 character f alphanumeric mode dependent variable format flashing field selection Handle Easy one handled operation facilitates thumb keying Keypad Oversized keys for ease of operation Dual modes Control for one handed use Numeric for quick two handed data entry FM 6 60 MCWP 3 1 6 23 KYK 13 K
550. to prepare a position for a deliberat occupation Upon his arrival in position the gun guide will be given a detailed briefing to include the following e The specific location for his howitzer e The azimuth of fire e The location of the wirehead e The track plan e The defense position Upon conclusion of his briefing he will prepare the position Evaluation Checklist Did the guide e Perform a security sweep of the area Have all the equipment required ggcording tol Table 2 1 in Chapter Emplace the pantel marking stakes us locati n designated by the Emplace the guide stakes on the azimuth of fire within 20 mils Establish wire communications with the aiming circle Record the deflection to the pantel marking stakes and measure and record the distance from the aiming circle to his gun position Determine site to crest using the M2 compass and piece to crest range e Record and report site to crest to the GSG e Establish the track plan as directed by the GSC e Take defensive position as directed by the GSG Scoring For each CO rating 8 points will be awarded for a maximum of 80 points For each NO GO rating 0 points will be awarded TASK 8 Emplacing the cannon TLABSPAP Conditions The section is occupying a new position prepared by your advance party FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 Evaluation Checklist Did the driver follow the gun guide at a safe speed and distance After
551. troubleshoot most of the wire system from behind the gun line b Using DR 8 V mile reel the gun guides connect the running end of each wire line to the of line binding posts on the voice wirehead After this connection is made the wire lines are tied off to a stake next to the voice wirehead and are tagged Each gun guide then routes the wire from the voice wirehead to his gun position and connects it to the line binding posts on his te one set TA 312 or headset chestset sound powered H 200 It is advisable to route wire lines to a stake forward of the gun line as illustrated in Figure 9 1 to avoid wire line damage by vehicles moving in with the main body However the chosen wire line route will be dictated by terrain and available wire FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 c The FDC representativealso installs a wire line from the voice wirehead to the FDC position by using a DR 8 The running end of the wire line is connected to the appropriate pair of binding posts on the voice wirehead and tied off to a nearby stake and tagged The wire line is then routed to the vicinity of where the FDC will be positioned and is connected to a TA 312 200 or an AN GRA 39 4 To complete the voice wire system a battery or peon representative installs a wire line to the aiming circle rom the voice wirehead After this circuit is Up ed by installation of a telephone set TA 312 or H 200 the telephone system will allow the howitzers to be
552. ts that error to the right 2 Once a weapon is properly boresighted the deflection to an aiming point aiming circle or collimator is reestablished The angle deflection between aiming point and pantel has not changed from when the weapon was laid The entire angle has simply rotated by the amount of boresight error Since the angle has not changed the deflection recorded to the aiming point is set off on the 4 26 antel and the tube is traversed onto the aimin pone e relationship made at the time of lay is now resti ished It is improper after correcting for boresight error to move or fine tune the aiming point to the tubein relation to ES deflection numbers originally established at the time of lay b Emer a occupation of a firing position may require firing before boresight is verified and any error is corrected In such cases the howitzers must verify boresight as soon as possible If this verification discloses an error the 0 3200 of the pantel and the howitzer tube are not parallel the platoon leader takes corrective actions after measuring the error and reporting it to the FDC c When a deflection is read from the pantel or when an azimuth is measured the deflection or azimuth determined is that of the 0 3200 line of the pantel as read from the azimuth counter When the FDC requests the platoon leader to MEASURE THE AZIMUTH the azimuth requested is that of the howitzer tube If the howitzer is out of
553. ttery or firing platoon area e Howitzer locations e The aiming circle e FDC or POC e MX 155 or TM 184 terminal strip e automatic chemical agent alarm f If the battery up ort elements are present they will be positioned with full consideration for survivability and operability as the tactical situation dictates FM 6 20 1 2 10 resents information and guidance on determining positions for CSS elements 2 16 FORMATIONS a The factors of METT T must always be considered when howitzers are emplaced The main emphasis is on mission and enemy The artillery will most likely face a general threat of counterfire air attack ground attack and radio electronic combat To counter that threat the BC or platoon leader must consider techniques such as dispersion movement hardening and concealment when selecting positions for his howitzer b The enemy counterfire threat and air attack threat may be so great that the BC or platoon leader will consider dispersing his howitzers over a large area and maximizing the natural cover and concealment offered by the local terrain This type of howitzer positioning is called terrain gun ositioning Figure 22 The capabilities of the LCU and attery computer system BCS to compute individual piece locations enhanced terrain gun positioning c The enemy ground attack guerrilla and special forces threats may cause the BC to position the howitzers in a tight and defensibl
554. uded in the SOI for the battery CF net b The use of the AN PRC 68 or AN PRC 126 may need to be tailored to a particular mission Their use during convoys ammunition resupply hip shoots and advance party and main body operations may warrant a change in assignment of these radios c Radio electronic combat may preclude the use of the radio because of jamming d Mutual interference between friendly units may preclude use of the radio e Alternate to be used in case of jamming must be identified 9 7 FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 J507 AM 1780 PART OF 1 ANTENNA AT 892 PRC 25 ANTENNA 467655 801 ANTENNA BASE 913C28 801 AN PRC 68 ANIPRC 126 J505 4723 INTERFACE CABLE CABLE 467654 801 TO 25 VOLT VEHICLE BATTERY SYSTEM CX 4720 VRC Figure 9 8 Amplifier power supply OG 174 and small unit transceiver AN PRC 68 or AN PRC 126 9 6 BCS TO GDU COMMUNICATIONS The BCS to GDU link is the location of the most frequent roblems This area requires constant command attention if the maximum benefit is to be derived from the entire system The following are the most common errors reported by or recommendations received from units worldwide a BCS GDU Wire Connection 1 Wire must be perfect 2 There must be a dedicated GDU wire with no splices 3 WD 1 was never meant for digital communications One improper splice or one short may knock the entire system out
555. uld be modified so that the more likely 100 mil errors are induced rather than transposed numbers W3a W7 2 Error W3b is for an M100 series sight with reset counter If testing a n with a 12 series sight the slipping scale should be slipped 30 mils out of synchronization with its original orientation to effect the same error FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 ANNEX 2 FIRE MISSIONS Note If testing a 155 mm section chief then state GREEN BAG on all charge commands C collimator and AP aiming posts in DF commands are the designated aiming points Fire Mission 1 errors A2 T2 W3a Shell Smoke shell WP set up Charge 4 not authorized by safety T Fuze Time Time 18 9 DF C 3043 transpose DF numbers 3403 QE 369 If called unsafe because the charge is off the safety T say CORRECTION CHARGE 3 QUADRANT 369 Fire Mission 2 error A3 Shell HE Charge 3 all charge bags not initially present Fuze TIME Time 13 9 DF 3104 387 Fire Mission 3 errors T1 W4a Shell WP no WP on charge 5 safety T Charge 5 Fuze PD DF AP 3441 sight picture on aiming posts off QE 251 Set time fuze M582 or 564 for PD action If unsafe because there is no WP on charge 5 safety say CORRECTION CHARGE 3 QUADRANT 251 15 FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 Fire Mission 4 Errors T4 and W6 Sp Inst High angle Shell HE Charge 5 Fuze PD DF 3402 QE 1107 quadrant off safety
556. uliar equipment predicte activities bumper markings spoils of the war and rubbish that is lett behind add to the accuracy of the targeting effort b Attack A battery can be suppressed and destroyed by the following e Counterfire Enemy attacks with up to 600 rounds fired into a 200 x 100 meter area see FM 100 2 1 page 9 23 e Air attack high performance aircraft and helicopters e Ground forces mounted forces of tanks and motorized infantry dismounted forces of infantry airborne and or air assault and partisans and or guerrillas e Radio electronic combat REC REC combines SIGINT direction tinding intensive jamming deception and destructive fires to attack enemy organizations and systems 3 1 FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 3 2 BATTERY RESPONSIBILITIES a The BC is responsible for general planning coordination and execution of his battery defense The DC analyzes the 52 s IPB and develops an overall defensive plan On the basis of the tactical situation the BC must develop his own engagement area based upon avenues of approach lines of intervisiblity and the expected threat The BC must be able to conduct a modified terrain analysis of the position area and surrounding terrain to determine from where the enemy will attack The BC must graphically portray to his leaders how he intends to defend his position With this as a beginning the platoon leader can develop a plan to defend his platoon He will coordi
557. ull back the spring loaded cover on the base of the baseplate and place the aiming circle on the tripod Loosely Screw the instrument fixing screw assembly into the base plate 5 Center the plumb bob over the orienting station by moving the base plate of the aiming cirde 6 Tighten the instrument fixing screw into the baseplate of the aiming circle CAUTION Be careful not to exert excessive pressure when you are tightening the instrument fixing screw The slotted arm may bend and damage the tripod head 7 Remove the aiming circle head cover and hang it on the tripod head cover or a leg clamp thumbscrew to prevent damage 8 Install the night lighting device accessory case if necessary b Some common malpractice are as follows e Not clearing the area of magnetic attractions such as weapons steel helmets and eyeglasses e Failure to set up the tripod so that one leg points in the direction of the sighting This puts one more tripod leg in the instrument operator s way as he moves around and increases the chance that he will kick a leg and knock the aiming circle off level 4 3 LEVELING THE AIMING CIRCLE There are two methods of leveling the aiming circle for normal use Either the circular leveling vial or the tubular leveling vial Figure 4 5 can be used FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 TUBULAR LEVELING VIAL CIRCULAR LEVELING VIAL WES LEVELING SCREW KNOB BUBBLE Figure 4 5 Leveling vials a The p
558. um range 5 200 meters Right limit Azimuth 6260 Maximum range 6 900 meters O 8 Charge 4 green bag only High angle fire only Required Complete the safety diagram and compute the safety data Show work 28 Situation You are the fire direction officer for a 155 mm M109A3 platoon firing charge 4 green bag The platoon is laid on azimuth 2050 a You have determined the following data Maximum Minimum altitude altitude Maximum range 377 368 Minimum range 324 320 b Platoon altitude 339 meters c The following data were taken from the safety card Safety limits for 155 mm SP howitzer shell ICM M483A1 are a follows Left limit Azimuth 1675 Minimum range 4400 meters Right limit Azimuth 2435 Maximum range 7 000 meters Charge 4 green bag only Low angle fire only Required Complete the safety diagram and compute the safety data Show work 29 Situation You are the fire direction officer for a 155 mm M109A3 platoon firing charge 5 green bag The platoon is laid on azimuth 2050 a You have determined the following data Maximum Minimum altitude altitude Maximum range 377 368 Minimum range 385 320 b Platoon altitude 339 meters c The following data were taken from the range safety card Left limit Azimuth 1675 Maximum range 7 000 meters Right limit Azimuth 2436 Minimum range 4400 meters Charge 5 green bag only Shell illuminating only FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 Required Comp
559. unit prepared to conduct limited equipment decontamination Have personnel been designated and trained Does the unit have all authorized MI3s m Does the battery have alarm signals for the NBC attacks n Does the unit have an EMP defense plan for electronic equipment Is the unit maintaining an operational exposure guide OEG p Have unmasking procedures been rehearsed q Has an alternate soldier been chosen for unmasking procedures H 9 AIR DEFENSE COVERAGE a Has the 53 established priorities of air defense coverage to the battalion Has the air defense warning status weapon status been disseminated b Has the battery or platoon been integrated into the air defense coverage c What percentage of available M2 machine guns are deployed in a ground mount vice ring mount configuration d How does the battery plan on providing air defense coverage with organic assets while in position FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 e Has the battery platoon plan been rehearsed f What are the primary and alternate signals H 10 MEDICAL a What is the plan for the evacuation of casualties to the battalion aid station Have litter teams and evacuation vehicles been identified Has the 156 or alternate rehearsed the route day and night MOPP IV Have maneuver aid Pu ambulance exchange points been identified and riefed b What is the plan to provide organic first aid durin combat operations Are combat lifesavers prope
560. unition can with a hole drilled in the bottom for the lines to pass through Once the lines are connected the lid can be closed 3 The terminal strip should be centrally located so that each weapon uses no more than 400 meters of wire one DR 8 4 Units must use a precise track plan and closely supervise movement of ammunition resupply vehicles to revent damage or destruction of wire Repair by splicing Is unacceptable 5 Special positioning considerations for a platoon based battery using one BCS is in Figure 9 9 6 Two wire lines must go to each gun one voice and one digital TA 312s should not be hooked up on the digital line once digital traffic begins LEGEND h NICAD Batteries Nickel cadmium We batteries used in the GDU must be completely discharged before they are recharged These batteries hav a memory unless they are discharged they ultimately refuse to accept a recharge i Digital Fire Commands The section chief must view the entire digital fire command on every round If in a hurry he may see only charge deflection and quadrant This creates obvious problems when FFE is entered or when shell fuze and or fuze setting is changed j Training Observer FDC and howitzer section must frequently participate in digital fire Scd oop training to get the maximum benefit from the BCS Th training set fire observation TSFO is a tool which aids in this training k AN PRC 68 or AN PRC 126
561. unner states that the collimator is set TIME IN SECONDS npo gn qo o o 3 o gt EBERT NET 17 17 17 mam mm ome w Cee ee l a FM 6 60 MCWP 3 1 6 23 TASK 7 Scoring Aligning the aiming posts 061 266 2000 061 266 2001 a Standards of precision 2 Conditions The soldier is given a howitzer in the firin Were met A applicable position that has already been laid on the initial direction b Correct steps were followed to of fire Bubbles will be level and special corrections on O complete the fask The pantel will be oriented on the collimator Aiming posts will be emplaced in the ground at 50 and 100 meters from followed soldier Tec NO CO the howitzer but will not be aligned An assistant examiner 0 40 50 T INU d will be posted at the far aiming post The soldier will position 2840 points If soldier received himself as gunner and announce when ready The examiner on steps a and b use the chart will say BEGIN elow to determine score c If steps a and b were not Time The time will start when the examiner says BEGIN The time will stop when the gunner states that the aiming posts are set TIME IN SECONDS 11 FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 TASK 8 Boresight the howitzer TASK 8A Boresighting the howitzer pantel with the test target Conditions The soldier is given a howitzer in the tiring osition Bubble
562. ure 4 3 is a lens which is placed over the eyepiece for protection against the sun s m It is stored On the side of the telescope body It is held in place by a spring loaded ball m Compass Needle Locking Lever When the locking lever 4 2 is in a vertical position the needle 15 locked When the lever is turned either right or left to the horizontal the needle is unlocked To preclude damage to the magnetic needle this lever should be returned to the locked position gently CAUTION The needle must be locked when not in use 4 2 SEITING UP THE AIMING CIRCLE To setup the aiming circle Figure 4 4 do the following actions INSTRUMENT FIXING AIMING CIRCLE M2A2 TRIPOD HEAD MENT LIGHT ASSEMBLY CANVAS CIRCLE COVER PLUMB BOB STATION MARKER Figure 4 4 Aiming circle with tripod 1 Unstrap the legs of the tripod loosen the leg clamp thumbscrews and extend the l gs to the desired length Tighten the leg clamp thumbscrews 2 Place the tripod over the point to be occupied One tripod leg should be pointing in the a direction of sighting and th leg with the night light mount should be to the operator s left Attach the plumb bob to the hook under the pennant n assembly The plumb bob should be within a l inch radius of the station marker 3 Firmly embed the aa legs Make sure the Pe head is approximately level when the legs are embedded Then remove the tripod head cover P
563. used for internal battery communications as soon as possible after occupation of a position The radios use the B A 1588 U battery NSN 6135 01 094 6536 a M577 Vehicle FDC Cabling The system for the CEU S in the FDC is cabled as follows refer to Figure TO C 2298 VRC DRIVER 4723 467654 801 CX 4723NRC 913828 801 CABLE W32 TO BCS POWER DISTRIBUTION B UNIT PLUG J4 Figure L 15 FDC cabling for the AN PRC 68 or AN PRC 126 L 13 FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 1 Connect one end of power cable W32 A to the connector labeled J103 B on the OG 174 and the other end to the BCS power distribution unit plug JA 2 Connect one end of cable CX 4723 C to the connector labeled J102 D on the OG 174 and the other end to the connector labeled J505 E on the AM 1780 3 Connect one end of the second cable CX 4723 F to the connector labeled J101 G on the OG 174 and the other end to the connector labeled J501 H on the AM 1780 4 Connect one end of the interface cable I to the connector labeled 104 on the OG 174 and the other end to the connector labeled AUDIO K on the AN PRC 68 or AN PRC 126 5 Connect one end of the antenna cable L to the connector labeled ANT M on the AN PRC 68 or AN PRC ES connect the other end to the connector N on the antenna ase 6 Connect one end of the data cable O to the connector labeled J105 P on the OG 174 connect the other end to the tact
564. vation a Piece to crest range PCR is the horizontal distance between the piece and the crest expressed to the nearest 100 meters Procedures for measurement are discussed in paragraph 6 4 AXIS OF TUBE ORIGIN Figure 6 1 b Angle 1 Figure 6 1 is the angle of site to crest for the weapon See paragraph 6 3 for measuring procedures The largest site to crest will not necessarily yield the largest minimum quadrant c Angle 2 Figure 6 1 is the vertical angle required to clear the top of the crest For quick time and unarmed proximity VT fuzes a vertical clearance of 5 meters is used For armed VT fuzes see paragraph 6 6 d Angle 3 Figure 6 1 is the complementary angle of site comp site It is the comp site factor from the TFT Table for the charge at the piece to crest range multiplied by the sum of Angles 1 and 2 If the PCR 15 not a listed value use the next higher listed PCR Site si is the sum of Angles 1 2 and 3 e Angle 4 Figure 6 1 is the elevation for the appropriate charge corresponding to the PCR A large PCR may cause the value of Angle 4 to override the effects of site to crest Angle 1 erefore minimum quadrant must be computed for each weapon and each charge to be tired f Angle 5 Figure 6 1 is a safety factor equivalent to the value of 2 forks from the TFT Table F for the appropriate charge at the PCR g greatest sum of Angles 1 5 Figure 6 1 is the minimum quadran
565. ver terrain where obstacles such as streams ravines or steep slopes may prohibit pacing or the use of wire 1 The subtense method uses precise values with a PE solution in tables 5 6 through 5 8 pages 5 16 through 5 2 1 Subtense is based on a principle of visual perspective the farther away an object is the smaller it appears 2 There are two procedures involved in subtense measurement Establishing a base of known length e Measuring the angle of that base with the use of the aiming circle 3 The subtense base may be any desired length However if a 60 meter base a 2 meter bar or the length of an 16 1 or M16A2 rifle is used precomputed subtense tables are available The M16 or 2 meter bar must be held perpendicular to the line of sight by a soldier facing the aiming circle The instrument operator sights on one end of the M 16 or 2 meter bar and measures the horizontal clockwise angle to the other end of the rifle or bar He does this twice and means the angles He then enters the appropria subtense table with the mean angle and extracts the distance Accurate distances can be obtained with the MI 6 out to approximately 150 meters with the 2 meter bar out to 250 meters and with the 60 meter base out to 1 000 meters If abase of another length is desired a distance can be computed by using the following formula 1 2 BASE in meters TAN 1 2 angle in mils Distance Note During advance party operat
566. visible the resection may also be performed by a somewhat different procedure Figure 5 9 Transferring angles to paper 5 14 GRID SHEET PLOTTING PIN Figure 5 10 Determining position a Measure the clockwise angles to each of the two known points from the EOL b Determine the azimuth to each known point b adding the azimuth of the orienting line to the appropriate angle measured in a above c Convert each of these azimuths to back azimuths by applying 3200 mils d Transfer the coordinates of the known points from the map to the grid sheet e a the RDP plot the back azimuths from the two known points on the grid sheet The point of intersection of the two rays is the position of the aiming circle b Regardless of which method of graphic resection is used the end result is always the location of the aiming circle If the resection was not performed from the orienting station the coordinates may be determined by graphic traverse hasty traverse or estimation based on the results of the resection The resection should be checked against the map to preclude a gross error 5 9 GRAPHIC TRAVERSE Graphic traverse is a means of transferring direction and location control from one point to another by uses of angle and distance measurements It may be used to provide direction and coordinates to a battery position It is also ideal for transferring survey control to an offset re
567. weapon with an M12 series sight is left and forward of the aiming circle red numbers are used when reading the aiming circle to lay the howitzer e With the lower nonrecording motion sights in on the panoramic telescope Note The 0 3200 line of the aiming circle is now parallel to the tube of the firing weapon 4 The final step at the aiming circle depends on whether survey control is available If it 15 not available follow the steps in subparagraph d below If it is available follow those in subparagraph e below d The following is the final step if survey control is not available 1 The platoon leader with the upper recording motion floats and centers the magnetic needle FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 Note Since the magnetic needle is being used the aiming circle must be declinated and set up away from magnetic attractions 0 The value now on the upper motion is the instrument reading Subtract the instrument reading from the declination constant The difference is the azimuth of the line of fire eo the LOF For a memory aid see Table 4 6 page EXAMPLE Your M198 platoon conducted an emergency occupation using the howitzer backlay method to lay on an azimuth of tire of 0900 You were instructed to m in position and continue answering calls for fire The platoon is at end of mission and all howitzers have returned to their lay deflections You go to the une circle and measure instrument reading
568. wire line can be used as necessary to hand off digital fire missions between FDCs As time and mission allow SB 22 switchboards can be installed in each platoon and connected by wire line to a battery command switchboard SB 22 providing voice communications In battery based operations Figure 9 6 9 6 only a battery command switchboard is installed Additional voice or digital capability can be provided by a battery wirehead that interfaces with battalion voice and digital wire lines In most cases external communications rely primarily on radio communications and mobile subscriber equipment The extent to which wire is installed and lines are improved or protected depends on the anticipated time the firing unit will stay in position before moving again GUN NES GUN GUN POSITION POSITION POSITION TM 184 N STAKE AIMING CIRCLE Note A3x6 platoon based organization would have one less gun position than the figure depicts Figure 9 1 Advance party voice wire system one of two platoons FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 PLT FDC 12 FEET OF SLACK LEGEND voice wire line digital wire line 155 MM SP HOWITZERS REQUIRE 12 FEET OF SLACK TO ALLOW THE TURRET TO TRAVERSE LEFT OR RIGHT Note 6 platoon based organization would have one less howitzer than the figure depicts Figure 9 2 Main body occupation wire system one of two platoons eat E E TO TM 184 Figure 9 3 Wire line connection to the GD
569. with a plotting pin d Continue the fieldwork for the traverse as described above Forward stations are successively established as needed station angles are measured accordingly and the azimuth of each leg computed as in directional traverse The distance of each leg is plotted in the same manner as above The traverse will appear on the grid sheet as a series of successive polar plots e The traverse is planned so that the final forward station is the orienting station or other needed position The EOL is the final occupied station in the traverse The orienting line is the back azimuth of the last traverse leg 5 10 DISTANCE MEASURING When graphic traverse is used to transfer survey control the distance of each traverse leg must be measured Since this distance is plotted on a grid sheet it must be the horizontal distance along the traverse leg not the slope distance obtained by measuring along the contour of the earth In simplified survey operations this horizontal distance can be easily measured in one of three ways subtense pacing and using premeasured communications wire FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 a Subtense The subtense method is the fastest of three distance measuring procedures It yields accuracy equivalent to that obtained with a premeasured piece of wire An advantage is that a horizontal distance is obtained indirectly that is the distance is computed rather than measured This allows subtense to be used o
570. y certified for peacetime use combat lI Navy MK399 Mod 1 is a CP type fuze but is sensitive 29 heavy rainfall Requires the removal of the supplementary charge if one is present 3 155 mm M116 HC smoke only 4 455 mm M449 HE ICM M485 illum and M116A1 HC smoke only 5 155 mm M1 HE M107 HE M110 WP and M110 HD gas only 6 455 mm M449 HE ICM M483 HE DPICM M692 M731 ADAM M718 M741 RAAMS M485 illum and M116A1 smoke only N 4 FM 6 50 Table N 7 Fuzes Permitted by the US for Firing in Combat 155 mm and 203 mm us ca pa m wo po se ru ux M557 557 557 557 557 DM241 557 557 M51A5 M572 M739 739 M739 51 5 DM211 M557C1 DM211 M557 M557 M572 51 5 MS M572 M572 CP M78A1 M78 78 DM71 M572 MK399 M78A1 M78A1 DM71B1 ee Mod 1 Prox M514A13 M514A1 NUT42 M732 MO AP imity M732 M732 M M572C1 M572C2 501 MS01A1 L81A2 faa m E e 520 1 520 1 520 1 520 1 520 1 5 564 564 ret M582 c 8 MTSQ M577 M577 MS577 1203 mm 2 78 and 78 1 are not safety certified for peacetime use combat only Navy fuze MK399 Mod 1 Is CP type fuze but is sensitive to heavy rainfall Requires the removal of the supplementary charge if one is present 15
571. y display an amber light or if this light is not available the last vehicle may display operating hazard warning ignts instead 4 Legal rights Closed formations moving in column must leave gaps for the remaining traffic at appropriate intervals Such traffic must not interrupt the column at any other point Hence follows that a closed formation or an element thereof is to be considered one road user That also applies at crossings and junctions If a part of the formation has already moved into a crossing the next vehicle must not wait when a vehicle approaches on the road with right of way or from the right It is however not justifiable that that right of way is called upon without warning the remaining road users The warning tasks no traffic regulation may be accomplished by military police forces or other military personnel unless police forces regulate the traffic Military police forces or military personnel detailed for warning must be clearly recognizable as military traffic posts warning posts e g by brassards or respective clothing When aomp hi their tasks military traffic pee are to use the same signals as prescribed for traffic regulation by police forces STANAG 2025 Other signals to warn road users where necessary and appropriate mnust however not be excluded Warning of the other road users must not be accomplished as a traffic regulation function Only the German Police has traffic regulation authority over civilian
572. y supporting The position should allow 6 400 mil firing capability The range fans range circles of the individual fire bases should overlap both to allow massing of tires and to facilitate mutual defense c Individual fire bases should be positioned on open defensible terrain with clear fields of direct fire in all directions The area beyond the perimeter must be dear of foliage or structures th t block vision for at least 580 meters maximum effective range of the M16A2 Larger cleared areas are better yet A hilltop makes an ideal fire base location as it provides clear kill zones and maximum grazing fires The area outside the perimeter must be carefully np by the defensive planner normally the 15 or USMC Local Security Chief and covered avenues of approach must be identified for coverage by means other than direct tire grenade launchers claymore mines artillery and so forth d The battery perimeter must be tightened and improved as much as possible Concertina and barbed wire mines trip flares remote sensors and OPs or LPs are used to prevent entry into the battery position As time and resources permit the defenses are expanded and improved Multiple bands of wire are established around the perimeter Fightin positions are prepared at each howitzer position the FDC and the CP This is to provide 6 400 mil defense of each individual element as well as to defend the battery position as a whole If possible
573. ze 6 When storing ammunition what is the minimum number of inches of dunnage that should be under the ammunition 5 b 6 c 12 7 How should a WP projetille be stored a On its side and rotated every few hours b On its base c The same as an HC projectile 8 How should you segregate the ammunition in the firing battery area a by size color and weight b by type lot and weight zone c by fuze type lot and zone 9 Field artillery cannon ammunition is classified according to type 5 fixed and separate b separate and separate loading c semifixed and separate loading d separate loading and fixed 10 o set an 557 PD fuze for delay action the correct tool is the a M63 fuze setter b P 38 c M 16 fuze wrench d M 18 fuze wrench 11 To prepare an M557 PD fuze for delay action you must first a rotate the selector setting screw to the horizontal position b rotate the fuze body to the proper setting c puta supplementary charge in the proper setting d move the interrupter out of the flash channel 12 A misfire occurs You have waited 2 minutes before removing and inspecting the primer The primer is dented and has ined How long must you wait before you open e breech a 2 minutes b 5 minutes c 8 minutes d 10 minutes 13 The type of fuze that can detonate the projectile in the air at a predetermined height above the ground is a superquick fuze b concrete p
574. zer s left front The soldier positions himself as the gunner and announces when ready The assistant examiner commands NUMBER 1 REFER AIMING POINT THIS INSTRUMENT Time Time will start on the word refer Time will stop when the last digit of deflection is announced e J e gt ms es 2 m _ _ m pue and 0 points If soldier received a B 9 FM 6 50 MCWP 3 1 6 23 TASK 6 Scoring Aligning the collimator 061 266 2000 061 266 2001 a Standards of precision B 2 Conditions The soldier is given a howitzer in the firing met applicable position that has ae been laid on the initial direction b Correct steps were followed to of tire Bubbles will be level and special corrections on 0 complete the task An assistant examiner will be posted at the collimator 4 15 meters off the howitzer s left front The collimator will be c If steps a and b were not followed soldier recieves a NO GO on the tripod but will not be sighted in on the pantel and d0 cinis If soldi ved will not have it s legs sandbagged The soldier positions and 0 points If soldier received a himself as gunner and announces when ready The examiner GO on steps a and b use the chart will say BEGIN below to determine score Time Time will start when the examiner says BEGIN Time will stop when the g

Download Pdf Manuals

image

Related Search

Related Contents

  AVR 1510, AVR 151, AVR 151/230C  Atomic Accessories PS3A.47 game console accessory  警 告 注 意 警 告 注 意 警 告 注 意  Research? - The University of Iowa  Draper MC1 & LVC-S    取扱説明書兼 保証書  取扱説明書:8905KB  Nuclear Associates CLEAR-Pb  

Copyright © All rights reserved.
Failed to retrieve file